Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit M92-0167 - BOEING - CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT #9-04m92-0167 chemical management #9-04 hvac 9725 east marginal way south . COOP f TUB` (206) 431 -3670 Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 MECHANICAL PERMIT Permit No: M92 -0167 Status: ISSUED Type: B -MECH Issued: 09/11/1992 Category: NRES Expires: 03/10/1993 Address: 9725 EAST MARGINAL WY S Location: Parcel #: 000340 -0018 Contractor License No: HOLMBPH2300A TENANT BOEING CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT #9 -04 Phone: 206 544 -2975 9725 EAST MARGINAL WY S, SEATTLE, WA 98124 OWNER THE BOEING COMPANY PO BOX 3707 - M/S 1F-09, SEATTLE WA.,.98124 CONTRACTOR HOLMBERG PLUMBING & HEATING Phone: 206 822 -2233 P.O. BOX 249, KIRKLAND, WA 980830249 ********************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * * * * * * * ** Permit Description: HVAC UMC Edition: T991 ****** * * *: * * * * * * * * * * * *, * * * * * * * * * * * ** ********* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** q- 1_L_(1.0 . Permit Center Authorized Signature •-Date I hereby' :cert.i fy that I 'have -read `.and examined this permit and know the same to .b'e true correct: A)rovisions of law and ordinances governing' this., work will be com'plied with,, whether specified herein' or not • The gran of this permit' does not presume to.give authority to violate or cancel he,,.pr.ovi of any othersta.te :or local laws regulating construct ,i on "or ; the performance of work . , % I . am authorized to ' s i gn . for and obtain thbu°il;Ong permit. Signature:'- Print Name: This permit shall1become null and'. v. oi.d work is not' Commenced within 180 days from the date;of issuance .:o;r if :the work i,s,su or abandoned for a peri6d:: days <from::the °last .inspection. Valuation: Total Permit Fee: Date 7/ Title: 200, 000.00 1:67.50 PERMIT NO. CONTACTED Q0' £' DATE NOTIFIED q. I l O' v 1 Q B nn.)— -' S DATE READY PERMIT EXPIRES 2nd NOTIFICATION BY: (init.) AMOUNT OWING LIQ2 5n c 3RD NOTIFICATION BY: PLAN CHECK NUMBER mqa- oltIn ARTM .... :...:... .......... ...: BUILDING - initial review FIRE O PLANNING O OTHER BUILDING - final ravinw REVIEW COMPLETED PROJECT NAME SITE ADDRESS INSTRUCTIONS TO STAFF • Contacts with applicants or requests for information should be summarized in writing by staff so that any time the status of the project may be ascertained. • Plan corrections shall be completed and approved prior to sending on to the next department. • Any conditions or requirements for the permit shall be noted on the plans or summarized concisely in the form of a formal letter or memo, which will be attached to the permit. • Please fill out your section of the tracking chart completely. Where information requested is not applicable, so note by using "N /A ". DEPARTMENTAL REVIEW "X" in box indicates which departments need to review the project. 6? INI ?:Rov,Et 7i��L2 ROUTED INI� INIT: INIT: MECHANICAL.. PERMIT APPLICATION ( g'RACKING ZONING: ink chm1 coA FIRE PROTECTION: SCREENING REQUIRED? fYes (] No REFERENCE FILE NOS.: UMC EDITION (year): 5 UIREMENTS I COMM E .... CONSULTANT: Date Sent - Date Approved - ctq ( q-(34 E NO. FIRE DEPT. LETTER DATED: ' Q Z INSPECTOR: S/3 IBAR/LAND USE CONDITIONS? Yes �No 08x17/90 SITE ADDRESS SUITE # 9725 E. Marginal Way S. . q--01/ VALUE OF CONSTRUCTION - $ :Z o`0�, , 0•0 0 v 4 PROJECT NAME/TENANT Boeing Chemical Management, Bldg 9 -04 /Phase III TYPE OF WORK: nNew /Addition ❑ Modifications ❑ Repair ❑ Other: DESCRIBE WORK TO BE DONE: HVAC System ; . . ... ... :.......:.::. ::.. :::�:...: .:: :::'. : : ,.. :<: : <::.: >: ><.::;:::r ` ..:.r ° , , "` :.: M ' ''''.:<:,,,,,, :.;:;::.: : : :OF:::UNITS R? . .::: Ruilt tip Air Handlers Various See Dwg. 3 Condensing Units Various See Dwg. 6 Unit Heater 75,000 BTU 1 Make U. Air Units (Rooftop ) Various See Dw:. 2 Roo Exhausters Various Sizes 5 BUILDING USE (office, warehouse, etc.) Paint Storage NATURE OF BUSINESS: Boeing Airplanes WILL THERE BE A CHANGE IN USE? X❑ZNo ❑ Yes IF YES, EXPLAIN: WILL THERE BE STORAGE OR USE OF FLAMMABLE, COMBUSTIBLE OR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS IN THE BUILDING? ❑ No a Yes IF YES, EXPLAIN: PROPERTY OWNER Boeing PHONE 544 -2975 ADDRESS P. 0. Box 3707, M/S 46 -87, Seattle, WA ZIP98124 -2207 CONTRACTOR Holmberg Plumbing & Heating, Inc. PHONE (206)822 -2233 ADDRESS P. 0. Box 249, Kirkland, WA ZIP 98083 -024'. WA. ST. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE # HOLMBPEI2300A EXP. DATE 9 -01 -92 CITY OF TUKWILA Department of Community Development - Building Division 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 PLAN CHECK NUMBER p L, APPLICATION MUST BE FILLED OUT COMPLETELY EREBY :T U EAND ; CORREC T BUILDING OWNER SIGNATUR OR AUTHORIZED AGENT CONTACT PERSON PRINT NAM ADDRESS !SA PPLICATIO !� RIZED TO PL AP Y FOR T E REA AND.EXAMINE Jon Varriano P. 0. Box 249 Jon Varriano MECHAN..3AL PERMIT APPLICATION :DESCRIPTION BASIC :PERMIT::FEE :;> >i UNIT(S): FEE' PLAN 'CHECK OTHER: >'! TOTAL ,AMOUNT ::: RCPT*:: Mechanical Fee Worksheet must also be filled out and attached to this application. FEES (for staff use only) DATE W:1 8 -21 -92 DATE PHONE (206)822 -2233 CITY /ZIP Kirkland 98083 PHONE (206)822 -2233 APPLICATION SUBMITTAL In order to ensure that your application is accepted for plan review, please make sure to fill out the application completely and follow the plan submittal checklist on the reverse side of this form. A completed "Mechanical Permit Fee Worksheet" must accompany this permit application. Handouts are available at the Building counter which provide more detailed information on application and plan submittal requirements. Application and plans must be complete in order to be accented for Dlan review. BUILDING OWNER / AUTHORIZED AGENT If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect/engineer, or contractor licensed by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property owner authorizing the agent to submit this permit application and obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal. VALUATION OF CONSTRUCTION The valuation is for the work covered by this permit and must be filled in by the applicant. This figure is used for budget reporting purposes only and not to calculate your fees. EXPIRATION OF PLAN REVIEW Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 304(d) of the Uniform Mechanical Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. If you have any questions about our process or plan submittal requirements, please contaii artment of Community Development at 431 -3670. "E APPLICATION ACC EPTEDc" Of- TUKWILA AUG 2 4 1992 PERMIT CENTER DATE APPLICATION EXPIRES 00/18/90 DESCRIPTION UNIT COST U NO. NITOS X TOTAL COST BASIC FEE 15.00 SUPPLEMENT PERMIT FEE 4.50 1 Installation or relocation of each forced -air gravity -type furnace or burner, including ducts and vents attached to such appliance, up to and including 100,000 Btu /h. $9.00 X 2 Installation or relocation of each forced -air or gravity -type furnace or burner, including ducts and vents attached to such appliance over 100,000 Btu /h. $11.00 X 3 Installation or relocation of each floor furnace, including vent. $9.00 X 4 Installation or relocation of each suspended heater, recessed wall heater or floor- mounted unit heater. $9.00 1 X 9.00 5 Installation, relocation or replacement of each appliance vent installed and not included in an appliance permit. $4.50 X I Repair of, alteration of, or addition to each heating appliance, refrigeration unit, cooling unit, absorption unit, or each heating, cooling, absorption, or evaporative cooling system, including installation of controls regulated by this code. $9.00 X Installation or relocation of each boiler or compressor to and including three horsepower, or each absorption system to and including 100,000 Btu /h. $9 X 8 Installation or relocation of each boiler or compressor over three horsepower to and including 15 horsepower, or each absorption system over 100,000 Btu /h and Including 500,000 Btu /h. $16.50 X 9 Installation or relocation of each boiler or compressor over 15 horsepower to and including 30 horsepower, or each absorption system over 500,000 Btu /h to and including 1,750,000 Btu /h. $22.50 X 10 Installation or relocation of each boiler or compressor over 30 horsepower to and including 50 horsepower, or for each absorption system over 1,000,000 Btu /h to and including 1,750,000 Btu /h. $33.50 11 Installation or relocation of each boiler or refrigeration compressor over 50 horsepower, or each absorption system over 1,750,000 Btu /h. $56.00 12 Each air - handling unit to and including 10,000 cubic feet per minute, including ducts attached thereto. (NOTE: This fee shall not apply to an air - handling unit which is a portion of a factory- assembled appliance, cooling unit, evaporative cooler or absorption unit for which a permit is required elsewhere in this code.) $6.50 5 X 32.50 13 Each air - handling unit over 10,000 cfm. $11.00 5 X SS_nn 14 Each evaporative cooler other than a portable type. $6.50 X 15 Each ventilation fan connected to a single duct. $4.50 5 X 22.50 16 Each ventilation system which is not a portion of any heating or air - conditioning system authorized by a permit. $6.50 X 17 Installation of each hood which is served by mechanical exhaust, including the ducts for such hood. $6.50 X 18 Installation or relocation of each commercial or industrial -type incinerator. $11,00 X 19 Installation or relocation of each commercial or industrial -type incinerator. $45.00 X 20 Each appliance or piece of equipment regulated by the code but not classed in other appliance categories, or for which no other fee is listed in this code. $6.50 X 06/18/90 SUBTOTAL PLAN CHECK FEE (25% of subtotal) GRAND TOTAL $ CITY OF TUKWILA Department of Community Development - Building Division 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 THIS WORKSHEET MUST ACCOMPANY YOUR MECHANICAL PERMIT APPLICATION. MECHANC..,AL PERMIT FEE WORKSHEET INSTRUCTIONS Complete the;w orksheet, indicating the number of units being installed in each category. At time of: submittal, staff will calculate the fees **** A*.******• h**' i41k .t * *it * ** *k * *. *it * * *k' * * * ** c * * * * ** *A *.A k.* *A. * * ** '' I U WA TRANSMIT h.* * ** * *** * *,** * * ** ******** ►"k*A* * * *k **k, *k** .4,, : ** *.,k x1 Numb r :. 92000,970 " ,'Amount: .167450 09/11!92 15.17 Permit ":No: M92-0167 ; Type: ,B MECH MECHANICAL PERMIT Parcel ;.No. 000340 -0016 Onl14 /�� e ' Ad tress: 9725 :EAST; MAROINAI, , 1 :.5 en►t ' :Method: CHECK Notation: M. A. MORTENSON 'hitt :SLEI ******* A*** it**** k"******:* k*** A****** At * * * * * *A * * ** * *A * *tF * '. * * caqur►�,':Cc►de:` Deadi^ipi;.iors • Pard 00 "5'15.`.850' PLAN CHECK ,N,ONRES 33.50: Q /322 i 00 MECHANICAL HC)NT�FS 134.00. Tet al (T111s 'Paymennt)e 167.5.0.. Total F ees: 1 '67".50' Total All :`Payments: 1,67.5 Bal ante a . 00• .GENERA: GENERA • CHECF( • CHANGE 3313A000 33.50 134.00 17:50 167.50 0.00 .16x22 Address: Tenant: Type: Parcel #: CITY OF TUKWILA 9725 EAST MARGINAL WY S BOEING CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT #9 -04 B -MECH 000340 -0018 c Permit No: Status: Applied: Issued: M92 -0167 ISSUED 08/24/1992 09/11/1992 ** *71* ** *, ************* k******* k************ k* *** * ** *** * * * * * * * ** * * ** ** * * ** ** Permi t,Conditions•: • 1. No • changes will be made to the plans unless approved by the Architect and the Tukwila Building Division. • Plumbing, permit shall be obta, s p,.e..d...•t.h.r�ough the Seattle -King County Department of Pub „xlfei '.isttl lZE.ai wi 11 be • `inspected by that . a.genc�y; i"nc'l ud i ng all ga:s_ i;p:i ng (296 -4722) � p . = -, • �;de Sys ;; a " , i " ✓4 k,; '.`W.. Electrical perm t;:"sha11x. oe;bbrtaained: through the' "sW,ash�i,ngton state Di Labor r�"an I dus:G ie',s, and al l elec r�i,cal work w 1 1 1 b ; e ' d V. b that a enc x(248= ; 6657),; �', . All •permitrs ins,pec,ti;on re cord's, and'd ':6pp roved + ., alil!,tib mainta1n�,e;d avail 1ab1 a the ,i'ofib .si te prior` +pto the, s tart\..o construct i on, • These docume.n;ts ,.are , to be 'ima i nta;0 r e.d • .any lab,1e until f in.inspection ap` o g val is ranted r r • . •Readi,1$7acce „ ssible� acces�s`.tio� mounted equipment is;,�F 6. •An x osed.. `t`nstf'1 at i ons,, back •i n niater�i a 1 shall 1 have) a ": l -ame 4 ' Sprea;c� Rating of •25 or” "less:.,••: :and materiel shall bear ide,n't�i- • f i cat'lon 'showi rig the - {:f i're per t-tn.g . thereof :�''..*''''s", `k' 7. .A11i c}onstructton tort_ b '•don•'e Si'n \ nc r ae.-- -wiith approved''' °'' }, • r• .p1alta�s' and egIi t'ir'e Uniform mlB,ui1dinng• Code (1.1 991ti Edi' +i �as� amen .ded',.,;by'the;tW�a�sh1ng,to F,,t't• 'te.. := Building• Cod'es, ,, Un 1prm Me:ehanl ca-1° Code, (199' <1,Edi ion3. State Code (1:991 S nd E n d it`io n) .,� x r }' 1:,, k ` s • • 8. •Va 1 i ty of Pe" •m1 t . ,he,r, ,;:1assuarice af- • Y 'a,•jp�`erm ;t t or appx;,ova • l o pla ^, s; p ec1 {fications and 'com p utat ,s sh`'a °l' =l- -not be °con + , : ,,.,, . • str t a��'f'b'e . �, M a '`permit for, or . an \apprra, 'Any v 'o1 atii . of • la , of 't t h e , pr` ov i s i ons of this ; code'' brr of ati r� otlier w ,• ' ''' ,ordin -e o.f the' ,urisdiction. Nn pernyl,;t ' res,Uming to give shat lr J! ' al.idaiolate or ca tie pt. vi iq�n .., 0 'this code, Fire Department Review Control #M92 -0167 Re: Boeing Company Building #9 -04 - 9725 East Marginal Way South Dear Sir: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 1. H.V.A.C. units rated at 2,000 cfm require auto - shutdown devices. These devices shall be separately zoned in the alarm panel and local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #1528) Local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #1528) :Yours truly, City of Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 -7661 (206) 575 -4404 The`Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau John W. Rants, Mayor September 8, 1992 City of Tukwila FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 -7661 (206) 575-4404 Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor Project Name 1 n� Address 'l-" G'. /v2 �' r/ y V Authorized Signature FINALAPP . FRM TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM �oY Retain current inspection schedule Needs shift inspection Approved without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: Pre-Fire: Permits: I' //4 1/- C/2- 4 f fy1�c�, •�' !Y • ,1 7,0 61 y7 4 4. I Control No( /r2'' 7 Permit No. Suite # /' - 2 r Date T.F.D. Form F.P. 85 0.- Project: r .. 9 - I ypell Ins. , . lain: t--r NA •'r e ss: 7`72.5 Gam, 1: e : : /" '-/ 95 tD Special Instructions: Date Wanted: d: / - a,p.m, Requester: /n� ,l/w A- P� Rona p {� • O $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 - 3670 ❑ Corrections required prior to approval, •r• : « t ype of Inspectioh: Address: ? C r ,/ a J Date Called: / r Z/` Special Instructions: Date Wanted: Z '9> am. p.m. Requester: n Phone No.: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit C CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd:, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 0 Approved per applicable codes. X92- 'O/6 PERMIT NO (206) 431 =3670 Corrections required prior to approval. alt e: Any 0 $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. COMMENTS: � � t L iz Fi 2e -013-1, -12-, A- C c n -Noa.S ADD .D t t cr +-1 x-ri t; F7L. IN) c,,..-7141-,,.....t_ t: L.A .4.6, e nstructlons: Date t a } S CtA+Q.�: • n- o-'`' t n v. 3e-' f. N) rry - a-t6 S Po 0..- ...c tic"1 s viA ■ C— - c- - . a SMM # J ,..,, . G . ttiT D d W . . A r-k0 COO ( I rJr vJ Mk F-1 Q n mar � yy� . E� � _ � � t .: ►; ype o ion: . �� E" r l►/ n , :rig ��** nstructlons: Date t Requester: 0 I Phone No.: . � • CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 0 Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Corrections required prior to approval. 0 $30.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to reinspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. step e: t2 Mqa -0167 IERMrV N0 (206) 431 -3670 •- ,"'. ZONE BY ZONE HVAC SUMMARY Zone •_— Equip. No. Area (sq.ft.) Heat Set- point ('F) Heat Pro- vided (MBH) Cooling Setpoint ("F) Cooling Provided (MBH) Venti- lation (cfm) Total ,.(cfm) 1 & 2 MARC2 2406 L 45 ) 77 - -• - -- 400 780 3 & 4 ACRA1 4487 70 143 70 151 740 3500 5 ACRA3 . 985 70 71.6 70 103.4 1200 1200 ,� 6. MARC.1 995 45 96,3 - -- - -- 980 980 7 & 8 ACRB.1 1964 70 96.3 70 236 2140 2140 9 UH 1 A.1 480 45 60 - -- • -- • -- - -- Zone 9 73 -90- 133 -16 Zohc . Zoh e 5 ZoH� 7 Zone. 3 HVAC ZONES, BLDG. 9.04 PHASE Ill October 30, 1991 , 011= ws4G \v 14 ° I. S. SIERRA • i . ° o J . T. ° o <F1> Help <F2> DOS <F3> Change Menu <F4> Change Index <F5> Quit ° ............................. fieeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee @deer o Program Description: aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaai Instructions: Press: Key Indicated at left of the program you want to run Invalid Choice - Press any key to continue. Choice => [ ] CITY OF TUKWILA Id: ACTP125 Keyword: UACT User: 1677 09/02/92 Activity Table Processing MECHANICAL PERMIT Permit No: M92 -0167 Tenant: BOEING. CHEMICAL, MANAGEMENT: #9 -04. Status: PENDING Address: 9725 EAST MARGINAL WY S F7= Update, F2= Previous Line, ESC = Cancel Update CITY OF TUKWILA Id: ROUT130 Keyword: UACT User: 1677 Activity document routing maintenance. Permit No: M92 -0167 F1 =Help, ESC =Exit current screen. Type: B -MECH Vers: 9101 Screen: 01 Base Information Parcel No: 000340 -0018 Owner: THE BOEING COMPANY Validated By: SAO Plan Ck Approved: / / Status: PENDING Applied: 8/24/1992 Issued: / / Active /Inactive: A Completed: / / To Expire: / / Nature of Work: HVAC Location: 9725 EAST MARGINAL WY S Category: NRES (RES, NRES, STOV) Inspector Area: Valuation: 200,000.00 UMC Edition (Yr): 1991 Fire Protection: SPRINKLERED Use Change (Y /N): N Storage of Flammable /Hazardous Materials:YES /CHEM MGMT STORAGE FAC. 09/02/92 MECHANICAL PERMIT Route: 1 Current Route Line: 2 of 5 Packet Units Description Station Status Received Assigned Complete aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Packet Units Action Station Initials Status Received Assigned Completed MECH 01 01 C BLDG KEN Approved 08/26/92 09/02/92 09/02/92 Priority (0 /low..9 /high): 0 Regular hours (HH.MM): .00 Overtime Hours(HH.MM) :• Comments 1[H . V. A. C. UNITS >` 2,00 CFM REQUIRE , AUTO SHUT ] 2[ 3[ 4(FIRE:- ;PLEASE.:REVIEW AND- COMMENT. 5[ 6[ 7[ 8[ 9[ 10[ aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa l l l l l l l BOE PHASE III DING 9 -: n Graham Associates A &E Mortenson Co. Contractor 3A ,Project No. 739.0133.1 :6 RECEIVED; CITY QF TUKWILA A40 41 '19 92. PERMIT CENTE ;: GENERAL BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION OF PHASE III The PHASE III project will utilize the same systems and type of construction as was used for the previous phases. The primary exception to those systems is that a portion of the PHASE III area will be air conditioned. This change will affect all disciplines: Architecture, by adding insulation; Structure, by adding some new concentrated loads on the roof; Mechanical, by adding air conditioning systems; and Electrical, by increasing power requirements. The following narratives will describe only the changes to the building systems . from the previous phases; systems that are not discussed will remain as proposed for Phases I &II. CIVIL Some underground utility lines will have to be relocated clear of the PHASE III building area. The primary power feed will be underground and will be re- routed to the location of the new transformer. The curb and landscaped bank along the north wall of the building will be extended across the north and west walls of PHASE III. The entire bang will be planted with ivy and provided with an irrigation system. The storm drainage system for the parking area will be modified because existing inlets are located within the Phase III footprint. New storm drains will be tied into the existing storm drainage system. ARCHITECTURAL Wall Insulation The Phase III area between Grids A and C will be air conditioned. The perimeter of this area, including the interior walls on Grids A & C will be insulated. The wall insulation will consist of 2" of rigid, non - combustible fiberglass (R -8.7) attached to the concrete panels with Z- furring. A vapor barrier will be installed accross the furring to protect the insulation from water absorption. The insulation will be faced with 1/2" thick exterior concrete panels. The insulation and furring will extend the full height of the wall. See Attachment No. 1. To protect he insulation and facing, there will be a 4" high by 4" deep concrete curb and two continuous rows of steel channel bumpers. The bumpers will be set at heights corresponding to typical storage drum dimensions. Roof Insulation The roof insulation will be the same material and system as used on the previous phases. The thickness of insulation will be the same over both the air conditioned and non -air conditioned portions of Phase III. (Approximately 4 ", R -19) This insulation thickness will meet the requirements of the Washington Energy. Code as a component of the total building envelope. Doors Coiling overhead doors will be electrically operated heavy -duty, steel doors as on PHASE II, except that the PHASE III doors will be insulated and sealed in the,air conditioned areas. Weatherstripping will be included on all exterior personnel doors. Personnel doors will be insulated on the insul. perimeter. STRUCTURAL The only change to the structural system used in Phase I & II will be the re- sizing of some members and the addition of some light steel framing to support the rooftop air conditioning equipment. The basic system of pile foundation, grade beams, tilt -up bearing walls, bar joist roof framing and structural metal roof deck will remain. MECHANICAL Codes and Standards The Design meets the 1988 UBC as . adopted by the City of Tukwila,. The Tukwila Fire Code and all federal, state, city and county codes.. Occupancy codes are listed in the architectural criteria. Design for the flammable storage areas is based on NFPA 30, whereas the Dispensing Area Is based on UFC 79. The basic difference between these two areas is that the storage area will have no materials used, dispensed or mixed within the space. Flammable Storage Rooms: The intended use of these rooms, to the best of our knowledge, is that Boeing will be storing materials in enclosed containers that will not exceed 60 gallons each. This material will then be mixed or used in the Dispensing Area. Based on the above conditions NFPA -30 would require the following, based on Chapter 4 Container and Portable Tank Storage. 1. 4 -1.1, limits storage in containers not to exceed 60 gallons, or portable tanks not to exceed 660 gallons. It is our understanding that 60 gallon drums will be used. 2. 4 -2.1, requires all containers and portable tanks to be approved under DOT Regulations or NFPA 386. • 4 -4, covers the design, construction, and operation of inside room storage and outlines, electrical wiring, ventilation. Specifically, paragraph 4- 4.1.5, requires all electrical wiring and equipment "located in inside rooms" with Class I liquids be suitable for Class I, Division 2 classification. The following is NEC definition of Class 1, Div. 2 as applies to this project. "As Class I, Division 2 location is a location: (1) in which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed, or used, but in which the liquids, vapors, or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or in case of abnormal operation of equipment; or (2) in which ignitible concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, and which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operation of the ventilating equipment." Paragraph 4 -4.1.6 requires inside rooms be provided with either a "gravity or a continuous mechanical exhaust ventilation system." Mechanical ventilation is only required when there . will be liquids dispensed in the area. We are therefore in excess of NFPA for this project. The mechanical ventilation system for the Flammable Storage Rooms meets all the criteria above as follows: The area is continuously ventilated, with a greater air quantity being exhausted than supplied. This assures that adjacent areas will not be contaminated in case of an accident. r._ 2. Air system is designed to provide cross ventilation of the rooms with air removed from the space near the floor and through the sub -floor containment pits. This will prevent a dangerous level of vapors to collect. 3. The heating unit is roof mounted and is outside the room. Unit is 100% outside air without any recirculation, therefore equipment need not be explosion proof. Dispensing Area: This room also falls under •FPA -30 as well as UFC -79. In order to meet these codes all equipment is explosion proof and interconnected to the lighting system as required by the ' codes. Energy Code: The shell of the air - conditioned portion of Building 9 -04 meets the 1991 edition of the Washington State Energy Code. Since this is an industrial building whose primary purpose is product storage, the building is exempt from meeting the energy code. However, designing the shell to meet the code ensures an energy tight building. The building shell has a U Value of .092 compared to a code required U Value of .144. See attachment A for sections through the wall and roof. Additional energy conserving features incorporated into this building include air to air heat exchangers, DDC control system. HVAC Systems The exhaust fan is also roof mounted. With the motor located outside the air stream and the fan located outside the room, there is no code requirement for it to be explosion proof. The building floor plan and zone by zone summary on the following sheet describe the air conditioning systems. Because of the temperature sensitivity of the materials being stored in this building, winter and summer design temperature are increased to 0'F and 100'F DB /78' F WB. These temperatures have been approached at the building site within past 3 years, and are substantially more conservative than the ASHRAE winter and summer design temperatures of 21' and 84'F DB /68'F WB. Reliability of the HVAC system also drives this design. All HVAC equipment will be mounted on the roof. The HVAC systems will keep the nominal air temperature in theair conditioned spaces at 70' . Due to thermostat location and perimeter exposures the temperature difference between rooms may be as much as ± 5' . ZONE BY ZONE HVAC SUMMARY Zone Equip. No. Area (sq.ft.) Heat Set- point (•F) Heat Pro- vided (MBH) Cooling Setpoint ("F) Cooling Provided (MBH) Venti- lation (cfm) Total (cfm) 1 & 2 MARC2 2406 77 - -• - -- 400 780 3 & 4 ACRA1 4487 70 143 70 151 740 3500 5 ACRA3 985 70 71.6 70 103.4 1200 1200 6 MARC.1 995 45 96.3 --- - -- 980 980 7 & 8 ACRB.1 1964 70 96.3 70 236 2140 2140 9 UH1A.1 480 45 ' 60 - -- - -- - -- - -- Zoht Zo "C4 2oN c 5 HVAC ZONES, BLDG. 9 -04 PHASE III October 30, 1991 Zones 1 & 2 Corrosives Storage - These zones are heated only. Winter inside design temperature is 45'F. Positive pressurization is maintained in the space by supplying 400 cfm of ventilation while exhausting 300 cfm. Total air supplied to space is 780 cfm. Air is moved and heat is provided by a gas -fired make -up air unit interlocked with an exhaust fan. Zones 3 & 4 Corrosives Storage - These zones are heated and air conditioned. Inside design temperature is 70°F year round. Positive pressure is maintained in the space by supplying 740 cfm of outside air. The air handling unit is a packaged unit with a single supply /return fan supplying a total of 3500 CFM. The unit has a direct expansion cooling coil with 2 refrigeration compressors, and an indirect fired gas furnace. The cooling coil has two separate refrigeration circuits so that in the event of compressor failure, the system will still operate at 50' capacity. This should provide adequate cooling for outdoor temperatures of 85'F and below. Zone 5 - Dispensing Area- This zone is heated and air conditioned. Inside design temperature is 70'F year round. The air handling unit is of explosion proof construction with a direct - expansion cooling coil and an electric heating coil. The unit includes an air to air heat exchanger which reduces energy consumption and reduces the required capacity of the heating and cooling equipment. This system is interlocked with the light switch so that the fans are operating whenever the light switch is on. The cooling coil has two separate refrigeration circuits so that in the event of compressor failure, the system will still operate at 50' capacity. This should provide adequate cooling for outdoor temperatures of 85'F and below. Cooling capacity control is provided by hot gas bypass. The zone is ventilated at 6 air changes per hour. It is negatively pressurized. The system provides 1200 cfm of ventilation air and exhausts 1320 cfm. No air is recirculated. Seventy -five percent of the air is supplied 12" above the floor, 25% is supplied at 14' above the floor to prevent stratification. 100 cfm of exhaust air is drawn through each pit, the remainder is drawn from 12" above the floor. Zone 6 - Flammable Storage- 'This zone is heated only. Winter inside design temperature is 45'F. Air is moved and heat i§ pr'4 ied by a gas fired make -up air unit interlocked with an exhaust fan. This space is Atrolively pressurized. The system provides 980 cfm of ventilation air and 1090 cfm of extant, No air is recirculated. 100% of the air is supplied 12" above the floor. 150 cfm exTrautt air is drawn through the pit, the remainder is drawn from 12" above the floor, 5 Zones 7 & 8 - Flammable Storage- These zones are air conditioned. Inside design temperature is 70'F year round. The air handling unit has a direct expansion cooling coil and gas fired furnace. The unit includes an air to air heat exchanger. The cooling coil has four separate refrigeration circuits and compressors. In the event of compressor failure, the system will still operate at 75% capacity, This should provide adequate cooling for outdoor temperatures of 92'F and below. Cooling capacity control is provided by staging the 4 compressors. These zones are negatively pressurized to prevent expulsion of vapors from the space into adjoining spaces. The system provides 2140 cfm of ventilation air, and exhausts 2380 cfm. No air is recirculated. Seventy -five percent of the air is supplied 12" above the floor, 25% is supplied at 14' above the floor to prevent stratification. One hundred -fifty cfm of exhaust is drawn through each pit, the remainder is drawn from 12" above the floor. Zone 9 - Generator Room- This zone is heated for freeze protection only. The design temperature is 45 °F. Heat is provided by a gas fired unit heater. There is no mechanical ventilation. Air for the generator is provided by an operable wall intake louver which opens when generator activates. Temperature Monitoring Each space shall have a temperature sensor connected to the Robertshaw Energy Management Control System (EMCS). The EMCS shall record the space temperatures and sound an alarm if any air conditioned space temperature drops below 60' F or exceeds 80' F. General Note: The system descriptions provided in this narrative are general. See the Sequence of Operations in the drawings for a more complete description ' of system operation. See the specification sections 15810 and 15820 for a complete description of the equipment. Plumbing The building cold water is tied into the Phase I water system. The cold water serves .5. emergency showers and 8 hose bibs. There are no drains tied into the sanitary waste system or storm system. The showers and hose bibs will drain into the pits. This arrangement will ensure that hazardous substances to not enter the sewage system. There is no hot water requirement in this building. The natural gas system is tied into the Phase I gas system. The Phase I system has been resized to accommodate the additional demand. Each spill containment pit is sized to hold one 55 gallon container of material plus 20 minutes of discharge from the fire sprinkler system. When the pit is filled to capacity, additional liquid will flow through the overflow piping system. The overflow system collects overflow from all of the pits and drains it into the depressed area of the truck loading dock. An intermediate gravity sump is installed near column D -5 to raise the level of the waste line above the level of the truck dock. Fire Protection The fire sprinkler system for Phase II will be an extension of the system installed for Phase I. The fire protection contractor will complete the design to provide both wet and dry sprinkler systems. The dry system will serve the covered outside area. The sprinkler system shall be designed for the following occupancies: a) Flammable Liquid storage: Extra Hazard b) Dispensing Area: Extra hazard c) Corrosive Storage: Ordinary Hazard d) Aisleway: Ordinary Hazard ELECTRICAL Lighting The lighting system will repeat Iighting patterns in the Warehouse areas of the previous phases. Fixtures and layout will be close to identical. Low voltage switching will be used to control Warehouse fixtures. Local switching will be used to control fixtures in the Electrical Room. Power Outlets Receptacle power will be identical to that under previous phases. Power Supply Emergency and Normal Power Feeders brought in from Building 9 -51 will be abandoned at the handholds provided under previous phases. Existing feeders will be picked up by a new Power Distribution system for Normal and Emergency Systems provided, in Phase III. A new pad - mounted transformer will be installed to provide normal 480/277 V, 3 phase, 4W, service to the 9 -04 Building. A 600 ampere service is anticipated. A new 30KW diesel generator will be. installed to generate emergency power for designated lighting fixtures in the event of power disruption. A skid - mounted fuel tank will be provided. The generator .7 exhaust piping, etc. set will be placed in the Electrical Room with appropriate louvers, automatic transfer switch, Telephone Telephone service is to remain as provided under previous phases No telephone extension is planned into the Phase III area Fire Alarm The fire alarm system will be under separate contract as in previous phases: Paging /Sound System The paging and sound system from the previous phases will be extended to the Phase III area Equipment included in previous phases is adequate to support the additional devices ATTACHMENT NO 1 Narrative Description boeing chemical management building 9-04 phase iii mechanical calculations john graham associates ma mortenson company cost estimate cost estimate calculations . insulation schemes gas pipe sizing PIPE CAPACITY IN CUBIC FEET OF GAS PER HOUR' NATURAL GAS PIPE SIZING GUIDE COMPLIMENTS OF WASHINGTON NATURAL GAS COMPANY NOTE : INC CU •IC ►((T P(M NOUN 1011 ANT APPLIANCC IS O0TAIN1O 6T DIVIDING TNL OTUM INPUT MATING OT ?Ng APPLIANCC 6T 1000. Sit GAS A (6ULATIONS TOP MINIMUM PIP( 054(5 ALL0 A60. energy code calculations conditioned space subscripts actual building walls conditioned space roof minimum zone ventilation requirement zone designation for hvac pre-conditioned air temperature for units with reclaim BUILDING DESIGN MONTH JOHN GRAHAM ARCHITECTS �. SEATTLE, WA FULL COMMERCIAL AUGUST JUNE JULY SEPTEMBER JANUARY FEBRUARY WINTER GLASS SUMMER NO. U -FAC. 1. 2. 3. 4. 0.190 0.360 0.470 0.800 OUTDOOR DRY BULB WINTER U -FAC. 0.190 0.360 0.380 0.700 ASSOCIATES ENGINEERS 98101 HVAC LOADS PROGRAM MASTER DATA AND DESIGN PARAMETERS: ROOF ASHRAE ROOF ROOF SUSP TYPE ROOF # U -FAC COLOR CLG. 1. 2 0.050 DARK NO PART PART COOL HEAT TYPE U -FAC T -D T -D 1. 0.095 20 25 WALL ASHRAE WALL WALL TYPE GROUP U -FAC COLOR 1. B 0.095 DARK 2. C 0.700 DARK LEN DIST. DIST. OF BEYOND BEYOND SHADE HOR RIGHT LEFT NO. OVH W -EDGE W -EDGE 1. 25.00 25.00 10.00 2. 25.00 25.00 25.00 3. 25.00 25.00 25.00 4. 25.00 10.00 25.00 GLASS INTERIOR SHD.COEF SHADING 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.480 DIST. OVERH ABOVE WIND. NO NO NO NO PROJECT: CLIENT: DATE: DESIGNER: OUTDOOR INDOOR INDOOR WET BULB REL.HUM DRY BULB 86 68 50% 70 19.93 -4 84 66 50% 70 12.88 -6 100 78 50% 70 56.19 10 80 65 50% 70 14.34 -10 54 48 50% 70 -14.58 -36 59 50 50% 70 -15.42 -31 • 0 0 50% 70 0.00 INTERIOR SHD.COEF 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 DIST. DIST. RIGHT R -FIN FIN BEYOND PROJ W -EDGE HT. OF RT. FIN GRAINS IN /OUTDOOR DIFF. CORRECTION ROOM GLASS GLASS CONST WIDTH HEIGHT HEAVY 10.00 12.00 HEAVY 3.00 7.00 HEAVY 3.00 5.00 HEAVY 8.00 4.00 DIST. LEFT FIN PROJ 5.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BOEING WHSE2. BOEING 07/03/91 DIST. L -FIN BEYOND W -EDGE JGA, HAY 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 HT. OF LEFT FIN 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 GENERAL PROJECT INFORMATION: PROJECT FILE NAME: PROJECT LOCATION: I BAROMETRIC PRESSURE: ALTITUDE: NORTH LATITUDE: MEAN DAILY TEMPERATURE RANGE: ATMOSPHERIC CLEARNESS FACTOR: ALL DESIGN DATA TAKEN FROM THE 1989 ASHRAE HANDBOOK OF FUNDAMENTALS * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 3 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR HANDLER INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR HANDLER * 1 INPUT DATA: AIR HANDLER DESCRIPTION: TERMINAL TYPE: METHOD FOR CV: SUPPLY FAN TYPE: CALCULATIONS PERFORMED: EXCESS SUPPLY AIR: NUMBER OF TIMES SYSTEM OCCURS: LIGHTING PROFILE NUMBER: EQUIPMENT PROFILE NUMBER: PEOPLE PROFILE NUMBER: EXHAUST CAN EXCEED SUPPLY AIR: HEATING SUPPLY CFM: DRY BULB TEMPERATURE ( DEG.F): COOLING COIL CFM: MISC. BTUH GAIN - SUPPLY SIDE: MISC. BTUH GAIN - RETURN SIDE: COMBINED FAN,MOTOR EFFICIENCY ( %): STATIC PRESS. ACROSS FAN (IN.WG): SUMMER SUPPLY DUCT TEMP. RISE (DEG.F): SUMMER RETURN DUCT TEMP. RISE (DEG.F): WINTER SUPPLY DUCT TEMP. DROP (DEG.F): WINTER RETURN DUCT TEMP. DROP ( DEG.F): CHILLED WATER TEMP. DIFFERENCE ( DEG.F): HOT WATER TEMP.DIFFERENCE (DEG.F): COOLING VENTILATION METHOD: COOLING VENTILATION VALUE: COOLING INFILTRATION METHOD: COOLING INFILTRATION VALUE: HEATING VENTILATION METHOD: HEATING VENTILATION VALUE: HEATING INFILTRATION METHOD: HEATING INFILTRATION VALUE: VENTILATION IS 100% OF SUPPLY AIR: PRETREATED OUTSIDE AIR: IGNORE PRETREATED LOAD: PRETREATED AIR SUMMER DB TEMP (DEG.F): PRETREATED AIR SUMMER WB TEMP (DEG.F): PRETREATED AIR WINTER DB TEMP (DEG.F): DRSI GN WgiVItg SM,V SA UAra ngfttlA' Vligifeltk OUTDOOR DRY BULB 86 84 100 80 54 59 0 0 0 0 OUTDOOR INDOOR INDOOR WET BULB REL.HUM DRY BULB 68 66 78 65 48 50 0 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% MARC2 CONSTANT VOLUME SUM PEAK ZONE CFMS DRAW -THRU HEATING LOADS ONLY RESERVE CAPACITY 1 0 0 0 NO 780 0 0 0 0 0 3.000 • 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 NO NO NO 70 70 70 45 45 45 45 GRAINS IN /OUTDOOR DIFF. CORRECTION 19.93 12.88 56.19 47.33 18.41 17.57 0.00 - 4 - 6 10 15 -11 - 6 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES BOEING WHSE2. 07/0 _= * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR HANDLER AIR HANDLER * 2 INPUT DATA: AIR HANDLER DESCRIPTION: TERMINAL TYPE: METHOD FOR CV: SUPPLY FAN TYPE: CALCULATIONS PERFORMED: EXCESS SUPPLY AIR: NUMBER OF TIMES SYSTEM OCCURS: LIGHTING PROFILE NUMBER: EQUIPMENT PROFILE NUMBER: PEOPLE PROFILE NUMBER: EXHAUST CAN EXCEED SUPPLY AIR: HEATING SUPPLY CFM: DRY BULB TEMPERATURE ( DEG.F): COOLING COIL CFM: MISC. BTUH GAIN - SUPPLY SIDE: MISC. BTUH GAIN - RETURN SIDE: COMBINED FAN,MOTOR EFFICIENCY ( %'): STATIC PRESS. ACROSS FAN (IN.WG): SUMMER SUPPLY DUCT TEMP. RISE (DEG.F): SUMMER RETURN DUCT TEMP. RISE (DEG.F): WINTER SUPPLY DUCT TEMP. DROP (DEG.F): WINTER RETURN DUCT TEMP. DROP (DEG.F): CHILLED WATER TEMP. DIFFERENCE ( DEG.F): HOT WATER TEMP.DIFFERENCE (DEG.F): COOLING VENTILATION METHOD: COOLING VENTILATION VALUE: COOLING INFILTRATION METHOD: COOLING INFILTRATION VALUE: BEATING VENTILATION METHOD: BEATING VENTILATION VALUE: BEATING INFILTRATION METHOD: ,EATING INFILTRATION VALUE: VENTILATION IS 100% OF SUPPLY AIR: ?RE'T'REATED OUTSIDE AIR: TG OwE PRETREATED LOAD: ETBEATE15 AIR SUMMER DB TEMP (DEG.F): 2 'ffEAT'ED AIR SUMMER WB TEMP (DEG.F): S'7.'BEATEtS AIR WINTER DB TEMP (DEG.F): tnom AaWn .P: {V OUTDOOR DRY BULB 86 84 100 80 54 59 0 OUTDOOR INDOOR INDOOR WET BULB REL.HUM DRY BULB 68 66 78 65 48 50 0 BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** SEATTLE, WA 98101 3/91 PAGE 4 INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% MARC.1 CONSTANT VOLUME SUM PEAK ZONE CFMS DRAW -THRU HEATING LOADS ONLY RESERVE CAPACITY 1 0 0 0 YES 980 46 0 0 0 3.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 YES NO NO 0 0 0 70 70 70 45 45 45 45 GRAINS IN /OUTDOOR DIFF. CORRECTION 19.93 12.88 56.19 47.33 18.41 17.57 0.00 - 4 - 6 10 15 -11 -6 ..� OUTDOOR DRY BULB 86 84 100 80 54 59 0 OUTDOOR INDOOR WET BULB REL.HUM 68 66 78 65 48 50 0 50% • 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 0 0 0 YES 2130 46 0 0 0 0 3.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 YES YES YES 85 75 38 INDOOR DRY BULB 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 GRAINS IN /OUTDOOR DIFF. CORRECTION 19.93 -4 12.88 -6 56.19 10 14.34 -10 -14.58 -36 -15.42 -31 0.00 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 6 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR HANDLER INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR HANDLER # 4 INPUT DATA: AIR HANDLER DESCRIPTION: TERMINAL TYPE: METHOD FOR CV: SUPPLY FAN TYPE: CALCULATIONS PERFORMED: EXCESS SUPPLY AIR: NUMBER OF TIMES SYSTEM OCCURS: LIGHTING PROFILE NUMBER: EQUIPMENT PROFILE NUMBER: PEOPLE PROFILE NUMBER: EXHAUST CAN EXCEED SUPPLY AIR: HEATING SUPPLY CFM: DRY BULB TEMPERATURE ( DEG.F): COOLING COIL CFM: MISC. BTUH GAIN — SUPPLY SIDE: MISC. BTUH GAIN — RETURN SIDE: COMBINED FAN,MOTOR EFFICIENCY (%): STATIC PRESS. ACROSS FAN (IN.WG): SUMMER SUPPLY DUCT TEMP. RISE (DEG.F): SUMMER RETURN DUCT TEMP. RISE ( DEG.F): WINTER SUPPLY DUCT TEMP. DROP (DEG.F): WINTER RETURN DUCT TEMP. DROP (DEG.F): CHILLED WATER TEMP.DIFFERENCE (DEG.F): HOT WATER TEMP.DIFFERENCE ( DEG.F): COOLING VENTILATION METHOD: COOLING VENTILATION VALUE: COOLING INFILTRATION METHOD: COOLING INFILTRATION VALUE: HEATING VENTILATION METHOD: HEATING VENTILATION VALUE: HEATING INFILTRATION METHOD: EEATY1:::: INFILTRATION VALUE: VENTILATION IS 100% OF SUPPLY AIR: PRETREATED OUTSIDE AIR: IGNORE PRETREATED LOAD: PRETREATED AIR SUMMER DB TEMP (DEG.F): PRETREATED AIR SUMMER WB TEMP (DEG.F): PRETREATED AIR WINTER DB TEMP (DEG.F): VES 1 G1; MOVM A : .'ET JU1wE JUfY 15ZPIDIBER ,JAW UssRY TZBRUAZY wIVTZR OUTDOOR DRY BULB 86 84 100 80 54 59 0 OUTDOOR INDOOR INDOOR WET BULB REL.HUM DRY BULB 68 66 78 65 48 50 0 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% ACRA1 CONSTANT VOLUME SUM PEAK ZONE CFMS DRAW —THRU BOTH HEATING AND COOLING LOADS RESERVE CAPACITY 1 0 0 0 NO 3500 49 0 0 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 NO NO NO 0 0 ,0 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 GRAINS IN /OUTDOOR DIFF. CORRECTION 19.93 12.88 56.19 14.34 —14.58 —15.42 0.00 — — 10 — 10 — 36 —31 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 7 DESIGN MONTH AUGUST JUNE JULY SEPTEMBER JANUARY FEBRUARY WINTER OUTDOOR DRY BULB OUTDOOR INDOOR WET BULB REL.HUM ACRA3 CONSTANT VOLUME SUM PEAK ZONE CFMS DRAW -THRU BOTH HEATING AND COOLING LOADS RESERVE CAPACITY 1 0 0 0 YES 1200 46 0 0 0 3.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 YES YES YES 85 70 38 INDOOR DRY BULB GRAINS IN /OUTDOOR DIFF. CORRECTION 86 68 50% 70 19.93 -4 84 66 50% 70 12.88 -6 100 78 50% 70 56.19 10 80 65 50% 70 14.34 -10 54 48 50% 70 -14.58 -36 59 50 50% 70 -15.42 -31 0 0 50% 70 0.00 , * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 8 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR HANDLER INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *.* * * * * ** AIR HANDLER # 6 INPUT DATA: AIR HANDLER DESCRIPTION: TERMINAL TYPE: METHOD FOR CV: SUPPLY FAN TYPE: CALCULATIONS PERFORMED: EXCESS SUPPLY AIR: NUMBER OF TIMES SYSTEM OCCURS: LIGHTING PROFILE NUMBER: EQUIPMENT PROFILE NUMBER: PEOPLE PROFILE NUMBER: EXHAUST CAN EXCEED SUPPLY AIR: LEAVING HEATING COIL TEMP. (DEG.F): DRY BULB TEMPERATURE (DEG.F): COOLING COIL CFM: MISC. BTUH GAIN - SUPPLY SIDE: MISC. BTUH GAIN - RETURN SIDE: COMBINED FAN,MOTOR EFFICIENCY (%): STATIC PRESS. ACROSS FAN (IN.WG): SUMMER SUPPLY DUCT TEMP. RISE (DEG.F): SUMMER RETURN DUCT TEMP. RISE (DEG.F): WINTER SUPPLY DUCT TEMP. DROP ( DEG.F): . WINTER RETURN DUCT TEMP. DROP (DEG.F): CHILLED WATER TEMP.DIFFERENCE (DEG.F): HOT WATER TEMP.DIFFERENCE (DEG.F): COOLING VENTILATION METHOD: COOLING VENTILATION VALUE: COOLING INFILTRATION METHOD: COOLING INFILTRATION VALUE: HEATING VENTILATION METHOD: HEATING VENTILATION VALUE: HEATING INFILTRATION METHOD: :EATING INFILTRATION VALUE: VENTILATION IS 100% OF SUPPLY AIR: PRETREATED OUTSIDE AIR: IGNORE PRETREATED LOAD: PRSTREATED AIR SUMMER DB TEMP (DEG.F): PRETREATED AIR SUMMER WB TEMP (DEG.F): PRETREATED AIR WINTER DB TEMP (DEG.F): aR;aIGN< OUTDOOR ;w O ' g DRY BULB SE 84 100 80 59 59 0 OUTDOOR INDOOR INDOOR WET BULB REL.HUM DRY BULB 68 66 78 65 48 50 0 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% UH1A.1 CONSTANT VOLUME SUM PEAK ZONE CFMS DRAW -THRU HEATING LOADS ONLY RESERVE CAPACITY 1 0 0 0 YES 110 55 0 0 0 0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 1 1.000 AIR CHANGES PER HOUR NO NO NO 0 0 0 70 70 70 45 45 45 45 GRAINS IN /OUTDOOR DIFF. CORRECTION 19.93 12.88 56.19 47.33 18.41 17.57 0.00 - 4 - 6 10 15 -11 -6 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 9 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE # 1: (319 SF) AIR HANDLER NUMBER: ZONE LENGTH (FEET): LIGHTING WATTS: PER.SF NO. OF PEOPLE IN ZONE: PER.SF LIGHTING PROFILE NO: CEILING HEIGHT (FEET): SEN.SAFETY FACTOR ( %): SEN.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): CLG VENTILATION CFM: HTG VENTILATION CFM: EXHAUST AIR CFM: CLG. SQFT EXPOSED TO PLENUM: LAT. BTUH EQUIP LOAD: ROOF TYPE ASHRAE # U- FACTOR 1. 1 2 0.050 WALL TYPE ASHRAE -G U- FACTOR 1 2 C 2. 2 C 0.700 0.700 GLASS TYPE SUM -UFAC SHD.COEF HEIGHT 1. 1 0.190 0.050 12.00 1 ZONE OCCURRENCES: 25.50 ZONE WIDTH (FEET): 638 EQUIPMENT WATTS: PER.SF 3 PEOPLE PROFILE NO: 0 EQUIPMENT PROFILE NO: 16.75 HTG.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 LAT.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 255 LAT.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): 0 CLG INFILTRATION CFM: 70 HTG INFILTRATION CFM: 50 MINIMUM SUPPLY CFM: -1 EXPOSED FLOOR SLAB EDGE -FT: 0 ONLY HEATING LOADS CALCULATED COLOR DARK COLOR DARK DARK LENGTH 25.50 HEIGHT 16.75 13.50 226.1 180 - 16.75 27.00 452.3 270 - 1 12.50 16 0 0 15 15 255 0 0 0 45.00 WIDTH ROOF -AREA SUSP.CEIL 12.50 318.8 NO WIDTH WALL -AREA DIRECTION S W WIDTH QUANTITY AREA SHD TILT REF 10.00 1.000 120.0 0 90 2 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 10 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE # 2: (2087 SF) AIR HANDLER NUMBER: ZONE LENGTH (FEET): LIGHTING WATTS: PER.SF NO. OF PEOPLE IN ZONE: PER.SF LIGHTING PROFILE NO: CEILING HEIGHT (FEET): SEN.SAFETY FACTOR ( %): SEN.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): CLG VENTILATION CFM: HTG VENTILATION CFM: EXHAUST AIR CFM: CLG. SQFT EXPOSED TO PLENUM: LAT. BTUH EQUIP LOAD: ROOF TYPE ASHRAE # U- FACTOR 1. 1 2 0.050 WALL TYPE ASHRAE -G U- FACTOR 1. 2 C 0.700 GLASS TYPE SUM -UFAC SHD.COEF HEIGHT 1. 1 0.190 2. .2 0.360 3. 3 0.470 0.050 0.100 0.100 1 ZONE OCCURRENCES: 1 53.50 ZONE WIDTH (FEET): 39.00 4174 EQUIPMENT WATTS: PER.SF 104 21 PEOPLE PROFILE NO: 0 0 EQUIPMENT PROFILE NO: 0 16.75 HTG.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 15 LAT.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 255 LAT.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): 255 330 CLG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 330 HTG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 250 MINIMUM SUPPLY CFM: 0 -1 EXPOSED FLOOR SLAB EDGE -FT: 30.00 0 ONLY HEATING LOADS CALCULATED 12.00 7.00 5.00 COLOR LENGTH WIDTH ROOF -AREA SUSP.CEIL DARK 10.00 3.00 3.00 53.50 39.00 2086.5 NO COLOR HEIGHT WIDTH WALL -AREA DIRECTION DARK 16.75 25.00 418.8 180 1.000 1.000 1.000 120.0 21.0 15.0 0 0 90 90 90 S WIDTH QUANTITY AREA SHD TILT REF 1 1 ZONE # 3: (2060 SF) , 1 ..2 3 0.190 0.360 0.470 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES BOEING WHSE2. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR HANDLER NUMBER: ZONE LENGTH (FEET): LIGHTING WATTS: PER.SF NO. OF PEOPLE IN ZONE: PER.SF LIGHTING PROFILE NO: CEILING HEIGHT (FEET): SEN.SAFETY FACTOR (%): SEN.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): CLG VENTILATION CFM: HTG VENTILATION CFM: EXHAUST AIR CFM: • CLG. SQFT EXPOSED TO PLENUM: LAT. BTUH EQUIP LOAD: ROOF TYPE ASHRAE # U- FACTOR 1. 1 2 0.050 PART TYPE U- FACTOR COOL.T -D 11. 1 0.095 20 WALL TYPE. ASHRAE -G U- FACTOR 1. 1 B 0.095 GLASS TYPE SUM -UFAC SHD.COEF 0.050 0.100 0.100 PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** SEATTLE, WA 98101 07/03/91 PAGE 11 ZONE INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** 4 ZONE OCCURRENCES: 1 53.50 ZONE WIDTH (FEET): 38.50 4120 EQUIPMENT WATTS: PER.SF 103 21 PEOPLE PROFILE NO: 0 0 EQUIPMENT PROFILE NO: 0 16.75 HTG.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 15 LAT.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 255 LAT.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): 255 330 CLG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 330 HTG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 250 MINIMUM SUPPLY CFM: 0 -1 EXPOSED FLOOR SLAB EDGE -FT: '40.00 0 HTG. & CLG. LOADS CALCULATED COLOR LENGTH WIDTH ROOF -AREA SUSP.CEIL DARK 53.50 38.50 2059.8 HEAT.T -D HEIGHT WIDTH PART -AREA 25 16.75 53.00 887.8 COLOR HEIGHT WIDTH WALL -AREA DARK 16.75 39.00 653.3 HEIGHT WIDTH QUANTITY AREA 12.00 7.00 5.00 10.00 1.000 3.00 1.000 3.00 1.000 120.0 21.0 15.0 NO DIRECTION 180 - S SHD TILT REF 0 90' 0 90 0 .90 1 1 1 GLASS TYPE SUM -UFAC SHD.COEF HEIGHT * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 12 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE # 4: (2427 SF) AIR HANDLER NUMBER: ZONE LENGTH (FEET): LIGHTING WATTS: PER.SF NO. OF PEOPLE IN ZONE: PER.SF LIGHTING PROFILE NO: CEILING HEIGHT (FEET): SEN.SAFETY FACTOR (%): SEN.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): CLG VENTILATION CFM: HTG VENTILATION CFM: EXHAUST AIR CFM: CLG. SQFT EXPOSED TO PLENUM: LAT. BTUH EQUIP LOAD: ROOF TYPE ASHRAE # U- FACTOR COLOR 1. 1 2 0.050 DARK WALL TYPE ASHRAE -G U- FACTOR COLOR 1. 1 B 2. 1 B 1.. 1 0.190 2. 2 0.360 3. 3 0.470 0.095 DARK 16.75 54.00 904.5 270 - 0.095 DARK 16.75 16.00 268.0 90 - 0.050 0.100 0.100 4 ZONE OCCURRENCES: 1.00 ZONE WIDTH (FEET): 4854 EQUIPMENT WATTS: 24 PEOPLE PROFILE NO: 0 EQUIPMENT PROFILE NO: 16.75 HTG.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 LAT.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 255 LAT.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): 410 CLG INFILTRATION CFM: 410 HTG INFILTRATION CFM: 300 MINIMUM SUPPLY CFM: -1 EXPOSED FLOOR SLAB EDGE -FT: 0 HTG. & CLG. LOADS CALCULATED 12.00 7.00 5.00 LENGTH WIDTH ROOF -AREA 1.00 2427.00 2427.0 HEIGHT WIDTH WALL -AREA 10.00 1.000 3.00 1.000 3.00 1.000 120.0 21.0 15.0 PER.SF 1 2427.00 121 0 0 15 15 255 0 0 0 68.00 SUSP.CEIL NO DIRECTION w E WIDTH QUANTITY AREA SHD TILT REF 0 90 2 0 90 2 0 90 2 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 13 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE n 5: (985 SF) AIR HANDLER NUMBER: ZONE LENGTH (FEET): LIGHTING WATTS: PER.SF NO. OF PEOPLE IN ZONE: PER.SF LIGHTING PROFILE NO: CEILING HEIGHT (FEET): SEN.SAFETY FACTOR (%): SEN.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): CLG VENTILATION CFM: HTG VENTILATION CFM: EXHAUST AIR CFM: CLG. SQFT EXPOSED TO PLENUM: LAT. BTUH EQUIP LOAD: ROOF 1. WALL TYPE 1 TYPE 1. 1 2. 1 3 1 ASHRAE # U- FACTOR 2 0.050 ASHRAE -G U- FACTOR B B B 0.095 0.095 0.095 GLASS TYPE.SUM -UFAC SHD.COEF HEIGHT • 5 ZONE OCCURRENCES: 1.00 ZONE WIDTH (FEET): 1970 EQUIPMENT WATTS: 10 PEOPLE PROFILE NO: 0 EQUIPMENT PROFILE NO: 16.75 HTG.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 LAT .SAFETY FACTOR (%) : 255 LAT.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): 0 CLG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 HTG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 MINIMUM SUPPLY CFM: -1 EXPOSED FLOOR SLAB EDGE -FT: 0 HTG. & CLG. LOADS CALCULATED DARK 16.75 DARK 16.75 DARK 16.75 12.00 41.00 27.00 201.0 686:8 452.3 PER.SF 90 - 180 - 270 - 1 985.00 49 0 0 15 15 255 110 110 0 77.00 COLOR LENGTH WIDTH ROOF -AREA SUSP.CEIL DARK 1.00 985.00 985.0 NO COLOR HEIGHT WIDTH WALL -AREA DIRECTION E S W WIDTH QUANTITY AREA SHD TILT REF 1. 4 0.800 0.480 4.00 8.00 2.000 64.0 0 180 1 ., * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 14 * * * * * * * * *• * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE # 6: (995 SF) AIR HANDLER NUMBER: ZONE LENGTH (FEET): LIGHTING WATTS: PER.SF NO. OF PEOPLE IN ZONE: PER.SF LIGHTING PROFILE NO: CEILING HEIGHT (FEET): SEN.SAFETY FACTOR (%) : SEN.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): CLG VENTILATION CFM: HTG VENTILATION CFM: EXHAUST AIR CFM: CLG. SQFT EXPOSED TO PLENUM: LAT. BTUH EQUIP LOAD: ROOF 1. WALL TYPE ASHRAE # U- FACTOR 1 2 0.050 TYPE ASHRAE -G U- FACTOR 1. 2 C 2. 2 C 1. 2 0.360 2. 4 0.800 0.700 0.700 GLASS TYPE SUM -UFAC SHD.COEF 2 ZONE OCCURRENCES: 25.50 ZONE WIDTH (FEET): 1990 EQUIPMENT WATTS: PER.SF 10 PEOPLE PROFILE NO: 0 EQUIPMENT PROFILE NO: 16.75 HTG.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 LAT.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 255 LAT.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): 0 CLG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 HTG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 MINIMUM SUPPLY CFM: ' -1 EXPOSED FLOOR SLAB EDGE -FT: 0 ONLY HEATING LOADS CALCULATED HEIGHT COLOR LENGTH WIDTH ROOF -AREA SUSP.CEIL DARK 25.50 39.00 994.5 NO COLOR HEIGHT WIDTH WALL -AREA DIRECTION 16.75 27.00 452.3 90 - 16.75 40.00 670.0 0 - DARK DARK WIDTH QUANTITY AREA SHD TILT REF 0.100 7.00 3.00 1.000 21.0 0 90 0.480 4.00 8.00 1.000 32.0 0 180. 1 39.00 50 0 0 15 15 255 0 110 0 67.00 E N 2 1 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES BOEING WHSE2. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE # 7: (982 SF) AIR HANDLER NUMBER: ZONE LENGTH (FEET): LIGHTING WATTS: PER.SF NO. OF PEOPLE IN ZONE: PER.SF LIGHTING PROFILE NO: CEILING HEIGHT (FEET): SEN.SAFETY FACTOR ( %): SEN.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): CLG VENTILATION CFM: HTG VENTILATION CFM: EXHAUST AIR CFM: CLG. SQFT EXPOSED TO PLENUM: LAT. BTUH EQUIP LOAD: ROOF TYPE ASHRAE # U- FACTOR 1. 1 2 0.050 PART TYPE U- FACTOR COOL.T -D 11. 1 0.095 20 WALL TYPE ASHRAE -G U- FACTOR 1. 1 B 0.095 COLOR DARK HEAT.T -D 25 COLOR DARK GLASS TYPE SUM -UFAC SHD.COEF HEIGHT 1, 2 0.360 0.100 7.00 2. 4 0.800 0.480 4.00 PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** SEATTLE, WA 98101 07/03/91. PAGE 15 ZONE INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** 3 ZONE OCCURRENCES: 25.50 ZONE WIDTH (FEET): 1964 EQUIPMENT WATTS: 10 PEOPLE PROFILE NO: 0 EQUIPMENT PROFILE NO: 16.75 HTG.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 LAT.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 255 LAT.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): 0 CLG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 HTG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 MINIMUM SUPPLY CFM: -1 EXPOSED FLOOR SLAB EDGE -FT: 0 HTG. & CLG. LOADS CALCULATED LENGTH 25.50 HEIGHT 16.75 HEIGHT 16.75 WIDTH 38.50 WIDTH 26.00 WIDTH 39.00 PER.SF 1 38.50 49 0 0 15 15 255 100 100 0 65.00 ROOF -AREA SUSP.CEIL 981.8 NO PART -AREA 435.5 WALL -AREA DIRECTION 653.3 0 - N WIDTH QUANTITY AREA SHD TILT REF 3.00 1.000 21.0 0 90 1 8.00 1.000 32.0 0 180 1 • ROOF 1 . • PART ' *** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC *** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 16 ****************************** ZONE INPUT DATA ***************************** ZONE # 8: (982 SF) AIR HANDLER NUMBER: ZONE LENGTH (FEET): LIGHTING WATTS: PER.SF NO. OF PEOPLE IN ZONE: PER.SF LIGHTING PROFILE NO: CEILING HEIGHT (FEET): SEN.SAFETY FACTOR (70): SEN.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): CLG VENTILATION CFM: HTG VENTILATION CFM: EXHAUST AIR CFM: CLG. SQFT EXPOSED TO PLENUM: LAT. BTUH EQUIP LOAD: WALL TYPE. ASHRAE-G U-FACTOR TYPE ASHRAE # U-FACTOR 1 2 0.050 TYPE U-FACTOR COOL.T-D 1. 1 B 0.095 GLASS. TYPE SUM-UFAC SHD.COEF HEIGHT WIDTH QUANTITY 1.. 2 0.360 2. 4 0.800 3 ZONE OCCURRENCES: 25.50 ZONE WIDTH (FEET): 1964 EQUIPMENT WATTS: 10 PEOPLE PROFILE NO: 0 EQUIPMENT PROFILE NO: 16.75 HTG.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 LAT.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 255 LAT.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): 0 CLG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 HTG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 MINIMUM SUPPLY CFM: -1 EXPOSED FLOOR SLAB EDGE-FT: 0 HTG. & CLG. LOADS CALCULATED COLOR DARK HEAT.T-D 25 COLOR DARK 0.100 7.00 3.00 1.000 21.0 0 90 1 0.480 4.00 8.00 1.000 .32.0 0 180 1 PER 1 38.50 49 0 0 15 15 255 120 120 0 70.00 LENGTH WIDTH ROOF-AREA SUSP.CEIL 25.50 38.50 981.8 NO HEIGHT WIDTH PART-AREA 16.75 27.00 452.3 HEIGHT WIDTH WALL-AREA DIRECTION 16.75 40.00 670.0 0 AREA SHD TILT REF * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 17 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE INPUT DATA * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** ZONE # 9: gen room (480 SF) AIR HANDLER NUMBER: ZONE LENGTH (FEET): LIGHTING WATTS: PER.SF NO. OF PEOPLE IN ZONE: PER.SF LIGHTING PROFILE NO: CEILING HEIGHT (FEET): SEN.SAFETY FACTOR (%) : SEN.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): CLG VENTILATION CFM: HTG VENTILATION CFM: EXHAUST AIR CFM: CLG. SQFT EXPOSED TO PLENUM: LAT. BTUH EQUIP LOAD: ROOF 1. WALL 1. 2. 3 . TYPE 1 TYPE 2 2 2 ASHRAE # U- FACTOR 2 0.050 ASHRAE -G U- FACTOR C C 0.700 0.700 0.700 6 ZONE OCCURRENCES: 1 32.00 ZONE WIDTH (FEET): 15.00 960 EQUIPMENT WATTS: PER.SF 24 5 PEOPLE PROFILE NO: 0 0 EQUIPMENT PROFILE NO: 0 16.75 HTG.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 15 LAT.SAFETY FACTOR (%): 15 255 LAT.HEAT PER PERSON (BTUH): 255 0 CLG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 0 HTG INFILTRATION CFM: 0 0 MINIMUM SUPPLY CFM: 0 -1 EXPOSED FLOOR SLAB EDGE -FT: 65.00 0 ONLY HEATING LOADS CALCULATED COLOR DARK COLOR DARK DARK DARK LENGTH 32.00 HEIGHT 16.75 16.75 16.75 WIDTH ROOF -AREA SUSP.CEIL 15.00 480.0 NO WIDTH WALL -AREA DIRECTION 15.00 251.3 30.00 502.5 15.00 251.3 0 - N 270 - W 180 — S * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC *4* JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 18 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** DETAILED PROJECT ZONE LOAD CALCULATIONS * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** LOAD DESCRIPTION 1. SYS* 1 ROOF- 1- 2- NO.CLG -D 180.WALL -2 -C -D 270.WALL -2 -C -D 270. GLS- 1- 90 -TRANS 0%S- 0- H- NS -SOLAR FLOOR SLAB TOTAL 2. SYS# 1 ROOF- 1- 2- NO.CLG -D 180.WALL -2 -C -D 180. GLS- 1- 90 -TRANS 0%S- 0- H- NS -SOLAR 180. GLS- 2- 90 -TRANS 0%S- 0- H- NS -SOLAR 180. GLS- 3- 90 -TRANS 0%S- 0- H- NS -SOLAR FLOOR SLAB TOTAL UNIT QUAN 319 226 332 120 120 45.00 -SC- CLTD U.FAC SEN. CFAC SHGF -CLF- GAIN PEAK TIME 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.050 PEAK TIME 2087 1.000 -3 0.050 263 1.000 24 0.700 120 1.000 -3 0.190 120 0.050 0 0.130 21 1.000 -3 0.360 21 0.100 0 0.130 15 1.000 -3 0.470 15 0.100 0 0.130 30.00 LAT. HTG. HTG. GAIN MULT. LOSS 1 AM WIN. (25.5 X12.5) = 319 SF -3 0.050 24 0.700 26 0.700 -3 0.190 0 0.140 0 0 0 0 0 X 1.15 X 1.15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1.15 X 1.15 2.250 31.500 31.500 8.550 30.600 1377 2.250 31.500 8.550 16.400 17.100 30.600 718 7119 10458 1026 20,698 X 1.15 0 0 23,803 1 AM WIN. (53.5 X 39) = 2087 SF 4696 8284 1026 340 257 918 15,521 X 1.15 . DESCRIPTION QUAN CFAC SHGF -CLF- GAIN GAIN MULT. LOSS 3. SYS# 4 TOTAL 4. SYS* 4 TOTAL PEAK TIME 3 PM JUL. (53.5 X 38.5) = 2060 SF 32,893 5,253 X 1.15 X 1.15 37,827 17,051 X 1.15 6,041 19,609 PEAK TIME 4 PM JUL. (1 X 2427) = 2427 SF ROOF -1 -2- NO.CLG -D 2427 1.000 84 0.050 10193 3.500 8495 270.WALL -1 -B -D 905 1.000 26 0.095 2235 6.650 6018 90. WALL -1 -B -D 112 1.000 36 0.095 383 6.650 745 90. GLS- 1- 90 -TRANS 120 1.000 24 0.190 547 13.300 1596 0%S- 0- H- NS -SOLAR 120 0.050 214 0.240 308 90. GLS- 2- 90 -TRANS 21 1.000 24 0.360 181 25.200 529 0 %S- 0- H- NS -SOLAR 21 0.100 214 0.240 108 90. GLS- 3- 90 -TRANS 15 1.000 24 0.470 169 26.600 399 O%S- 0- H- NS -SOLAR 15 0.100 214 0.240 77 LIGHTS -0 4854.00 1.000 100% 3.410 16552 EQUIPMENT -0 121.00 1.000 3.410 413 0 PEOPLE -0 24.27 1.000 255/255 6189 6189 FLOOR SLAB 68.00 47.600 3237 37,355 6,189 X 1.15 X 1.15 42,958 7,117 21,019 X 1.15 24,172 { LOAD DESCRIPTION * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 20 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** DETAILED PROJECT ZONE LOAD CALCULATIONS• * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** 5. SYS* 5 ROOF -1 -2- NO.CLG -D 921 90. WALL -1 -B -D 201 180.WALL -1 -B -D 687 270.WALL -1 -B -D 452 SKYLIGHT- 4- 180 -TRANS 64 0 %S- 0- H- LIGHTS-0 EQUIPMENT -0 PEOPLE -0 SUMMER INFL WINTER INFL FLOOR SLAB TOTAL 6. SYS# 2 ROOF- 1- 2- NO.CLG -D 90. WALL -2 -C -D 0. WALL -2 -C -D 0. GLS- 2- 90 -TRANS 0%S- 0- H- NS -SOLAR SKYLIGHT- 4- 180 -TRANS 0 %S- 0- H- NS -SOLAR WINTER INFL FLOOR SLAB TOTAL NS -SOLAR 64 1970.00 49.00 9.85 110 110 77.00 UNIT -SC- CLTD U.FAC SEN. QUAN CFAC SHGF -CLF- GAIN 963 452 649 21 21 32 32 110 67.00 PEAK TIME 3 PM JUL. (1 X 985) = 985 SF 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.480 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.100 1.000 0.480 84 35 28 25 24 247 100% 0.050 0.095 0.095 0.095 0.800 0.620 3.410 3.410 255/255 32.526 PEAK TIME 1 AM WIN. -3 0.050 17 0.700 8 0.700 -3 0.360 247 0.250 -3 0.800 247 0.170 3868 668 1827 1074 1229 4704 6718 167 2512 3578 26,345 6,6 X 1.15 X 1.15 30,297 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1.15 LAT. HTG. HTG. GAIN MULT. LOSS 3.500 6.650 6.650 6.650 49.000 0 2512 4143 74.514 47.600 3224 1337 4569 3006 3136 8197 3665 27,134 X 1.15 7,653 31,204 (25.5 X 39) = 995 SF 2.250 2167 31.500 14238 31.500 20443 16.200 340 31.500 1008 47.902 5269 30.600 2050 0 45,515 X 1.15 X 1.15 0 0 52,342 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 21 22,494 7,024 X 1.15 X 1.15 23,086 X 1.15 25,868 8,078 26,549 ROOF- 1- 2- NO.CLG -D' 0. WALL -2 -C -D 270.WALL -2 -C -D 180.WALL -2 -C -D WINTER •INFL FLOOR SLAB 'TOTAL * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE. DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 9 BOEING WHSE2.. 07/03/91 PAGE 22 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** DETAILED PROJECT ZONE LOAD CALCULATIONS * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** LOAD DESCRIPTION 9. gen room S1S# 6 UNIT -SC- CLTD U..FAC SEN. LAT. QUAN CFAC SHGF -CLF- GAIN GAIN PEAK TIME 1 AM WIN. 480 1.000 251 1.000 503 1.000 251 1.000 134 65.00 -3 0.050. 8 0.700 26 0.700 24 0.700 (32 X 15) = 480 SF 0 2.250 0 . 31.500 0 31.500 0 31.500 47.902 30.600 HTG. HTG. MULT. LOSS 1080 7906 15844 7906 6419 1989 41,144 X 1.15 47,316 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 23 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR SYSTEM # 1 (MARC2) ZONE SUMMARY * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** 1 AM AUGUST 1 AM AUGUST ZONE PEAK TOTALS TOTAL ZONES: 2 319 2087 2,406 HTG.LOSS SEN.GAIN LAT.GAIN HTG.CFM CLG.CFM O.A. CFM O.A. CFM EXH. CFM CFM /SF. CFM /SF. 23,803 70 17,849 330 41,652 400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 446 0 50 1.40 0.00 0 334 0 250 0.16 0.00. 0 780 0 300 0.32 0.00 ZONE SPACE INFILTRATION OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY DUCT RETURN DUCT TOTAL SYSTEM SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SUPPLY AIR: 41,652 / (0.986 X 1.08 X 50) _ ( WINTER VENT OUTSIDE AIR (51.3% OF SUPPLY): RETURN DUCT SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH RETURN PLENUM SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH ( BLOW -THRU FAN SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON RETURN SIDE OF COIL: TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: 41,652 BTUH 0 BTUH 19,161 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH ZONE SPACE LAT.GAIN: 0 BTUH INFILTRATION LAT.GAIN: 0 BTUH ( OUTSIDE AIR LAT.GAIN: 0 BTUH ( TOTAL LAT.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: TOTAL SYSTEM SENSIBLE AND LATENT GAIN: TOTAL TONNAGE REQUIRED WITH OUTSIDE AIR: INSIDE: 45 DB, 50% RH WINTER: VENT CONTROLS OUTSIDE AIR 0 CFM) 400 CFM) 780 CFM) 400 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 60,813 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0.00 TONS ZN. ZONE - DESCRIPTION FLOOR HTG.LOSS SEN.GAIN LAT.GAIN HTG.CFM CLG.CFM NO. PEAK TIME & MONTH AREA O.A. CFM O.A. CFM EXH. CFM CFM /SF. CFM /SF. * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING.WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 25 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR SYSTEM # 2 (MARC.1) ZONE SUMMARY * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** 6 1 AM AUGUST ZONE PEAK TOTALS TOTAL ZONES: 1 995 52,342 0 0 980 0 980 0 0 0.98 0.00 995 52,342 0 0 980 0 980 0 0 0.98 0.00 SUMMER: NONE CONTROLS OUTSIDE AIR ZONE SPACE INFILTRATION OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY DUCT RETURN DUCT TOTAL SYSTEM SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: 46,282 BTUH 6,060 BTUH 46,944 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH SUPPLY AIR: 52,342 / (0.986 X 1.08 X 50) _ WINTER VENT OUTSIDE AIR ( 100% OF SUPPLY): ZONE SPACE SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH INFILTRATION SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH DRAW -THRU FAN SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH SUPPLY DUCT SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON SUPPLY SIDE OF COIL: f SUPPLY AIR: 0 / (0.986 X 1.10 X 0) _ SUMMER VENT OUTSIDE AIR (0.00% OF SUPPLY): RETURN DUCT SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH RETURN PLENUM SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH ( BLOW -THRU FAN SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON RETURN SIDE OF COIL: ZONE SPACE LAT.GAIN: 0 BTUH INFILTRATION LAT.GAIN: 0 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR LAT.GAIN: 0 BTUH TOTAL LAT.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: TOTAL SYSTEM SENSIBLE AND LATENT GAIN: TOTAL TONNAGE REQUIRED WITH OUTSIDE AIR: INSIDE: 45 DB, 50% RH WINTER: VENT CONTROLS OUTSIDE AIR 110 CFM) 980 CFM) 980 CFM) 980 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 99,286 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0.00 TONS *. NO. PEAK TIME & MONTH AREA O.A. CFM O.A. CFM EXH. CFM CFM /SF. CFM /SF. 7 3 PM JULY 3 .PM. JULY ZONE PEAK TOTALS TOTAL ZONES: 982 24,385 25,049 1,020 1,059 982 26,549 1,110 1,964 25',868 1,093 50,934 50,917 2,130 2,152 7,212 1,020 1,059 0 1.04: 1.08 8,078 1,110 1,093 0 1.13 1.11 15,290 2,130 .2,152 0 1.08 1.10 SUMMER VENT OUTSIDE AIR ( 100% OF SUPPLY): ( RETURN DUCT SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH RETURN PLENUM SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR SEN.GAIN: 34,997 BTUH BLOW -THRU FAN SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON RETURN SIDE OF COIL: TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: ZONE SPACE LAT.GAIN: 5,760 BTUH INFILTRATION LAT.GAIN: 9,530 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR LAT.GAIN: 88,700 BTUH ( TOTAL LAT.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: TOTAL SYSTEM SENSIBLE AND LATENT GAIN: TOTAL TONNAGE REQUIRED WITH OUTSIDE AIR: WINTER: VENT CONTROLS OUTSIDE AIR 220 CFM) 2,130 CFM) 2,130 CFM) 2,130 CFM) 220 CFM) 2,152 CFM) 2,152 CFM) 2,152 CFM) 220 CFM) 2,152 CFM) 123,489 BTUH 55,999 BTUH 34,997 BTUH 90,996 BTUH 103,990 BTUH 194,986 BTUH 16.25 TONS MISC LOAD ON RETURN SIDE VENT AIR 2,152 CFM BLOW -THRU FAN ENTERING COIL CONDITION 103,990 116.776 GENERAL PSYCHROMETRIC EQUATIONS USED IN ANALYSIS: PR = (BAROMETRIC PRESSURE OF SITE / STANDARD ASHRAE PRESSURE OF 29.921) TSH = PR X 1.10 X CFM X (DB.ENTERING - DB.LEAVING) TLH = PR X 0.68 X CFM X (GRAINS.ENTERING - GRAINS.LEAVING) GTH = PR X 4.50 X CFM X (ENTHALPY.ENTERING - ENTHALPY.LEAVING) TSH = 0.986 X 1.10 X TLH = 0.986 X 0.68 X SUM = GTH = 0,986 X 4.50 X TOTAL SYSTEM LOAD ENTERING COOLING COIL CONDITIONS: ENTERING HEATING COIL CONDITIONS: DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 85.00 WET BULB TEMPERATURE: 75.00 RELATIVE HUMIDITY(%): 63.44 ENTHALPY: 38.73 BTU /LBM DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 46.00 WET BULB TEMPERATURE: 45.44 RELATIVE HUMIDITY( %): 96.01 ENTHALPY: 17.94 BTU /LBM 44.683 15,290 10.601 15,290 55.284 88,700 61.492 2,152 X ( 38.733 - 17.944 ) _ 46.000 5,082 2.178 195 0 0.000 0 0 0.000 0 50,917 21.822 1,957 55,999 70.000 2,152 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 34,997 15.000 0 0.000 90,996 85.000 2,152 2,152 X ( 85.000 - 46.000 ) = 90,996 BTUH 2,152 X ( 116.776 - 44.683. ) = 103,985 BTUH 194,981 BTUH 198,428 BTUH 194,986 BTUH DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 38.00 LEAVING COOLING COIL CONDITIONS: LEAVING HEATING COIL CONDITIONS: DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 92.46 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE. DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA. 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 30 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR SYSTEM.t 4 (ACRA1) ZONE SUMMARY * * * * * * * * ** * * * * * * * ** ZN. ZONE - DESCRIPTION FLOOR HTG.LOSS NO. PEAK TIME & MONTH AREA O.A. CFM 3 4 3 PM JULY 4 PM JULY ZONE PEAK TOTALS TOTAL ZONES: 2 2060 2427 4, 487 19,609 330 24,172 410 SEN.GAIN O.A. CFM 37,827 330 42,958 410. LAT.GAIN HTG.CFM CLG.CFM E.H. CFM CFM /SF. CFM /SF. 6.041 250 7,117 300 1,568 1,679 0.76 0.82 1,932 1,907 0.80 . 0.79 3,500. 3,586 0.78 0.80 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 31 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR SYSTEM # 4 (ACRA1) TOTAL LOAD.SUMMARY * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR HANDLER DESC: ACRA1 WITH CV (SUM OF PEAKS) TERMINALS SUPPLY AIR FAN: DRAW -THRU WITH PROGRAM ESTIMATED HORSEPOWER OF 0.34 HP. AIR SYSTEM PEAK TIME: 4 PM IN JULY OUTDOOR CONDITIONS: 99 DB, 78 WB, 113.11 GRAINS INSIDE: 70 DB, 50% RH SUMMER: VENT CONTROLS OUTSIDE AIR WINTER: VENT CONTROLS OUTSIDE AIR ZONE SPACE INFILTRATION OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY DUCT RETURN DUCT TOTAL SYSTEM SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SUPPLY AIR: 43,781 / (0.986 X 1.08 X 12) _ WINTER VENT OUTSIDE AIR (21.1% OF SUPPLY): ZONE SPACE SEN.GAIN: INFILTRATION SEN.GAIN: DRAW -THRU FAN SEN.GAIN: SUPPLY DUCT SEN.GAIN: RESERVE SEN.GAIN: TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON SUPPLY SIDE OF COIL: TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: TOTAL SYSTEM SENSIBLE AND LATENT GAIN: 43,781 BTUH 0 BTUH 55,141 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 80,729 BTUH 0 BTUH 847 BTUH 0 BTUH 64 BTUH ( SUPPLY AIR: 81,640 / (0.986 X 1.10 X 21) _ -- SUMMER VENT OUTSIDE AIR (20.6% OF SUPPLY): RETURN DUCT SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH RETURN PLENUM SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR' SEN.GAIN: 23,267 BTUH BLOW -THRU FAN SEN.GAIN: .0 BTUH TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON RETURN SIDE OF COIL: ZONE SPACE LAT.GAIN: 13,158 BTUH INFILTRATION LAT.GAIN: 0 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR LAT.GAIN: 28,681 BTUH TOTAL LAT.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: TOTAL TONNAGE REQUIRED WITH OUTSIDE AIR: 0 CFM) 740 CFM) •3,500 CFM) 740 CFM) 0 CFM) 3,586 CFM) 740 CFM) 740 CFM) 0 CFM) 740 CFM) 98,922 BTUH 81,640 BTUH 23,267 BTUH 104,901 BTUH 41,839 BTUH 146,746 BTUH 12.23 TONS ENTERING COIL CONDITION 41,839 67.215 • SYSTEM LOAD ANALYSIS GENERAL PSYCHROMETRIC EQUATIONS USED IN ANALYSIS: LATENT GRAINS SENSIBLE TEMP CFM PR = (BAROMETRIC PRESSURE OF SITE / STANDARD ASHRAE PRESSURE OF 29.921) TSH = PR X 1.10 X CFM X (DB.ENTERING - DB.LEAVING) TLH = PR X 0.68 X CFM X (GRAINS.ENTERING - GRAINS.LEAVING) GTH = PR X 4.50 X CFM X (ENTHALPY.ENTERING - ENTHALPY.LEAVING) TSH = 0.986 X 1.10 X 3,586 X ( 75.985 - 49.000 ) _ TLH = 0.986 X 0.68 X 3,586 X ( 67.215 - 49.806 ) _ SUM = GTH = 0.986 X 4.50 X TOTAL SYSTEM LOAD DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 75.98 WET BULB TEMPERATURE: 63.16 RELATIVE HUMIDITY(%): 49.56 ENTHALPY: 28.75 BTU /LBM DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 49.00 WET BULB TEMPERATURE: 48.33 RELATIVE HUMIDITY( %): 95.47 ENTHALPY: 19.47 BTU /LBM 81,640 70.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 23,267 5.985 0 0.000 3,586 X ( 28.750 - 19.465 ) 49.000 847 0.218 37 0 0.000 0 0 0.000 0 80,729 20.766 3,546 64 0.016 3 3,586 104,907 75.985 3,586 104,907 BTUH 41,838 BTUH 146,745 BTUH 147,663 BTUH 146,746 BTUH ENTERING COOLING COIL CONDITIONS: ENTERING HEATING COIL CONDITIONS: DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 55.20 LEAVING COOLING COIL CONDITIONS: LEAVING HEATING COIL CONDITIONS: DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 81.75 * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC. * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES' SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 33 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR SYSTEM # 5 (ACRA3) ZONE SUMMARY * * * * * * * * *. * * * * * * * * ** ZN. ZONE - DESCRIPTION FLOOR HTG.LOSS SEN.GAIN LAT.GAIN HTG.CFM CLG.CFM NO. PEAK TIME & MONTH AREA O.A. CFM O.A. CFM EXH. CFM CFM /SF. CFM /SF. 5 3 PM JULY ZONE PEAK TOTALS TOTAL.ZONES: .1 985 31,204 1,200 985 31,204 1,200. 30,297 7,653 1,281 0 30,297 1,281 1,200 1,281 1.22 1.30 7,653 1,200 1,281 0 1.22 1.30. * *? FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 34 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR SYSTEM # 5 (ACRA3) TOTAL LOAD SUMMARY * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR HANDLER DESC: ACRA3 WITH CV (SUM OF PEAKS) TERMINALS SUPPLY AIR FAN: DRAW -THRU WITH PROGRAM ESTIMATED HORSEPOWER OF 1.21 HP. FAN INPUT: 50% COMBINED FAN AND MOTOR EFF. WITH 3.00 IN WATER ACROSS THE FAN SENSIBLE HEAT RATIO: 0.81 THIS SYSTEM OCCURS 1 TIME(S) IN THE BUILDING AIR SYSTEM PEAK TIME: 3 PM IN JULY OUTDOOR CONDITIONS: 100 DB, 78 WB, 111.48 GRAINS INSIDE: 70 DB, 50% RH SUMMER: VENT CONTROLS OUTSIDE AIR WINTER: VENT CONTROLS OUTSIDE AIR ZONE SPACE INFILTRATION OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY DUCT RETURN DUCT TOTAL SYSTEM SEN.LOSS: 'SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: SEN.LOSS: TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: TOTAL SYSTEM SENSIBLE AND LATENT GAIN: 26,895 BTUH 4,309 BTUH 40,876 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH SUPPLY AIR: 31,204 / (0.986 X 1.08 X 24) = WINTER VENT OUTSIDE AIR ( 100% OF SUPPLY): ZONE SPACE SEN.GAIN: 26,182 BTUH INFILTRATION SEN.GAIN: 4,115 BTUH ( DRAW -THRU FAN SEN.GAIN: 3,024 BTUH SUPPLY DUCT SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON SUPPLY SIDE OF COIL: SUPPLY AIR: 33,321 / (0.986 X 1.10 X 24) _ SUMMER VENT OUTSIDE AIR ( 100% OF SUPPLY): ( RETURN DUCT SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH RETURN PLENUM SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR SEN.GAIN: 20,833 BTUH BLOW -THRU FAN SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON RETURN SIDE OF COIL: ZONE SPACE LAT.GAIN: 2,888 BTUH INFILTRATION LAT.GAIN: 4,765 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR LAT.GAIN: 27,727 BTUH TOTAL LAT.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: TOTAL TONNAGE REQUIRED WITH OUTSIDE AIR: 110 CFM) . 1,200 CFM) 1,200 CFM) 1,200 CFM) 110 CFM) 1,281 CFM) 1,281 CFM) 1,281 CFM) 110 CFM) 1,281 CFM) 72,080 BTUH 33,321 BTUH 20,833 BTUH 54,154 BTUH 35,380 BTUH 89,534 BTUH 7.46 TONS LEAVING COIL CONDITION DRAW -THRU FAN * ** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES SEATTLE, WA 98101 BOEING WHSE2. 07/03/91 PAGE 35 I * * * * * * * * * * * * ** AIR SYSTEM # 5 (ACRA3) PSYCHROMETRIC ANALYSIS * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** SYSTEM LOAD ANALYSIS ZONE CONDITION RETURN AIR DUCT • RETURN AIR PLENUM MISC LOAD ON RETURN SIDE VENT AIR 1,281 CFM BLOW -THRU FAN ENTERING COIL CONDITION 35,380 87.574 GENERAL PSYCHROMETRIC EQUATIONS USED IN ANALYSIS: SUM = GTH = 0.986 X 4.50 X TOTAL SYSTEM LOAD ENTERING COOLING COIL CONDITIONS: DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: WET BULB TEMPERATURE: RELATIVE HUMIDITY(%): ENTHALPY: 34. 1,281 X ( 34.148 - 18.204 ) _ 85.00 70.00 47.90 15 BTU /LBM DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 46.00 WET BULB TEMPERATURE: 45.94 RELATIVE HUMIDITY( %): 99.57 ENTHALPY: 18.20 BTU /LBM LATENT GRAINS SENSIBLE TEMP 46.364 7,653 8.917 7,653 55.281 27,727 32.293 46.000 3,024 2.178 0 0.000 0 0.000 30,297 21.822 33,321 70.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 20,833 15.000 0 0.000 CFM 117 0 0 . 1 , 164 1,281 54,154 85.000 1,281 54,146 BTUH 35,369 BTUH 89,514 BTUH 90,558 BTUH 89,534 BTUH ENTERING HEATING COIL CONDITIONS: DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 38.00 LEAVING COOLING COIL CONDITIONS: LEAVING HEATING COIL CONDITIONS: DRY BULB TEMPERATURE: 94.43 *** FULL COMMERCIAL HVAC LOADS PROGRAM BY ELITE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC * ** ' ZN. ZONE - DESCRIPTION FLOOR HTG.LOSS SEN.GAIN LAT.GAIN HTG.CFM CLG.CFM NO. PEAK TIME & MONTH AREA O.A. CFM O.A. CFM EXH. CFM CFM /SF. CFM /SF. 9 gen room 480 47,316 0 0 684 0 1 AM AUGUST 0 0 0 1.43 0.00 ZONE PEAK TOTALS 480 47,316 0 0 684 0 TOTAL ZONES 1 0 0 . 0 1.43 0.00 AIR HANDLER DESC: UH1A.1 WITH CV (SUM OF PEAKS) TERMINALS SUPPLY AIR FAN: DRAW -THRU WITH PROGRAM ESTIMATED HORSEPOWER OF 0.00 HP. FAN INPUT: 50% COMBINED FAN AND MOTOR EFF. WITH 0.30 IN WATER ACROSS THE FAN SENSIBLE HEAT RATIO: 0.00 THIS SYSTEM OCCURS 1 TIME(S) IN THE BUILDING RETURN PLENUM SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH BLOW -THRU FAN SEN.GAIN: 0 BTUH TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON RETURN SIDE OF COIL: TOTAL SEN.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: ZONE SPACE LAT.GAIN: 0 BTUH INFILTRATION LAT.GAIN: 0 BTUH OUTSIDE AIR LAT.GAIN: 0 BTUH TOTAL LAT.GAIN ON AIR HANDLING SYSTEM: TOTAL SYSTEM SENSIBLE AND LATENT GAIN: 39,934 BTUH 7,382 BTUH ( 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH TOTAL TONNAGE REQUIRED WITH OUTSIDE AIR: 134 CFM) 0 CFM) 684 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 0 CFM) 47,316 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0 BTUH 0.00 TONS • re '1'.0 - = - r• n 2D 14B D04 - .EQUIPMENT . CODE AIR CONDITIONER - A1R HANDLING UNIT COOLING COIL CF = CHEMICAL FEED POT H C :-. _.. CHILLER J ' �o -- COMPRESSOR rr rr, , ..... ._ _ - - - • --- • — - '.... -: .. ._ '.r -. rtInormark tillMICIErirr © • ONE DATER OPTION 0 MIEAT ,..TT 1 /Ii, E ;i 16 crM PANGC MODEL M A C 0 E ol O 1,500 -3,000 5000 -A 146 -7/16 60 Ina 20 5 20 3,00A -4,500 5000 -8 155 73-3/4 52 3 30 4 20 4.5n7-6,000 5000 -C 164 -7/8 03 -5/8 63 mi 3; 4 80 an 260 In l' a95 13/16 F ROSENF G • TO• 206:643-431 . AUG 14) • AUC 15 '91 14:33 TRINE CO SEA 6434140 - • _ - F' - - °91 16 :22AM P :02 w INNISS AIR IX AIR MOS WILY • SERIES • 5000 (ROOFTOP. UNITS) PLAID YItV A . ?W,0 VIt • AIR � Alit OJT INDIRECT FIRED HEATER OPTIONS F►ir_1 `P 1 I? P!4 -;-'• rr r : 1,) : IEa.,CX NEAT EXGwIGCR t.) S%PPLY CNN CNSATC DRAIN 'I' MPT) SUPPLY • -'• EXHAUST ILOvER/MOTTO* LY .. ''5) EX)AUST CONDENSATE DRAIN (1• MT) '' OPTIONS -' , - • ".. 6,) RECIRCYlDZt DAMCR / U.A 7.) SPACE rat HEATING COIL OR ELECTRIC DUCT NEATER (+) AND/OR COALING COIL (w) YITH DRAIN PAH 0.) rAGC AND MYPAts DAMP =R 9.) 8•. 30Z INTAKE ftLTER 10.) Ou1SIDC AIR DAMPER •• RIGHT D» YICY • r- re _...._ _ ..._ .. - - - _ .;...... • . .. _'-.. ' ••'_' -. ONE NEATER OPTION 0 HEAT 4 1 % CFN RANOC HODCL N A . C 0 C F G k I A• Illir 1/1L 1.500 - 3,000 5000 -A 146 -7/16 60 3 20 5 20 4 C 215 7/2 3.00" -4,500 5000 -b 155 73-3/4 3 30 4 20 4 6 236 1/4 I 1 16 4.503 -6,000 5000 -C 164 -7/2 03 -5 /B 3 34 4 20 4 6 260 I/2 295 13/10 'AUC '91 14:33 TRINE CO SEA 64343140 _ P.3 • I . 4PROt1 HEATEX ROSENBERG TO: 206=643-4314 ....: AUG 14, 1991 - 12: 22AM P; 02 : • ..... • • _._• . ._. _. • Awr O.T:1at AIR IN A MAN Vlt: 1--- i ' I w I =TURN ?WONT VIEW rr AIR cur _ •r , • i I.) HEATER MCA? EXCWIGCR 1 E.) SUPPLY CONDENSATE DRAIN (1$ NWYO 3.) SUPPLY ElDVER/NOTCP ASSENILY 4.) • EXHAUST $Lt7YCR/IOTCR ASSEN1LY '3.) moist CI3"IDCH$ATC DRAIN CI' WT) 6,) aEC1RCW►TION D AIDLR " 7.) SPACE run HEATING COIL OR ELECTRIC DUCT NEATER co AND/OD - CODEINE COIL co viol DRAIN PAM 0.) TA= AND DYrASI DAMPER D.) 2'. 30X 1N/AKE FILTER 10.) WTSIDE AIR DNPER SERIES 5000 (ROOFTOP UNITS ENE HEATER, UP-I40N IMr.YY W 0M■ INDIRECT FIRED NEATER OPTIONS 6F Ki3.1 6: 1 Indoor Gas Duct Furnaces (11),1GGDPC 005 007 010 012 !Bart MBh 50.0 75.0 100.0 / 125.0 (� ,ut MBh 38.5 57.8 77.0 T 98.3 M,+� 1233 1850 24674 3083 I ir.viure Drop .48 .48 .48 I .46 Mm lump Rise 30 30 30 1! 30 Min CFM 463 694 925 1156 I reas'XS Drop .110 .095 .090. .068 Mar Temp Rise 80 80 80 t 80 Hue Outlet 4" R 6" R 6" R 6" R Duct furnaces are AGA certified for installation downstream of cooling coils in air conditioning systems. Both LP (propane) and natural gas units are available with left or right -hand controls for ganging of units in the field. Approved in blow -thru applications only. Single Furnace Rooftop -- Arrangement 1 015 017 020 022 025 030 035 040 150.0 ,175.0 200.0 229 a 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 115.5 134.8 154.0 173 I 192.5 231.0 289.5 308.0 3700 4317 4933 55!4 6167 7400 8633 9867 .48 .50 .48 .47 .48 .50 .49 .50 30 30 30 3C 30 30 30 30 1388 1619 1850 20b 2313 2775 3238 3700 .100 .090 .100 .09. .090 .090 .090 .095 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 BO 7" R 7" R 8" R 8" R 8" R 10" OV 10" OV 12" OV Rooftop duct furnaces combine all the features of indoor units with rail mounting and watertight construction. Side access burner drawer and intermittent pilot ignition is standard. Gravity venting is standard - optional power venting is available. Available in double or triple furnace sizes. For outdoor use only. Approved in blow -thru applications only. GFNCIGFPC 010 015 02f, 025 030 035 040 Input MBh 100.0 150.0 2C 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 Output MBh 77.0 115.5 1540 192.5 231.0 269.5 308.0 Max CFM 2350 3650 4(11 5850 7000 8200 9300 Pressure Drop .52 .59 .E2 _, .63 .54 .57 .62 Min Temp Rise 30 30 3C 30 30 30 30 Min CFM B80 1325 1754 _ 2225 2640 3100 3560 Pressure Drop .07 .07 .1l .10 .09 .09 .09 Max Tem . Rise 80 80 86 80 80 80 80 Ala available in double furnace l050.060.070.0901 and amsrriww wa (1201 suss. Table 14 -1 General Data Cooling Performance' Gross Cooling Capacity 183,000 183.000 EER 8.5 8.5 Nominal Ctm' 6000 6000 ARI Net Cooling Capacity 172.000 172.000 Integrated Part Load Valuer 8.80 8.80 System Power (Kw) 20:24 20.24 Heating Performance' Heating Input (Btuh) 2nd Stage Heating Output (Btuh) 2nd Stage Steady State No. Burners No. Stages Gas Connection Pipe Size (in.) Compressor No./Type Sound Rating (8ELS) Outdoor Coil • Type Tube Size (in.) OD Face Area (sq.ft) Rows/FPI Indoor Coil • Type Tube Size (in.) Face Ar.. (sq. ft.) Rows /FPI Refrigerant Control Drain Connection No. /Size (in.) Fessrs • Tyys/Fwnrshed Dfa) Sae Recommended fiekrOwans C>,arge (Lba. of R•22)' General Data. YCD180A3,A4,AWL YC0180A3,A4.AWH Low Heat Models 175,000 250.000 143,000 201.000 82.1 15 Ton Downflow Units 15 Ton Horizontal Units 2/Trane H 9.2 Plate Fin .376 23.98 2/18 YCH180A3,A4.AWL YCH1BOA3,A4,AWH High Heat Low Heat High Heat Models Models Models 250,000 175,000 250,000 350,000 250,000 350,000 202.000 142.000 200,000 279,000 198,000 275,000 81.4 80.9 - 80.1 1 1 2 2 .50 .75 .50 .75 2/Trsne H 9.2 Plate Fin .375 23.98 2/18 Plate Fin Plate Fin .375 .375 17.50 17.50 2/16 2/15 Capillary Tube Capillary Tube 1/1.00 NPT 1/1.00 NPT Outdoor Fan • Type Propeller Propeller No. Used /Diameter (in.) 2/25 2/26 Drive Type /No Speeds Direct /1 Direct/1 Ctmt 10800 10800 No. Motors/Hp 2/.50 2/.50 Motor Rpm 1100 1100 Indoor Fan • Type FC Centrifugal FC Centrifugal Nor Used/Diameter (in.) 1/15X 15 1/16 X 15 prune Type /Nor Speeds Belt/Variable Pitch Belt/Variable Pitch No. Morton 1 1 Moto Np (Standard /Oversized) 3.0/5.0 3.0/5.0 Motor Rpm (Standard/Oversized) 1740/3460 1740/3450 Motor Frame Sae (Standard/Oversized) 145T/145T 145T/145T Throwaway/Yee Throwaway/Yes (2120X20X2 (2120X20X2 14120X25 X2 (4)20X25X2 10.3 /Circuit 10.3 /Circuit OICTI4 I. Rated or samrrd rrs wren MI stsreterd 360, at 95'F ambient. S0'F Hawing dry bulb. 67'F wearing wet bulb end nominal Cim listed Gross eaperay does not include the effect of len moor /wet. AM =wow is no and andudw the Olen at Ian moor hest MI rating dm I 360 dm /ton for that product. Cim operating range t20%of nominal dm. 14 nmnya sod ' wing ewe were awablehed and approved under laboratory taw conditions using American National Sunwards minas standard A14I1221.47. Ratings shown are id/ ienuoia W to 2000 Net For elevations above 2000 feet, retinae should be reduced at the rate el 4% for each 1000 lest above sae UvaL 2 sinners er•ery not wawa. 4 *grraa,rswa wen,. For awe emcee value. me unit nameplwa and service arouctwta. I. 01,V • trwywed Poi lard Volvo • based on MI Standard 360. Units are rated at 90° ambient end S0 at MI road dm 14 4 • i4ZNO OVE ' ;x 4" 4 � �, � * E SE SET' MODEL F INDOOR GRAVITY VENTED GAS FIRED FAN TYPE UNIT REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW DESCRIPTION The Reznor Series 100, Model F gas -fired unit heaters are designed for 80% thermal efficiency for use with natural or propane gas in sizes from 25,000 to 400,000 BTUH gas input and are arranged for gravity venting. Model F units are designed for ceiling suspension with propeller fans for air delivery. Standard features on the Model F Series include a manual match -lit pilot with 100% shut -off and a single - stage, 24-volt gas valve. A terminal strip connector facilitates field con- nection to a remote 24 -volt thermostat for automatic opera- tion. Each unit is provided with a fan control and required limit safety controls, including an energy cut-off (ECO) device. - These units have been design- certified by the American Gas Association (A.G.A.) and approved by the Canadian Gas Association (C.G.A.) and bear the A.G.A. or C.G.A. label, and are approved for use in California. NOTE: Model F units for California require the addi- tion of spark pilot Option AH2 or AH3. WARNING: Gas-fired appliances are not designed for use In hazardous atmospheres containing flammable vapors or combustible dust, or atmospheres contain- ing chlorinated or halogenated hydrocarbons. Installations in public garages or airplane hangars are permitted when in accordance with ANSI Z223.1 and NFPA 54 codes or CAN1 -B149 codes and enforcing authorities. c STANDARD FEATURES • Orifices for natural gas • Aluminized steel heat exchanger • 115 volt supply voltage • 115 volt, ODP, motor with internal overload • Fan and limit safety controls • Energy cut-off (ECO) device • 24 volt control voltage transformer • Terminal strip connector for 24 -volt field wiring • Single -stage combination gas valve • Manual match -lit pilot with 100% shut-off • Convenient bottom burner access • Full safety tan guard • Horizontal directional louvers • Horizontal /Vertical vent outlet • 2 -point threaded hanger connections • Baked enamel and aluminized steel finish • Blocked vent switch (effective 4/91) OPTIONAL FEATURES — FACTORY INSTALLED • Burner orifices for elevations over 2000 ft. • E -3 (409) stainless steel heat exchanger & burner • Two -stage gas control (50% - low fire) — Sizes 75 thru 400 • Spark - ignited, intermittent safety pilot with electronic flame supervision and timed lockout (required for pro- pane gas) (Manual reset) • Manual summer /winter switch • 208/230 single phase supply voltage • Unit equipped for propane gas OPTIONAL FEATURES — FIELD INSTALLED • Power venter • Vertical louvers' • Downturn air nozzles, 25 ° -65° or 50 ° -90° variable air deflection range (includes 4 -point suspension kit) • 4 -point suspension kit • Thermostat and relay kits • Air recirculation kits • Manual summer /winter switch • Multiple heater control • Unit - mounted thermostat bracket • Stepdown transformer 230/115 or 460/115 NOTE 1: Regulated combination gas valve consists of combination pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shut -off, and manual shut -off, all in one body. Gas supply pressure must not exceed 0.5 PSI (8 oz. -14" W.C.). Minimum inlet pressure for natural gas is 5" W.C. Minimum Inlet pressure for propane gas is 11" W.C. MODEL NUMBER 25 50 75 100 130 185 200 250 300 400 Btuh Input 25.000 50.000 I 75,000 100,000 130.000 165.000 200,000 250,000 300.000 400.000 *Btuh Thermal Output 20,000 40,000 60.000 f 80,000 104,000 132.000 160,000 200,000 240.000 320.000 * *Gas Connection — Natural 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" Size of Std. Hoz.Nert. Vent Outlet 4" Rd. 4" Rd. 5" Oval 6" Oval 7" Oval 8" Oval 8" Oval 10" Oval 10" Oval 12" Oval Control Amps (24 -Volt) .33 .33 .33 .33 .23 .23 .23 .23 .20 .20 Full -Load Amps (115V) 0.8 1.3 1.9 2.8 4.0 4.0 4.0 2.5 4.0 7.0 Normal Power Consumption -Watts 60 95 135 195 250 275 300 280 375 565 Throw at 8' Mounting Ht. - 35' 39' 48' j 60' 69' 78' 85' 96' 108' 120' CFM 380 650 980 1250 1600 2200 2800 3360 3800 4940 Outlet Velocity (FPM) 423 653 1166 1358 932 1100 1217 1182 1426 1420 Motor Horsepower 1/70 1/40 1/35 1/30 1/20 1/20 1/20 1/6 1/4 1/2 Motor RPM 1550 1550 1550 1050 1050 1050 1050 850 850 850 Fan Diameter (In.) 10 10 12 14 14 16 20 22 22 24 Approx. Net Wt. Lbs. 72 79 88 97 132 149 170 204 221 276 Approx. Ship Wt. Lbs. 89 96 107 118 155 172 196 232 249 311 MODEL NO. A B C 0 E F G H I d K L APPROX. NET WT. APPROX. SHIP. WT. NAT PRO. 25 29% 131/2, 2 31 '/,, 527/32 14 ' /,, 14 %, 17 % 4 10 i6 1/2 '/i 72 89 50 293/4 1 3 7 /3 271/23 317/3 527, 147 /3 14 %2 17 3/4 4 10 16 '/2 1 /2 79 96 75 29% 15 271/2„ 31 5 14 141/2 17% 5 10 16 1 / 2 1 / 2 88 107 100 291/2 17 30 31 5 14 14 17% 8 12 16 1 / 2 1 / 2 97 118 130 393/4 17 35 35 ",, 4% 19 15 21% 7 11 24 1/2 '/ 132 155 165 393/4 20 35 3515 4% 19 157%, 21% 8 14 /32 24 1 /2 '/2 149 172 200 393/4 23 36 35 47/, 191%2 1523 /32 213/4 8 14 % 24 1 / 2 1 /3 170 196 250 39 28 363 /18 3514 4 % 191 %2 152 %2 21 % 10 12 24 1 /2 '/3 204 232 300 39 2817/,, 3611/„ 359/ 47 /, 19 152 1/22 213/4 • 10 12 2 % 1 /2 221 249 400 39 377/,4 37 35 4 % 1916 /32 152 %2 20'/3 12 13 24 % 1 / 2 276 311 MODEL F TECHNICAL DATA HEATERS FOR COMMERCIAL - INDUSTRIAL USE *A.G.A. ratings for altitudes to 2000 feet. Above 2000 feet de -rate by orifice change, 4% for each 1000 feet above sea level *C.G.A. ratings for altitudes to 2000 feet. High altitude units (2001 to 4500 eet) de -rated by 10 °/• of maximum input. **Gas connection for propane Is '/2" for all sizes. Sizes shown are for gas connection to a single -stage gas valve, NOT gas supply line size. NOTE Not certified for residential use. e v,sIW 'CMMTS III CM 141 S /. -IS 'DIAL( 1I0E4O Sn , tt I 0°IIOWL 8111 IC m. LOWt.S r H RISKY flit MItlJUL MULL MIXTCCM (For Additional Mounting Heights sss page 24) NOTES: 1. Use dimension "G" for (2) point suspension and "E" and "F" for (4) point. 2. Factory eouipped (2) point suspension; (4) point is optional. IL CtRIC WRY COI.IWCT10. �-- 8,8 .---1 r1 �I•NW Inn y , , 'T 1.■ � •MS C740. IMOI SVRl 1.141 0 4I0"1 slot III" MODEL F DIMENSIONS (ACCURATE WITHIN PLUS OR MINUS 1/8") CLEARANCE FROM COMBUSTIBLES 1. Top and flu. connection — 6". 2. Sides — 18 ". 3. Bottom — 12" (When sup- piled with optional downturn nozzle, bottom clearance is 42 "). 4. Back — For service pur- poses, the back of the unit must have 24" clearance. Page'? • P•9• 40 • , * r • ' E. ••■• r F. . I' WAWA EMI ►� w L L *on. DESCRIPTION Reznor RGB (patent pending) Series packaged units are gravity - vented, gas -fired forced air furnaces, designed for installation outdoors and used with recirculating and /or make -up air warm air duct systems. The RGB units use either natural or propane gas, as specified, in sizes from 75,000 through 400,000 BTUH gas input. Standard features include an intermittent spark pilot with electronic flame supervision, a single-stage 24 -volt gas valve, and all required limit and safety controls, including a reverse air flow limit switch. For automatic operation, each unit is wired for field connection to a remote 24V thermostat. The ROB Series models have a weatherized, aluminized steel cabinet with a full curb cap for mounting on a roof curb or supports. The standard packaged furnace has a horizontal discharge air opening. A bottom discharge air opening is available with the addition of a downturn plenum. The blower cabinet has a standard horizontal inlet but is engineered to allow for horizontal and /or bottom air inlets with various optional damper control systems. The air con- trol systems for both return air heating and make -up air are complemented by a selection of gas control options. To ob- tain the desired CFM, a wide selection of optional motor and drive combinations are available to operate the cen- trifugal blower. To meet a variety of installation requirements, these packaged units are available In selected combinations equipped with a downturn plenum, an evaporative cooling module, a cooling coil cabinet, and an outside air inlet hood. The duct furnace in the packaged unit is design- certified by the American Gas Association and approved by the Canadian Gas Association. STANDARD FEATURES • Orifices for natural gas • Aluminized steel heat exchanger (When inlet air temperature Is below 40 °F, optional stainless steel heat exchanger Is recommended.) • Aluminized steel burners with stainless steel insert • 120 -volt power supply • 24✓rolt control transformer • Redundant single -stage combination gas valve (See Note 1) OUTDOOR GAS FINED FU^S'i E • Intermittent spark pilot • Fan and limit safety controls • Power venter • Reverse air flow limit control • Adjustable belt drive • Motor contactor • Terminal block wiring • Insulated, weatherized, aluminized steel cabinet for outdoor mounting • Full curb cap base OPTIONAL FEATURES — FACTORY INSTALLED • Unit equipped for propane gas • E -3 (409) stainless steel heat exchanger • 321 stainless steel heat exchanger • E -3 (409) stainless steel burners • E -3 (409) stainless steel drip pan • Intermittent spark pilot with flame supervision and timed lockout (see page 63) • 1/4 HP through 3 HP open drip - proof, totally enclosed, energy efficient and -2 -speed motors; 5 HP available in open drip -proof (see pages 53.58 for selection) • 230/1, 208/1, 208/3, 230/3, 460/3 575/3 alternate supply voltages • Motor starter (optional with motors having internal overload protection) • Burner air shutters (required for units equipped for propane gas) • Two -stage gas control (see page 63, 64) • Electronic modulation (see page 63, 64) • Mechanical modulation (see page 63, 64) • Mechanical modulation with full fire bypass (see page 64) • Make -up air controls /dampers (see pages 65 and 66) • 1/2" O. D. BX cable (Chicago code) • Convenience outlet • Flrestat(s) • Freezestat • Filter rack with filters (1" or 2" disposable, perma- nent or pleated) • Evaporative cooler (see pages 48 and 49) • 30% 0/A inlet hood (ADJ 0-30% dampers) • Downturn Plenum Cabinet • Cooling Coil Cabinet (see page 67, 68) • Double wall cabinet construction • Manifold arrangement for Illinois School Code (see page 64) • High ambient burner cutoff • Gas pressure safety switches • Air flow proving switch OPTIONAL FEATURES —FIELD INSTALLED • Full roof curb (see page 69, 70) • Disconnect switch • Single -stage thermostat • Two -stage thermostat • Electronic 7 -day programmable thermostat • Thermostat guard with locking cover • Remote control console (see page 71, 72, 73) • •100% 0/A inlet hood (requires assembly) • Vertical flue extension NOTE 1: Regulated combination redundant gas valve consists of combination pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shut -off, and manual shut -off, all in one body. Gas supply pressure must not exceed 0.5 PSI (8 oz. -14" W.C.). Minimum inlet pressure for natural gas Is 5" W.C. Minimum inlet pressure for propane gas is 11" W.C. r MODEL NUMBER 75 / 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 , BTUH Input - 75.000 . 100,000 4 � 125,000 150.000 175, 000 200, 000 225, 000 250,000 300,000 350,000 400,000 Thermal Output Capacit • 57,750 77,000 1 96,250 115,500 134,750 154,000 173,250 192,500 231,000 269,500 308,000 Control Amps (24V) .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .7 .6 .6 .6 A.G.A. CFM Ran • e • RGB 585-705 780.940 , 980.1175 1175.1410 1370.1645 1565.1880 1765.2115 19602350 2350-2820 2745-3295 3135-3765 A.G.A. CFM Range • HRGB•' 705-2645 940-3400 1175.3800 14144700 1645-5000 1880-5100 2115.5150 23505800 28206300 32958800 3785-7100 C.G.A. CFM Range • ROB 660-1055 880-1410 i 1100.1765 1320.2115 15402470 1765-2820 1985-3175 2205.3530 2645-4235 3085.4940 3530-5645 C.G.A. CFM Range • HRGB•• 10552645 141034001 1765 -3800 2115-4700 2470-5000 2820-5100 3175-5150 35305800 42358300 49404800 56457100 (H)-R08 Net Wt. (Lbs.) "• 465 465 501 538 539 559 559 1306 606 659 692 ' (H)-RGB Ship Wt. (Lbs.)" • 605 605 641 695 696 739 739 835 835 903 960 Gas Connection•Natural•••• 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 112" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 314" 314" Filter Size (Filters are optional and available In 1" or 2" disposable, permanent, or pleated.) (2) 20x25 (2) 20x25 (2) 20x25 , (2) 16x20 (2) 16x25 (2) 16x20 (2) 16x25 (1) 16x20 (1) 20x20 (1) 16x25 (1) 20x25 (1) 16320 (1) 20x20 (1) 16x25 (1) 20x25 (1) 20x20 (3) 20x25 (1) 20x20 (3) 20x25 (3) 20x25 (2) 16x25 (2) 20x20 (1) 16x20 (1) 16x25 (2) 20x25 0 • ,ions s : . Installed on the furnace: 75 100 125 150 175 200 1 225 250 300 350 1 400 Downturn Plenum Cabinet (wt. Includes additional crate) 166 166 166 177 177 196 196 __229 229 253 271 Options shipped separately for field assembly and Installation: Outside Air Inlet Hood 70 70 70 76 76 79 79 87 87 92 196 Roof Curb for Basic Unit 90 90 90 95 95 101 101 111 111 117 ( 123 Roof Curb for Unit with Downturn Plenum 112 112 112 118 118 124 124 133 133 139 1 145 Roof Curb for Unit with Cooling Coil Cabinet 117 117 117 123 123 129 129 138 138 144 1 150 Roof Curb for Unit with Downturn Plenum and Cooling Coll Cabinets 144 144 144 149 149 155 155 165 165 171 177 MODEL SIZE A B C D 75 and 100 28% 17% 25% 12'/4 125 28% 17% 25% 15% 150 and 175 34'4 22% 31% 20% 200 and 225 39% 28% 36% 26'/3 250 and 300 47% 38% 45% 34% 350 53% 42% 50% 40 400 58'4 47% 56% 45 Optional Return Air Opening — 19' x B Standard Horizontal Dacha -e Air Openln• — 18 x D Optional Bottom Discnarge Air Opening 19'/, x B • COMMERCIAL I INDUSTRIAL HEATING, MAKE-UP AIR, EVAPORATIVE COOLING, ROOF CURB MOUNTEC 1t, ARC `;' : F, RGB SERIES TECHNICAL DATA • A.G.A. ratings for altitudes to 2000 feet. Above 2000 eet de-rate by orl ice change 4% for each 1000 feet above sea level. C.G.A. ratings for altitudes to 2000 feet. High altitude units (2001.4500 t.) are de -rated by 10 of maximum input. •• Prefix 'H' indicates high CFM units. ••• Weights shown are for packaged furnace and blo r with curb cap. '•" Gas connection for optional propane is 1/2 Inch t all sizes. Sizes shown are for gas connection to a single -stage gas valve. not gas supply line size. Note: Not certified for residents, use. MODEL ROB I 32 FIELD i WIRING CONTROL 19y ' 1 86 1 6 48 T 31 32 1 3- BLOWER SECTION uRNA:E 1 I AIRF -OW CAP . I ti 3 32 • 19z 38 ;.1 32 t3 — 85 LEFT 5IDE •lIEi CLEARANCES FROM COMBUSTIBLES: 1. Top -36" 2. Side opposite controls -6 ". 3. Control side —unit width plus 6 ". 4. Radius of vent cap to all obstructions -10'. 5. Bottom -0" 1 32 • 4332 • OPTIONAL 100% OUTSIDE AIR INLET HOOD 394/0 T ' i I OPTIONAL GA5 — MIME! I CURB 3 i RETURN _ - =IELC SIRING AIR LINE VOLTAGE 7 _L 5 4 • - I - 19- - 1 • - FIELD MIRING CONTROL VOLTAGE A 5 C BLOWER SECTION ^" - 4 6 J I 1 FURNACE AIR FLOW FIELD WIRING -- LINE VOLTAGE 61% LEFT 510r VIEW FRONT VIEW OF OPTIONAL DOWNTURN PLENUM 381/,,1 396• GAS] tom CURB CA WEIGHTS OF ACCESSORIES (Ibs.) —Add to Ship Weight of Unit "I'll' I NIIISIIIWANNIINSM ,, ii I- - C FRONT VIEW `Height from top of cabinet to top of curb cap. "Height from top of cabinet to bottom of cabinet side. Pipe 41 l I OPTIONAL DOWNTURN PLENUM i � 1.Lip000_ ' I � I • 1 i V _ i .._-__. I ^ le =: tr lir PO FURNACE SECTION T Ii� b. _ -- r �IWIIN - ----.� _. -. OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER LOCATION CODE RETURN AIR DAMPER CONTROL DAMPER MOTOR TRANSFORMER FUNCTION NOTES: 1. Standard unit has an Insu- lated blower cabinet with rear Inlet only. All dampers, con- trols, and return air opening are optional. 2. Two position damper motor includes one end switch. 3. Standard modulating motor does not include end switches. Optional modulat- ing damper motor including two end switches is available. 4. All dampers Include vinyl blade strips and stainless steel jamb seals rated at 5 CFM /sq. ft. leakage. 5. Filter rack and filters illus- trated are optional. 6. Controls are in same loca- tion in Type "B" and 'BL' cabinets. Type "B" cabinet is illustrated. 2 and 3 (or Remote Location) 4 5 Remote Location Two - Position Damper Motor Modulating Damper Motor Potentiometer Mixed Air Controller Warmup Control Pressure Null Switch Allows for either return air and /or outside air dampers to be stopped at two fixed positions (100% open /100% closed). Allows for either return and /or outside air dampers to be stopped at more than two positions or modulated to various positions. Controls "set" position of the dampers operated by a modulating damper motor. Positions may vary anywhere between full open to full closed. Controls the mixture of return air and outside air based on a set temperature. i.,et temperature is usually 55°F.) Used with modulating damper motor only, Allows for 100% return air until the entering air reaches a set temperature. (Set temperature is usually 5 degrees below the thermostat setting . Sensor is located in the return air duct.) Controls the position of the dampers based on the pressure of the building, measures both negative and positive pressure. INLET AIR OPTIONS AR4 — 100% Return Air Inlet only AR6 — 100% Return Air Inlet, 30% Outside Air Inlet with Hood and Manual Outside Air Damper AR7 — 100% Return Air Inlet, 30% Outside Air Inlet with Hood and Motorized Outside Air Damper ARB — 100% Outside Air Inlet, with Two - Position (open /closed) Motorized Damper AR9 — 100 Outside Air Inlet, with a Three - Position (fulllpartiallclosed) Motorized Damper and Patenti r7irteter– ...— ...._.._...,,.,, Air Inlets — 100% Outside Air and 100% Return MA Dampers and Manual Quadrant AR Option control combinations are designed to meet a variety of appli- cations. To ensure weather resistance, the Reznor designed outside air hood (Option AS2) should be used on units with a 100% outside air opening. APPLICATION Designed for 100% recirculated heating system. Available on RGB and RPB Model Series only. Supplies constant 30% or less outside air to a recirculating heating system. Outside air hood is shipped separately for field installation. Supplies 30% outside air to a recirculating heating system at specific times, as controlled by a time clock or switch. On shutdown, the outside air damper closes. Outside air hood is shipped separately for field installation. 100% outside air system which provides make -up air intermittently, usually In unison with a building exhauster. Outside air damper opens when unit is on: closes when unit is off. 100% outside air system that provides for low and high air flow damper positions to control the supply of make -up air, usually wired in unison with a two -speed exhauster. Motor and drive selection must be based on high air flow. ""Onyshnldowa... the outside air dam oer.rImaa^ Manually fixed position dampers to provide constant mix of return and make -up air. Page as INLET AIR OPTIONS F r r C.C4i∎ AR12 — 100% Outside Air and 100% Return Air Inlets with Dampers, Modulating Damper Motor and Mixed Air Controller. AR13 — 100% Outside Air and 100% Return Air Inlets with Dampers, Modulating Damper Motor, Mixed Air Controller and Potentiometer AR14 - 100 Outside Air and 100% Return Air Inlets with Dampers, Two-Position Damper Motor and Warmup Control (ASHRAE Cycle I) AR15 — 100 Outside Air and 100% Return Air Inlets with Dampers, Modulating Damper Motor, Potentiometer, Mixed Air Controller and Warmup Control (ASHRAE Cycle II) AR16 — 100% Outside Air and 100% Return Air inlets with Dampers, Modulating Damper Motor, Mixed Air Controller and Warmup Control (ASHRAE Cycle HI) AR17 — 100% Outside Air and 100% Return Air inlets with Dampers and a Two-Position Damper Motor ARM — 100% Outside Air and 100% Return Air Inlets with Dampers, a Modulating Damper Motor and Potentiometer AR23 — 100% Outside Air and 100% Return Inlets with Dampers, Modulating Damper Motor and Pressure Null Switch t: ..r.- ' i QQ r �i $cc �a • r ° .Lr� APPLICATION Automatically controlled mix of outside and return air to meet temperature setting of mixed air controller. On shutdown, the outside air damper closes. Automatically controlled mix of outside and return air to meet temperature setting of mixed air controller, with a minimum amount of outside air as determined by the potentiometer setting. On shutdown, the outside air damper closes. 100% return air on warmup and 100% make-up air after warmup. On shutdown, the outside air damper closes. 100% return air on warmup and automatically controlled mix of outsidelreturn air to meet the temperature setting of the mixed air controller after warmup. A minimum amount of outside air is allowed after warmup as determined by the potentiometer setting. When used with mechanical cooling, optional air change over control may be added. An outside air change over control (not Included in Option AR15 package) closes outside air dampers when the entering air reaches a set temperature (usually 75 °F). 100% return air on warmup and automatically controlled mix of return and outside air to meet the temperature setting of the mixed air controller after warmup. On shutdown, the outside air damper closes. 100% return air or 100% outside air as controlled by a switch or time clock. On shutdown, the outside air damper closes. Mixture of return and outside air as controlled by a manually set remote potentiometer. On shutdown, the outside air damper closes. Mixture of return and outside air as automatically controlled by a remote pressure null switch. On shutdown, the outside air damper closes. SATE: t- DEL : C OIL SPECIFICATIONS: FACE AREA — NUMBER OF ROWS — FINS PER INCH — IUBE O.D. — COIL TYPE — FACE VELOCITY — SYSTEM TYPE — COOLING PERFORMANCE E NTERING AIR: LEAVING AIR: "SUCTION TEMP. AT COIL: CONDENSING TEMPERATURE: DELTA P AT FLOW CONTROL: :DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE: SUB COOLING: OUTDOOR DESIGN TEMP.: 'OWER INPUTS: t ( GROSS SYSTEM , AT OFT. ivET CAPACITY: AT 0 FT. cANE LIPS SYSTEM BOEING 9 -04 8 -27 -91 YCD180B3 CAPACITY : TOTAL SENSIBLE — LATENT — TOTAL — SENSIBLE — LATENT — HEATING PERFORMANCE • • ENTERING AIR% L.EAVING AIR: 'Ell 16:04 TRH; IE CO SEA 64143140 TOTAL AIRFLOW — OUTSIDE AIRFLOW — TEMF'ERATURE. — 76.0 DRY BULB TEMPERATURE — 48.7 DRY BULB OPERATING TEMPERATURE RISE: 53.1 DROSS SYSTEM CAPACITY: LOW HEAT 38.7 DEGREES 129.E DEGREES 229 P516 210.2 DEGREES 13.9 DEGREES 100.0 DEGREES OUTDOOR FAN — COMPRESSOR — INDOOR FAN — FAN SPEED: E .E.R. — E.S.P. — TOTAL AIRFLOW TEMPERATURE — TEMPERATURE — DEGREES TOTAL — SELECT ION 933 15779 0.89 00582 S. 65 0.50 • 154634 108131 46503 • 151801 105298 46503 LOCATION; UN1T: 200 FPM WET 3500 CFM 6610 CFM 64.0 WET BULB 48.7 WET BULB — 3500 CFM 56.8 DRY BULB 109.9 DRY BULB 196000 BTUH AHS - 4 17.50 SQUARE FEET 2.0 15.0 3/8E INCH PROGRAM ; . -., J fl I WATTS WATTS HP INSIDE COND. SPACE RPM BTUH /WATT BTUH BTUH BTUH BTUH BTUH 0.69 SHR.. BTUH L { ' 1 t 21 ' Table 14-1 General Data Cooling Performance' Gross Cooling Capacity EER Nominal Clm' ARI Net Cooling Capacity Integrated Part Load Value System Power IKw) No. Burners No. Stages f 2 Gas Connection Pipe Size (in.) Compressor No./Type Sound Rating (BELS) Outdoor Coil - Type Tube Size (in.) OD Face Area (sq. ft.) Rows /FPI Refrigerant Charge (Lbs. of R -221 General Data 15T CD 180A3.A4.A .50 Downflow Units 15 Ton Horizontal Units • 1 83.000 183,000 8.5 8.5 1 6000 6000 172.000 172.000 I ! 8.80 8.80 ( 20.24 20.24 Heating Performance/ Low Heat High Heat Low Heat High Heat Models ■ Models Models Models Heating Input (Muhl 175,000 I 250,000 175.000 250,000 2nd Stage 250,000 350.000 250.000 350.000 Heating Output (Btuh) 143,000 ' 202,000 142,000 200.000 2nd Stage S 201.000 " 279,000 198,000 275,000 Steady State t 82.1 , 81.4 80.9 80.1 2ttrane H 9.2 Plate Fin .376 23.96 2/16 YC D 180A3,A4, AW H 14 .75 YCH I 80A3.A4,AWL YCH180A3.A4.AWH .50 1 2 2/Trane H • 9.2 Plate Fin .375 23.96 2/16 Indoor Coil - Type Plate Fin Plate Fin Tube Size (In.) .375 .376 Face Area (sq. ft.) 17.50 17.60 Rows /FPI 2/16 2/16 Refrigerant Control Capillary Tube Capillary Tube Drain Connection No. /Size lin.) 1/1.00 NPT 1/1.00 NPT Outdoor Fan • Type Propeller Propeller No. Used /Diameter lin.) 2/26 2/26 Drive Type /No. Speeds Direct /1 Direct/1 Cf m 10800 10800 No. Motors /Hp 2/.50 2/.50 Motor Rpm 1100 1100 • Indoor Fan - Type FC Centrifugal FC Centrifugal No. Used /Diameter (in.) 1/16 X 15 1/15 X 15 Drive Type /No. Speeds Belt/Variable Pitch Belt/Variable Pitch No Motors 1 1 Motor Hp (Standard /Oversized) 3.0/5.0 3.0/5.0 Motor Rpm (Standard /Oversized) 1740/3450 1740/3450 Motor Frame Size (Standard. /Oversized) 145T/145T 1457/145T Filters • Type /Furnished Throwaway/Yes Throwaway/Yes (No.) Size Recommended (2) 20 X 20 X 2 (2) 20 X 20 X 2 (4)20X25X2 (4)20X25X2 10.3 /Circuit 10.3 /Circuit .75 NOTES 1. Riled in accoroanca with ARI Standard 360. at 95°F ambient BooF snaring dry bulb. 67°F emitting wet bulb and nominal Cfm listed Gross capacity doss not include the affect of fan motor Mat. ARt capacity is net and includes the elect of tan motor neat. ARI rating dm • 350 clm /ton for this product. Clm operating range' 120% of nominal elm. 2. Limit settings and rating data were established aro sporovad under laboratory ten conditions using American National Standards Institute standard ANSIZ21.47. Ratings shown are for elevations up to 20001er. For elevations stove 2000 feel. ratings should be reouctid at the rile of 4% for sack 1000 lerd above sea level. 3. Standard an -dry cod outdoor. 4 Approximate value. For more precise value, see unit nameplate and service instructions 5 I.P,L.V. • Integrated Pan Load Valve is based on ARI Standard 360. Units are rated at 80 ambient and 60 ARI rated dm. Airflow (F) V MBh SHC MBh SHC MEM SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC 75 1380 111.7 1574 864 164.3 568 1301 108.2 152.7 840160.7 547 1190101.8 1434 79.0 153.1 51.2 104.6 954 129.8 74.51414 483 4500 80 138 0 133.5 157 109.5 164.3 BD B 1301 127.9 152.7 107.8 160.7 790 119.0 118.5 143 4 104.0 153.1 754 106.3 106.3 129.8 100.3 141 4 72 4 118.5 85 138.9 138.9 157 4 132.9 164.3 107.9 134.6 134.6 152.7 132 0 160.7 106.5 126.8 126.8 1434 1288 1531 102.2 1141 114 1 129.8 125.6 1414 990 1484 90 144 1 144 1 1574 153 6 164.3 124 4 141.5 141.5 1527 150.5 160 7 1234 1291 1291 1434 143.0 1531 119 0 122.2 122.2 1308 130 8 141 4 115.9 154.5 75 1401 1167 1598 90.3 166.8 594 1321 1131 155.0 87.7 163.2 57.1 120.8 106.3 145 6 82 6 1554 53.5 106.2 99.7 131.6 77 8 143.5 50.5 5000 80 140.1 139.5 159.8 1144 166.8 844 133.7 1337 155,0 112.7 163.2 62.6 123 8 123.8 145.6 108 6 1554 78.8 111.1 111 1 131.8 104.8 143.5 75.7 123.9 85 145.1 145.1 159.8 138.9 166.8 112.8 140.7 140.7 155.0 137.9 163.2 111.3 132.5 132.5 145.8 134 6 1554 1058 119.2 119.2 131.8 131.3 143.5 1034 155.1 90 150.6 150.6 1605 160.5 166.8 1300 147.8 147.8 157.3 157.3 163.2 128.9 134.9 134.9 1494 1494 1554 124.3 127.7 127.7 136.6 136.6 143.5 121.1 181.4 75 142.0 120.8 1621 93.5 189.2 61.6 134.0 117.0 157.2 90.8 165.5 59.1 122.5 110.0 147.7 85.5 157.6 55.3 107.7 103.2 1336 80.6 145.5 52.2 5500 80 1444 1444 162.1 1184 169.2 874 1384 1354 167.2 116.6 165.5 85 5 128.2 128.2 147.7 1124 157.8 81.5 116.0 115 0 1336 108.5 146.5 78.3 128,2 85 150.2 150.2 162.1 143.8 169.2 116.7 145.6 145.6 157.2 142.8 185.5 115.2 137.2 137.2 147.7 139.3 157.6 110.5 123 4 123.4 135.9 135.9 145.5 107.1 160.6 90 165.8 155.8 1861 186.1 189.2 134.5 153.0 153.0 162.8 162.8 165.5 1334 139,7 139.7 154.8 154.8 157.6 128.7 132.2 132.2 1414 141.4 145,5 125.3 167.1 75 144.1 126.7 164.5 98.1 171.7 64.5 135.9 122.8 159.5 95.3 167.9 62.0 124.3 115.5 149.9 897 159.8 581 109.3 108.3 135.6 84.5 147.7 54.8 6000 80 151.5 151.5 164.5 124.3 171.7 91.7 145.2 145.2 159.6 1224 167.9 89.7 134.5 134.5 149.9 118 0 169.9 85 8 1206 120.8 135.6 113.8 147.7 82.2 134.5 85 157.6 157.6 164.6 150.8 171 7 122.5 152.9 152.8 169.5 149 8 167.9 120.9 143 9 143.9 149.9 148.1 159.9 115.9 129.5 129.5 142.6 142.6 147 7 112.3 1684 90 163.5 183.5 174.3 174.3 171 7 141.1 160.5 160.5 170.8 170.8 167.9 140.0 148.5 146.5 162.3 162.3 159.9 1350 1387 138.7 1454 1484 147.7 131.5 186.2 165.8 i Airflow (F) r MBh SIC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC MBh SHC 76 171.3 138.6 188.8 103.6 199.5 69.0 180.8 133.8 180.3 99.1 193.9 65.9 146.6 126.3 168.5 92.8 198.13 82.4 128.6 117.2 153.3 88.0 178.3 60.9 5400 80 171.3 165.8 188.6 131.2 199.5 98.1 16011 158.1 180.3 127.3 193.9 95.3 146.6 148,0 168.5 122.2 186.8 92.0 130.6 130.6 153.3 118.5 178.3 91.3 86 172.4 172.4 188.6 159.2 199.5 131.1 166.4 166.4 1 80.3 155.9 193.9 128.5 166.2 156.2 168.5 161.3 186.9 124.7 140.2 140.2 153.3 1484 178.3 1 90 178.9 178.9 188,6 184.0 199.5 151.0 174.9 174.9 180.3 177.8 193.0 148.8 159.0 168.0 188.5 168.0 186.8 145.2 160.2 150.2 154.5 154.5 178.3 146.1 75 173.9 144.9 191.5 108.2 202.6 72.1 163.3 139.8 183.0 103.6 198.9 68.9 148.8 130.9 171.1 97.0 189.7 65.2 130.4 122.5 155.7 92.0 181.0 83.6 6000 80 173.9 173.2 191.5 137.1 202.6 102.5 165.3 165.3 183.0 433.1 196.9 99.6 152.5 162.6 171.1 127.6 189.7 96.2 136.4 1364 155.7 123.9 1 81.0 95.4 85 180.2 180.2 191.5 1664 202.6 136.9 173.9 173.9 183.0 162.9 196.9 134,3 163.2 163.2 171.1 168.1 109.7 130.3 146.5 146.5 165.7 155.1 181,0 130.4 90 185.9 186.9 192.2 192.2 202.6 167.8 182.7 182.7 185.8 185.6 198.9 155.6 166.2 166.2 176.6 175.5 189.7 151.7 156.9 158.9 1614 181.4 181.0 152.6 75 178.3 149.9 194.1 112.0 2064 74.6 165.6 144.7 185.6 107.2 199.6 71.3 150.9 135.6 173.5 100.4 192.3 67.6 132.2 126.6 157.8 95.2 183.5 65.8 8800 80 179.3 179.3 194.1 141,9 2054 1061 171.0 171.0 185.6 137.7 199.6 1031 157.9 157.9 173.5 132.1 182.3 99.5 141.2 141.2 157.8 128,2 183.5 98.8 85 186.6 186.5 194.1 172.2 2054 141.7 180.0 180.0 185.6 188 6 1996 139.0 166.9 168,9 173.5 163.6 182,3 134.9 (51.6 151.6 160.6 160.6 183.5 136.0 90 193.5 193.5 198.9 198.9 2054 163.3 189.1 189.1 192.3 1923 199.6 161.0 172.0 172.0 181.7 181 7 192.3 157.0 162 1624 167.1 167.1 183.6 158.0 75 178.9 157.3 197.0 117.6 208.5 78.3 168.0 151.8 188.3 112.5 202.6 748 1531 142.2 176.1 1054 195.2 70.9 134.2 133.0 160.2 99.9 188.2 69.1 7200 80 188.1 188.1 197.0 148.9 208.5 111.3 1705 179.5 188.3 144. 202.6 108.2 165.6 165 6 176,1 138.6 195,2 101.4 148.2 148.2 160.2 134.5 186.2 103.6 85 195.7 195.7 197.0 160 7 208.5 148.7 188.9 168.9 188.3 176.9 202.6 145.8 177.3 177.3 176.1 171.7 195.2 141.5 159.1 169.1 166.4 1684 1 86.2 141.7 90 203.0 203.0 208.8 208.8 208.5 1714 1984 1984 201.8 201.8 202.6 168.9 180.5 180.6 190.6 190.6 195.2 164.8 1704 1704 175.3'175,3 186.2 165.8 Table 24 -1 Gross Cooling Capacities (MBh) 12 Ton Three Phase YC•150A3,A4,AW Enter Dry •Indicates both downflow and horuontal modals NOTES. 1. All espacnUS shown an pipes and have not considered indoor fan heat. To obtain net cooling subtract indoor fan heat 2. MBh s Total Gross Capacity 3. SHC = Sensible Meat Capacity Table 24.2 Gross Cooling Capacities (MBh) 15 Ton Three Phase YC•180A3,A4,AW Enter. Dry 85 95 Performance Data Entering Wet Bulb (F) 81 67 73 61 67 73 61 85 95 Ambient Temperature (F) Ambient Temperature (F) Entering Wet Bulb (F) 61 67 73 61 67 73 61 •fndiutes both downflow and horuontal modaU. NOTES 1. All canacnuea shown err gross and have not considered indoor fan heat. To obtain net cooling subtract Indoor fan hem 2. MBh s Total Gross Capacity 3. SHC. Sensible Heat Capacity 24 105 67 105 67 73 73 61 61 115 67 116 67 73 73 ( Performance Data Table 29 -1 Evaporator Fan Performance 12 Ton YC•150A External Static Pressure (Inches of Water) ..10 .20 .30 .40 .50 .60 .70 .80 .90 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 Cfm RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 'Indicates both downflow and horizontal models. For Standard Evaporator Fan Speed 1RPM). reference page 31 Tibia 31.1. For Standard Motor 6 High Static Drive Accessory/Fan Speed IRPMI. reference page 31 Table 31.2. For Oversize Evaporator Fan Speed (RPM), reference page 31 Table 31.3. Data includes pressure drop due to fibers and wet coils. Fan motor heat IMBhI • 3.15 X Fan Bhp. Tram s factory supplied motors, in commercial equipment. are definite purpose motors, specifically designed and tasted to operate reliably and continuously it all cataloged conditions Using the full horsepower range of our Ian motors as shown in our tabular data will not result in nursing, tripping or premature motor failure. Our product's warranty will not be affected. Table 29 -2 Evaporator Fan Performance 15 Ton YC•180A Cf m 4800 5200 5600 6000 6400 6800 7200 471 .69 608 .76 647 .88 581 .97 615 1.08 646 1 1.31 708 1.42 738 1.52 769 1.63 799 1.75 828 1.87 856 2.00 520 .95 555 1.03 588 1.16 622 1.281 652 1.38 682 1.50 711 1.83 738 1.76 766 1.89 793 ' 2.00 820 2.12 847 2.24 874 2.37 571 1.27 603 1.37 631 1.461663 1.63 692 1.75 720 1.87 747 2.00 773 2.14 799 2.29 824 2.43 848 2.57 873 2.70 897 2.83 622 1.65) 651 1.79 678 1.87 704 2.01 734 2.20 760 2.33 785 2.45 810 2.59 834 2.74 858 2.90 881 3.06 904 3.22 926 3.37 674 2.10 699 2.28 727 2.37 749 2.48 775 2.66 802 2.86 826 3.00 849 3.13 872 3.28 894 3.44 916 3.61 (938 3.78' 959 3.96 3 HP Standard Motor & Sheaves 5 HP Oversize Motor & Sheaves .10 RPM BHP 4000 864 2.13 4500 900 2.50 6000 921 2.96 5500 J 948 3.52 6000 980 4.13 External Static Pressure (Inches of Water) .20 .30 .40 .50 .60 .70 RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP Table 29 -1 (Continued) Evaporator Fan Performance 12 Ton YC.150A External Static Pressure (Inches of Water) 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 Cfm RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP 3 HP Standard Motor & High Static Drive Accessory 911 2.27 938 2.42 963 2.57 988 2.73 1012 926 2.63 952 2.78 977 2.92 1002 3.07 (1026 946 3.10 970 3,24 994 3.38 1017 3.53 1041 971 3.66 993 3.81 1015 3.95 1037 4.10 1059 1001 4.30 1021 4.46 1042 4.62 1062 4.78 1082 5 HP Oversize Motor & Sheaves 704 1.71 732 1.84 1709 1.93 736 2.04 762 2.17 ) 713 2.09 742 2.29 769 2.43 793 2.55 - - 1699 2.28 727 2.37 749 2.48 775 2.66 802 2.86 826 3.00 716 2.52 739 2.73 766 2.85 788 2.94 809 3.08 835 3.30 (860 3,50 758 3.00 779 3.22 804 3.381827 3.47 847 3.58 868 3.77 892 4.01 800 3.54 820 3.76 842 3.96 866 4.07 885 4.17 904 4.32 925 4.54 5 HP Oversize Motor indicates both downflow end horizontal model For Stanoard Evaporator Fan Speed IRPMI reference page 31 Table 31•1 For Oversize Evaporator Fan Soeeo IRPMI. reference page 31 Table 31.3 Data mahouts pressure drop due to Idlers ano wet coils Fen motor heal lMBhl • 3 15 x Fan Bhp Irene a factory supplied motors, in commercial equipment. we Winne purpose motors, specifically oestgned and tested to operate reliably end continuously at all cataloged conditions using The full horsepower range of our fen motors as shown in our tabular oats will not result in nuisance tripping or premature motor failure. Our product's warranty will not be affected Table 29-2 (Continued) Evaporator Fan Performance 15 Ton YC•180A Cfm External Static Pressure (Inches of Water) 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP 4800 912 2.77 937 5200 932 3.18 955 5600 954 3.64 976 6000 980 4.13 1001 6400 1007 4.66 1027 6800 1036 5.22 1055 7200 r-- - - 29 5 HP Oversize Motor & Sheaves 2.90 962 3.04 987 3.19 1011 3.34 3.31. 978 3.46 1002 3.60 1025 3,75 3.79 998 3.93 1020 4.08 1042 4.23 4.30 1021 4.46 1042 4.62 1062 4.78 4.85 1047 5.03 1066 5.21 1085 5.3B 5.42 1074 5.62 2.89 1036 3.06 3.23 1049 3.40 3.69 1063 3.84 4.26 1081 4.41 4.93 1103 5.09 80 .90 ;J 1.00 1 .10 1.20 1.30 RPM BHP RPM BHP%RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP 3 HP Standard Motor & Sheaves 759 1.98 785 2,13 811 2.28 836 2.38 862 2.51 887 2.64 788 2.31 813 2,46 837 2.62 881 2.76 88 2.9 908 3.04 817 2.69 842 2.84 865 3.00 . 9 21111.12 . 1 910 3.33 932 3.49 849 3.13 872 3.28 894 3.441 916 3,61 938 3.78 959 3.96 882 3.65 903 3.79 925 '3.94 , 946 4.10 967 4.28 987 4.47 915 4.21 936 4.37. 957 4.52: 977 4.67 997 4.84 1017 5.03 948 4.80 970 5.01 990 5.17 1009 6.33 1028 5.49 1047 5.67 & Sheaves 1034 3.49 1057 3.65 1047 3.90 1070 4.06 1063 4.38 1085 4.64 1082 4.93 1103 5.09 1104 5.551 - - Performance Data Table 32 -1 Gas Fired Heating Capacities Air Temperature Tons Unit Model No. Heating Input MBh Heating Output MBh Rise Range • 3 YCD036A -L 80 63 50.80 YCD036A -H 120 90 60-90 YC.048A•L 90 , 71 35.65 YCD048A -H 120 90 45-75 YCH048A -H 120 89 45-75 YC•060A -L 90 71 35.65 5 YCD060A -H 135 102 50-80 YCH060A -H 135 101 50-80 61/4 YC.075A -1. 120 97 25.55 YC.0754•H' 150/205 120/183 50.80 71/2 YC 120 97 25 -55 YC.090A- H /B•H' 150/205 120/163 50-80 • 81 10 12 YCD180Ja1) 15 YCD180A -H'' YCH 180A -L' YCH180A -H' 1714 VCD102A -1) 100/150 81/121 20-50 YCD102A -H' 175/250 143/201. 45 -75 YCH102A -L' 100/150 79/118 20.50 YCH102A -H' 175/250 140/196 45.75 YCD120A -L' 100/160 81/121 20-50 YCD120A -H' 175/250 143/201 45-76 YCH120A -0 100/150 79/118 20.60 YCH120A -H' 175/250 140/196 45-75 YCD150A•1.' 100/150 79/119 10-40 YCD150A -H' 175/250 143/201 26.55 YCH150A -1.' 100/150 79/118 10-40 YCH150A -H' 175/250 142/198 25-55 175/250 250/350 175/250 250/350 143/201 202/279 142/198 200/275 25-55 35 -65 25-55 35.85 YCD210A -1.' 175/250 143/199 15-45 YCD210A -H' 250/350 200/276 35-65 YCH210A•1) 175/250 143/202 15.45 YCH210A -H' 250/350 203/278 35.85 •InWeatas both dawtWI w and horuontal modals. NOTES: 1, Two Napa heating capacity. Fast Stage /Saoond Stage. YCD240A -1.' 175/250 143/199 15-45 20 YCD240A -H' 300/400 247/317 25.55 ' YCH240A -1.' 175/250 143/202 16-45 YCH240A -H' 300/400 244/317 25.55 Performance Data Table 33 -1 Static Pressure Drops Through Accessories (Inches Water Column) Unit Economises with OA/RA D.mpen Tons Model No. 3 YC•036A 4 YC.048A 5 YC.060A 6 YC.075A 2400 0.06 0.12 0.02 714 YC.0904, 8 3000 0.10 0.15 0.03 3600 0.15 020 0.03 2700 0.04 0.13 0.04 ' YCD102A 3400 0.06 0.16 006 E. 4000 0.08 0.18 0.10 81/2 2700 0.04 0.13 0.04 YCH102 3400 0.07 0.16 0.08 4000 0.10 0.18 0.10 10 121 YC.150A 16 Yi..180A 17'/ 20 YCD120A YCH1204 YCD2104 YCH2104 YCD2404 YCH240A 33 CFM Fhws t 1 0096 OA 10096 RA 1000 0.01 0.05 0.01 1200 0.02 0.06 0.01 1440 0.03 0.07 0.01 1300 0.03 0.06 0.01 1600 0.04 0.08 0.02 2000 0.06 0.10 0.03 1600 0.04 0.08 0.02 2000 0.06 0.10 0.03 2400 0.09 0.12 0.06 2000 0.06 0.10 0.01 2500 0.07 , 0.13 0.02 3000 0.10 0.15 0.03 3200 0.06 0.15 0.06 4000 0:08 0.18 0.10 4800 0.11 0.23 0.14 3200 0.06 0.15 0.06 4000 0.09 0.18 0.10 4800 0,13 0.23 0.14 4000 0.06 0.20 0.02 5000 0.07 0.26 003 6000 0.11 0.35 0.04 4800 0.07 024 0.03 6000 0.11 0.35 0.04 7200 0.15 0.42 0.06 5600 0.06 0.17 0.04 7000 0.09 0.25 0.04 8400 0.13 0.34 • 0.06 5600 0.06 0.17 0.04 7000 0.07 025 0.04 8400 0.10 0.34 0.06 6400 ' 0.07 0.22 0.04 8000 0.11 0.28 0.06 9600 0.16 0.44 0.07 6400 0.06 0.22 0.04 8000 0.09 0.28 0.05 8600 0.13 0.44 , 0.07 'Indicates bath hontotttal or downtime model. NOTES: 1. Niters not supped with 4 i 5 ton handout nodal. 2 1" Nun on the 3•71/2 ton nods& 2" httas nardMd on the 11 ton =chit 3:0A • Outside No end RA • Return Ait. NOTE: All Dimensions Are In Inches NOTE: DUCT FLANGES MOUNT 7 7 DOWN INSIDE THE CURB ON THE CURB FLANGES. Dimensional Data FILTER ACCESS DOOR HORIZONTAL ONLY DOWN FLOW COPOENSATE DRAIN CONNECTION 1.00 NPT 47/2 I ' I NPT GAS INLET SERVICE GAUGE PORT ACCESS 70% 50 ie r,: ROOF OPENING UNIT OUTLINE L ri DIA. HOLE {UNIT CONTROL WIRES) 2 DIA. HOLE (UNIT POWER WIRES) • TAG' 3CFM 1 — 25.00 rr.•'r.ir* * ti l# * *** ****i!••14ik•Y. ***tr.• sir. •**#*•11• **:f•*#*•it **•K14••1 **tiS•i4••ik•'r.•* •! t• i3:* •ii•*** * *** **•'i.• ** **4 t-u /UF F .0 4.2 .0 OUTPUT DATA ACTUAL F I t•.INEi. WIDTH LENO1H FIN TYPE L : '� i_ lI: i ; �. L,'r: L; "i '..'�, l— • \ I:° t:.; LJ L.. SO I N i ELDt3 •;...I:)!. r :3C.F; l. , /200 SS.° 70.0 11011, 401.1 4.0 NOM FIN WIDTH FF'F r,F 1'07 1 -24 REFER TO THE CORRESPONDING D I At3NOST'I C r•)ESSA0ES ON THE D I AUN0ST L C PAVE. NOTE: FIN TYPE TF• gm TYNE OF COIL, DF :t ;TYPE FD COIL, tF OR PF = TYPE F CUXL. MANE I ;E. kEi -I-t i kAl4 ;U i L. bELLL I ': UN F'F {l.11:1k tM MAX FV ELB EWB TEI'IP UNIT T''(PE ROW CKTS / COIL D FIN F'Pt= TYPE COIL STANDARD FACE VELOCITY: ACTUAL FACE AkEA: LitAUIU I)IST size AL 3/16 46.0. • bUL'i CJN ;.:UXL TEMP ":t;.FRIG TYPE :39.0 F:22 FU CC R43 FIN (YTS/ L>1S1 / UIS'1' MAT' L. COIL C'.) J. L lj J, .`'t» t-.1iEl MHH/ TOTAL LWI:i APD COILS MBH 4`a.9 .32 85.'5 P L;11.. :(UiTI116 rYPE I NTEF TW I I'•a~.J) TAO CC-': 71 l.:: -1,".• 1 Rni YL k.,.) 4J *** ****.►..*.t C:Ub OMEk D I rthL:T bERV I L E I.IL-•.'rw'Jr-w: * **** * 1 -. 36.25 X ;36.O L)1•' AL 44.0 . i-•r.±••ri**w:* f•• i.••;<• •Y:*K* *•i*•i4••i'•if• *t*****• •i4 # *ii #;1• ** **•ih *• **•k"•i4••tt••I••MF•k••ir -: ** ii••if•ii•*•ir•'•*•'I(••;i*• * *•Y•4.Y•• R••M• #is r'1i /Ur • F CU1L.. ROW FIN TYPE 40.1400 .01. 4.700. PEPOWM STANDARD FACE VELOCITY:, :!'r3 :i . '% .0 ACTUAL FACE AREA: 9.1 .0 NOM FIN CVIS/ DIS/ DIS"i I°11{F-i/ FPF WIDTH COIL COIL SIZE LDS LW }`s APD COILS 6 f)F 129 1--36 2S 4 'd/14 44.0 43.9 .22 205 . iii REFER TO THE COIAESPONDI.NQ D I A G N O T I C NIL.a w' 4ACIiil: ON THE DIAGNOSTIC Pr" GE . NOTE: VIM TYPE TF TYPE OF COIL, OF = TYPE FD COIL, SF OR PF = TYPE F CIRCUITING TYPE INt't'.PFWINEL) TU'd AL maH 21,:) . wi c ca�D . vA#l7 € /-2-4,6• /Oaf m5i/ skcoil e /Oa 0 A-Akt3. 3dO C U •_r L 1000 S80 H or V S80HorV -Z Design-Air SERIES S85 H or V 1/2" spacing available upon request. • S8OH or V Z — Zero Deflection. • S8OH — Horizontal deflection vanes set at 35 angle. • S80V — Vertical deflection vanes set at 35 angle. • S8OVS — Vertical deflection vanes setat 35 angle left and right. • Stationary deflection vanes are set on 3 /4" centers. • Opposed Blade Damper (OBD) operator is easily adjusted with screwdriver or alien wrench. • Narrow depth of OBD design allows Grille — OBD combination to be used in stackheads of minimum depth. • Construction — Steel, • A phosphate coating followed by a 49 White finish is standard. • Large sizes manufactured in multiple sections. • Optional — Model 8PF Plaster Frame. (Frame 125 only) • Specify horizontal dimension followed by vertical dimension. S80V OBD HORIZONTAL DUCT SIZE PWS 1.3/4' HORIZONTAL DUCT SIZE YINUS 1/4 S8OH OBD t'R — 26 ice i a VE TKAL DUC PLUS f 3 FL F/4' STANDARD FRAME o•I.7rr L r114c STYLE 125 73. I /4' 1•.• . I � I.7A S8OH VERTICAL DUCT SIZE MINUS 3/1 7N' P E F E R R E D S z E S t000 NOTE: PREFERRED SIZES SHOWN IN BOLD PRINT. 00 PERFORMANCE DATA RETURN AIR GRILL AND REGISTERS ip CAPACITY AND SELECTION CHART NC SOUND DATA COLOR CODE NC LEVEL LESS THAN 30 NC LEVEL LESS THAN 30 NC LEVEL LESS THAN 35 mei NC LEVEL LESS THAN 40 = NC LEVEL LESS THAN 50 NC LEVEL MORE THAN 50 NMI DATA 845E0 ON 8 d0 ROOM ATTENUATION IUJOIMIUMS CI Data based on 580 H or S80V. •Fete Velocity and Effective Area based on 4" Rotating Vane Ane- mometer. CFM = Effective Area x Face Velocity Not. 1 It Is recommended that a face velocity of 800 fpm not be ex• ceeded where noise is to be considered. Note 2 NC Sound Data based on Sound power level Re: 10' watts and Room Attenuation at 8 db. 24 SERIES NOMINAL UNIT DIMENSIONS FIELD BUILT CURB SELF FLASHING ALUM. SONOTROL CURB FABRICATED UNI•BEAM CURB USC SOUND ATTENUATING CURB NOMINAL ALUMINUM NESS THICK. SHIPPING WEIGHT CURB) DAMPER SQUARE 0 FIELD SELF FLAS HING I FLASHING L H E R. T. RI Ot Ti R3 03 To R3 03 T3 Al 28' 22' 20' 11' 19 11'/ 12 20 11' 15 19 0121/2 11 19 .064 .081 45 111/4 12 11 'h 20 BB 31 25 24 16'/• 23 16'/4 16'/• 24'/. 16'/• 19'/ 23' 17'A 1 bY. 23V• .081 70 16 17'/• 165. 24y. Cl 38 27 28% 20 27 20 20 28 20 23 27 O .081 100 19 34 21 20 20 LB 38 28' 31 22'/ 29'/ 2259 22' 30'/ 22 25'/ 29'h . 0231/2 22'h 29'h 081• .091 17S t 22 /� 23' 22'h 30' RS 46 32 36' 28 35 28 28 36 28 31 35 O 29 28 35 • .091 275 273/4 29 20 36 OB 55 37' 44 36 43 36 36 44 36 39 43 0 37 36 43 .091 440 351/2 36 44 KB 63 38 52' 44 51 44 44 52 44 47 51 0 45 44 SI 600 431/ 44 52 .091 .1B 73 45' 59 50 57 50 SO 50 50 .53 57 0 51 50 57 760 49' 50 58 .102 MB 98 50 63' 55 62 55 55 63 55 58 62 56 0 56 55 62 1500 54' 55 63 .1075 Page 10 • SELF FLASHING ALUMINUM SONOTROL CURB r 1 '' &L e/ f- C"' ^ 1 = , , C am, � , EE ° " , Z c'_., IZ t , Fe ' s. IPA:NSIO; DATA With the use of the V -Belt Driven Domex Centrifugal Roof Ventilator, engineers now have virtually unlimited scope in capacity selection. Wheel diameters from 11" to 50" are available in 9 housing sizes. More than 400 operating speeds and the resultant capacities contained in the per- formance tables that follow are presented for your use. This large selection offers a wide variety of low speed quiet operating models. The silhouette is clean and low and provides direct 360° discharge. Standard components, selected from the quality products of leading national manufacturers are combined with lifetime aluminum housings to provide a most durable product. Line drawings below show the V•Belt Driven Domex mount- ed on four different curb styles. Dimensions for each are listed in the box at bottom of page. Full information on the various curbs available and their use is contained in Penn's Curb Bulletin. PENN VENTILATOR FABRICATED UNI -BEAM CURB USC SOUND ATTENUATING CURB (RECOMMENDED DAMPER LOCATION ILLUSTRATED) °FIELD FLASHING REQUIRED / SELF FLASHING Ut' 'UN* Projection of clomp* boot below roof wrfoce is S'• for 500. for MOD. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES HP RPM TIP FAN CAPACITY - CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE MAX. BHP Sones @ .125" SPEED F.P.M. 0' SP .125' SP .25" SP .375' SP .5" SP .625' SP .75" SP .875' SP 1.0' SP 1.125' SP 1.25' SP 1,5' SP 1/6 350 1006 265 820 j 355 , 1.5 1/6 1.1 1/6 400 1 152 305 1175 855 445 1.6 1/6 1.3 1/6 425 1224 325 1365 1150 790 415 2.2 1/6 1.4 1/6 500 1440 380 1425 1225 905 535 150 2.8 1/4 1.7 1/6 600 1728 460 135 1140 990 805 585 325 30 .23 • 1/4 2.2 1/6 1525 4392 1165 1075 985 900 795 620 445 230 .27 10.4 .16 7.3 1/4 1600 4608 1220 1140 1050 970 885 735 565 390 175 .30 10.9 .19 7.7 1/4 1690 4867 1290 1210 1125 1050 970 870 710 555 375 170 .34 11.5 .22 8.3 1/4 1825 5256 1390 1320 1240 1170 1100 1020 915 765 625 460 280 12.0 .28 9.2 1/3 2000 5760 1525 1460 1390 1320 1255 1195 1120 1030 895 760 630 310 .36 10.3 1/3 2040 5875 1555 1495 1425 1355 1290 1230 1160 1080 955 820 695 395 .38 10.6 1/3 2075 5976 1585 1520 1455 1385 1320 1260 1195 1120 1015 875 745 470 .41 10.9 1/2 2250 6480 1715 1660 1600 1535 1470 1415 1360 1300 1235 1145 1020 790 .52 12.1 1/2 2300 6624 1755 1700 1640 1575 1515 1460 1405 1350 1285 1210 1095 860 .55 12.4 1/2 2358 6791 1800 1745 1690 1625 1565 1510 1455 1405 1345 1280 1185 950 .59 12.8 1/6 325 1011 315 1140 905 I 445 1.3 1/6 375 1166 360 1300 1120 820 j 355 , 1.5 1/6 400 1244 385 1505 1365 1175 855 445 1.6 1/6 500 1555 485 1645 1520 1365 1150 790 415 2.2 1/6 600 1866 580 230 1570 1425 1225 905 535 150 2.8 1/4 1575 4899 1520 1420 1340 1250 1140 990 805 585 325 30 .23 9.8 1/4 1650 5132 1595 1495 1420 1335 1235 1115 950 760 535 280 .27 10.4 1/3 1710 5318 1650 1555 1480 1400 1315 1200 1060 890 690 460 200 .30 10.9 1/3 1780 5536 1720 1625 1555 1480 1400 1300 1175 1025 850 645 420 .34 11.5 1/3 1850 5754 1785 1695 1625 1555 1480 1390 1285 1150 995 815 615 145 .38 12.0 1/2 1950 6065 1885 ' 1795 1 ( 1785 1 1665 159f) 1515 1425 1315 1180 1030 860 990 460 630 .44 .49 12.9 13.4 1/2 2010 6251 1940 1855 1 1725 1660 1585 1500 1405 1285 1145 1/2 1 2075 1 8454 2005 ' 1920 I 1850 ■ 1795 ; 1730 1 1660 1585 1495 1390 1265 1125 795 .54 14.0 1/6 900 3180 1305 1140 905 I 445 5.5 1/6 1000 3535 1455 1300 1120 820 j 355 , 6.3 1/6 1130 3995 1640 1505 1365 1175 855 445 7.4 1/4 1220 4310 1770 1645 1520 1365 1150 790 415 8.1 1/4 1250 4420 1815 1690 1570 1425 1225 905 535 150 8.4 1/4 1275 4505 1850 1730 1615 1470 1290 1000 635 265 8.6 1/3 1375 4860 1995 1885 1775 1655 1505 1315 1015 680 335 .32 9.5 1/3 1400 4950 2035 1930 1815 1700 1555 1380 1110 770 445 .34 9.7 1/2 1530 5405 2220 2130 2020 1925 1810 1670 1500 1260 950 650 340 .45 10.9 1/2 1560 5515 2265 2175 2065 1975 1865 1730 1575 1355 1060 775 475 .47 11.2 PERFORMANCE TABLE SER ES A P PENN DeritlEX CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUSTER S.P. fgurn ore anemol pressures (0.00' S.P. includes all internal fan fosses). • Maximum broke horsepower over catalogued range. BHP does not include drive losses. Sone values on lower at higher static pressures. Performance shown is for exhauster, PENN VENTILATOR without ducts. The AMCA Certified Ratings Seal applies to air performances only. Motors ore sized on the basis of internal temperature rise rather than nameplate horsepower. Please refer to Page 5 for full explanation of sound data. v -belt drive Page 11 finned tubular electric duct heaters indeeco Class Division Group Material I 1 & 2 B Butadiene. Hydrogen I 1 & 2 C Cycloproane. Diethyl Ether I 1 & 2 0 Acetone. Ammonia. Benzene. Butane. Ethyl Alcohol (Ethanol), Gasoline 50 to 60 Octane/ 100 Octane 100 -130 Grade/ 115-145 Grade, Jet Fuel JP -4/ JP-5/ JP -6, Lubricating (Motor) Oil, Methane (Natural Gas), Methyl Alcohol (Methanol), MEK (Methyl Ethyl Ketone), Petroleum Naptha, Tolvene, Xylene II 1 & 2 E Metal Dusts II 1 & 2 F Carbon Black, Coal & Coke Dust II 1 & 2 G Flour Starch & Grain Dusts III 1 & 2 G Easily Ignitable Fibers r 42 12. SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONS HEATERS FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS (not UL listed) Heaters are available in both flanged and slip -in constructions for the types of hazards listed in Table 16 below. TABLE 16 HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERES Construction — Elements are threaded into a cast aluminum, explosion - resistant terminal box. Thermal cutout sensing bulbs are sealed at the terminal box. Thus, all electrical connections are isolated in the explosion- resistant box. Threaded connections are provided for incoming power and control circuit connections which are made to terminal blocks in the explosion - resistant housing. Electrical Accessories — Although the accessories described in Sections 5 and 6 can be built into the explosion resistant housing, it is often more economical and satisfactory from a servicing standpoint to locate these accessories in a panelboard located outside the hazardous zone. Application— Heaters are custom designed to the following parameters, all of which must be specified: • Electrical Characteristics: KW, voltage, phase and number of stages. • Duct Size: Width and height. • Hazard Classification: Class, division, group and material selected from Table 16. • Airflow: Direction and velocity in cubic feet per minute or linear feet per minute. • Maximum entering air temperature: Whether the hazardous atmosphere exists in the air stream, in the terminal box area, or both. Fig. 57 Unlike standard applications, velocity and entering air temperature are crucial factors in designing heaters for hazardous locations. Element surface temperatures cannot exceed the limits specified in the National Electrical Code (NEC) and UL Standard 823. Furthermore the air must be uniformly distributed over the entire face of the coil. See "Airflow Uniformity" Page 38 for details. SPECIAL MATERIALS Materials for stainless steel frames, as well as stainless, monel, inconel and incoloy element and sheath materials are stocked for special applications. Submit details of your application to your local INDEECO representative for proper selection of materials. C HUU GI ' 1 L17 17 I t':Hi 1L l•'J DLH C vRN � v TRAII4E " Tag; All diman;..:ill are in inches i itok... M!NAMUM CLEARN4CE FOR PROPER OPEM110N N, ee IS 3d RICKS FRAM WALLS, f WR1e$ERY, PRNALY FENCES. ETC. M0404A4 CIEM&J1 , 1St OIAAIETER 11E1WiEN A. JACEHT UNITS IS 77 NICHES. .. •/ 'a oneeOCQ NOLEt • i► otimETER - -.../- ` 0 UMW) HOiNSI �, '� -.� R1 a4 TOP OdC,4AR0L AMA 7.40I4.17 PE VENTC.ALLY 11NESTIOCIEG FOR 100• 1404441.4 4. SIC4J K PLACED W ROOF Ru+.OFf WATER DOES NOT P0;11 ONSC1LY ON utirl Sa• , .Ar:oia tY OIA3.441E1 NOTE PROM VOLTAGE) 114 MATER UFIMFG NOTE $ RACES) hoirommt =arms. WYYNG) 1 JIL • - 7 /1d OA. ISOLATOR M01M11710 HOLES peat ►IoLdl . 4 MA US) 04 3 Al Y4 • % •y i�1w • .� .jam 1 0 Ton Split System Cooling ..,, Dual Compressor 14,16 SI TTAl20B (1,5 ar �u )lrfi$ J)! Una Model No. 17412003 TTAl2004 TTAl20BW • Shipping MIUIImum 5 3 7 /3 —_ ,' RECD 4 NALN X.O sE►w CI cLtARANCE Table 1 Unit Wiring Unit Operating Vohage Range 187 -263 414.506 518.632 Table 2 Unit and Corner Weights (Lbs.)' . Nat• Msiumum • 466 Minimum Circuit AmoacnY 51 • 2E 15 ACCESS COMPRESSOR L PRE:SUPA TAPS ACL"RSs 33 3/4 to 11/16 3< 1/4 •• FOOTPRINT MU MOWN PATTERN) • > 211 3/4 Ma inium Fuse Si» Ms* nuin HACR Cued Breaker 70 35 25 • 41 N2 144 147 Corner W u.tinte Rutver- In•Shdar Isolators Steel Spring Isolators Arai•Shon Cycle Timor Cod C uvd • low Ambient lint matt at Canada Only Circuit Ardakar 70 a0 30 N3 44 Table 3 ' Accessory Weights jLbs.) AtcrUey Shipping Ndt 3 2 14 12 1 1 • 14 1 25 23 1 1 TRINE" General . Data Table 7 -1 General Data - 71/2, 10 Ton Condensing Units 7t12 Ton 10 Ton 10 Ton 10 Ton .. TAB 6— December 1987 OUTDOOR UNIT TTA060A300A TTA060A400A (D Rated in accordance with A.R.I. Operation on a 200.208 volt performance by 2% p y ®Rated in accordance with A.R.I. y r,ry,y,N) SPLIT SYSTEM pCalculated in accordance with Natl. Suitable for use with HACR circuit ®Standard Air - Dry Y Coil - Outdoor. ®This value approximate. For more Standard 210. power supply reduces Standard 270. ; _ S lAND►PC Electric Code. breakers or fuses. precise value see unit lift • Suction 60 ft.; Max. of precharged tubing 50 ft. Piping Manual Pub. test procedure. POWER CONNS. - V /Ph /Hz Min. Brch. Cir. Ampacity® Sr. Cir. i Max. (Amps) Prot. Rtg. S Record. (Amps) 200/230/3/60 25.2 40 40 460/3/60 13.2 20 20 NOISE RATING NO.m 8.4 8.4 COMPRESSOR No. Used - No. Speeds Volts /Ph /Hz R.L. Amps - L.R. Amps Brch. Cir. Selec. Cur. Amps CLIMATUFF"' 1 -1 200/230/3/60 18.6 -118 18,8 l CLIMATUFF"' 1 -1 460/3/60 9.1- 71 10 OUTDOOR FAN - Type Die. (in.) - No. Used Type Drive - No. Speeds CFM ® 0.0 in. w.g.0 No. Motors --- HP Motor Speed R.P.M. F. L. Amps PROPELLER t 26 -1 DIRECT -1 4030 1 -1/4 i 825 230/1/60 1 1.9 PROPELLER 26 -1 DIRECT -1 4030 1 -1/3 825 460/1/60 1.0 OUTDOOR COIL - Type Rows - F.P.I. Face Area (sq. ft.) Tube Size (in.) SPINE FIN'" 1- 20 ; 26.92 • 3/8 SPINE FIN"' 1 26.92 3/8 nameplate and service instruction. ; ®Max. linear length 80 ft.; Mai. lift - Liquid 60 ft. Max. length REFRIGERANT Lbs. - R -22 (0.D. Unit)m Factory Supplied Line Size - in. 0.D. Gas® Line Size - in. 0.D. Liq.® 10- LBS.,4 -OZ. YES 1 -1/8 3/8 10- LBS.,40L YES 1 -1 /8 3/8 • For greater length refer to Refrigerant No. 22 -3040. ®Rated in accordance with O.O.E. TXV•B s . DIMENSIONS Outdoor Unit - Crated (in.) Uncrated HxWxO 371/2 X 40 /is X 36 /ie SEE OUTUNE DWG. • HxWxO (37½ X 40 X 36 SEE OUTLINE DWG. 3 WEIGHT Shipping (lbs.) Net (lbs.) 316 300 316, 300 BTUH • TXC072P5 TXC7411P3 TXC760P3 TXF04SA4 TXA072P5 TXC049P5 TXC010P5 TXC072P3 CHG TO CHG TO CHG TO _ EXPANSION TYPE TXV-B TXV-NB TXV -NB 89 TgV-B • TXV-B TXV•B TXV -NB RATINGS (Cootial)m . BTUH 62000 56000 59000 56500 62000 57500 60500 61500 indoor Airflow (CFM) 2250 1850 2000. 1800 2250 • 2000 2250 System Power (KW) 7.01 6.48 8.77 6.60 7.01 6.58 6.83 7.00 E.E.R. /S.E.E.R.® 8.85 / 9.20 8.70 / 9.40 8.75 / 9.50 8.55 / 9.00 8.85 / 9.20 8.75 / 9.10 8.85 / 9.25 8.80 / 9.60 • SXE010A TXA048A4 TXA041A4 TXA060P6 TXA072P5 TXC049P5 TXC010P5 TXC072P3 CHG TO CHG TO EXPANSION TYPE 7XV-8 89 89 TXV-8 TgV-B • TXV-B TXV•B TXV -NB RATINGS (Cooliag)m . BTUH . 61000 56500 ' 56500 60500 62000 57500 60500 61500 Indoor Airflow (CFM) 2250 1725 1725 2000 2250 1800 2000 2250 System Power (KW) 6.98 8.57 8.57 6.83 7.01 6.58 6.83 7.00 E.E.R. /S.E.E.R.® 8.75 / 8.90 8.60 / 9.00 8.60 / 9.00 8.85 / 9.25 8.85 / 9.20 8.75 / 9.10 8.85 / 9.25 8.80 / 9.60 PRODUCT SP IFICATIONS OUTDOOR UNITS PRODUCT DATA The Irene Company, Dealer Products Group, Tyler, Texas 75711 CONDENSING COOLING COILS OATH aNarNCT TO CNANO( WITHOUT NOTICE MODELS A ! C U E TTA080A300A 37 28 30.1/8 TTA080A400A TTA072A300A 38. 344/4 TTA072A400A 44 3/4 35.3/4 38 ' 1 -18 DIA. K. O. WITH 7/8 DIA. HOLE ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY E 7/8 DIA. HOLE LOW VOLTAGE PRESSURE TAPS 1 -1/4 (INSIDE ACCESS PANEL) TTA060,072A CONDENSING UNITS (AU. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHESI V � R 'S �y J I �l ` 1 -1/8 O.D. GAS LINE (FEMALE CONNECTION) 3/8 O.D. LIQUID LINE (FEMALE CONNECTION) VIEW "X" PRESSURE TAP DATA SUDJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE A 1Q SUCTION • (LOCATED BEHIND ACCESS PANEL) SERVICE VALVE TOP DISCHARGE AREA SHOULD BE UNRESTRICTED, UNIT SHOULD BE PLACED SO ROOF RUN-OFF WATER DOES NOT POUR DIRECTLY ON UNIT, AND SHOULD BE AT LEAST 12' FROM WALL AND ALL SURROUNDING SHRUBBERY ON TWO SIDES, OTHER TWO SIDES COMPLETELY•UNOBSTRUCTED. LIQUID SERVICE VALVE From Dwg. 21C141010 Rev. 1 2: TEC SPECIFICATIONS •. CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE ,`III DESIGN/BUILD TEAM: M'.A. MORTENSON GENERAL CONTRACTOR YN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS dt ENGINEERS JGA 73- 90- 133.16 BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION: April 14 ;1992 ':, _ CONTRACT MANUAL APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9 -04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON INVITATION FOR BIDS B. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PROPOSAL FORM C. TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTRACT FORMS & GENERAL CONDITIONS (INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE) BOND FORMS F. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT FORMS INSURANCE CERTIFICATE (SAMPLE) SPECIAL CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS & CONTRACT PLANS G. The contract documents include: ,., CONTRACT DOCUMENTS APRIL 14, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9 -04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON M.A. Mortenson Company Contract Manual. Specifications, dated April 14, 1992. Boeing Company - "General Conditions" (60 Pages, version date July 22, 1986 BE &C Contract BECE 90 -5000, Special Conditions (3/6/90). Drawings; All dated April 14, 1992, as listed on the sheet index, ., C. Guarantees required in various sections, and on items of work, shall be furnished in same number of copies as required for shop drawings. SPECIAL CONDITIONS APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9.04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 4. COOPERATION OF CONTRACTORS, SUBCONTRACTORS AND TRADES: A. Subcontractor shall require his subcontractors and trades to cooperate and fully coordinate their work with one another for the purpose of securing a complete project within the contract period. B. Contractor shall perform neat cutting of walls and floors; leave openings and recesses; build in anchors, boxes, conduit, ducts, rough frames, rough hardware, pipes, etc. Contractor shall require his subcontractors to cooperate and coordinate with him in obtaining the correct location of items furnished by them. C. Contractor shall require specialty subcontractors to provide, correctly locate and set in place all sleeves necessary for installation of their work, such items to be built into place by Contractor. D. Contractor shall build all necessary chases, recesses, openings, etc., as required to correctly install work. 5. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: Wherever any reference Is made to an item that should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's standard specifications or manufacturer's instructions, the subcontractor shall submit to the General Contractor, in writing, for approval, the manufacturer's standard specifications, recommendations, or instructions for the installation of the particular item under consideration. The number of copies required shall be as defined under the "Shop Drawings" requirements. 6. MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND INSTRUCTIONS: Prior to substantial completion of work, each Contractor shall deliver to General Contractor, for review and approval, copies of maintenance and operating instructions for all finish items and for all mechanical and electrical or other operable equipment and care and maintenance of all finishes in accordance with the specifications. 7. LAYOUT: A. The General Contractor shall: 1. Lay out building corners, including the erection of necessary batter boards. 2. Provide datum bench on each floor for the use of all contractors. 3. Establish column center line control points. B. All other layout to be provided by subcontractor requiring same. 8. FIELD OFFICES: A. The General Contractor shall: Provide field office and telephone for his use, and the use of the project representative. B. Each subcontractor shall: Provide field office and telephone for his exclusive use as required. 9. PROJECT SIGNS: SPECIAL CONDITIONS APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9 -04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON A. The General Contractor shall furnish and install one project sign as designed by the Owner. B. No other signs are allowed, 10. DELIVERY AND STORAGE AREAS: A. Contractors and subcontractors shall make suitable provisions for the storage of their materials and provide such temporary weatherproof shed as may be necessary for the protection of their materials. The foregoing structures and equipment shall remain the property of such parties and upon completion of the work the structures shall be removed from the site. 11. WATCHMAN: 13. TEMPORARY UTILITIES: SPECIAL CONDITIONS APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9 -04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 10. DELIVERY AND STORAGE AREAS: (Continued) B. Each Contractor shall schedule deliveries and unloading to prevent congestion, blocking and access to project site, and interference with the work. Arrange deliveries to avoid larger accumulations than can be suitably stored at the site. C. Provide for continuity of supplies to avoid change of supplier or manufacturer, or change in brand materials during work. D. Store materials in such a manner so as to prevent damage to materials or structure and to prevent injury to persons. E. Temporary structures and sheds shall be arranged to avoid interference with construction. Location shall be approved by the General Contractor. F. All use of the site and structure shall be subject to approval by the General Contractor. Services of a watchman will not be provided by the General Contractor. Each subcontractor shall be responsible for and make good any loss or damage due to vandalism or robbery during construction: Subcontractors are advised that the project site will be outside of the Boeing "Security area" perimeter fence. 12. TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES: The General Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate chemical toilet facilities for the use of all subcontractors until the building is enclosed. A. The General Contractor will provide adequate temporary lighting and electrical power for small tools. In addition, a 200A, 480V, 3 phase service will be provided to a single location at the main floor level for welding power. Any other temporary electrical requirements, including connection of any trailers, storage sheds, etc. will be the responsibility of the subcontractor. Energy costs will be paid for by the owner. SPECIAL CONDITIONS APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9 -04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 13. TEMPORARY UTILITIES: (Continued) B. Water will be available from hydrant locations on -site. Subcontractor will be responsible for providing required backflow preventers, valves, etc. for utilization of existing hydrants. C. Subcontractor's are to make their own arrangements for telephone service. 14. TEMPORARY HOISTING: A. All hoisting shall be provided by the subcontractor requiring same. Compliance with requirements of Boeing Field Operations (obstruction lighting of crane booms, etc. is the responsibility of the subcontractor. A personnel hoist will not be provided for this project by the General Contractor. 15." . SCAFFOLDING: Each Contractor shall be responsible for his own scaffolding. 16. TEMPORARY FENCES: The General Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary site fencing. Any Contractor who removes a portion of fence to perform work shall replace fence to its original condition. SPECIAL CONDITIONS APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9 -04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 17. CLEANING UP: A. The General Contractor shall: Oversee cleaning and Insure that building and grounds are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and debris. Each Subcontractor Shall: 1. Clean up all waste materials, rubbish and debris resulting from his own operations at such frequencies as required by the General Contractor. 2. Each subcontractor shall deposit debris in dumpster provided by the General Contractor after first reducing such debris to minimum volume, e.g., all cardboard boxes are to be opened and flattened, all dunnage to be disassembled, etc. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible to remove from the site waste materials of such size and shape or weight to make use of dumpster type box unreasonable. No trash chute will be provided for the project. Removal of each Subcontractors waste materials, rubbish and debris from levels above the first floor, shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor. If the Subcontractor fails to comply with the requirements of this Article, the General Contractor shall perform the necessary clean up and deduct the cost of such work from the monies due, or to become due, said Subcontractor. • PARKING: SPECIAL CONDITIONS APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9 -04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON No parking for personal vehicles will be provided on the project site. Only Contractor's company vehicles will be permitted on -site. Subcontractor personnel may park in Boeing general parking areas, subject to availability. Subcontractors are responsible for parking arrangements and transportation of personnel to the jobsite. INVITATION FOR BIDS APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES • BUILDING 9 -04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON ids are solicited for Chemical Management Facility, Phase Ill for: All work items Bids are due before 2:00 pm post on April 24, 1992. Bids to be accepted at the offices of M.A. Mortenson, 10900 N.E. 8th Street, 810 Plaza Center Building, Bellevue, Washington 98004. Telephone (206) 451 -1305 Fax (206) 637 -5155. Opening of proposals will be in private. Drawings and specifications may be obtained by contacting the M.A. Mortenson Co. N.W. Regional Office (206) 451 -1305, attention: V. Thomas Cole or Neal Ruud 1.00 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS APRIL 1, 1992 1.01 The Boeing Company, hereinafter called the "Owner ", and M. A. Mortenson Company, hereinafter called "General Contractor ", invite bids for the construction of the Phase HI Chemical Management Facility, to be submitted on the bid date as described in the Invitation for Bids. 1.02 Bids will be received for the contract packages listed in the "Invitation for Bids ". 2.00 PREVIOUS PACKAGES None 3.00 PREPARATION OF BIDS 3.01 Submit proposal, in duplicate, on forms provided. All blanks must be completed. 3.02 Submit proposals filled out in ink or typewritten, without erasure, interlineation or changes. If not made in accordance with Construction Documents, proposals will be subject to rejection as irregular. The Owner and the General Contractor reserve the right to waive any irregularities or informalities. 3.03 If Bidder elects to bid on more than one Contract Package, a separate price shall be shown for each. Acceptable combinations of award for multiple Contract Packages are to be indicated by the Bidder in the space provided on the Proposal Form. 4.00 WITHDRAWAL OR REVISION OF BID 4.01 Bids may be withdrawn or revised prior to scheduled time for opening, under the following terms: A. Bidder may, without prejudice to themselves, withdraw Bid after it has been deposited with the General Contractor, provided request for such withdrawal is received by the General Contractor in writing or by telegram, prior to time bids are due. After the time bids are due, no Bid may be withdrawn for the period indicated. B. Bidder may modify his Bid by telegraphic communication at any time prior to scheduled time for opening, provided such telegraphic communication is received by the General Contractor prior to opening. 4.02 If written confirmation is not received within 48 hours after bidding deadline, no consideration will be given to any telegraphic modification. 5.00 ACCEPTANCE AND REJECTION OF BID PROPOSALS 5.01 Bids are considered irregular and may be rejected for the following reasons: A. If there are unauthorized additions, conditional bids, or irregularities of any kind which may tend to make Bid incomplete, indefinite, or ambiguous as to meaning. B. If bidder adds any provisions reserving right to accept or reject any award, or to enter into Contract pursuant to an award. C. If unit or lump sum prices contained in bid schedule are obviously unbalanced either in excess of, or below, reasonable cost analysis values. D. If bidder fails to complete Bid in any other particulars where information is requested so Bid may be properly evaluated. 5.02 A separate price must be clearly noted for each respective line item on the bid form. 5.03 Bidders agree, if awarded a contract, to enter into a contract agreement with M. A. Mortenson Company on the enclosed contract forms. 5.04 Proposals shall remain open for acceptance for a period of 60 days from the date and time of bid. 5.05 The Owner and General Contractor reserve the right to reject any or all Bid Proposals and to waive any or all informalities or irregularities. 6.00 BID SECURITY 6.01 None required. 7.00 AVAILABILITY OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 7.01 Construction Documents are available upon request from M. A. Mortenson Company. Refundable deposit may be required (as indicated in the Invitation to Bid). 8.00 EXAMINE DOCUMENTS AND VISIT SITE 8.01 Before submitting a Bid Proposal, bidders should carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications; visit the site of work; fully inform themselves as to all existing conditions and limitations, including those of labor; and shall include in the Bid Proposal a sum sufficient to cover the cost of all items contemplated by the Construction Documents. 8.02 Each sub - bidder by making a bid represents that he has read and understands the specifications and drawings. 8.03 Each sub - bidder further represents that he has inspected the site of the proposed work to ascertain any obstacles that might be encountered and other matters and conditions relevant to this work. 8.04 The nature of the work required demands thorough review of all drawings and specifications, and diligent and careful site inspection by all prospective sub - bidders as a means of determining the extent of work and conditions under which the work is to be performed. 8.05 Additional charges will not be considered for work which, prior to bidding, could reasonably be inferred as appropriate by examination of the drawings and specifications, visiting the site, and closely reviewing the work as indicated above. No representations as to subsurface conditions are made. 9.00 DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS 9.01 Bidders are required to submit bid proposals for a complete scope of work. Due to the schematic nature of the Drawings, Specifications and other information provided, bidders are expected to anticipate accurately all material, labor and working conditions. Unless discrepancies or omissions are identified in writing and addressed to the attention of Thomas F. Gunkel and received prior to the date and time of bid, no adjustment will be made in the Contract Amount for these items without the General Contractor's approval. 10.00 ADDENDA 10.01 All addenda issued during the time of bidding shall become a part of the Construction Documents and receipt thereof shall be listed in the Bid Proposals. 11.00 SUBSTITUTIONS PRIOR APPROVALS. VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES 11.01 Base bid only on materials, equipment and procedures specified. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications by means of trade names, catalog numbers and /or manufacturer's names. Where this occurs, it is not intended to exclude from consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other trade names, catalog number and /or manufacturer's names capable of accomplishing the purpose of the types of equipment and kinds of material specifically indicated. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner and Architect. The Owner is the final authority of substitute materials. 11.02 Any cost modifications necessary as a result of the use of an approved substitute shall be paid by the Subcontractor proposing the substitution. 11.03 Types of equipment and kinds of materials to be used, if not specifically indicated in specifications, must be approved in writing by Architect and be agreed upon by Owner prior to letting of Contract. No substitutions allowed after letting of Contract. 11.04 A part of the bid form is designated for voluntary alternates. All substantiation, technical information, test reports, etc., required to evaluate the alternate, must be submitted with the bid proposal. Design alterations due to the proposed alternate must be specifically identified: 12.00 FORM OF CONTRACT 12.01 The form of agreement for subcontracts with the General Contractor will be the M. A. Mortenson Company Standard Subcontract Agreement (NW7.90) including Additional Provisions and Supplementary Conditions included as a part of this Contract Manual. 12.02 The form of agreement for purchase agreements will be the M. A. Mortenson Company Standard Purchase Agreement (NW7.90) including Additional Provisions and Supplementary Conditions included as a part of this Contract Manual. 13.00 SUBCONTRACTS 13.01 Bidder is specifically advised that any person, firm or other party to whom it intends to subcontract any portion of the work, must be acceptable to Owner. Owner reserves the right to reject any proposed subcontractor if Bidder fails to satisfy Owner that proposed subcontractor is properly qualified to complete the work contemplated. 13.02 A listing of proposed subcontractors (if any) is to be provided to the General Contractor and Owner for approval prior to execution of the contract. 14.00 CONTRACT SECURITY 14.01 Coincident with execution of contract, if requested, Bidder shall furnish performance and payment bonds in an amount equal to 100 percent of contract price as security, on the forms designated by M. A. Mortenson Company. (Copies attached herewith). 14.02 By submitting a bid on this project, the Bidder represents that it has the ability to provide performance and payment bonds in the required amounts. 15.00 LAWS, PERMITS, LICENSES, REGULATIONS, ETC. 15.01 Attention is particularly directed to the General Conditions for requirements which deal with laws, permits, licenses, regulations, etc. 15.02 Subcontractor shall conform to all applicable Federal and State laws, municipal ordinances, rules and regulations or all authorities having jurisdiction over construction, including all construction codes and safety codes which may apply to: 1. Performance of the work 2. Protection of adjoining and adjacent property 3. Maintenance of passageways, guard fences or other protective facilities 15.03 Boeing will obtain the General Building permit. 15.04 The Subcontractor shall obtain and pay for all other permits, licenses and approvals for the work and give all notices as required for specific work package. 15.05 Subcontractor shall arrange for all inspections required by Federal, State, Municipal or other authorities and pay all fees and costs incurred. 16.00 INSURANCE CERTIFICATE 16.01 A sample Insurance Certificate is enclosed. Prior to any work on site, Insurance Certificates must be submitted by each Subcontractor, properly executed, showing the specific Liability and Workman's Compensation Insurance limits and policies in effect for the duration of the Contract. Required insurance coverages are listed in the Supplementary Conditions of the Standard Subcontract Agreement. 17.00 BIDDERS QUALIFICATIONS 17.01 Before a bid is considered for award, the bidder may be requested by the Owner or his authorized agent, to submit a statement regarding his previous experience in performing comparable work, his business and technical organization, financial resources, list of proposed Subcontractors, facilities and plant, and all other criteria the Owner deems relevant to the successful performance of the Contract. 18.00 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY AND AFFIRMATIVE ACTION 18;01 Bidders shall comply with Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action requirements of this project. The Subcontractor shall also be responsible for ensuring compliance with such requirements by all of its Subcontractors. 18.02 The "Compliance Report Certificate" included with the bid forms herein, must be submitted at the time of bid, and all reporting requirements of this certificate must be complied with for the duration of the project. 19.00 CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE PROJECT MANUAL AND CONTRACT MANUAL 19.01 In the event of a conflict between the Architect's Project Manual and this Contract Manual, the Contract Manual shall govern. Bid Proposal of _ (hereinafter) called ("Bidder") a * organized and existing under the laws of the State of , and doing business as Contractor License No. * Insert corporation, partnership or individual, as applicable. To: M.A. Mortenson Company 10900 NE 8th Street, Suite P.O. Box 1867 Bellevue, WA 98009 Gentlemen: PROPOSAL FORM APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9 -04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON Date: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of Phase III, Chemical Management Facility, having examined the plans and specifications listed in the Supplementary Conditions, as prepared by John Graham Associates, the Contract Manual, the Form of Contract and General Conditions, the Special Conditions and the forms of Payment and Performance Bonds which were received as part of the Invitation to Bid, and being familiar with the site of the proposed work, and with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, machinery, equipment rental, transportation, superintendence, perform all work, provide all services, and to construct all work in the category stated below, in accordance with the Contract Documents set forth therein, and at the bid amount stated below. The bid amount is to cover all cost incurred in performing the work required for that Contract Package under the Contract Documents, of which this Bid Proposal is a part. After Bid Proposals are received, tabulated, and evaluated by the General Contractor Manager, and the successful bidder from each category of work has been determined, said bidder agrees to meet immediately with the General Contractor at the place of bids for purposes of confirming scope. For the purposes of these meetings, the bidder agrees to provide complete detailed cost breakdown; a list of all subcontractors proposed for use in the work, and a list of all items, materials, and their manufacturers proposed for use in the work. PROPOSAL FORM APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9-04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON PAGE 2 . All applicable taxes, with the exception of Washington State Sales Tax, are included. The. Bidder agrees that these quotations shall not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after submittal of this proposal. The undersigned understands that the General Contractor reserves the right to reject any or all .Bid Proposals and to waive any informalities or irregularities therein. The successful bidder agrees to provide Performance and Payment Bonds on the forms provided in favor of M.A. Mortenson Company, if so requested. The bond premium Is to be identified separately from bid prices. The bidder acknowledges the following addenda : BASE BID: BASE BID (S): Performance & Bond Premium: PROPOSAL FORM APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9 -04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON PAGE 3 The undersigned agrees to perform all work identified in the following Contract Packages described in the contract documents and contract manual for the total price listed below. Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern. Add to base bid for performance and payment bonds. dollars ($ If bidder is proposing on more than one contract package in this Release, complete the appropriate line below: 1. Bids are separate and bidder will accept award of any individual contract package bid above 2. Acceptance of Award of Contract Package(s) is contingent upon award of Contract Package 3. Bidder will only accept award of the combination of all Contract Packages bid above. IF AN INDIVIDUAL: Doing Business as: IF A PARTNERSHIP: PROPOSAL FORM APRIL 1, 1992 THE BOEING COMPANY BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES BUILDING 9-04 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT FACILITY PHASE III DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON PAGE 4 . IF A CORPORATION: PROPOSAL FORM APRIL 1, 1992 COMPLIANCE REPORT CERTIFICATE Yes No PAGE 5 A. Has your company filed the required Employer Information Report, EEO -1 (Standard,Form 100) with the Secretary of Labor's Joint Report Committee for the prior period ending May 31? If your answer to question "A" above is "No ", check the following appropriate reason for not filing. 1. Employ Tess than 50 people. 2. Have not received any of the following: (a) Prime contracts for first -tier subcontract for $50,000 or more. (b) Any tier construction contract for $50,000 or more. 3. Have specific exemption from Secretary of Labor as provided in Section 204 or Executive Order 11246. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of any award of a subcontract from M.A. Mortenson Company and prior to each May 31 thereafter, during the performance of work under said contract or subcontract, the undersigned firm agrees to file Standard form 100, entitled "Equal Employment Opportunity Employer Information Report EEO -1" in accordance with instructions contained therein, unless such firm has either filed such report within 12 months preceding the date of the award or is not otherwise required by law or regulation to file such a report. B. By the submission of this bid, the bidder, offeror, applicant, or subcontractor certifies that he does not and will not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facility at any of his establishments, and that he does not and will not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregation facilities are maintained. The undersigned agrees that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Opportunity Clause in any subcontract, contract, purchase order or agreement that the undersigned may receive from M.A. Mortenson Company. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting room, work areas, rest rooms, wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated on the basis of race, creed, color or national origin, because of habit, custom or otherwise. The undersigned further agrees that he will obtain identical certifications from proposed subcontractors prior to the award of subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause; that he will retain such certification in his files and that he will forward the following notice to his proposed subcontractors (except when the proposed subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods). "NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTORS OF REQUIREMENT FOR CERTIFICATION OF NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES ". A certification of Nonsegregated Facility, as required by May 9, 1987, order on Elimination of Segregated Facilities, by the Secretary of Labor (32 Fed. Reg, 7439, May 19, 1967) must be submitted prior to the award of a subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause. The certification may be submitted either for each subcontract or for all subcontracts during a period (Le., quarterly, semi - annually, or annually). (Note: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001). .Do you have at each of your facilities a written affirmative action compliance program, as 'called for in 60 -1.40 of Title 41 of the Code of Federal Regulations? Yes No If yes, is it current? Yes No COMPLIANCE REPORT CERTIFICATE APRIL 1, 1992 PAGE 6 If "no ", within 60 days after receipt of any contract or subcontract from this bid, the undersigned firm agrees to develop a written affirmative compliance program for each of its facilities unless at such time it is not required by law or regulation to develop such a program. Firm: By: Title: Date: CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III BOEING MILITARY AIRPLANES DEVELOPMENTAL CENTER TUKWILA, WASHINGTON ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION: April 14, 1992 DESIGN /BUILD TEAM: M.A. MORTENSON GENERAL CONTRACTOR JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS & ENGINEERS JGA 73- 90- 133.16 TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTE: ALL SECTIONS NOT INCLUDED IN THE PREVIOUS PROJECT (PHASE II) AND WERE ADDED IN THEIR ENTIRETY HAVE BEEN INDICATED WITH REDLINE CODE. ALL SECTIONS WHICH WERE INCLUDED IN THE PREVIOUS PROJECT (PHASE II) AND DELETED IN THEIR ENTIRETY HAVE BEEN INDICATED WITH THE 6S14.14E0UT-60.14-8. THE SAME REDLUS AND STRIKEOUT CODES HAVE BEEN USED THROUGHOUT THE SPECIFICATIONS TO INDICATE CHANGES FROM THE PHASE II SPECIFICATIONS. Specifications: Division 1 - General Requirements NOT USED 73 Division 2 - Site Work Section Section Section Section Section 02010 02050 02210 02220 02221 Section 02230 Section 02250 Subsurface Exploration Demolition Site Grading Structural Excavation and Backfilling Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Pavement Subgrade Excavating and Backfilling Compaction Control and Testing 02010-1; 1 02050-1; 1 02210-1; 2 02200-1; 2 02221-1; 2 02230-1; 1 02250-1; 2 z - - • = - - Beet Section 02282 Secon 02350 Se6" Section 02430 Section 02512 Section 02513 Section 02577 Section 02713 Section 02722 Section 02725 Division 3 - Concrete Section 03010 Concrete Floor Slab Finish 03010-1; 1 Section 03100 Concrete Formwork 03100-1; 1 Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03200-1; 2 Section 03251 Expansion and Contraction Joints . • 03251-1; 2 Section 03252 Anchors and Inserts 03252-1; 1 Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete . . . . . . . 03300-1; 4 S 03400 C oncrete i1t Wall Pan Soils Sterilization 02282-1; 1 Drille Piers , . Foundation Diaina . . . . C2411-1; 2 Drainage Structures, Pipe and Fittings 02430-1; 2 Aggregate Base Course 02512-1; 2 Asphalt Paving 02513-1; 4 Pavement Marking 02577-1; 2 Water Distribution 02713-1; 3 Sanitary Sewer System 02722-1; 2 Polymer Concrete Trench Drains • 02725-1; 1 Concrete lanclo Section 03600 Nonshrink Grout Division 4 - Masonry Section 04100 Mortar 4*0$04004MOOnreiaioria Sect • n, 20 t :Masonry. . • . - ........ Division 5 - Metal Section 05060 Welding Section 05061 Stud Welding 03420-1; 03600-1; 1 20 05060-1; 2 05061-1; 1 73-90-133-0 Section Section Section Section Section Ccction Division 6 - Wood and Plastics Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06100 -1; 1 Ccction 06200 Finish Carpcntry 06200 1; Section 06300 Wood Treatment 06300 -1; 1 Division 7 - Thermal Ccction 07110 Ccotion 07115 Section 07193 Section 07213 Perimeter Wall a Under -Slab Insulation 07230 -1; 1 Ccction 07250 Cpr ycd Fircproofing 07270 1; Section 07270 Fire Stopping 07270 -1; 2 Section 07411 Preformed Metal Siding . . . . . . 07411-IL ... SectJ.on 07530 single : Ply Membrane Roofin 07530 , Cc 4h dl5'33 Heelithi a.ly A "... • '0' 7 5 3 3 ""1' t ' 07600 -1; 3 07800-1; 8].0 i, ; Section 07230 Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07800 Roof Accessories Se on. 07810 Smoke: Vents' : and :Explosion Rel Section 07900 Sealants 079 - 1; 4 Division 8 - Doors and Windows SeCtia € < 00 <> Metal DOors<' Ccc tion t 210 Plush Wood boors Section 08330 Section 08400 Section 08700 Section 08800 Section 09220 Portland Cement Plaster Ccction 09250 Cypoum Hoard �eCn 092 cement B 800tion 09610' Suction 09530 Ccction 09050 Ccotion 09680 Section 09900 05070 Bolting 05070 -1; 1 05100 Structural Steel 05100 -1; 3 05300 Metal Decking 05300 -1; 2 05410 Cold- Formed Metal Stud System . . . 05410 -1; 2 05500 Metal Fabrications 05500 -1; 3 OS800 Expansion Control 05800 1; and Moisture Protection ?lcmbronc Watcrproofing 07110 17 Elaatomcric Shcct Watcrproofing . 07115 1; Plastic Vapor Retardant 07193 -1; 1 Safcty InoulationNrrous and Ref #00. �Insulation . . . . '07213 -1; 2 rame Coiling Doors Acocoo Dooro Hardware and Specialties Glazing 08330 -1; 2 08400 1; 08700 -1; 2 08800 -1; 3 09220 1; 09250 1; Acoustical Ccilingc 09610 1; Aeouotical Insulation and Barriers 09530 1; Rcoilicnt Flooring 096:0 1; Carpct Tilco 09680 -1; Painting 09900 -1; 4 73- 90- 133 -E Division 10 - Specialties Ccction 10150 Compartments and Cubicle° 10150 1; Section 10200 Louvers Syliento 10200 -1; 6 Section 10250 Firefighting" 10250 -1; 1 Ccction 10270 Acccos Flooring 10270 1; Ccction 10610 Demountable Partitiono 10610 1; Ccotion 10800 Toilet Aooc000rico 10800 1; Ccotion 10900 Dock Bumpero 10900 1p Division 11 - Equipment NOT USED Division 12 - Furnishings NOT USED Division 13 - Special Construction NOT USED Division 14 - Conveying Systems NOT USED Division 15 - Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Ccction Section Cootion Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Division 16 - Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Mechanical 15010 Mechanical Requirements 15030 Heating and Cooling System Testing and Balancing 15040 Acceptable Manufacturers List 15050 External Corrosion Control 15060 Pipe and Fittings 15070 Supports and Hangers 15080 Valves 15090 Piping Identification 15100 Installation of Equipment, Piping, and Ductwork 15110 Sleeves and Seals 15130 Insulation 15140 Motors and Control 15410 Canitary Drainage Syotem 15430 Domestic Water Piping 15410 Domcotic Hot Water Equipment 15450 Plumbing Specialties 15460 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 15470 Natural Gas Piping Systems 15510 Fire Protection System 15810 Air Moving Equipment 15820 Roof -Top Central Station Air Handlers 15830 Air Duct Systems 15850 Air Distribution Specialties . 15950 Temperature Controls and Monitoring Electrical 16010 16110 16120 16134 16140 16155 16160 8cotion 16165 Section 16170 General Provisions Raceways Wire and Cables Outlet Boxes Wiring Devices Motor Starters Panelboards and Enclosed Circuit Breakers Switchboard° Motor and Circuit Disconnects TC -3 15010 -1; 3 15030 -1; 2 15040 -1; 4 15050 -1; 2 15060 -1; 1 15070 -1; 3 15080 -1; 1 15090 -1; 1 15100 -1; 3 15110 -1; 2 15130 -1; 2 15140 -1; 2 15410 1; 15430 -1; 2 15440 1, 15450 -1; 1 15460 -1; 2 15470 -1; 1 15510 -1; 5 15810 -1; 3 15820 -1; 15830 -1; 15850 -1; 15960 -1; 16010 -1; 16110 -1; 16120 -1; 16134 -1; 16140 -1; 16155 -1; 5 6 2 4 2 3 4 1 2 2 16160 -1; 3 16165 1; 16170 -1; 3. Section Section scation Section Section Section Section Section Ccation Section Section Section 16181 16190 16310 16402 16450 16460 16500 16612 16721 16770 16900 16994 Fuses 16181 -1; 2 Supporting Devices 16190 -1; 2 Cubctationo 30 and 31 . . . . . 16310 -1; Outside Power Transmission and Distribution 16402 -1; 5 Grounding 16450 -1; 2 Transformers (small dry type) . 16460 -1; 2 Lighting 16500 -1; 2 Generator System and Automatic Transfer Switch . . . . 16612 -1; 3 Fire Alarm and Detection Cyotcm 16721 - 1; Public Address System . . 16770 -1; .2 Motor Connections and Controls 16900 -1; 2 Testing 16994 -1; SHEET INDEX NOTE: THE PHASE III WORK DESCRIBED IN THESE DOCUMENTS 1S AN ADDITION TO A STRUCTURE WHICH RECEIVED A BUILDING PERMIT UNDER A PRIOR APPLICATION (ACTUAL DATE UNKNOWN). SINCE THE ADDITION WILL BE BUILT UNDER THE SAME CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT, THESE DRAWINGS REPRESENT AN EXTENSION TO THE SET OF DRAWINGS WHICH WERE PREVIOUSLY REVIEWED AND APPROVED. SHEETS PREVIOUSLY ISSUED WILL CONTAIN DETAILS NOT USED FOR THE PHASE III WORK. T3 SHEET INDEX, SCHEDULES, AND CODE SUMMARY -- PHASE III T2 TITLE SHEET C1 TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY C2 SITE LAYOUT PLAN C3 SITE GRADING PLAN C4 SITE UTILITY PLAN L1 LANDSCAPE PLAN All GROUND LEVEL PLAN -- PHASE III Al2 ROOF PLAN & DETAILS -- PHASE III A13 ELEVATIONS -- PHASE III A14 WALL SECTIONS & DETAILS -- PHASE III A6 BUILDING SECTIONS A9 DOOR DETAILS & SCHEDULES A10 WALL SECTIONS & DETAILS S9 FOUNDATION PLAN -- PHASE III S10 GROUND FLOOR FRAMING -- PHASE III S11 ROOF FRAMING PLAN -- PHASE III S1 GENERAL NOTES & TYPICAL DETAILS 56 SECTIONS AND DETAILS S7 SECTIONS AND DETAILS S8 TILT -LAP DIAGRAMS AND DETAILS 73 -90- 133 -16 (new sheet) (re- issued for reference only, previously approved) (re- issued for reference only, previously approved) (new sheet) (new sheet) (new sheet) (revised & re- issued) (new sheet) (new sheet) (new sheet) (new sheet) (revised & re- issued, previously approved) (re- issued, for ref. only previously approved) (revised & re- issued) (new sheet) (new sheet) (new sheet) (revised & previously (revised & previously (revised & previously (revised & re- issued, approved) re- issued, approved) re- issued, approved) re- issued, April 14, 1992 P6 UNDERFLOOR PLUMBING -- PHASE III P7 GROUND FLOOR PLUMBING — PHASE III M7 GROUND FLOOR HVAC — PHASE III MPS SCHEDULE & SEQUENCE OF OPERATION — PHASE III MP9 HVAC DETAILS — PHASE III MP1 HVAC PLAN & SCHEDULES MP2 HVAC PLAN AND DETAILS E5 E6 E7 E8 SITE PLAN — PHASE III GROUND FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL — PHASE III DETAILS & SCHEDULES -- PHASE III SCHEDULES -- PHASE III Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, A7, A8, Al 0 S2, S3, S4, S5 MP3, M4, M5, M6, P4, P5 El , E2, E3, E4 previously approved) (new sheet) (new sheet) (new sheet) (new sheet) (new sheet) • (re-issued for reference only, previously approved) (re-issued for reference only, previously approved) (new sheet) (new sheet) (new sheet) (new sheet) THE FOLLOWING SHEETS WERE ISSUED WITH THE ORIGINAL BUILDING PROJECT. THEY HAVE NOT BEEN RE-ISSUED WITH THESE SHEETS BECAUSE THEY ARE NOT RELEVANT TO THE PHASE III WORK: • CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION - 2 Site Work Section 02010 Subsurface Exploration Section 02050 Demolition Section 02210 Site Grading Section 02220 Structural Excavation and Backfilling Section 02221 Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Section 02230 Pavement Subgrade Excavating and Backfilling Section 02250 Compaction Control and Testing Section 02270 Slope I'rotcction and Erosion Control Section 02282 Soils Sterilization Section 02430 Section 02512 Section 02513 Section 02577 Section 02713 Section 02722 Section 02725 oun at ion 17'rins Drainage Structures, Pipe and Fittings Aggregate Base Course Asphalt Paving Pavement Marking Water Distribution Sanitary Sewer System Polymer Concrete Trench Drains 3 -90 -133 02010 - GENERAL SECTION 02010 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION • 1.1" SUBSURFACE SOIL DATA 1.1:1 SUBSURFACE SOIL INVESTIGATIONS have been. made and a complete report is included in, the Specifications. The report is included . only'to, inform the Contractor of the type and character of materials to .be encountered. Geotechnical Investigation, Centralized END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS 1.1.1 SCHEDULE OF WORK AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS. Submit proposed methods and schedule of demolition work for approval by the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 BARRICADE AND FENCE MATERIAL shall consist of sound materials, free of nails and sharp projections. 2.1.2 PAVEMENT REPAIR MATERIAL shall be identical to those removed. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 ERECT barricades, fences, or other suitable barrier to protect the public from falling debris and operating equipment. Place and maintain warning signs and lights at locations where the public is exposed to danger. 3.1.2 DISCONNECT utility services prior to starting demolition operations. 3.1.3 PROTECT existing utility service lines, poles, boxes, vaults, and structures, which are to remain in service, from damage. Exercise extreme caution when removing pavements or structures in and around these utilities. Notify the Owner immediately should damage occur to any utility. Damages to utilities known at the time of demolition shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. 3.1.4 BRACE, SHORE, OR PROVIDE other protection as required to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of adjacent buildings, pavements, utilities, or other structures. At any time, if the safety of adjacent structures appears to be endangered, cease operation, take precautions to support the structure, and notify the Owner. Resume operations only after permission has been granted. If the Owner considers additional bracing or shoring necessary to safeguard or prevent movement or settlement, install such bracing or shoring upon the Owner's order. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly with such order, such bracing and shoring may be placed by the Owner at the Contractor's expense. 3.1.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIAL 1. General. From the site, remove debris, rubbish, and other material resulting from demolition operations. 3.1.6 GROUND AND SURFACE WATER. After the existing pavements have been removed, protect the resulting excavation or open area from surface or ground water. Promptly remove any water which accumulates in the excavation or opening. The method of dewatering and the disposal of water is subject to the approval of the Owner. 73- 90- 133 -6 END OF SECTION 02050- 1?►p>174?: >'1::9:92 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Structure Excavating and Backfilling Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Pavement Subgrade Excavating and Backfilling Compaction Control and Testing 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.2.1 STRUCTURAL FILL is defined as fill material that supports a structure or pavement. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 BORROW MATERIAL shall be inspected at the source by the Soils Engineer, for compliance with Paragraph 2.1 of this Section, prior to transport to the site. 1.3.2 ACQUIRE PERMITS to haul earth over public ways as required by local jurisdiction. 1.4 SITE CONDITIONS 1.4.1 DO NOT COMMENCE grading operations when low temperatures prohibit placing fill on nonfrozen surfaces. When frost depths are minimal, the frozen surface material may be stripped and stockpiled to allow excavation and placement of nonfrozen material. Frozen surface material shall not be used as fill material, but shall be stockpiled until such time as the material thaws. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIAL 2.1.1 STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL shall be hauled to the site from an approved borrow area. 2.1.2 STRUCTURAL FILL FOR USE BENEATH FOOTINGS, floor slabs or pavements . shall meet the following gradation requirements: Percent Finer Sieve Size By Weight 3 inch 100* 1 1/2 inch 70 -100 3/4 inch 30 -100 1/2 inch 25 -100 No. 4 20 -49 No. 40 0 -25 No. 200 0 -6 * The fill may contain up to 10 percent cobbles. Fill material that does not meet this gradation requirement may be acceptable for use subject to the approval of the soil engineer. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 BRACE, SHORE, OR INSTALL other means necessary to protect adjacent structures from movement, settlement, or collapse.. Damage resulting from movement shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. 73- 90 -133- 76 SECTION 02210 SITE GRADING 02210 -1 Section 02220 Section 02221 Section 02230 Section 02250 3.1.2 ADJUST moisture content of structural fill material to written specified tolerances prior to installing fill. 3.2 EXCAVATION, OVEREXCAVATION AND FILLING 3.2.1 BENCH AREAS to receive fill which have slopes exceeding four horizontal to one vertical. 3.2.2 EXCAVATE AND FILL below pavements as specified in Section 02230, Pavement Subgrade Excavating and Backf illing. 3.2.3 PROOFROLL THE BUILDING and pavement areas to detect any loose or soft existing fill soils. 3.2.4 OVEREXCAVATE ALL EXISTING FILL OR LOOSE SOILS within the building and pavement areas. The Soils Engineer shall determine the actual depth of overexcavation. 3.2.5 PLACE FILL AND STRUCTURAL FILL in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 8 inches in thickness if a large vibratory compactor is used or not exceeding 6 inches in thickness if a hand operated compactor is used. Compact fill to specified density by rolling, or other means approved by the Soils Engineer. .1 Structural fill shall extend laterally from the edge of footing, floor slabs or pavements 1 foot for each foot of fill beneath the footing, floor slab or pavement. 3.2.6 HAUL excavated material not suitable for use as structural fill off the site as required to balance cut and fill. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.3.1 COMPACT structural fill to minimum densities specified and within moisture content tolerances as specified in Section 02250, Compaction Control and Testing. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 02220 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Site Grading Section 02210 2.0 PRODUCTS STRUCTURE EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 GRANULAR FILL. Use a granular material which is pervious, prevents capillary action, and conforms to the following requirements: 100 percent passing the 3/4 -inch sieve Less than 15 percent passing the 100 sieve Less than two percent passing the 200 sieve 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL EXCAVATION 3.1.1 EXCAVATE in accord with the Contract Documents and in a manner which ensures reasonable accuracy in preserving lines and levels shown on the Drawings. Excavate for buildings far enough beyond wall line to permit removal of forms. 3.1.2 EXCAVATE TRENCHES included in the building. Carefully maintain minimum width and in no way impair the bearing value of any footing or foundation. 3.2 FOOTING EXCAVATION '3.2.1 CUT footing excavations vertically from the widest part of footing. Undercutting for footing projections is not permitted. 3.2.2 REMOVE surface water from footing excavations immediately. 3.2.3 POUR FOOTINGS immediately after excavation is complete. Do not remove the last 4 inches to 6 inches of subsoil until preparations are complete for pouring footings. Place concrete for footings on undisturbed glacial till and /or structural fill compacted in accord with Section 02210, Site Grading. When footings are inadvertently excavated below elevations shown on the Drawings, fill footings with concrete to the proper level. 3.3 SLAB ON GRADE 3.3.1 OVEREXCAVATION. Where excavation is made below the elevations indicated on the Drawings, restore the excavation to the proper elevation in accord with the procedure specified for structural fill. 3.3.2 BACKFILL. Provide two feet granular fill compacted to 95 perent of maximum dry density. The floor slab shall be underlain by an additional base course of at least 4 inches of crushed rock or 6 inches of clear sand and gravel with 5 percent fines or less. 3.3.3 SUPPORT walls laterally while placing and compacting fill or backfill against walls and until permanent lateral support is in place. 3.3.4 PLACE backfill for structures in horizontal uniform layers not exceeding 8 inches in thickness if a large vibratory compactor is used, or not exceeding 6 inches in thickness if a hand operated compactor is used. Bring each layer up uniformly on all sides of structure and thoroughly compact using pneumatic compaction or other methods approved by the Owner. 73-90-133-# 02220 -1 3.4 PROTECTION 3.4.1. PROTECT soils, in the building area and within 20 feet of building perimeter, against moisture content increases throughout construction period. Expose footing and utility excavations for as short a. time as practical and, if water enters excavation, remove softened soils completely or allow to dry before placing footings or floor slabs. Keep swales a minimum of 20 feet away from exterior walls. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL UTILITY EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Site Grading Compaction Control and Testing Foundation Drains Drainage Structures, Pipe and Fittings Water Distribution Sanitary Sewer 2.0 PRODUCTS SECTION 02221 Section 02210 Section 02250 Section 02411 Section 02430 Section 02711 Section 02722 2.1 BACKFILL MATERIAL 2.1.1 BEDDING MATERIAL shall be crushed limestone, crushed gravel, or sand finer than 3/8 inch. Bedding material shall also be used as backfill to 12 inches above top of pipe where plastic pipe is used. 2.1.2 BACKFILL MATERIAL shall be free of roots and other organics, trash, ashes, cinders, corrosive materials, frozen material, and stones larger than 6 inches in diameter. Limit stones to 3/4 -inch diameter in backfill -to 12 inches above the top of pipes larger than 3 inches in diameter. Limit stones to 3/4 -inch diameter for backfill to 4 inches above the top of pipes 3 inches or smaller in diameter. 2.2 SHORING MATERIAL 2.2.1 SHORING MATERIAL shall be wood timber or steel sheet piling with cross members and braces to meet local codes or other governmental requirements. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 REMOVE AND REPLACE minor structures including fences, culverts, signs, etc., as required for trenching. Reset structures in their original locations. 3.1.2 REMOVE AND REPLACE pavements where required for trenching. Saw cut asphalt pavemen ts, and saw cut or remove concrete pavements to the nearest joint. Remove pavements back a sufficient distance from the trench to prevent settlement. New paving material shall match existing material removed. 3.1.3 MAINTAIN vehicular and pedestrian traffic circulation as directed by the owner. Furnish, place, and maintain sufficient flags, flares, barricades, and signage to provide proper safety. 3.1.4 STAKE utility trenches and verify existing utility inverts and locations to assure that utilities can be constructed as engineered. Excavate and expose existing utilities and tunnels along the utility route prior to opening other sections of trench. If conflicts occur between actual conditions and conditions shown on the Drawings, contact the Owner. 3.1.5 INSTALL TEMPORARY DIVERSION BERMS OR DITCHES to prevent surface runoff from entering utility trench. Where rain or surface water inadvertently enters the trench, remove water with pumps or other suitable method. Keep utility pipes clean of sediment, debris, and trench water. 73- 90- 133 - 6 02221 -1 Ppr l ?` 14 >19 i2 3.2 TRENCH AND UTILITY STRUCTURE EXCAVATION 3.2.1 EXCAVATE AND BACKSLOPE trenches as required to prevent slides or cave -ins. Install shoring, where required, to protect pavements or structures or where the depth of the trench makes backsloping of trench sides impractical. Pile material a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading, slides, or cave -ins. 3.2.2 EXCAVATE trench width to a point 1 foot above the pipe no less than 8 inches and no more than 12 inches on each side of the pipe. Excavate for structures to provide no less than 12 inches of clear space. Excavate the width of the trench above 1 foot over the top of pipe as wide as necessary for trench backsloping, shoring, or installation and removal of forms. Excavate for conduits or direct bury wire wide enough to accommodate installation. 3.2.3 TUNNELING below pavements is allowed only at locations shown on the Drawings. Install shoring and bracing as required to provide safety to workmen and prevent settlement of pavements. 3.2.4 OVEREXCAVATE TRENCH BOTTOMS TO ALLOW FOR BEDDING. Shape the bedding to provide uniform bearing for each section of pipe with the bottom rounded to allow at least one - fourth of the circumference of the pipe to rest firmly on bedding material. Excavate holes for pipe bells only to a sufficient depth necessary to assure accurate jointing of pipes. 3.3 BACKFILLING TRENCHES AND STRUCTURES 3.3.1 TEST piping prior to completing trench backfilling when tests call for inspection of joints. Install thrust blocking and minimal backfilling over pipes to prevent displacement of piping when performing pressurized testing of systems. Repair or replace pipe sections which fail, retest, then complete backfilling operations. 3.3.2 BACKFILL under pipe haunches and around bells. Continue backfilling in layers uniformly on each side of pipe to prevent lateral displacement. Compact backfill using hand, pneumatic, or mechanical compacting equipment as desired and preventing damage to the pipe. Compact to specified densities in Section 02250, Compaction Control and Testing. �.. 3.3.3 BACKFILL tunnel areas using pneumatic tampers ramming the backfill material into the tunnel in layers to assure all voids are filled. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Site Grading Compaction Control and Testing 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL 2.1.1 STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL shall be as specified in Section 02210, Site Grading. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 OVEREXCAVATION 3.1.1 OVEREXCAVATE all existing fill or loose soils below the subgrade elevation of pavements. Extend overexcavation laterally 1 foot beyond edge of pavement for each foot of fill beneath the pavement. Backfill the overexcavation with structural fill. 3.2 STRUCTURAL FILLING 3.2.1 PLACE structural fill in layers not to exceed 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by large vibratory compactor and 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated equipment. 3.2.2 COMPACT structural fill to densities specified in Section 02250, Compaction Control and Testing. 3.2.3 INCREASE thickness of structural fill or limit weight of vehicles and equipment on prepared subgrade as required to eliminate subgrade distortion, rutting, or pumping during construction operations. 3.3 TOLERANCES 3.3.1 CHECK SUBGRADE PROFILE using templates of the correct cross section and depth riding on the top of forms. Remove or add material as required to bring subgrade to the correct cross section. Remove loose material and recompact to specified densities. 3.3.2 CHECK SUBGRADE SURFACE TOLERANCE using a 10 -foot straightedge applied parallel and perpendicular to the centerline of paved areas. Surface tolerance shall not vary more than 1/2 inch. 3.3.3 KEEP TRUCKS AND HEAVY EQUIPMENT OFF of the prepared subgrade as much as feasible. Repair and recheck the subgrade profile, tolerances, and density in areas disturbed by construction traffic prior to paving. SECTION 02230 PAVEMENT SUBGRADE EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING END OF SECTION Section 02210 Section 02250 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Site Grading Structure Excavating and Backfilling Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Pavement Subgrade Excavating and Backfilling 1.2 REFERENCES ASTM D 698 ASTM D 1556 -88 ASTM D 1557 ASTM D 2922 -81 ASTM D 3017 -78 2.0 EXECUTION Structural Fill and Backfill within building and pavement area Utility Tunnel and Trench Backfill Utility Trench Backfill 73-90-133-'0 SECTION 02250 COMPACTION CONTROL AND TESTING 02250 -1 Section 02210 Section 02220 Section 02221 Section 02230 Moisture-density relations of soils and soil - aggregate mixtures using 5.5 -pound (2.49 -kg) rammer and 12 -inch (305) drop Density of soil in place by the sand cone method Moisture- density relations of soils and soil- aggregate mixtures using 10 -pound (4.54 -kg) rammer and 18 -inch (457 -mm) drop Density of soild and soil aggregate in -place by nuclear methods (shallow depth) Moisture content of soil and soil aggregate in- place by nuclear methods (shallow depth) 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 DENSITY TESTING RESULTS AND INSPECTION REPORTS shall be submitted by the testing laboratory to the Contractor and duplicate copies to the Owner within ten days of testing or inspection. 1.4 SCHEDULING 1.4.1 COMMENCEMENT. Notify the testing laboratory at least seven days in . advance of the expected date of commencement of fill replacement. Coordinate times of soil testing and inspection to allow efficient fill placement operations and effective and efficient soil density testing and inspection. 1.4.2 DELAYS. Notify the testing laboratory of any unexpected delays of fill placement due to inclement weather or equipment breakdown to minimize unnecessary trips to the site. 1.4.3 PLACEMENT of fill material without proper density testing and inspection may necessitate removal and replacement of untested fill at the Contractor's expense. 2.1 METHOD OF TESTING AND REQUIRED DENSITIES 2.1.1 COMPACT AND ADJUST moisture contents of fill material to at least the following percentages of maximum density and at moisture contents within the limits specified above or below optimum moisture content as determined by Test Procedure ASTM D 1557: Percent of Maximum Material Density Percent Above or Below Optimum Moisture Content 95 percent 2 percent 92 percent 2 percent 95 percent 2 percent :9; 2.1.2 MOISTURE AND DENSITY TESTS for determining compaction shall be taken at locations selected by the testing laboratory. Remove, replace, and retest fills which do not meet testing requirements. Costs of retesting shall be borne by the Contractor. Take the following number of tests: 1. Fill, Nonsupporting. One test per 1,000 square yards per 8 -inch lift. 2. Backfill Adjacent to Buildings, either Structural or Nonsupporting. One test per 50 linear feet per 8 -inch lift. 3. Utility Trench Backfill, Nonsupporting. One test per 200 linear feet per alternate 8 -inch lift. Utility Trench Backfill, Structural. One test per 100 linear feet per 8 -inch lift. 5. The Testing Laboratory shall maintain the right to decrease the number of tests if test results consistently pass required densities. 2.2 INSPECTION 2.2.1 THE SOILS ENGINEER shall inspect and test structural fill placement within building and pavement areas. The Soils Engineer shall inspect the bottom of overexcavations prior to structural fill placement, bottom of footing excavations, and subgrades for floor slabs and pavement before installation of footings, floor slabs, and pavements. 2.3 REIMBURSE FOR TESTING AND INSPECTION 2.3.1 PAYMENT AND REIMBURSEMENT are specified in Section 01400. Testing Laboratory Services. Fill not meeting required densities shall be removed, replaced, recompacted and retested at the Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 2.0 PRODUCTS SECTION 02282 SOILS STERILIZATION 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Aggregate Base Course Section 02234 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT STERILANT PRODUCT DATA as shop drawings in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Data shall include a list of weeds controlled, application rates and times, application methods, and limitations of use. 1.2.2 SUBMIT PACKAGE LABELS AND COPIES OF PURCHASE INVOICES of material to the Owner. 1.3 SEOUENCING 1.3.1 APPLY sterilant immediately prior to asphaltic treated base course installation and at times recommended by the manufacturer. When sterilant is applied and pavement installation is delayed, protect applied sterilant from rainfall. 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 SOIL STERILANT shall be a nonselective herbicide in pelleted form applied dry and having a residual weed killing action of not less than one year. Herbicide shall be moisture activated. Sterilant shall be capable of controlling, as an absolute minimum, Johnsongrass, bindweed, Bermudagrass, and nutgrass. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 CHECK compaction and surface level tolerances of aggregate base course as specified in Section 02234, Aggregate Base Course 3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 PROTECT areas outside of paved areas from accidental sterilant contamination. Promptly remove and dispose of any contaminated soil. Use contaminated soil onsite under areas to receive pavements or haul offsite to a safe dumping area. Dispose of sterilant containers according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 APPLICATION 3.3.1 APPLY sterilant using methods and at rates required to control bindweed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply sterilant using equipment capable of spreading sterilant uniformly over the entire area to receive asphaltic pavements. 3.4 PROTECTION 3.4.1 INSTALL pavement immediately after applying sterilant or protect sterilant from wind displacement and rainfall activation using one of the following methods: 1. Apply a prime coat as specified in Section 02513, Asphaltic Concrete Paving. 2. Cover sterilized area with plastic sheeting weighted and secured to prevent displacement and moisture infiltration. END OF SECTION 73 -90- 133 -1 02282 -1 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Concrete Reinforcement Concrete SECTION 02350 DRILLED PIERS Section 03200 Section 03300 1.2 SUBSOIL INFORMATION 1.2.1 SOIL BORINGS, for exploratory information, have been taken at the site. 1.3 QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP 1.3.1 SUGGESTED DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES FOR PIER FOUNDATIONS, ACT 336, shall be the minimum construction standard. 1.4 ALTERNATES 1.4.1 ALTERNATES affecting the work of this Section are specified in Section 01100, Alternates. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE 2.1.1 CONCRETE is specified under Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2.1.2 REINFORCING is specified under Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL DRILLED PIERS from the level existing after general excavation has been completed. The maximum construction tolerances for plumbness shall be.one percent of the pier length, 12 -1/2 percent of the shaft diameter, or 6 inches at the bottom, whichever is less. The tolerance for location of the top of the pier shall be four percent of the pier diameter or 3 inches, whichever is less. Correct out of tolerance piers as directed by the Architect - Engineer at no cost to the Owner. 3.1.2 DRILL SHAFTS from the ground surface to a depth shown on the Drawings, or such other depth as directed by the Soils Engineer, to obtain the required capacity. For adjustment in payment for variations in pay length, see the General Conditions. Install a protective casing in the shaft during the progress of the work when required to prevent cave -ins, water entry, and displacement of earth. The casing shall have an inside diameter not smaller than the shaft design diameter, and shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the pressure of sand and water encountered. 3.1.3 INSPECTION. Before placing any concrete, the pier shall be inspected and approved by the Soils Engineer. 3.1.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT. When the excavation of any drilled pier or group of drilled piers is completed and approved, place concrete without delay in one continuous pour. Drill no adjacent piers within a clear distance of 5 feet until the concrete has set a minimum of 24 hours. 3.1.5 WITHDRAW STEEL CASING, if used, as the concrete is deposited. Keep the lower end of the casing below the top level of the concrete being poured to prevent any earth or water coming in from the sides and mixing with the concrete. 73-90-133-0 02350 -1 ,. • 3.1.7 INTERRUPTION OF CONCRETE PLACEMENT. If it is necessary to stop the placing of concrete prior to completion of a pier, leave the resulting surface approximately level and place dowels of the same size and number as the vertical reinforcing if the stoppage is below the main reinforcing cage. Clean this surface thoroughly before completing concreting operations. 3.2 QUALITY CONTROL 3.2.1 INSPECTION OF DRILLED PIERS will be made by a Soils Engineer designated in Section 01400, Testing Laboratory Services. The Soils Engineer must be present during the placing operations of drilled piers. Notify the Architect-Engineer and Soils Engineer at least seven days prior to the start of drilled pier placing operations. The Soils Engineer will keep a record for each pier placed. The record will give the pay length, location, bearing strata, penetration into • bearing strata, and water conditions. Cooperate with the Soils Engineer to facilitate the keeping of these records. END OF SECTION 3.1.6 REINFORCING PLACEMENT. During the concreting operation, place reinforcing when the concrete is at a level to support the bar cage. Make provisions to hold the bar cage in position during the remainder of the concreting. 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Structure Excavating and Backfilling Drainage Structures, Pipe and Fittings 2.0 PRODUCTS 73 -90- 133 -0 SECTION 02411 FOUNDATION DRAINS 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS for products specified herein to the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2.2 SUBMIT MATERIAL CERTIFICATES, signed by the material producer and the Contractor, certifying that aggregate material and gradations comply with, or exceed, specified requirements. 2.1 DRAINAGE PIPE 2.1.1 PERFORATED CORRUGATED POLYETHYLENE PIPE shall meet requirements of ASTM F 449, and shall be manufactured using Type III, Grade 4, Class C polyethylene according to ASTM D 1248, with the exception of the requirement for electrical properties. Crush strength and chemical resistance shall meet requirements of CS 228 -61 and FMA Materials Release No. 693. Pipe diameter shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Pipe and fittings shall be equal to the following: , ADS Perforated Tubing Advanced Drainage System, Inc. 2.2 SOIL FILTER FABRIC 2.2.1 SOIL FILTER FABRIC shall be a nonwoven needle punched polypropylene with an equivalent open size (EOS) of any sieve size between 70 and 100. Minimum tensile strength shall be 175 pounds in stronger direction and 100 pounds in weaker direction, and maximum elongation shall not exceed 35 percent when tested in accord with ASTM D 1682. Maximum water absorption shall be one percent. 2.3 GRANULAR BACKFILL 2.3.1 MINERAL AGGREGATE shall be crushed limestone, dolorite, granite or quartzite, and gravel and sand, or combination thereof. Materials shall be clean, hard, and durable containing no more than one percent of clay lumps or shale and no more than three percent of soft particles when measured by weight. Aggregates shall be free of injurious quantities of dust, soft or flaky particles, loams, alkali, or organic matter. Gradation of aggregate shall be as follows when pipe perforation holes are 0.25 -inch diameter or less or when pipe slots are 0.21 inch wide or less: Gradation Table Cumulative Percentages by Sieve Designation Weight Passing Square -Mesh Sieves 1 -1/2 inches 100 1/2 inch 80 - 100 1/4 inch 70 - 85 No. 10 55 75 No. 20 35 - 70 No. 40 15 - 50 No. 100 0 - 10 No. 200 0 - 8 02411 -1 Section 02220 Section 02430 4`'19 When holes or slots exceed the above opening size, wrap pipe with soil filter fabric to prevent infiltration of rock into pipe openings. Filter screen pipe wraps supplied by the drain tile manufacturer may be used instead of soil filter fabric. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 EXCAVATE trench to the width necessary to properly install pipe. Width of trench from top of pipe to 6 inches below pipe shall be 12 inches wide plus the diameter of pipe. Excavate trench 6 inches lower than invert of pipe. Place a layer of soil filter fabric in the bottom of trench wide enough to totally encapsulate pipe and granular backfill. 3.1.2 PLACE AND COMPACT a layer of granular material atop filter fabric. Shape trench bottom to fully support the lower quadrant of pipe. Excavate recesses for bell joints. 3.1.3 LAY pipe in the center of trench true to grade with a continuous fall in the direction of slope at no less than 0.2 percent. Bells shall face upgrade. Keep pipe and bedding free of dirt, water, and debris. Wrap pipe with soil filter fabric and lap joints 3 inches when perforation exceeds 0.25 -inch diameter or slot width exceeds 0.21 inch. 3.1.4 INSTALL pipe to meet the manufacturer's recommendations. Make changes in directions using 1/8 bends. Cap ends of runs. 3.1.5 PLACE granular backfill on each side and above pipe to a height of 12 inches over top of pipe. Lap soil filter fabric over granular fill and 3 inches up wall. 3.1.6 PLACE AND COMPACT backfill as specified in Section 02220, Structure Excavating and Backfilling. Exercise care in placing material to avoid damage to and drainage pipe. Replace any damaged sections of pipe. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Structure Excavating and Backfilling Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Compaction Control and Testing Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 02430 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, PIPE AND FITTINGS Section 02220 Section 02221 Section 02250 Section 03300 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT shop drawings and product data to the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Submittals shall include, but are not limited to, the following: Inlet Grates and Frames Manhole Covers and Frames Manhole Steps Precast Sections 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE 2.1.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE shall meet requirements of ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 3034, SDR 35 for 6 -inch through 12 -inch pipe diameters. 2.1.2 JOINTS shall be belland spigot rubber gasket meeting requirements of ASTM F 477 and ASTM D 3212. 2.1.3 LUBRICANT for pipes with rubber ring joints shall be water soluble, nontoxic, and nondestructive to pipe or gasket. Lubricant shall have an easily spreadable consistency at all operating temperatures, and shall provide adequate lubrication for assembly and re- assembly, if required, after 20 minutes. Lubricant shall adhere satisfactorily to wet pipe. 2.2 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 2.2.1 PRECAST SECTIONS shall meet requirements of ASTM C 478 using Type I or II portland cement meeting requirements of ASTM C 150. Sizes, shapes, and details of these shall be as shown on the WSDOT Standard Plans 8 -1 or equal. 2.2.2 RING AND COVER AND GRATE AND FRAME shall be ductile iron which meets requirements of ASTM A 536. Ring and cover and grate and frame shall conform to WSDOT Standard Plans B -2 or B -2A, or equal. 2.2.3 MANHOLE STEPS shall be Neenah R- 1981 -Y manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co. Paint with a coal tar enamel protective coating. 2.2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND MIXES shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete, for air - entrained concrete, and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days. 2.2.5 MORTAR FOR PLASTERING BRICK SECTIONS OF MANHOLES shall consist of two parts portland cement, one part masonry cement, and six parts fine sand by volume. 2.2.6 SEALANT for jointing precast sections shall be cold - applied plastic bituminous compound meeting requirements of FS SS -C -153 for Bituminous Plastic Cement, Type I, Asphaltic Base, or preformed flexible plastic gasket meeting requirements of FS SS- S -210A, Type I, rope form equal to Rub'r -nek as . manufactured by K.T. Snyder Company, Inc., 9601 West Tidwell, Houston, TX 77040, telephone 1- 800 -231 -4549. 73- 90 -133- 02430 -1 2.2.7 BEDDING is specified in Section 02221, Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. 2.3 CLEAN OUTS 2.3.1 8" clean out shall be in conformance to WSDOT Standard Plans B -186. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 EXCAVATE BED FOR PIPE AND BACKFILL THE TRENCH as specified in Section 02221, Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. 3.2 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION 3.2.1 LOWER PIPE into trench by use of pipe slings or lifting hairpins to avoid injury of pipe and disturbance of trench bottom. Check line and grade for each section of pipe. Keep surfaces of pipe to be joined and interior of pipe dry and clean. 3.2.2 LAY PIPE with belled or grooved -end upgrade. Commence sewer pipe laying at lowest point in system. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE 3.3.1 INSTALL polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe according to ASTM D 2321. 3.3.2 CLEAN the inside of bell and outside of spigot. Install gasket in bell groove. Lubricate exposed portion of gasket and beveled surface of spigot with lubricant. 3.3.3 INSERT spigot into bell, align pipe, and push pipe home to seal joint to depth specified by the pipe manufacturer. 3.4 PRECAST MANHOLES AND INLETS 3.4.1 SET precast concrete bottom section on compacted subgrade in. Form invert into a semi- circle which conforms to the inside diameter of adjacent sewer sections. Make changes in direction of flow with a smooth curve of a radius as large as base permits. Make changes in size and grade of channels gradually and evenly. Slope floor of structure to channel at no less than 1 inch per foot nor more than 2 inches per foot. 3.4.2 CUT AND GRIND pipe smooth and flush with the inside of wall of structure. Grout opening solid around pipe as it enters the structure. 3.4.3 CLEAN the surface of precast sections to be joined of dirt, mud, and other foreign material. Wipe any moisture from surfaces to be joined and allow to dry thoroughly. Apply mastic joint sealant in sufficient quantity to assure that the annular space between sections is filled and a minimum of a 1/4 -inch bead of mastic is squeezed out of joint when sections are joined. Keep mastic clean during installation. Replace mastic which becomes contaminated. Smooth the interior of joints. 3.4.4 SET ring and frame in a fresh bed of mortar at finish grade. Install adjusting rings in the throat of structure as necessary. 3.4.5 INSTALL CAST IRON STEPS at 12 -inch centers in structures greater than 4 feet deep. Locate top step not greater than 24 inches from finish grade. Grout into walls. 73-90-133-0 END OF SECTION 02430 -2 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Soils Sterilization Asphalt Paving Concrete Paving 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 CRUSHED ROCK BASE COURSE 2.1.1 CRUSHED ROCK BASE COURSE shall meet the gradation requirements of the following table: Base Course % passing 1 -1/4" square sieve 100 % passing -5/8" square sieve 50- 80 % passing -1/4" square sieve 30- 50 % passing No. 40 square sieve 3- 18 % passing No.200 square sieve 7.5 Max. All percentages are by weight Sand equivalent 40 Min. In addition, the crushed rock should conform to Washington State Department of Transportation Specification 9- 03.9(3). 2.2 ASPHALT TREATED BASE COURSE 2.2.1 MATERIALS shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Washington State Department of Transportation Specifications: Asphalt 9 -02.1 Anti - Stripping Additive 9 -02.4 Aggregates 9 -03.6 The grade of paving asphalt shall be AR -4000W meeting the requirements of Section 9- 02.1(4). 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 CRUSHED ROCK BASE COURSE 3.1.1 PLACE CRUSHED ROCK BASE COURSE in the thicknesses shown on the Drawings and compact to a density not less than 98 percent of the maximum density determined by ASTM D 698 -70. 3.2 ASPHALT TREATED BASE COURSE 3.2.1 ASPHALT TREATED BASE shall be spread with a spreading machine equipped with a stationary, vibratory, or oscillating screed or cut -off device. The temperature of the mixture at the time compaction is achieved shall be a minimum of 185 degrees F. 3.2.2 FINAL SURFACE COURSE of the asphalt treated base section, whether constructed in one or more courses or over a protective layer, shall not deviate at any point more than 3/8 inch from the bottom of a 10 -foot straightedge laid in any direction on the surface. 3.2.3 ASPHALT TREATED BASE shall be compacted to a density of not less than 80 percent of the maximum theoretical density established for the mix by WSDOT Test Method 705. 73- 90- 133 -E6 SECTION 02512 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE END OF SECTION 02512 -1 Section 02282 Section 02513 Section 02515 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Pavement Subgrade Excavating and Backfilling Section 02230 Soils Sterilization Section 02282 Aggregate Base Course Section 02512 Pavement Marking Section 02577 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 MINERAL AGGREGATES. Each material source for coarse aggregate (retained No. 8 sieve) and fine aggregate (passing No. 8 sieve and retained on No. 200 sieve) shall meet the requirements of the following tests: Sieve Analysis ASTM C 136 Unit Weight of Slag ASTM C 29 1.2.2 ASPHALT CEMENT shall meet the requirements of the following tests: Ductility ASTM D 113 Flash Point ASTM D 92 Penetration ASTM D 5 Solubility ASTM D 2042 Thin Film Oven Test ASTM D 1754 Viscosity (kinematic) ASTM D 2170 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 ASPHALT MIX. Submit the following to the Owner as shop drawings for each mix to be provided: Field Quality Control Test Results Laboratory Test Results for quality assurance Source and Type of Each Aggregate. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 1.4.1 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. Do not place bituminous mixture upon a wet surface or when surface temperature of underlying course is less than the following: Mat Thickness Minimum Base Temperature Degrees F Degrees C 3 inches (7.5 cm) or greater 40 4 Greater than 1 inch (2.5 cm) but less than 3 inches (7.5 cm) 45 7 1 inch (2.5 cm) or less 50 10 1.4.2 TRAFFIC CONTROL. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic, during paving operations, as required for other construction activities. Provide flagmen, barricades, and warning signs and lights for safe movement of traffic and to cause the least interruption of work. 2.0 PRODUCTS 73- 90- 133 -6 SECTION 02513 ASPHALT PAVING 2.1 AGGREGATE MATERIALS 2.1.1 COURSE AND FINE AGGREGATES shall conform to Washington State Department of Transportation Specification Section 9.03 -8. 2.1.2 MINERAL FILLER shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M17. 02513 -1 2.2 ASPHALT CEMENT AND LIQUID ASPHALT 2.2.1 ASPHALT CEMENT (AC) shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3381, viscosity grade AR 4000. 2.2.2 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT for tack coat shall be either SS -1 or SS -lh diluted to a 50/50 mix of emulsified asphalt and water. 2.2.3 LIQUID ASPHALT for prime coat shall be MC 250. 2.3 ASPHALT - AGGREGATE MIXTURES 2.3.1 SUBMIT JOB MIX FORMULAS for each aggregate mixture. Formulas shall comply with the following: Aggregate Gradation (Total Percent Passing by Weight) Sieve Size 5/8" sieve (square opening) • • 100 1/2" sieve (square opening) . . 90 -100 3/8" sieve (square opening) . . 75- 90 1/4" sieve (square opening) . . 55- 75 U.S. No. 10 sieve 32- 48 U.S. No. 40 sieve 11- 24 U.S. No. 80 sieve 6- 15 U.S. No. 200 sieve 3- 7 Mineral Filler 0- 2 Asphalt % of total mixture 4.0- 7.5 Sand -Silt Ratio . . .5- 10.5 2.3.2 HEAT AND DRY aggregates to provide a paving mixture temperature in conformance with placing conditions, but not to exceed 325F. 2.3.3 MAXIMUM PERMITTED VARIANCES from job -mix formula are as follows: Aggregate passing No. 4 sieve or larger 7.0 percent Aggregate passing No. 8 through 100 sieves 4.0 percent Aggregate passing No. 200 sieve 3.0 percent Asphalt content 0.5 percent 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 ROLL, COMPACT, AND CHECK surface level tolerance of asphalt treated base course as specified in Section 02512, Aggregate Base Course. 3.1.2 PRIME COAT the asphalt treated base course applying 0.2 gallon to 0.5 gallon per square yard. 3.1.3 TACK COAT existing and previously constructed bituminous concrete, portland cement concrete, and similar surfaces applying 0.05 gallon to 0.15 gallon per square yard. Tack coat is not necessary between courses if lower course remains dustfree and dry until upper course is installed. 3.1.4 APPLY soil sterilant as specified in Section 02282, Soils Sterilization. 3.2 PREPARATION AND DELIVERY OF MIX 3.2.1 STORE coarse and fine aggregates separately at the paving.plant. Prevent segregation of aggregate sizes within stockpiles. 3.2.2 HEAT asphalt cement to the viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed throughout mixture. 73 -90- 133 -0 02513 -2 3.2.3 DRY AND HEAT aggregate with moisture contents reduced as necessary to prevent mix from foaming, slumping, or segregating during hauling. 3.2.4 ACCURATELY WEIGH aggregates and weigh or meter asphalt cement to comply with job mix formula. Mix aggregate and asphalt cement to achieve 90 percent to 95 percent of coated particles. 3.2.5 TRANSPORT asphalt cement mix to project site in trucks properly insulated and covered as required to insure the mix is delivered at, or above, minimum laying temperature. 3.3 PLACING MIX 3.3.1 PLACE, SPREAD, AND STRIKE OFF asphalt concrete mix using an acceptable paver at a minimum temperature of 225F. Place inaccessible and small areas by hand. 3.3.2 LAY asphalt strips as wide as practical and in the direction of traffic flow. Begin laying strips at high points of area to be paved. After the first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlay previous strips. 3.3.3 ROLL joints between strips while the previously laid strip is in a hot and readily compactible condition. Tack coat existing concrete surface or cold asphalt pavement where new asphalt abuts. 3.3.4 OFFSET TRANSVERSE JOINTS in succeeding courses not less than 24 inches. 3.3.5 OFFSET LONGITUDINAL JOINTS in succeeding courses not less than 6 inches. 3.4 COMPACTING MIX 3.4.1 BEGIN rolling operations when mixture bears the weight of the roller without excessive displacement. Compact areas inaccessible to rollers with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors. 3.4.2 DURING INITIAL ROLLING, check pavement for crown, grade, and smoothness. Repair displaced areas by loosening with lutes or rakes. Fill depressed areas with hot loose material and continue rolling. 3.4.3 CONTINUE rolling while mixture is still hot for at least three passes or as necessary to provide proper compaction. 3.4.4 PERFORM final rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. 3.4.5 PROTECT final surface from vehicular traffic until it has cooled and hardened and, in no case, sooner than six hours. 3.5 QUALITY CONTROL 3.5.1 TAKE specimens of not less than 3 -inch diameter for each course. Correlate specimen with the location taken. Obtain one specimen for each 500 square yards of each course, but not less than one test per day. Repair test holes by patching to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.5.2 DENSITY. Test compacted asphalt for density. Density shall be a minimum of 97 percent for surface course of recorded laboratory density obtained. Use test method ASTM D 1559 with 50 blows each end of specimen. 3.5.3 THICKNESS. Test compacted asphalt for thickness. Total pavement thickness is not acceptable if less than the thickness shown on the Drawings. 73-90-133-0 02513 -3 3.5.4 SMOOTHNESS. Test compacted asphalt for smoothness. Use a 10 -foot straightedge applied both parallel and perpendicular to the direction of courses. Pavement courses shall not deviate more than the following limits when measured from straightedge surface: Surface Course 1/4 inch 3.5.5 UNCOMPACTED MIX. Test uncompacted asphalt mix. Perform the following tests once for each day's paving: Asphalt Cement Content and Recovery of Asphalt ASTM D 2172 Ductility of Recovered Asphalt Cement ASTM D 113 Extraction AASHTO T 30 Penetration of Recovered Asphalt Cement ASTM D 5 Sampling ASTM D. 979 3.5.6 REMOVE, REPLACE, AND /OR REPAIR pavements not complying with specified requirements as directed by the Owner. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 73-90-133-i1# SECTION 02577 PAVEMENT MARKING 1.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 APPLY paint as follows: 1. When Air and Pavement Temperatures range between 40F and 95F 2. When Inclement Weather is not anticipated within eight hours after application of paint 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT 2.1.1 PAINT shall be in sealed containers with labels indicating the manufacturer's name, specification number or formula, color, batch number, and directions for application. 2.1.2 PAINT shall be homogeneous and easily stirred to a smooth consistency. 2.1.3 PAINT shall conform to FS TT -P -115, FS TT -P -85, or FS TT -P -1952. 2.1.4 PAINT COLOR shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 CLEAN surfaces to be painted of dirt, dust, or sand using brooms, water, or compressed air. 3.1.2 REMOVE OIL DEPOSITS by scrubbing with detergent and water. Seal oil soaked pavement with shellac to prevent bleeding through new paint. 3.1.3 REMOVE OLD PAINT by wire brushing, sandblasting, scraping, or other approved methods. 3.2 APPLICATION 3.2.1 RATE OF APPLICATION. Apply paint uniformly at the rate of 1 gallon per 105 square feet plus or minus 5 square feet. 3.2.2 EQUIPMENT. Apply paint to clean, dry surfaces using pneumatic spraying equipmeni capable of producing clean sharp edges at the rate of coverage specified. 3.2.3 USE guidelines or templates as necessary to control paint application. 3.3 PROTECTION 3.3.1 PLACE suitable'warning signs and traffic barriers to prevent damage to newly painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Utility Excavation and Backfilling Compaction Control and Testing Cast -In -Place Concrete 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA to the Architect- Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Submittals shall include, but are not limited to, the following: Gate Valve and Indicator Post Pipe and Fittings Pressure and Leakage Teat Results Record Drawings 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE - 2.1.1 DUCTILE CAST IRON (DI) PIPE shall be Class 50, Pipe to be joined using restrained mechanical joints shall be class 53, with a working pressure of 350 psi, and shall meet the requirements of AWWA C151 and ANSI A21.51. Joints shall be the rubber - gasket type conforming to AWWA C111 and ANSI A21.11. Pipe shall be cement- mortar lined to meet the requirements of AWWA C104 and ANSI A21.4, with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Fittings shall be ductile cast iron, and shall meet the requirements of AWWA C110. The class of all fittings shall be compatible with working pressure and class of pipe specified. 2.1.2 LUBRICANT for pipes with rubber ring joints shall be water soluble, non - toxic, unable to support bacteria growth, impart no objectionable taste when dissolved in the water, and nondestructive to pipe or gasket. Lubricant shall have an easily spreadable consistency at all operating temperatures, and shall provide adequate lubrication for assembly and re- assembly, if required, after 20 minutes. Lubricant shall adhere satisfactorily to wet pipe. 2.2 VALVES AND BOXES 2.2.1 GATE VALVE shall meet the requirements of AWWA C -500, be UL listed and FM approved, and shall be iron body, bronze mounted, double disc with non - rising stem, with type of ends to fit pipe which they are to be connected. Valve shall have a clear waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of valve, and shall be opened by turning in a counterclockwise direction. Operating nut shall have an arrow cast thereon indicating direction of opening. Valve shall have the manufacturer's name or trademark, pressure rating, and year in which made cast on the body. Design valve for a working pressure equal to, or greater than, that of pipe to which it is connected. 2.2.2 INDICATOR POSTS shall be grinnel indicator post, Fig. 1430 and shall be UL listed and FM approved. Indicator posts shall have integral tamper switch and shall be wired to the fire alarm panel trouble circuit. Indicator posts shall have lock and cable as specified in Section 08700 Hardware and Specialties. 2.3 CONCRETE 2.3.1 CONCRETE for thrust blocks shall be 3,000 psi at 28 days. 73-90-133-0 SECTION 02713 WATER DISTRIBUTION 02713 -1 Section 02221 Section 02250 Section 03300 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 EXCAVATE trench in accord with Section 02221, Utility Excavating and Backfilling. Minimum cover over top of pipe shall be 4 -feet measured from finish grade and shall avoid interference with other utilities. 3.1.2 THOROUGHLY CLEAN interior of pipes and valves of foreign objects prior to lowering in trench. Keep interior clean during construction operations by the use of plugs or other suitable means. 3.1.3 KEEP TRENCH free of water. Do not lay pipe in water, under water, or when unfavorable weather conditions exist. 3.2 BEDDING AND ALIGNMENT OF PIPE 3.2.1 LAY pipe on an even grade free of humps which pocket air. Install mains at grades which permit air to be released at fire hydrants. 3.2.2 BED pipe as specified in Section 02221, Utility Excavating and Backfilling. 3.2.3 ALIGN water main in a straight line. Make deflections at joints according to pipe manufacturer's engineering data for maximum pipe deflections. Install special bends or a sufficient number of short pipe lengths, at no extra expense to the Owner, where pipe deflections exceed manufacturer's maximum pipe deflections. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION AND JOINTING 3.3.1 CLEAN surfaces of pipes at points where pipes are joined. 3.3.2 LUBRICATE GASKET RETAINING GROOVE of ductile iron pipe bell, insert gasket, and press firmly to seat. Apply lubricant to gasket and beveled nose at end of pipe. Insert pipe into bell and push pipe to depth specified by pipe manufacturer. 3.3.3 CONNECT SPECIALTIES AND PIPES of different materials and sizes according to manufacturer's recommendations and the approval of the Architect - Engineer. 3.4 VALVE, INSTALLATION 3.4.1 INSTALL valves, as recommended by the manufacturer and as shown on the Drawings. 3.5 THRUST BLOCKS 3.5.1 INSTALL thrust blocks at bends, tees, valves, hydrants, and ends of mains. Pour thrust blocks against undisturbed earth and in a manner to keep joints and pipe accessible for repair. Size of thrust blocks shall be as shown on the Drawings. Thrust blocks shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. 3.6 BACKFILLING 3.6.1 BACKFILL trenches as specified in Section 02221, Utility Excavating and Backfilling. 3.7 DISINFECTION 3.7.1 DISINFECT DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE with chlorine before acceptance. Each time a section of main is tapped or depressurized for any reason, all portions depressurized must be disinfected. 73-90-133-'0 02713 -2 A, 3.8 FLUSHING OF FIRE LINES 3.8.1 FLUSH FIRE LINES in accordance with NFPA 24, Section 8 -8. 3.9 TESTS 3.9.1 PREPARE water system for testing. Install thrust blocking and allow time for concrete to properly set up. Backfill over top of pipe as required to prevent movement under pressure. If practical, leave joints exposed to allow visual inspection during testing. Install additional temporary bracing as required to withstand appreciable thrust developed while testing. Cap or valve open ends of system. 3.9.2 TEST DOMESTIC WATER PIPE in accord with AWWA C600 -77, Section 4. 3.9.3 TEST DOMESTIC WATER PIPE FOR PRESSURE by subjecting pipe to 150 percent of working pressure at point of testing for a period of not less than two hours and as required to permit inspection of line and marking of defective joints. Supply specified test pressure by means of a hand- operated force pump or other suitable means. Do not allow pressure to change five percent above or below specified test pressure. 3.9.4 TEST DOMESTIC WATER PIPE FOR LEAKAGE after pressure tests are completed and accepted. Test for leakage at 100 psi maintained pressure for two hours. Maximum allowable leakage in gallons per hour shall be determined using the following formula: L = ND x P1/2 where: 7400 L = leakage in gallons per hour N = number of joints in pipe section under test D = pipe diameter in inches P = average test pressure, psig 3.9.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING of fire lines shall be in accordance with NFPA 24, Section 8 -9. The maximum working pressure at the site is 175 psi which requires that mains be tested at not less than 225 psi for 2 hours. A copy of the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate must be provided to Fire Protection Engineering for review and approval. The hydrostatic testing shall be coordinated with a Boeing Representative for observation of the test. 3.9.6 REPAIR defective joints or pipe sections which fail and retest until pipe passes tests. Complete backfilling after approval of tests. 73- 90- 133 - END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Structure Excavating and Backfilling Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Compaction Control and Testing Cast -In -Place Concrete 2.0 PRODUCTS 3.0 EXECUTION 73-90-133-A6 SECTION 02722 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02722 -1 Section 02220 Section 02221 Section 02250 Section 03300 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA to the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Submittals shall include, but are not limited to, the following: Cleanout Covers and Frames Pipe and Fittings Record Drawings 1.3 PROTECTION OF WATER SUPPLIES 1.3.1 LAY domestic water mains paralleling sanitary sewers at least 10 feet horizontally from any existing or proposed sewer. Measure the distance from face to face of pipes. If approved by the Owner, or shown on the Drawings, water main may be laid closer to sewer, provided that water main is laid in a separate trench or on an undisturbed shelf located on one side of sewer at such an elevation that the bottom of water main is at least 18 inches above the top of sewer. 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.1.1 NONPRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS shall meet the following requirements: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe. ASTM D 3034, Type PSM, with SDR of Rubberized ring joints: ASTM D 3212 2.1.2 LUBRICANT for pipes with rubber ring joints shall be water soluble, nontoxic, and nondestructive to pipe or gasket. Lubricant shall have an easily spreadable consistency at all operating temperatures, and shall provide adequate lubrication for assembly and re- assembly, if required, after 20 minutes. Lubricant shall adhere satisfactorily to wet pipe. 2.2 CLEANOUTS 2.2.1 CLEANOUTS shall conform to WSDOT Standard Plans B018b. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND MIXES 2.3.1 CONCRETE MATERIAL AND MIXES shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete, for air - entrained concrete, and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days. 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 EXCAVATE the trench as specified in Section 02221, Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. APr 3.2 BEDDING OF PIPE 3.2.1 BED pipe as specified in Section 02221, Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION AND JOINTING 3.3.1 CLEAN surfaces of pipes at points where pipes are joined. 3.3.2 LUBRICATE THE SPIGOT END of PVC ring jointed pipe. Do not lubricate rubber ring or groove. Insert spigot end into bell and push pipe to the depth specified by the pipe manufacturer. Install nonpressure PVC pipe to meet the requirements of ASTM D 2321. 3.3.3 APPLY SOLVENT to PVC pipe surface to be solvent welded using a natural bristle brush with a width equal to two - thirds of pipe diameter. Apply a coating of solvent and assemble pipe without delay while surfaces are still wet. Secure factory -made sewer service wyes after solvent welding with stainless steel clamps. Make solvent welds in the shop or out of the trench. 3.3.4 CONNECT specialties and pipes of different materials and sizes to meet the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Owner. 3.4 CLEANOUTS 3.4.1 CONSTRUCT cleanouts on service lines of 6 -inch diameter or less at maximum intervals of 100 feet and at changes in direction of 45 degrees or more. Construct cleanouts of the same material as service line. Provide and install a threaded cast iron plug flush with finish grade. Set cleanout in a 16 x 16 x 6 -inch thick concrete collar when located in nonpaved areas. 3.5 BACKFILLING 3.5.1 BACKFILL trenches as specified in Section 02221, Utility Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. 3.6 TESTS - GRAVITY SEWER 3.6.1 PREPARE sewer system for testing. Backfill over top of pipe as required to prevent movement under pressure. If practical, leave joints exposed to allow visible inspection during testing. Cap or plug open ends of system. 3.6.2 TEST FOR INFILTRATION by plugging upper end of line under test. Install a suitable flow measuring device at lower end. Measure amount of water flowing through lower end for a specific period of time. 3.6.3 TEST FOR EXFILTRATION by plugging lower end of line under test. Fill upper end of portion of line to be tested with water to provide a minimum of 5 psi (11.6 feet of head). Do not subject any part of system to a pressure greater than 10.8 psi (25 feet of head). Let water stand for four hours and refill to specified level. After one hour, record new level and convert to gallons. Obtain depth measurement in manholes or other suitable location which allows for accurate measurements. 3.6.4 ALLOWABLE infiltration and exfiltration quantities are as follows: Polyvinyl Chloride 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile per day 3.6.5 REPAIR defective joints or pipe sections which fail and retest until pipe passes tests. Complete backfilling after approval of tests. END OF SECTION 73- 90- 133 -0 02722 -2 SO g' IlgrO on ac s opt u :;: p: < se <: 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Cast in. Place Concrete 2.0 Products 2.1 Provide pre -cast chemically resistant polymer concrete trench drains 8" or. 12" in width where shown on drawings .Drains a*e chal 1 m with built in for!: ?:::w .d >;<no ao s:::::f >:;l2:!► idth . o la>;: . Pes ..:.,.,..:. ... Ps • :.. w :::.:. hs bums shxi:l;< a;:. •" :: >< .> # ► . ' .. . °> by oth ers.. aed—r gr,atco. Cratco to SB;CT1 :0.2725: • POlik NCRETE ENC TRH :t RATNS ranufacture� >. by Acco,_;.: ;;: END OF SECTION Section 03300 r equal. • Concrete Section 03010 Section 03100 Section 03200 Section 03251. Section 03252 Section 03300 ct iori'f :0'3 Section 03600 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION - 3 Concrete Floor Slab Finish Concrete•Formwork, Concrete. Reinforcement Expansion and Contraction Joints Anchors and Inserts Cast -In -Place Concrete rccaoE I'r'cot'rcoocd lnou]:deed Concrctc Pancln Nonshrink Grout 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Cast in Place Concrete 2.0' MATERIALS SECTION 03010 CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB TiND`i4MT FINISH Section 03300 2.1 WAREHOUSE AREA AND MISCELLANEOUS EXPOSED CONCRETE: heavy duty, conductive spark proof metallic hardener black or slate in color conforming A ' S ' T • M ' C-309 /2tia MO#00###Mge 1.9#/100 square feet. + Erift-ea-Hea* Y+ -r ##30#01####PW 2.2 ittiggatiglittidinAtATIM ' ' " W:7 are '' ''''''' ------------ to rebeiVe 68i1ri4 - iidT - daatIng applied in two coats to eliminate pinholes. After curing, apply a top coat of vinyl ester coating resin. 2.2.1 C'H COVERING to be aoturad b5i'Dural lnternati.onal C orp or equal. ra • Tetme, 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: Install according to manufacturers written instructions. Surface of concrete to be free of all laitance and any contaminants and dust free. 2.0 PRODUCTS 3.0 EXECUTION SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Metal Decking Section 05300 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 DESIGN OF FORMWORK shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.2.2 MINIMUM STANDARDS. American Concrete Institute Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, ACI 318, and Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301, shall be the minimum design and construction standards. 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 FORMS AND SHORING MATERIALS to be used are to be determined by the Contractor. 3.1 FORM ERECTION 3.1.1 ERECT FORMS to conform to shapes, lines, and dimensions of the members as shown on the Drawings. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, and shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shapes. 3.1.2 EARTH CUTS may be used as a form for footings and grade beams below grade. 3.2 FORM REMOVAL 3.2.1 REMOVE FORMS to ensure the complete safety of the structure. Where the structure is supported on shores, the removable floor forms, beam and girder sides, column, and similar vertical forms may be removed after 24 hours providing the concrete will not be injured. Supporting forms or shoring shall not be removed until members have acquired sufficient strength to safely support their weight and imposed loads. 1.0 GENERAL 2.0 PRODUCTS 3.0 EXECUTION 73 -90- 133 -1;4 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Reinforcement for Storm Sewer Appurtenances Reinforcement for Pavement and Walks Reinforcement for Site Improvements Strcaoing Tcndono 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS. Fabrication and installation shall meet the requirements of Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, ACI 318. 1.2.2 MILL TESTS. Upon request, furnish certified copies of mill test reports covering chemical and physical properties of reinforcing steel. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS in accord with ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures, General Conditions, General Requirements, and requirements stated herein. Splice lengths shall be shown on the shop drawings. 1.3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS shall be complete enough to permit reinforcement placement without reference to the Drawings. 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 STORE, HANDLE, AND CLEAN REINFORCING as necessary to keep it free of dirt, loose mill scale and rust, paint, oil, or other foreign material that will destroy or reduce bond. 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 REINFORCING BARS shall meet the requirements of Standard Specification for Deformed Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM A 615, Grade 60, and the exceptions to ASTM A 615, listed in ACI 318. 2.1.2 WELDED WIRE FABRIC shall meet the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Welded Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM A 185, or Standard Specifications for Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforced Construction, ASTM A 497. 2.1.3 BAR SUPPORTS shall meet the requirements of ACI 315. Use noncorrosive supports to prevent surface staining where supports are in contact with an exposed concrete surface. 2.1.4 SUPPORTS FOR WELDED WIRE FABRIC IN SLABS -ON -GRADE shall meet the requirements of ACI 315, and shall have a base which will not sink into the subgrade or puncture the vapor barrier. 3.1 PLACING REINFORCEMENT 3.1.1 PLACE REINFORCEMENT BARS accurately and secure adequately to resist displacement. 3.1.2 PLACE FABRIC REINFORCING and lap fabric at least 1 -1/2 meshes plus end extension of wires but not less than 12 inches in structural slabs. Lap at least 1/2 mesh plus end extension of wires but not less than 6 inches, unless 03200 -1 Section 02500 Section 02600 Section 02700 Ccction 03230 A j 19.92 3:l'.3 SUPPORT WELDED WIRE FABRIC IN SLABS-ON-GRADE 2 inches from the upper surface., Hooking and pulling up the fabric as concrete is not acceptable: END OF, SECTION ^dr"}7Cti AvFri 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 03251 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Waterstops Section 03253 Masonry Joints Section 04150 Joint Sealer Section 07900 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.0.1 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER FOR INTERIOR SLABS, which receive a nonasphaltic joint sealant, shall be a foam type composed of closed cell polyethylene which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1564. 2.0.2 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENT, AND CURBS, which receive an asphaltic sealant, shall be a fiber type, composed of cane fibers uniformly saturated with a bituminous binder, which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1751. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 JOINTS IN SLAB -ON -GRADE 3.1.1 INSTALL ISOLATION JOINTS at joints in contact with vertical surfaces such as columns, walls, foundation stems, grade beams, equipment pads and elsewhere as indicated. Provide joint filler at isolation joints and joint filler and sealer at joints in exposed concrete slabs. Install joint filler and sealer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.1.2 CUT SAWED CONTROL JOINTS 1/8 inch wide x 1/5 slab depth in exposed slabs at locations shown on the Drawings. If not shown, locate joints at a maximum of 25 -foot centers each way. Verify the exact location with the Architect - Engineer. Saw control joints after concrete has cured enough to prevent aggregates from being dislodged by the saw but before shrinkage stresses become sufficient to produce cracking. Install joint sealant in joints in exposed slabs. Exterior joints may be tooled. 3.1.3 PROVIDE FORMED KEYWAYS AT LEAST 1 2/2" DEEP IN CONSTRUCTION JOINTS to prevent differential vertical movement of adjoining slabs. Welded wire mesh is continuous through construction joints. 3.1.4 PROVIDE KEYWAYS at least 1 1/2" deep in construction joints in walls, and between walls and footings. 3.1.5 PLACE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints. 3.1.6 WATERSTOPS: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.1.7 CONTRACTION JOINTS IN SLABS -ON- GROUND may be constructed to form panels of patterns as shown using inserts 1/8" to 1/4" wide x 1/4 of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. Contraction joints may be formed by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. 73- 90 -133- 3'4 03251 -1 END OF SECTION 3-90-133-ft 03251 3.2. JOINTS IN STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 3.2.1 LOCATE AND INSTALL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as to least impair the strength and appearance of the structure. Verify the exact location with the Architect-Engineer. 3.2.2 CLEAN AND TREAT JOINTS, before placing new concrete, to provide maximum bond. ' 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 EXPANSION BOLTS shall be Kwik -Bolt Molly Parabolt Wedge Anchor Standard Wej -It 3.0 EXECUTION SECTION 03252 ANCHORS AND INSERTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Headed Studs and Deformed Anchors Section 05061 1.2 DESIGN CAPACITIES 1.2.1 DESIGN CAPACITY OF ANCHORS AND INSERTS shall have been determined by tests performed or witnessed by an independent testing laboratory. Upon request, furnish certified copies of these test results. 2.0 PRODUCTS one of the following types and manufacture: Hilti Fastening Systems The Molly Company Phillips Drill Company, Inc. Wej -It Corporation 2.1.2 EXPANSION FLUSH ANCHORS shall be Phillips red head self - drilling anchors manufactured by Phillips Drill Company, Inc. 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL ANCHORS AND INSERTS in accord with the manufacturer's 'recommendations. 3.1.2 GROUT MASONRY CELLS full so that there is a minimum of 6 inches of solid concrete all around expansion bolts or expansion flush anchors installed in masonry. 03252 -1 • END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Granular Fill Storm Sewers SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section 02220 Section 02500 anOre ? =<::laor S3 ab'inih Section 0301. Join Filler .rid Sealer Section 07900 Special Interior Floor Coatings Section 09885 1.2 CONCRETE QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP 1.2.1 MINIMUM STANDARDS. American Concrete Institute Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, ACI 318, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301, and Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials, ACI 117, 81 shall be the minimum design and construction standards. Keep at least one copy of ACI 301 in the field office at all times. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 CONCRETE MIX. Submit the following to the Architect - Engineer as shop drawings, in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements, for each mix to be provided. Make no alterations in materials without approval. Aggregate gradation Compressive strength Percent air content Pounds of aggregate per cubic yard Pounds of cement per cubic yard Pounds of water per pound of cement Slump in inches Source of each aggregate Type and quantity of admixtures used 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.4.1 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS. Conform to ACI 306, Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting. 1.4.2 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS. Conform to ACI 305, Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 PORTLAND CEMENT shall meet Type II. the requirements of ASTM C 150, Type 2.1.2 NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATES shall meet the requirements Aggregate shall be from a source approved by the Washington Department. 2.1.3 ADMIXTURES 1. Air - Entraining Admixtures shall conform 2. Water - Reducing or Retarding Admixtures, ASTM C 494, Type A, Type B, or Type D. 3. Accelerating Admixtures, if used, shall to ASTM C 494, Type C or Type E. 4. Calcium Chloride shall not be used. 73-90-133-0 03300 -1 of ASTM C 33. State Highway to ASTM C 260. if used, shall conform to be nonchloride and conform I or ............. 2.1.4 CURING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS shall the requirements of ASTM C 309, and shall manufacture: Sealco 309 Dress and Seal #18 CS -309 ABCO Cure and Seal I Acryseal Kure -N -Seal concrete: >hardene as ind` 2.1.6 IIARDENER ohall bc a fluooilicatc e€aeturc . Fluohard Harbeton Pena -Lith 2.2 CONCRETE MIXES 2.2.1 MIX CONCRETE to provide a compressive strength as shown on the Drawings, air content of five percent to seven percent, and maximum slump of 3 inches. Use minimum cement content of 5 -1/2 sacks per cubic yard.- 2 .2 Sub mix design to architect for . chemi 04 3.0 EXECUTION 73- 90- 133 - be acrylic base compounds, meeting be one of the following types and 03300 -2 Gifford -Hill & Company, Inc. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. W.R. Meadows, Inc. Nox -Crete Chemicals, Inc. Protex Industries, Inc. Sonneborn Division of Contech, Inc. ompounds shall be compatible : wit h bated by: manufacturers literature hardcncr, and ohall bc one of the L & ?S Construction Chcmioalo, Inc. Nox Crctc Chcmicalo, Inc. W.R. Meadows, Inc. approval. 2.3 CONCRETE PRODUCTION 2.3.1 PRODUCE AND DELIVER READY -MIXED CONCRETE in accord with ASTM C 94. Excessive slump or more than one hour between mixing and placing will be considered as a basis for rejection of the load. ver : ond as manufacture by ua1 .... 'uf : G ori s tr u'can 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 CLEAN EQUIPMENT for mixing and tr concrete. Forms shall be thoroughly wetted (except in freezing weather) or oiled. Clean reinforcement of ice, dirt, rust, scale, or other coatings. Remove debris, water, and ice from the place of deposit of concrete. Remove laitance and other unsound material from hardened concrete before additional concrete is added. 3.1.2 PLACE SLIP SHEET so that sheet is continuous from form to form and the surfaces of the form are covered. When placing concrete against previously placed slabs, slip sheet shall cover the edge of the previously placed slab, so as to provide two layers of the slip sheet between the two slabs. Where slip sheets meet, they need only be overlapped sufficiently to assure coverage of the substrate. 3.2 CONVEYING AND PLACING 3.2.1 CONVEY CONCRETE FROM TRUCKS to the place of final deposit by methods that will prevent separation or loss of materials. 3.2.2 CHUTING, PUMPING, AND PNEUMATIC CONVEYING EQUIPMENT shall be of a size and design that ensures a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end without separation of materials. 3.2.3 PUMP CONCRETE to conform with the report recommendations of ACI Committee 304, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 3.2.4 DEPOSIT CONCRETE as nearly as practical in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Place concrete at a rate so that concrete is plastic and flows readily into the spaces between the bars. Concrete contaminated by foreign material shall not be used unless approved by the Architect - Engineer. When placing is once started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until placement of the panel or section is completed. to prevent damage to thc deck. 3.3 CONSOLIDATION 3.3.1 CONSOLIDATE CONCRETE in accord with ACI 309. 3.4 FINISHING 3.4.1 FLATWORK. Floor finish shall be in accord with ACI 301, Chapter 11. The following finishes shall be used, unless noted otherwise: 1. Troweled Finish. For floors intended as walking surfaces or for reception of floor coverings, floor surface shall conform to a Face Floor Flatness of F30. At rooms noted on the drawings to receive Super Flat Floor, the finish floor surface shall conform to Face Floor Flatness Number of F80. 2. Broom or Belt Finish. For pavements, finish shall be true planed within 1/2 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10 -foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. 3.4.2 FORMED SURFACES. The following finishes shall be used, unless noted otherwise: 1. Rough Form Finish. For concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. Patch tie holes and defects. Chip off fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height. 2. Smooth Form Finish. For concrete exposed to public view. Form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. Patch tie holes and defects. Completely remove fins. 3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION 3.5.1 CURE FORMED SURFACES by moist curing while forms are in place. 3.5.2 APPLY CURING- SEALING COMPOUND immediately after the finishing of flatwork is completed, in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations, to meet or exceed ASTM C 309. Coverage shall not exceed 300 square feet per gallon. Use a compound which will not interfere with the bond of subsequent coatings. 3.5.3 APPLY A SECOND COAT OF CURING - SEALING COMPOUND to exposed concrete floors at the completion of construction in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5.4 APPLY THREE COATS OF HARDENEII to floors in Rooms 100, 101, 103, 105, 107, 114, 115, 120, 121, 1231 125 in accord with thc manufacturcr'o to receive a kardcecr. 73- 90 -133- 1'6 03300 -3 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.6.1 TESTS. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Architect- Engineer, a test set is required to be made for each 150 cubic years of structural concrete or 5,000 square feet of surface area, but at least one test set per class of concrete for each day's concreting. Each test set shall include the following: 1. Three Compression Test Specimens made, tested, and evaluated in accord with ACI 301 2. Slump Test made in accord with ASTM C 143 3. Test for Entrained Air Content in accord with ASTM C 231 or ASTM C 173 4. Floor flatness in accord with Face Floor Flatness Numbers. 3.7 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS 3.7.1 DEPRESS FLOORS for topping and floor finishes as required and provide slopes to drains as shown or as appropriate to the location. 3.7.2 PROVIDE SLOPES TO DRAINS as shown or as appropriate to the location. 3.7.3 RTi1'CIt TO SECTION 9889. &PF3CIAL INTERIOR FLOOR COATINC& for coating to be applicd at Room 102, Battcry Chargc Arc a. END OF SECTION 73-90-13346 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS 1.1.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS showing details and reinforcing steel to the Architect - Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.2.1 HANDLE MEMBERS in a manner that prevents damage at all times. Do not turn members over on edges or corners so that chipping of exposed edges occurs. 2.0 PRODUCTS SECTION `! 0'3.400 CONCRETE <:T: xI:�UP; >.G�AII >:F�PiNEL 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 PORTLAND CEMENT shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type I. 2.1.2 AGGREGATE shall conform to ASTM C 33. 2.1.3 REINFORCING shall be welded wire fabric conforming to ASTM A 185 or reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM A 615. 2.1.4 CONCRETE shall have a minimum compression strength at 28 days of 4,000 psi. 2.1.5 CAST -IN PLATES shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 36. 2.1.6 FINISH shall be smooth for concrete tilt -up wall panels. 2.1.7 CAST in accurate molds designed to withstand high frequency vibration. Place reinforcing accurately according to detail. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL CONCRETE tilt -up wall panels at locations shown on the Drawings. 3.1.2 ERECTORS shall be competent, experienced workmen, and shall erect concrete tilt -up wall panels in accord with the previously mentioned codes and best accepted practice. 3.1.3 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES shall be as outlined in Division V, Section 5, of PCI MNL -116. 3.1.4 MAKE CONNECTIONS and welds in accord with drawings, accepted industry standards, and best accepted practice. 3.1.5 HOLES AND KNOCK -OUTS in concrete tilt -up wall panels shall be coordinated and cast in by the general contractor. 3.1.6 GENERAL CONTRACTOR to coordinate with other trades for the installation of anchors, inserts, embedded plates, hangers, electrical outlets, etc. 3.1.7 GENERAL CONTRACTOR to determine location of lifting inserts and additional reinforcement for lifting, transporting, and erecting the concrete tilt -up wall panels. 73- 90- 133 -1 END OF SECTION 03400 -1 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 NONSHRINK GROUT is a high strength nonshrink material for application at the following locations: Under steel base plates Under precast concrete panels 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 NONSHRINK GROUT shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 827. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 GROUT shall be nonmetallic, and shall contain no chlorides, aluminum powder, gassing agents, or gypsum. Grout shall provide minimum compressive strengths of 3,000 psi at one day and 6,000 psi at 28 days. Grout shall be one of the following types and manufacture: Type 713 Master Builders Type 588 W.R. Meadows, Inc. - Sonogrout Sonneborn Contech Five Star Grout U.S. Grout Corporation 2.1.2 BUILD FORMWORK FOR GROUT to adequately confine it until it hardens to prevent leakage. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 CLEAN AREA thoroughly of oil, grease, scale, laitance, and foreign material prior to placing grout. 3.1.2 SATURATE AREA thoroughly for 24 hours prior to placing grout. Remove free water just prior to grouting. 3.2 MIXING 3.2.1 MIX GROUT in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mix no more grout than can be placed in a period of ten minutes. Do not retemper. 3.3 PLACING 3.3.1 PLACE GROUT in a fashion to completely fill the space. Where the grout flows into the void, the minimum space between members being grouted is 1 inch. If grout is poured, pour grout from one side, always maintaining a 6 -inch grout "head." Forms must provide venting to avoid entrapment of air. 3.4 CURING 3.4.1 WITHIN TWENTY MINUTES AFTER PLACING, cover the grout with wet rags or burlap and keep continuously wet for 24 hours. 73-90-133-# SECTION 03600 NONSHRINK GROUT END OF SECTION CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04. PHASE III DIVISION - 4 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Erecting Architectural Pt Concrete with Mortar Nonshrink Grout Erecting Unit Masonry With Mortar Mortar for Tile setting Bede 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.2.1 DELIVER MORTAR MATERIALS, other than aggregate and water, in sealed and labeled packages. 1.2.2 STORE MORTAR MATERIALS in a manner that prevents deterioration or intrusion of foreign material. Material that has become unsuitable for good construction shall not be used. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS 1.3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS. During cold weather, store and mix mortar materials, incorporate into masonry work, and protect to meet the requirements of the Uniform Building Code. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 PORTLAND CEMENT. Type I or III, Type II, ASTM C 150 2.1.2 MASONRY CEMENT. ASTM C 91 2.1.3 LIME. Quicklime, ASTM C 5, or hydrated lime, Type S, ASTM C 207. 2.1.4 MORTAR AGGREGATE. ASTM C 2.1.5 WATER. Clean and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, or organic materials 2.1.6 AIR - ENTRAINING ADMIXTURES. ASTM C 260 added in accord with the manufacturer's instructions. 2.1.7 ANTI - FREEZE COMPOUNDS shall not be used. 2.1.8 CALCIUM CHLORIDE shall not be used as an accelerator. 2.2 MORTAR MIXES 2.2.1 MORTAR FOR MASONRY shall be Type S in accord with ASTM C 270, and shall have a minimum 28 -day strength of 1,800 psi. 2.2.2 GROUT FOR REINFORCED MASONRY shall conform to ASTM C 476, shall have a slump of 10 -1/2 inches to 11 inches as tested according to ASTM C 143, and shall have a 28 -day strength of 2,500 psi. Where required, grout should be plastic, suitable for pumping without separation of constituents. 2.3 RETEMPERING MORTAR 2.3.1 MORTAR may be retempered, unless hereinbefore disallowed, by adding water within a basin formed with mortar and by reworking the mortar within the water. Discard mortar which is unused two hours after initial mixing. 3.0 EXECUTION 73-90-133-0 SSCT:.2O MORTAR 04100 -1 Ccction 03450 Section 03600 Section 04200 Cection 09300 3 -90 -133 - 3.1 TESTING ;3.1.1 LABORATORY TESTS to determine the compressive strength and water .retention shall be provided, prior to. construction, for'each mortar mix not in accord with the materials and proportions set forth in,ASTM C.270 for type. S mortar. 3.1.2 FIELD TESTS to determine the compressive strength of mortar shall be Provided in accord with ASTM C 780 for each 5,000 square feet of wall but not less than two such tests per building.. END.. OF 'SECTION 1.O GENERAL SECT' • 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Anchors and Inserts Installation of Masonry Accessories Weld -on Adjustable Anchors 3.0 EXECUTION MASONRY ?' >ACCES SORES' END OF SECTION Section 03252 Section 04200 Section 05500 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.2.1 STORE REINFORCING off the ground. Reinforcing shall be free of loose rust or other coatings that reduce bond. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPRESSIBLE FILLERS 2.1.1 COMPRESSIBLE FILLER AT MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS shall be one of the following types and manufacture: Brick -Seal Construction Gaskets, Inc. Neo -Seal IV Williams Products, Inc. 2.1.2 COMPRESSIBLE FILLER AT EXPANSION JOINTS shall be 1 -1/2 -inch thick open cell polyurethane foam gaskets, and shall be one of the following types and manufacture: 1320 Series Construction Gaskets, Inc. Everlastic Foam Williams Products, Inc. 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL ACCESSORIES, as masonry walls are being laid, as specified in Sections 04200. 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mortar for Unit Masonry Masonry Accessories Anchor Bolts 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 FIRE RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS. Minimum equivalent thickness (volume of masonry unit minus volume of cores divided by face area) of masonry units for fire - resistant walls and partitions shall be as follows: Coarse Aggregate Siliceous Gravel 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.3.1 STACK MASONRY UNITS off the ground in such a manner that air circulation occurs. Protect masonry units so they are not wetted by rain, snow, or capillary action. Upon delivery by the distributor or manufacturer, inspect masonry units, prior to installation in the wall, to insure the color match with the approved sample panel. Handle carefully to avoid chipping, and store on pallets or concrete slab until ready for use. Properly protect the faces of glazed masonry units for delivery, storage, and handling. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS 1.4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS. During cold weather, store, erect, and protect masonry materials to meet the requirements of the Uniform Building Code. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 HOLLOW LOAD - BEARING AND NONLOAD- BEARING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 90, Grade N, Type I,. Units shall be manufactured with normal weight aggregate. Units shall have a minimum 28 -day compressive strength (fm') as shown on the Drawings. Special shapes, including end and jamb blocks, solid top blocks, and lintel and bond beam blocks, etc., shall be furnished as shown or required unless noted otherwise. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION OF UNIT MASONRY 3.1.1 JOINING OF WORK. Where fresh masonry joins masonry that is partially or totally set on concrete, the surface to be joined shall be free of loose material and lightly wetted. When necessary to "stop off" a horizontal masonry run, rack back one -half length at each course and, if grout is used, stop grout 4 inches back of rack. Toothing is not permitted except upon written approval of the Architect - Engineer. 3.1.2 LAYING UP MASONRY. Masonry shall be laid up true and plumb, with special units (corners, jamb blocks, headers, fillers, closers, fitters, etc.) as required to form corners, returns, openings, and offsets and to maintain a proper bond throughout the length of wall. 73 -90- 133 -6 SEGT:XON;: 0.4200 ...................... .... UNr1..; : MASONRY: Minimum Equivalent Thickness (inches) 4 Hour 3 Hour 2 Hour 1 Hour 6.7 5.7 4.5 3.0 04200 -1 Section 04100 Section 04150 Section 05070 3.1.3 CUTTING OF UNITS. Avoid cutting masonry units if possible. If cutting of concrete masonry units is necessary, it shall be done with a carborundum wheel with junctions and joints carefully and accurately fitted. No piece shorter than 4 inches shall be used at any vertical corner of jamb. 3.1.4 BONDING. Masonry shall be laid up in running bond. 3.1.5 MORTAR BEDDING 1. Thickness. Unless indicated otherwise, horizontal and vertical mortar joints shall be 3/8 inch thick. 2. Hollow Units. Place mortar bedding under the face shells of all units but do not extend across webs, except full mortar bedding is required under starter courses of units laid on footings, walls, lintels, and beams. Provide full mortar bedding for all units in piers, columns, and pilasters. Provide mortar at webs adjacent to cells to be filled with grout and at other locations shown on the Drawings. Apply mortar over the full thickness and height of face shells or solid end faces and units shoved tight to form vertical joints. 3.1.6 BUILD MASONRY BEAMS AND LINTELS in place over masonry openings where masonry construction continues above, unless steel lintels are shown on the Drawings. 1. Shoring. Provide a level platform of wood shoring, or other approved means of support, of proper elevation while members are being built in place. Keep shoring in place for a minimum of seven days or until member has gained sufficient strength to support load. 2. Mortar Bedding. Lay units end to end with full mortar coverage on abutting edges; the joints shall be shoved tight. Provide a minimum of 8 inches of bearing, set in a full bed of mortar, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 3. Place Reinforcing Steel accurately and support in the cavity. 4. Grouting. Fill cavity with grout and carefully rod or vibrate to insure complete filling and proper embedment of reinforcement. Take care to prevent displacement of reinforcement. Screed off excess grout and level. Lay,next succeeding course of masonry in a full mortar bed. 3.1.7 BOND BEAMS. Construct bond beams at the top of concrete masonry unit walls and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings. Unless indicated otherwise, the minimum bond beam reinforcement shall be two No. 4 bars in 6 -inch and 8 -inch bond beams and two No. 5 bars in 10 -inch and 12 -inch bond beams. Bed, reinforce, and grout bond beams the same as masonry lintels. 3.1.8 MISCELLANEOUS GROUTING. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, fill cores of concrete masonry units solid with grout where required to secure anchors and bolts; at metal frames; and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings. Fill heads and jambs of metal frames solid with grout. 3.1.9 EXPANSION JOINTS shall be nontinuous, 1 inch wide, from the top of the wall to the bottom of the wall. F with 1 -1/2 inch thick, compressible filler compressed to 1 inch thick. 3.1.10 CONSTRUCT EXPANSION JOINTS TO RECEIVE PREFORMED SEALANTS plumb, straight, and in alignment with adjacent courses with both sides parallel, 1 inch apart, with bed joints struck flush. 73-90-133-4E? 04200 -2 3.1.11 BUILD OPENINGS AND CHASES for heating, plumbing, and electrical ducts, pipes, and conduits into masonry walls. Cutting of units to accommodate the work of others shall be performed by masonry mechanics. Keep chases free from mortar and debris. 3.1.12 TOPS OF WALLS AND PARTITIONS ABUTTING STEEL STRUCTURE. Install compressible filler, compressing a 2 -inch filler into a 1 -inch space. Hold filler back 1 inch from the face of masonry. 3.2 TOOLING AND POINTING 3.2.1 TOOLING AND POINTING. Joints shall be struck flush, and, after mortar has partially set but is still sufficiently plastic to bond, tool joints with a tool which compacts mortar and presses excess mortar out of the joint rather than dragging it out. Joints shall be made with a straight, clean line. 3.2.2 CONCAVE JOINTS. Joints shall be tooled concave at exposed concrete masonry. 3.2.3 POINTING. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed, and then tooled. 3.3 GROUTING 3.3.1 MASONRY shall have vertical alignment to provide continuous unobstructed cores or cavities which shall be grouted in accord with the following: Least Clear Dimensions Grout Pour Cell Maximum Width of Dimensions Height Grout Space (Inches x Cleanouts Grout Type (Feet) (Inches) Inches) Required* Coarse 24 3 3 x 4 Yes* Cleanouts may be omitted if approved provisions are made to keep the grout space clean prior to grouting. 1. Clear Dimension is the cell or grout space width less mortar projections. 2. Place Grout in continuous pour in grout lifts not exceeding 6 feet. 3. Increase Grout Space Width by the diameter of the horizontal bars in the grout space. 4. Provide Cleanouts in the bottom course at every vertical bar but do not space more than 32 inches on centers for solidly grouted masonry. 3.3.2 GROUTING shall be done, wherever possible, from the inside face of masonry. Use extreme care to prevent any grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. If any grout or mortar does contact the face of such masonry, it shall be immediately removed. Protect sills, ledges, offsets, etc., from droppings of mortar and protect door jambs and corners from damage during construction. 3.3.3 STOP GROUT POUR 1 -1/2 inches below the top of a masonry course to form a key when grouting is stopped for one hour or longer. 3.4 REINFORCING 3.4.1 HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL REINFORCING shall be accurately positioned as shown on the Drawings and rigidly secured against displacement. Reinforcing 73-90-133-10 04200 -3 1 bars shall be straight, except for bend around corners and where bends or hooks are detailed on the Drawings. 3.4.2 FOUNDATION DOWELS that do not line up with cores or cavities shall not be sloped more than one horizontal in six vertical. Grout dowels into a core in vertical alignment, even though it is in an adjacent core to vertical wall reinforcing. 3.4.3 SECURE VERTICAL REINFORCING BARS in position at the top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 200 -bar diameters or 10 feet. Do not begin high -lift grouting until reinforcing is in the cores or cavities and secured in position. 3.4.4 LAP BARS as indicated on the Drawings. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5.1 TESTS. Before construction begins and for every 5,000 square feet of masonry - bearing wall construction, make and test a set of three prisms. Testing shall comply with the requirements of ASTM E 447 and the Uniform Building Code. Construction of specimens shall be under field conditions. 3.5.2 TESTS. Before and during construction, verify the strength of the individual units used in masonry bearing wall construction by testing as specified in ASTM C 140. 3.6 CLEANING 3.6.1 CLEAN MASONRY, removing dirt, mortar, stains, and other defacement, after completion of masonry work, or after liability from stain or other operations on the building is passed. The use of wire brushes, strong acids, or solutions which might cause discoloration to work, disintegration of mortar, or adjacent materials is not permitted. Start cleaning down at the top and continue down until such work is finished. Pointing shall be inspected and any imperfections repointed. 3.7 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK 3.7.1 PROTECT MASONRY from damage or staining. END OF SECTION Metal Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Ccction CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PEASE III DIVISION - 5 05060 Welding 05061 Stud Welding 05070 Bolting 05100 Structural Steel 05300 Metal Decking 05410 Cold- Formed Metal Stud System 05500 Metal Fabrications 05800 Expunoion Control 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Stud Welding Structural Steel Metal Deck 3.0 EXECUTION 73- 90- 133 - SECTION 05060 WELDING 1.2 OUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP 1.2.1 MINIMUM STANDARDS. The codes and specifications listed below are the minimum construction standards and form a part of these Specifications: American Institute of Steel Construction, Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings American Welding Society, Specification for Welding Sheet Steel in Structures, AWS D1.3 American Welding Society, Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1 1.2.2 WELDERS shall be certified in accord with the American Welding Society, and, upon request, shall furnish certification. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 WELDING ELECTRODES FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL shall be E70, unless approved otherwise by the Owner. 3.1 ERECTION 3.1.1 FIELD WELD CONNECTIONS only where shown on the Drawings or otherwise approved by the Architect - Engineer. 3.1.2 WELDING PROCEDURES, including the necessary weather protection and preheat requirements, shall be in strict accordance with AWS D1.1. 3.2 INSPECTION 3.2.1 TESTING LABORATORY shall make an inspection of all the shop and field- welded structural steel connections. Welds to be Inspected: The following welds shall be inspected by the methods given below without cost to the Contractor. All full and partial penetration welds shall be checked 100 percent by ultrasonic testing. Of all fillet and other remaining welds, 25 percent shall be checked•by magnetic particle testing. All welding shall be checked by visual means and by other methods deemed necessary by the welding inspector. Where radiographic testing is performed, it shall consist of one spot teat per weld. When a spot radiographic shows defects that require repair, the remainder of that weld shall be radiographed at the expense of the Contractor. 05060 -1 Section 05061 Section 05100 Section 05300 Where ultrasonic testing is performed, it shall consist of one spot test per weld. When spot testing reveals discontinuities that require repair, the remainder of that weld shall be tested ultrasonically at the expense of the Contractor. Standards of Acceptance: Welds tested by radiographic and ultrasonic methods shall be as given in AWS D1.1. Defective Welds: All welds found defective and repaired shall be reinspected by the same methods originally used and this reinspection shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for repair of any defects found, including preparation of the design of repair methods suitable to the Architect, all costs of the repair itself, and inspection of the repaired area. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 05061 STUD WELDING 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Welding Section 05060 Structural Steel Section 05100 Metal Deck Section 05300 1.2 QUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP 1.2.1 WELD STUDS TO STEEL in accord with American•Welding Society, Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 HEADED CONCRETE ANCHOR STUDS AND HEADED SHEAR CONNECTOR STUDS shall be of uniform diameter, heads shall be concentric and normal to the shaft, and the weld end shall be chamfered and solid fluxed. Studs, after welding, shall be free of any substance which would interfere with their function as an anchor. 1. Studs shall be made from cold drawn bar stock conforming to ASTM A 108, Grades 1010 through 1020. 2. Studs shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi and a minimum elongation of 20 percent. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 WELDING 3.1.1 SHOP WELD CONCRETE ANCHOR STUDS in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations. Test welds in accord with AWS D1.1. 3.1.2 FIELD WELD SHEAR CONNECTOR STUDS to supports through deck units in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations and AWS D1.1. Do not weld shear studs through two layers of deck units at lapped ends unless top sheet has been pre- punched. 3.1.3 INSPECTION OF SHEAR STUD WELDS shall be performed by the testing laboratory, and shall follow the procedures in AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 05070 BOLTING 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Concrete Section 03100 Masonry Section 04200 Structural Steel Section 05100 Rough Carpentry Section 06100 1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA 1.2.1 BOLTS CONNECTING TWO PIECES OF STRUCTURAL STEEL shall be designed and installed in accord with the Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings and Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 bolts. Connections shall be friction bearing type with threads included in the shear plane, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 1.2.2 BOLTS CAST IN MASONRY shall be designed in accord with the Specification for the Design and Construction of Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry.Uniform Building Code. 1.2.3 BOLTS CONNECTING WOOD TO WOOD, STEEL, CONCRETE, OR MASONRY shall be designed in accord with the National Design Specification for Wood Construction, 1988 Edition.Uniform Building Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS OF FRAMING MEMBERS to the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements, including the type, size, and length of all bolts. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 BOLTS CONNECTING STRUCTURAL STEEL shall be heavy hexagon structural bolts with heavy hexagon nuts and required washers, and shall conform to ASTM A 325, bearing Type -X bolts shall be 7/8 inch diameter, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 2.1.2 HEADED ANCHOR BOLTS CAST IN CONCRETE OR MASONRY shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 307. 2.1.3 NONHEADED ANCHOR BOLTS, either straight or bent, cast in concrete or masonry shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 36. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION 3.1.1 USE THE TURN -OF -NUT METHOD to tighten high strength A 325 bolts, unless approved otherwise by the Architect - Engineer. Flat, hardened, circular washers are required at all oversized and slotted holes. 3.1.2 OVERSIZED OR LONG SLOTTED HOLES used in the outer ply of connections shall be provided with plate washers or continuous bars at least 5/16 inch thick with standard holes. Size to completely cover the hole after installation. 3.1.3 ANCHOR BOLTS SUPPORTING COLUMN BASEPLATES. shall be double nutted to support members until grout is placed. 3.2 INSPECTION 3.2.1 TESTING LABORATORY shall observe the placement of all bolts to assure proper installation. 73- 90- 133 -0 END OF SECTION 05070 -1 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Grout for Base Plates Section 03600 Welding Section 05060 Stud Welding Section 05061 Bolting Section 05070 Metal Fabrications Section 05500 Sprayed Fireproofing Section 07250 1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA 1.2.1 MEMBERS AND CONNECTIONS not shown on the Drawings shall be designed by the Contractor to meet the requirements of the current issue of the Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings published by the American Institute of Steel Construction. One -sided or other types of eccentric connections are permitted only with the approval of the Architect - Engineer. Make proper provisions to prevent excessive stresses wherever piles of material, erection equipment, or other loads are carried during erection. 1.2.2 ALLOWABLE LOADS. When details or reactions are not shown, select connections to support maximum end reactions using Tables 2 -27 through 2 -45 in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction for the given shape, span, and steel specified for the subject member. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF BUILDING CODES 1.3.1 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS listed below form a part of these Specifications: Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, except Section 4.2.1 Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS to the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Prepare in accord with AISC Structural Steel Detailing, Chapter No. 1. Include the type and size of bolts and welds, grade of steel material, and type of paint. Erection plans shall include the following: Dimensioned location of members Layout for framing including framing around openings Size of referenced members 1.5 CONNECTIONS 1.5.1 SHOP CONNECTIONS shall be welded, unless shown otherwise. 1.5.2 FIELD CONNECTIONS shall be bolted, unless shown otherwise. 1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.6.1 STORE MEMBERS above ground on skids or other supports to keep free of dirt, grease, and other foreign materials. 1.7 CERTIFICATION FOR POSITION AND ALIGNMENT 1.7.1 STEEL ERECTOR shall furnish to the Architect - Engineer a written certification stating that the steel is within tolerance with respect to position, plumbness, level, and alignment. 73-90-133-0 05100 71 1.7.2 CERTIFICATION shall be received within ten days after final tightening and welding. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 36 with 36 ksi yield strength or ASTM A 572 with 50 ksi yield strength, as shown on the Drawings. 2.1.2 STRUCTURAL TUBING shall meet ASTM A 500, Grade B, with a minimum yield strength of 46 ksi. 2.1.3 DAMPPROOFING COMPOUND shall be a solvent- based, fiber reinforced, semi - mastic bitumen or asphalt compound. 2.2 FABRICATION 2.2.1 STRAIGHTENING. Material shall be clean and straight. If straightening or flattening is necessary, it shall be done by a process and in a manner that will not injure the material. Sharp kinks or bends shall be cause for rejections. 2.2.2 PROVIDE HOLES IN MEMBERS to permit connecting the items specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Holes shall not be made or enlarged by burning, nor will the burning of unfair holes in the shop or field be acceptable. 2.2.3 COPES, CUTS, HOLES, AND ALL RE- ENTRANT CORNERS shall be cut, not chipped, notch free to a 1/2 -inch minimum radius. 2.2.4 SHOP COAT. After inspection and before leaving the shop, thoroughly clean steel work, by effective means, of all loose mill scale, rust, splatter, slag or flux deposit, oil, dirt, and other foreign matter. Shop paint exposed structural steel with one coat of Tnemec 99 or 20 -pound red lead applied thoroughly and evenly at a rate of not more than 400 square feet per gallon. Apply paint to dry surfaces only.. Members to be encased in concrete or to receive sprayed fireproofing shall not be shop painted. The top flange of beams to receive shear studs shall not be painted. 2.2.5 MAKE PIECE IDENTIFICATION FOR EXPOSED MEMBERS so the markings are not visible after the piece is set into place. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION 3.1.1 ERECT STRUCTURAL STEEL in a safe and orderly manner. When required, submit the program for erection to the Architect- Engineer for approval before erection is begun. Carry steel work up true and plumb, and use temporary bracing wherever necessary to take care of all loads to which the structure may be subjected during erection, including erection equipment and operation of same. Leave such bracing in place as long as required for safety. 3.1.2 PERFORM FINAL BOLT TIGHTENING AND WELDING after members have been positioned and aligned in accord with tolerance requirements of Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 3.1.3 BASE PLATES. Support column base plates on double nutted anchor bolts until the support members have been plumbed, following which the entire bearing area shall be grouted solid with nonshrink grout as specified in Section 03600, Nonshrink Grout. Upset threads of bolts to prevent nuts from backing off. 73-90-133-0 05100 -2 3.1.4 USE DRIFTPINS to bring together the several parts only; do not use in a manner that distorts or damages the metal. 3.2 FIELD PAINTING 3.2.1 TOUCHUP all damaged or abraded areas, which were originally shop painted, with the same materials and at the same coverage rates as the original shop coating. 3.3 DAMPPROOFING 3.3.1 BRUSH APPLY two coats of dampproofing to all steel surfaces exposed to, earth or granular fill. Apply in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF. SECTION 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 05300 METAL DECKING 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Welding Section 05060 Chcar Connector Stud° Ccction 05864 Sprayed Fireproofing Section 07250 1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA 1.2.1 DECK DESIGN shall meet the requirements of the American Iron and Steel Institute Specifications for the Design of Light Gauge Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members and the requirements of the Steel Deck Institute Basic Design Specifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS to the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Shop drawings shall show the manufacturer's recommended sizes and connection spacings to provide the specified shear resistance. 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 STORE UNITS on supports above the ground with one end elevated and cover with a waterproof covering to minimize damage and corrosion. 1.4.2 ONE AND ONE HALF INCH ROOF DECK shall be 20 gauge, and shall be one of the following types and manufacture: Type B - Nestable Type B Type B ASC Pacific, Inc. Vulcraft Verco ohall have deformation° for oompo°itc action. The deck °hall be one of the Typc 2 W W2 Formlok 2 VLI, VLJ 1.4.4 ACCESSORIES. Provide necessary recessed sump pans at roof drains, closures, taping, ceiling support tabs, welding washers, and other fittings and accessories for a complete installation. 1.5 COATINGS 1.5.1 GIVE DECK a sprayed -on shop coat of rust - inhibitive paint, baked on, designed to protect unexposed surfaces and, if left exposed, to act as a primer for finish painting, unless noted otherwise. 2.0 EXECUTION 73- 90- 133 -0 05300 -1 ACC Pacific, Ino. Vcrco t Vulcraft 2.1 ERECTION 2.1.1 ERECT UNITS in strict accord with the deck manufacturer's recommendations. Provide tight joints to prevent leakage of roofing materials. _ __..__c`_c. 2.1.2 WELDING shall be done by competent, experienced welding personnel using equipment, equipment settings, and welding rod as recommended by the deck manufacturer. 2.1.3 CONNECTIONS between the deck and steel beams, joists, walls, or edge members shall be 5/8 -inch effective diameter plug welds, unless called out otherwise. 2.1.4 ROOF DECK SIDE LAP CONNECTIONS shall be 1 -1/2 -inch long fillet welds at the short edge for 20 gauge and heavier deck. 2.1.5 FASTEN FLOOR DECK UNITS in atriot accord with the mnnufaaturcr'a 2.1.6 FASTEN ROOF DECK UNITS to the structural framework at the ends of units, intermediate supports, and side supports and to adjacent units in strict accord with the manufacturer's recommendations for each type of deck. There shall be a minimum of one side lap connection per deck span located at midspan. 2.1.7 LIGHT FIXTURES, DUCTS, OR OTHER UTILITIES shall not be supported by the steel roof deck. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK Lightgage Metal Stud System Section 09110 1.2 SCOPE 1.2.1 THIS SECTION covers cold- formed metal studs 20 gauge and heavier. 1.3 PRODUCT STORAGE 1.3.1 STORE STUDS in a dry location or stack off the ground and properly support on a level platform and fully protect from the weather. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 METAL STUDS shall be punched, and shall be the type, size, gauge, and spacing shown on the Drawings. 2.1.2 TRACK AND OTHER ACCESSORIES shall be the same gauge as the applicable studs, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 2.1.3 GALVANIZED STUDS, 16 gauge or heavier, shall be formed from steel that meets the requirements of ASTM A 446, Grade D, with a minimum yield of 50 ksi. 2.1.4 GALVANIZED STUDS, 18 gauge and 20 gauge, shall be formed from steel that meets the requirements of ASTM A 446, Grade A, with a minimum yield of 33 ksi. 73 -90- 133 -6 SECTION 05410 COLD - FORMED METAL STUD SYSTEM 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION 3.1.1 ANCHOR TRACKS to the supporting structure as shown on the Drawings. At . track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common structural element, or they shall be butt - welded. together. 3.1.2 PLUMB, ALIGN, AND ATTACH STUDS to the tracks. 1. Attach Exterior Studs to Tracks with welds as shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide for Vertical Structural Movement as shown on the Drawings. 3.1.3 HORIZONTAL BRIDGING ROWS. Type and size of bridging members shall be in accord with the stud manufacturer's recommendation. Provide horizontal bridging rows in accord with the following: 1. Nonload- bearing Walls Up to 10 -foot Height. One row at midheight 2. Nonload- bearing Walls Exceeding 10 -foot Height. - Equally spaced, not to exceed 5 feet 3.1.4 PROVIDE STUDS at partition ends, corners, intersections, and jambs of openings. Provide one bearing stud plus one continuous stud at opening jambs, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 3.1.5 TOUCH UP FIELD ABRASIONS from cutting or welding with a zinc rich paint or primer. , 3.1.6 SPLICES are not allowed in exterior wall studs. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Concrete rill for Stair Trcada Concrete Fill for Guard Posts Grout and Grouting for Base Plates 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT shop drawings to the Architect - Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. 20 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 METALS. Unless shown or specified otherwise, metals for fabrication of miscellaneous metal items and fastenings shall be as follows: Aluminum, extruded 6063 Cast Iron ASTM A 48 High Strength Steel Bolts ASTM A 325 Ctainlcoo Ctecl 304 with No. 4 finioh Steel ASTM A 36 Steel Pipe ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B, open hearth or basic oxygen steel with maximum sulfur content of 0.05 percent ASTM A 500 Steel 73 -90- 133 -0 Tubing Stubbs Foundry Co. W000tcr Producto Inc, SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.1.2 STEEL exposed to the exterior of the building shall be galvanized and phosphatized to hold paint. 2.1.4 FASTENINGS. Provide bolts and fastening devices required to set metal fabrications in place. 2.1.5 GROUT MATERIAL for setting posts in sleeves shall be Por -Rok Anchoring Cement manufactured by Lehn & Fink Industrial Products Division of Sterling Drug Inc. 2.1.6 METAL STAIR & % <:At PE shall be fabricated from structural steel shapes as shown on the Drawings e fabricated as indicated . a red ,by Ohio Gratings, Inc. or a p aced, at 7/16" center to ;center. w 2.1.8 CTAIR NOSINC shall be 3 inches wide, full trcad lcngth at metal pan stairs Metal Pan Ctair Style 1CP Type 101 &P 05500 -1 Ccction 03300 Section 03300 Section 03600 2.1.9 HANDRAILS, RAILINGS, BRACKETS, TOE GUARDS, AND GUARD RAILS trench frames shall be fabricated from structural steel shapes and other products as shown on the Drawings, trsnoh frames to be: galvanized steel, (match existing)* 2.1.10 TRENCH DRAIN FRAMES-AND GRATINGS shall be of cast iron for 8" & 12" -inch wide trenches, and shall be of the following types and manufacture: (match exis in McKinley Iron Works Type TGMB or equal tJ eer a vItgin y Gratings must be capable of supporting a wheel load of 12,000 lbs. 2.1.11 MAN HOLE COVERS shall be of cast iron in cast iron frame. Cover to have checkered design top and be 1 -3/8" inch x 27" with lifter and shall be one of the following manufacturers. (match existing) Neenah Foundry Co. Type "C" McKinley Iron Works Type ETX Cambell Foundry Type S 1700 Brat 'Faunclr Manhole covers must support a wheel load of 12,000 pounds minimum. 2.1.12 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS. Fabricate miscellaneous and incidental.items as shown on the Drawings or as required to complete the Work. Miscellaneous items include, but are not limited to, the following: Fascia Braces Grating Support Frame Guard Rails and Toe Boards Handrails Handrail Brackets Ladde*a Metal Ctair M , iTS1lwork Roll -up Door Frame Rooftop Unit Support Frames Down Spout,Protection Plates Meta. Stile on R,00 2.2 FABRICATION 2.2.1 SHOP FABRICATION. Fabricate, fit, and assemble miscellaneous metal items in the shop. Work that cannot be permanently shop- assembled shall be completely assembled, marked, and disassembled before shipment to ensure proper assembly in the field. 2.2.2 FASTENINGS shall be concealed when practical. Where exposed on finished surfaces, screw heads shall be oval head, unless shown or specified otherwise. 2.2.3 JOINTS in exposed work shall be matched to produce continuity of line and design, and shall be accurately fitted and firmly secured with hairline contacts. 2.2.4 WELDING shall meet the requirements of the appropriate recommendations of the American Welding Society. Welds exposed to view shall be ground smooth and uniform. 2.2.S WELDING OF &TAINLESC CTEEL ohall meet thc requirements of thc American Welding Cocicty•. Crind and polioh weld bcvda on exposed poliohcd surfaces to matoh and blend with the finish of the adjacent parent metal. Crind and polish otainlcao steel with clean whccla and oompoundc froc from iron and iron oompoundo thc finiohcd aide. Remove di000loration of finiohcd ourfacco due to welding by 73-90-133-16 05500 -2 finished surfaces by blasting, grinding, or an electrochemical process. 2.2.6 SHOP PAINTING. Miscellaneous steel and iron shall have one shop- applied coat of paint "Tnemec 99" or 20 -pound red lead applied at a rate of not more than 400 square feet per gallon. 2.2.7 PROTECTIVE COVERING. Stet::'____ _.... Bronco. and aluminum items shall have a shop- applied protective strippable coating, protective sleeve, or boarding to prevent damage during fabrication, shipment site storage, and erection, after which it shall be removed. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL miscellaneous and ornamental items plumb, level, square, true to line, securely anchored, and in proper alignment and relationship to other work. Set posts of railings in pipe sleeves and grout. Install handrail brackets at 5 -foot maximum centers. Removable guard rails to fit into pipe sleeves as shown on drawings. Sections to be 5' -0" long maximum. END OF SECTION CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION - 6 Wood and Plastics Section 06100 Rough Carpentry Section 06300 Wood Treatment 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Anchor Bolts Wood Treatment 1.2 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS Treated Wood Section 06300 1.3 STORAGE 1.3.1 STORE LUMBER AND ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS at least 6 inches above the ground on bunks or skids and protect materials from weather with waterproof covers. 2.0 PRODUCTS SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 05070 Section 06300 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 LUMBER shall be seasoned, surfaced four sides, graded, and grade stamped in accord with the grading rules of one of the following agencies: National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (NELMA) Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturers Association (NHPMA) Redwood Inspection Service (RIS) Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) The moisture content of the lumber shall not exceed 15 percent, and shall be indicated on the grade stamp by MC -15. Lumber shall be the following species and grade, unless approved otherwise by the Architect - Engineer: 1. Miscellaneous Framing and Blocking. Douglas Fir Standard and Better. 2.1.2 PLYWOOD shall meet the requirements of U.S. Products Standard PS -1 for Construction and Industrial Plywood, and shall bear the APA trademark of the American Plywood Association. 2.1.3 HARDWARE AND FASTENINGS 1. Miscellaneous Fastenings. Spikes, screws, lag bolts, and other miscellaneous fastenings and rough hardware shall be as shown on the Drawings or as required to assemble and secure rough carpentry items. 2.1.4 ADHESIVES shall conform with Specification AFG -01 of the American Plywood Association. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF TREATED WOOD 3.1.1 TREATED LUMBER used in association with roof edge strip nailers shall be spiked together with galvanized common 16d nails, and shall be anchored in place as hereinbefore specified unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Other treated wood shall be installed as hereinbefore specified. END OF SECTION 73 -90- 133 -6 06100 -1 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Rough Carpentry Materials Requiring Treatment Section 06100 Installation of Treated Rough Carpentry Materials Section 06100 1.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS are those listed by the American Wood Preservers Institute in their current directory as suppliers of the pressure- treated wood products. 1.3 QUALITY MARK 1.3.1 AWPI QUALITY MARX. Each piece of lumber shall bear the American Wood Preservers Institute Quality Mark to indicate conformance with the AWPI Standard hereinafter specified. The information required by the American Wood Preservers Institute Standard must appear on the label. 1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.4.1 FLAME SPREAD. Material, which is pressure treated for fire. retardance, shall have a flame spread of 25 or less when tested under ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, UL 723, or UBC Standard No. 42 -1. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 STORE PRESSURE - TREATED LUMBER indoors, if possible, or on a raised platform under waterproof coverings. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER FOR PRESSURE TREATMENT 2.1.1 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIAL used in association with roof edge strip nailer, shall meet the requirements of miscellaneous framing and blocking material n4 bet or .xce ed lumber specificati 2.1.2 FIRE - RETARDANT PRESSURE TREATMENT. Pressure treat all rough carpentry materials used in association with exterior grade fire - retardant chemicals to meet the requirements of Standard AWPI C -208, latest edition. Treat materials in a manner to prevent stacking marks which result from uneven application of treatment. 3.0 EXECUTION 73- 90- 133 - SECTION 06300 WOOD TREATMENT 2.2 ONSITE TREATMENT 2.2.1 CUTS RESULTING FROM SITE FABRICATION shall be liberally coated with a concentrated solution of the preservative. 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALLATION OF TREATED WOOD shall be as specified in Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. END OF SECTION Thermal and Moisture Protection Elaatomcric Sheet Watcrproofing Plastic Vapor Retardant Eafcty Insulation ?u`rrous<;and Ref ` ve Cootion 07220 Roof ZnauT'on Perimeter Wall and - Under Slab Insulation Lootion 07115 Section 07193 Section 07213 Section 07230 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION - 7 Section 07270 Fire Stopping Section 07411 Preformed Metal S y H embrari ;:. r Ea' ioirti75 ircct►aiiica•1'ly•'•Attac Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07800 Roo A Sects #sfl8 Q smoke Vents and Explo : Re Section 075�tl Sea antis ...... :........ . ,a ©t' oacr'ic SECTION 07193 PLASTIC VAPOR RETARDANT 1.0 PRODUCTS 1.1 MATERIALS 1.1.1 PLASTIC VAPOR RETARDANT shall be similar to Visqueen Polyethylene Film manufactured by Visqueen Division of Ethyl Corporation. Thickness shall be 6 mils elsewherewith a vapor permeability of 1.0 perm. 1.1.2 PRESSURE - SENSITIVE TAPE shall be Zero Perm, 1- 1 /2-inch wide tape, manufactured by Alumiseal Corporation, and shall consist of aluminum foil 1.0 mil thick, laminated between two sheets of polyester film, with a vapor transmission of 0.015 perm or less, and with a permanent pressure- sensitive adhesive on one face. 1.1.3 ADHESIVE shall be of the type and manufacture recommended by the vapor retardant manufacturer. 2.0 EXECUTION 2.1 INSTALLATION: Exercise care to avoid punctures. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with adhesive. Attach to walls at perimeter and to penetrations with adhesives, nails, or staples. Where adhesively sealed joints are not effective and where nails or staples have been installed, seal with pressure - sensitive tape. Use pressure- sensitive tape or vapor barrier material with adhesive to seal punctures, tears, and penetrations through barrier. 2.2 INSTALLATION AT WALLS UNFACED FIBROUS BATT AND SEMI -RIGID FIBROUS INSULATION RIGID INSULATION 2.2.1 STRETCH POLYETHYLENE FILM VAPOR BARRIER over supports on room.side, exercising care to avoid punctures or wrinkles, and staple to supports. Seal with pressure - sensitive tape at punctures, tears, and penetrations. END OF SECTION 73-90-1330A 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Plastic Vapor Retardant for Unfaced Fibrous Insulation 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.2.1 STORE INSULATION MATERIAL to prevent covered with ice or snow. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS MIftimem-the*maa-ree-iotance ohall be as followo: Walla 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 73-90-133-X0 Unfaocd Fiber Claoo Inoulation - . . Premium Brand Baoy Fit Batts Thcrmafiber W C H-S Blankets 2. Safing Inoulation shall bc onc Ther.ms4-iber Safing Ccmi Rigid Inoulation Board, Type I SECTION 07213 FIBROUS REFLECTIVE INSULATION Inoulation tO risu a ion Shall be approved as a non-combustible assembly when installed as shown on the drawings. 07213-1 Section 07193 it from wet, soiled, or R 19 e offioc aroa Johno Hanvillc Cale() Corp. Rockwool Induotrico, Inc. Unitcd Ctateo Cypoum Company of thc following types an4--merftufeete*e+- Reekwee-1-1-nes-r-1-ne, United Staten Cypoum Company SEMI--RIGID .FBRAUS-.,40004„WINSULATION (HH-1-558B, Form A, Class I, and Form B, Class 7, or HH-1-521F, - T ; !iPe shall be 1 1/2 Z:A.nches thick and one of the following types and manufacture: OWCNB Corp. TANgEM..,,ct4I4Eic1c0i3O4.0404 ......... rated oonotruotion. 3.1.4 . cite sea ;` INSTALL 66444.-RIGID PI S—FIBERGLASSzINSULATION against ills and END OF SECTION Ana ions ► 3.0 EXECUTION 73-90 SECTION 07230 PERIMETER WALL -UNDER SLAB INSULATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.1.1 STORE INSULATION MATERIAL to prevent it from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Protect insulation from exposure to sunlight. 1.2 JOB CONDITIONS 1.2.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS. Install perimeter insulation when temperature is at least 32 1.2.2 SCHEDULING. Proceed with installation of insulation only when subsequent work, which conceals the insulation, is ready to be performed. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERIMETER UNDER -SLAB INSULATION 2.1.1 PERIMETER INSULATION shall be expanded polystyrene beads, molded into minimum 2 -pound density boards, 2 inches thick, with a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.26 at a mean temperature of 75F, and shall be one of the following types and manufacture: Styropor Board BASF Wyandotte Zonolite Styrene Board W.R. Grace & Co. Thermco White FR Holland Plastics Co. Ray -Lite Expanded Polystyrene Minnesota Diversified Products, Inc. 3.1 INSTALLATION OF AND UNDER -SLAB INSULATION 3.1.1 INSTALL PERIMETER INSULATION under perimeter areas of on -grade floor slabs. Extend to 4 feet inside of perimeter walls. 3.2 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK 3.2.1 INSTALL FLOOR SLAB CAREFULLY to prevent damage or displacement of insulation. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 07270 FIRE STOPPING 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.1.1 THIS SECTION covers installation of firestopping materials at openings and voids in or at periphery of fire -rated construction, including ducts, cables, conduit, and piping penetrations through floor slabs and time -rated partitions or fire walls, and at other locations shown on the Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Installation of Mechanical Equipment and Piping Section 15100 General Provisions Section 16010, Electrical Manual 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 STANDARDS. Firestopping materials shall meet the requirements of the following: Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops, ASTM E 814 Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Firestops, UL 1479 Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 UL Building Materials Directory; Through- Penetration Firestops Systems (XHEZ), and Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW) Uniform Building Code (ICBO) 1.3.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Dow Corning Corporation Electrical Products Division /3M 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT shop drawings, product data, and certifications in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Shop drawings shall show proposed materials, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings, and method of installation, and shall accurately reflect actual job conditions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.5.1 DELIVER materials in the original unopened containers or packages bearing the manufacturer's name, brand designation, and product description. 1.5.2 STORE materials under cover and protect from damage. 1.6 SEOUENCING AND SCHEDULING OF WORK 1.6.1 COORDINATE firestopping work with mechanical and electrical work. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS shall be one of the following products: 1. 3M Brand Caulk, Putty, Strip and Sheet Forms 2. Dow Corning 3 -6548 Silicone RTV Foam 2.1.2 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS shall be asbestosfree and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke, and gases in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E 814 and UL 1479. 2.1.3 RATING OF FIRESTOPS shall be one hour, two hours, and three hours but not less than the rating of the time -rated floor or wall assembly. 73- 90- 13340 07270 -1 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 CLEAN surfaces to be in contact .grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting or the required fire resistive. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 INSTALL firestopping materials as indicated in accord with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.2.2 SEAL all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. 3.2.3 UNLESS PROTECTED FROM POSSIBLE LOADING OR TRAFFIC, install firestopping materials in floors having void openings of 4 inches or more to support the . same floor load requirements. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.3.1 EXAMINE firestopped areas to ensure proper concealing or enclosing firestopped areas. 3.3.2 AREAS OF WORK shall remain accessible until the applicable code authorities. with firestopping materials of dirt, END OF SECTION installation prior to inspection and approval by 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600 Sealants Section 07900 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA to the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2.2 SUBMIT SAMPLES of face finish on preformed metal siding to the Architect - Engineer in accord with the Section 01300. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 PREFORMED METAL SIDING 2.1.1 METAL SIDING shall be 4 (2 L in tongue and groove side joints, and manufacture: Versawall S36 -2.00 2.1.2 SIDING PANELS PREFORMED METAL SIDING H.H. Robertson SECTION shall consist of the following: ches thick, 44 A2 inches wide, with 11 be one of the "following type and Company R 1. Exterior Face Sheet shall be stucco embossed, steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A 525, finish. Color shall match other buildings at 22 -gauge galvanized G -90, with Versacore complex. 2. Include Matching Flashing, Trim, Closures, Sub- girts, Fasteners, and Other Miscellaneous Items. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 and in accord with the manufacturer's erection drawings and recommendations. END OF SECTION INSTALL FIELD - ASSEMBLED PREFORMED METAL SIDING as shown on the Drawings 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SIN Wood Treatment 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION i' MEMBRANE :ROOF'ZNG : SYSTEM 1.1.1 Rough Carpentry:Wood Nailers, cants, blocking Section 06100 Section 06300 1.2.1 This Section includes single -ply totally adhered membrane roofing system, composed of Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EDPM). 1.2.2 Roof insulation related to flexible sheet roofing is specified in this section. 1.2.3 Wood nailers, blocking, and other related items are specified in Division 6. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Shop drawings showing roof configuration, sheet layout, seam locations, details at perimeter, and special conditions. 1. Indicate layout of tapered insulation materials. 1.3.2 Test data for pullout resistance of fastening systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 Manufacturer: Obtain primary flexible sheet roofing from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 1.4.2 Installer: Engage an experienced Installer to apply single ply membrane roofing who has specialized in application of roofing systems similar to those required for this project. Installer must be acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing material. 1.4.3 Work associated with single ply membrane roofing, including (but not limited to) insulation, flashing and counterflashing, expansion joints, and joint sealers, is to be performed by Installer of this work. 1.4.4 UL Listing: Provide labeled materials that have been tested and listed by UL in "Building Materials Directory" or by other nationally recognized testing laboratory for application indicated, with "Class A" rated materials /system for roof slopes shown. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 73 -90- 133 -6 anufac:turer >« shall:: ><:o xnstallati >ratingndicat °e 07530 -1 o.z:ng cordance 1.5.1 Weather: Proceed with roofing work when existing and forecasted' weather conditions permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. 1.5.2 Substrate Conditions: Do not begin roofing installation until substrates have been inspected and are determined to be in satisfactory condition. 1.6 WARRANTY 1.6.1 Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit executed copy of single ply membrane manufacturer's "Limited Service Warranty" agreement including flashing endorsement, signed by an authorized representative of manufacturer. Provide form that was published with product literature as of date of Contract Documents, for the following period of time: 1.6.2 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL 2.2 EPDM MEMBRANE 2.2.1 General: Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into uniform, flexible sheets, complying with ASTM D 4637, Type 1. .1 Class SR, Scrim Reinforced Thickness: 45 mils nominal, .2 Exposed Face Color: To match existing. 2.2.2 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane: Manufacturer's standard installation. 2.2.3 Manufacturer: 1. Firestone Building Products Co. "Rubbergard Reinforced System." 2. No substitutions allowed, match ec 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 2.3.1 G ypsum Board Base: ASTM C 36, Type X, 5/8 inch thick. '� >x ? >: egu xed' f0 non - com ti b usble roof..rig a y ste m. 2.3.2 Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's standard materials for sealing lapped joints, including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2.3.3 Cant Strips, Tapered Edge Strips, and Flashing Accessories: Types recommended by membrane manufacturer, including adhesive tapes, flashing cements, and sealants. 2.3.4 Flashing Material: Manufacturer's standard system compatible with flexible sheet membrane. 2.3.5 Slip Sheet: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer for protecting membrane from incompatible substrates. 2.3.6 Mechanical Fasteners: Metal plates, caps, battens, accessory components, fastening devices, and adhesives to suit substrate and as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2.3.7 Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer for particular substrate and project conditions, formulated to withstand min. 60 -psf uplift force. 73- 90 -133- 07530 -2 Apr • 2.4 INSULATING MATERIALS 2.4.1 General: Provide insulating materials to comply with requirements indicated for materials and compliance with referenced standards in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. 1. Provide tapered boards where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate with taper of 1/4 inch per foot minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4.2 Polyisocyanurate Board Roof Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with polyisocyanurate closed -cell foam core and manufacturer's standard facing laminated to both sides; complying with FS HH- I- 1972/2, Class 1. Firestone Building Products Co. "Firestone ISO 95 +," and "Tapered Firestone ISO 95 +." 2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATION MATERIALS 2.5.1 Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with fire resistance requirements. 2.5.2 Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filling voids. 2.5.3 Mechanical Anchors: Corrosion - resistant type as recommended by insulation manufacturer for deck type and complying with fire and insurance uplift rating requirements. 1. Provide system tested and approved for I -90 wind uplift rating. 2 >; <'; <<` ??' >AIT ERNPTIVEziINSULATION< 'SYSTEM 3.0 73- 90- 133 -i6 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE 3.1.1 General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions for preparation of substrate to receive single ply membrane system. 1. Verify that penetrations, expansion joints, and blocking are in placed and secured and that roof drains are properly clamped into position. 3.1.2 Install flashings and accessory items as shown, and as recommended by manufacturer if not shown. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION 3.2.1 General: Extend insulation full thickness in two layers, or in multiple layers over entire surface to be insulated, cutting and fitting tightly around obstructions. Form cant strips, crickets, saddles, and tapered areas with additional material as shown and as required for proper drainage of membrane. 1. Stagger joints in both direc for each course. 07530 -3 3.2.2 Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membrane before end of day or before start of inclement weather. 3.2.3 Secure roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type and spacing indicated by the insulation manufacturer, but in no case provide less than one anchor per 4 square feet of surface area or less anchorage than required by FM "Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1 -28." 1. Insulation Schedule: 2 layers with a total R -Value of 19, minimum. 3.3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 3.3.1 Fully Adhered Membrane: Install membrane by unrolling over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended by manufacturer. Apply adhesive to surfaces to be bonded and roll into place when adhesive has properly cured. Treat seams with special cement and apply sealant to exposed sheet edges, tapering application as recommended by manufacturer. Install mechanical fasteners, flashings and counterflashings, and accessories at locations and as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3.2 Walkway Protection: Install paver units at locations shown and where required for access to roof - mounted equipment. Place protection boards carefully to avoid damage to membrane, laying over an additional layer of roof membrane material, loosely applied, for additional protection. 3.4 PROTECTION OF ROOFING 3.4.1 Upon completion of roofing (including associated work), institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, make a final inspection of roofing and prepare a written report to Owner, describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage found. 3.4.2 Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at time of final inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and in accordance with requirements of specified warranty. END OF SECTION 73 -90- 133 - 1f 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Preformed Metal Siding Section 07411 Roof Accessories Section 07800 Sealants Section 07900 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 SMACNA STANDARDS. Except as otherwise shown, detailed, or specified, flashing and sheet metal work shall comply with applicable recommendations and details of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT shop drawings to the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Shop drawings shall show the manner of forming, jointing, and securing of flashing and sheet metal. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS 2.1.1 PREFINISHED SHEET METAL shall be copper bearing steel sheet, zinc - coated (galvanized) by the hot dip process, commercial quality, and shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 526. Steel sheet shall be galvanized to meet the requirements of ASTM A 525 for G90 coating, and shall be mill phosphatized. Galvanized sheet metal shall be 24 gauge, unless other gauges or thicknesses are recommended by the SMACNA Manual or the sheet metal manufacturer, are shown on the Drawings, or are specified herein; shall be primed and finished on one side with Versacore. Color shall be as scheduled. Prefinished sheet metal shall be manufactured by one of the following: H.H. Robertson or Approved Equal ;(match 'existing) 2.1.2 STAINLCCS STEEL ohall bc Typc 302/304 3tainlcoo otccl ohcct or otrip, • No. 2 D Piniah and No. 1 F'inioh, rcopcctivcly. Ctainlcoo otccl shall bc of 2.1.3 EXPANSION JOINT COVERS at wall shall be Expando -Flash as manufactured by Manville. 2.1.4 SCREWS shall be No. 12 copper, bronze, or brass round head wood screws of sufficient length to penetrate substrate 7/8 inch. Provide lead, bronze, or nylon expansion sleeves where screws are used to secure sheet metal to masonry or concrete. Washers shall be brass, copper, or neoprene. 2.2 ISOLATION MATERIALS 2.2.1 COATINGS AND TAPES, for isolation of dissimilar materials, shall meet the recommendations of the sheet metal manufacturer. 2.3 SHEET METAL SPECIALTIES 73- 90- 133 07600 -1 2.4 FABRICATION 2.4.1 GENERAL FABRICATION. Fabricate work with lines and corners true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal. Provide uniform neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on the concealed side of exposed edges and provide soldered flat -lock seams, unless shown or specified otherwise. Follow the metal manufacturer's recommendations for tinning, soldering, welding, and cleaning flux from metal. 2.5 FABRICATION OF PREFINISHED GALVANIZED SHEET METAL, AND STAINLESS STEEL, ITEMS 2.5.1 FORM GRAVEL STOPS - FASCIAS AND EDGE STRIPS from Prefinished Sheet Metal to the profile shown on the Drawings in maximum 20 -foot lengths. Form 12 -inch wide back -up plates for joints to the same profile as gravel stops. 2.5.2 FORM COPINGS from Prefinished Sheet Metal to a profile as shown on the Drawings in 10 -foot lengths. Form continuous cleats as shown in SMACNA Manual, Plate 68, and 12 -inch wide back -up plates for joints as shown in SMACNA Manual, Plate 68, Alternate 3. 2.5.3 FORM SCUPPER AND CONDUCTOR HEAD from prefinished sheet metal as shown on SMACNA Manual Plate 27 Figure A. 2.5.4 FORM DOWNSPOUTS from prefinished sheet metal to 4- inches x 4- inches rectangular cross section as shown in SMACNA Manual, Plate 32, Figure C, with hangers as shown in SMACNA Manual, Plate 34, Figure C. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 SUBSTRATE CONDITION shall be smooth, free from defects, dust, rubbish, and other foreign material and with projecting nails driven flush. 3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 SEPARATE CONCEALED SURFACES OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS as follows: 73- 90- 1331'6 1. Ctainlcoo Steel. Coat cithcr otainleoo otccl or oubotratc with building felt and building paper or polyethylene ohcct oannot be inotallcd to ocparatc otainlcoo steel from diooimilar fte ocmcntitiouo matcrialo. 2. Aluminum. Coat with 15 -mil dry -film- thickness of bituminous coating wherever aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, cementitious surfaces, wood, or other absorptive substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION 3.3.1 INSTALL WORK with lines and corners true and accurate in alignment. Install faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal. Provide uniform neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on the concealed side of exposed edges. Follow the metal manufacturer's recommendations for tinning, soldering, welding, and cleaning flux from metal. 3.3.2 SMACNA AND MANUFACTURER'S DETAILS. Install the work to meet the recommendations shown in the SMACNA Manual and the recommendations of the sheet metal manufacturer, except when otherwise shown or specified. In the event of a conflict between recommendations of SMACNA and the sheet metal manufacturer, the latter shall govern. 07600 -2 3.3.3 CONCEAL FASTENERS AND EXPANSION PROVISIONS wherever possible in exposed work and locate to minimize the possibility of leakage. Cover and seal work for a watertight installation. Provide cleat -type anchorages for metal flashing and trim wherever practical, arranged to relieve stresses resulting from building movement and thermal expansion. 3.3.4 PROVIDE FLANGES, minimum 4 inches wide, for stripping in roofing or base flashing and set in roofing cement. 3.3.5 PROVIDE FOR THERMAL EXPANSION for items which exceed 15 feet in length. Expansion joints shall be watertight, and shall be located as follows: 1. Flashing, Gravel Stops, Copings, and Trim. At 2 feet from corners and intersections and at 10 -foot centers elsewhere 3.3.6 OVERLAPS shall be as follows: Vertical Surfaces Minimum 3 inches 3.3.7 FORM FLAT -LOCK SOLDERED SEAMS, unless otherwise shown or specified, with flux removed. Where welded joints are shown for stainless steel, for upturned and hooked flanges, weld between adjoining sheets, and lay seam flat with minimum 1/2 -inch wide hooked flanges. 3.3.8 INSTALL MANUFACTURED ITEMS to meet the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3.9 CLEAN EXPOSED SURFACES of substances which are visible or which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finish. 3.3.10 CLEAN AND NEUTRALIZE FLUX to meet the recommendations of the metal manufacturer. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED ITEMS ri 2.1 2.0 PRODUCTS EXPANSION Cclotcx Expanoion Joint Chicld E 6 Plaoh Mctnlaotic Expanoion Joint Cover Expando Flaoh Ncrva Flex C1 -4S4 Roof Expanoion Wasco E1-angc Expanoion Je nt 2.2 PREFORMED PVC SUPPORT PLASHING Inc., mi5x�n 2.3 ROOF TRAFFIC PADS 2.3.1 TRAFFIC PADS shall be Carey -Tred Tex - Mastic Roofwalk Products, Inc. Whitewalk Roof Traffic Pads 73- 90- 13316 one 36 36 SECTION 07800 ROOF ACCESSORIES SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE e Roofing. System 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT shop drawings and product data to the Architect - Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S OPTION 1.3.1 PREFORMED PVC SUPPORT FLASHING specified herein may be substituted for pitch pockets specified in Section 07600, Flashing and Sheet Metal, at round roof penetrations. may be-uocd in licu of pitch pockct3 for round roof pcnctrationo whet of the x 36 x x 72 x following: 3/4 inch thick 3/4 inch thick 36 x 60 x 3/4 inch thick Ccloten Corp. E 3 Flaoh Inc. Crcfeo, Inc. Johno Manville Calco Corp. Rubber & Plaotioo Compound 07800 -1 d ahall be one of the following: Wa3co Producto, Inc. 2.4 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS 2.4.1 ROOF CURBS shall be box section design, 12 inches high, galvanized steel construction, continuous mitered and welded corner integral base plate, pressure - treated wood nailer, galvanized steel insulated with 1 -1/2 -inch thick, rigid fiberglass board insulation, be one of the following types and manufacture: Model CRC -1 Custom Curb, Inc. Model PC -5 Pate Company or as supplied with equipment. ection : 7530 Celotex Corp. J & P Petroleum W.R. Meadows, Inc. seams, liner, and and shall 2.5 PREFABRICATED EQUIPMENT SUPPORT CURBS 2.5.1 SUPPORT CURBS shall be monolithic design, 12 inches high, galvanized steel construction, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base 2 plate, pressure - treated wood nailer, galvanized steel counterflashing,. and shall be one of the following types and manufacture: Model CES -1 Custom Curb, Inc. Model ES -5 Pate Company or as supplied with equipment. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF ROOF ACCESSORIES 3.1.1 INSTALLATION OF ROOF TRAFFIC PADS. Install traffic pads in accord with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Leave gaps between sections of traffic pads where required for roof drainage. Install walks where shown on the. Drawings. Color of walking surfaces to be as selected by owner to be in strong contrast with color of roof surface. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Roof Accessories Section 07800 Sealants Section 07900 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Submit shop drawings and product data to the Architect - Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 EXPLOSION RELIEF VENT 2.1.1 Vent shall release automatically at an outward pressure of 15 pounds per square foot. 2.1.2 Frame shall be constructed of extruded aluminum, mitered and welded, with seepage ports, corrosion resistant fasteners and a 12" high integral insulated curb. 2.1.3 Cover shall be double insulated plastic dome double leaf cover. The acrylic dome shall have a clear outer light with a translucent white plastic interior light. Light transmission shall be 50 %. 2.1.4 The cover shall be capable of being opened manually from the inside or outside and have a fusible link. 2.1.5 Size shall be 48" x 96", o SECTION 0781:0 SMOKE: VENTS AND EXPLOSiON'REL'IEF VENT 48 " >as:« SIiota 2. The cover shall be capable of opening against a wind Ub4 p e .1 r'a qu are food and a 10 peand snow load of 1 po unds per s fao Hydraulic dampers shall control the rate of opening. 2.1.7 Vent shall have an FM and UL listing and shall include a fire brand screen. 2.1.8 Vent shall be designed and fitted with a personnel safety structure capable of withstanding an impact load of 700 pounds. tom manUfacturera Dur Red by<Red PlasticCo. 2.2 AUTOMATIC SMOKE VENTS 2.2.1 Vent shall operate At the detection of the products of combustion. 2.2.2 Frame shall be constructed of extruded aluminum, mitered and welded, with seepage ports, corrosion resistant fasteners and a 12" high integral insulated curb. 2.2.3 Cover shall be double insulated plastic dome double leaf cover. The acrylic dome shall have a clear outer light with a translucent white plastic interior light. Light transmission shall be 50 %. 2.2.4 The cover shall be capable of being opened manually from the inside or outside and have a fusible link. 73-90-133..4, 07810 -1 2.2.5 Size shall be 48" x 96 ". 2.2.6 The cover shall be capable of opening against wind and , a 10 pound snow load. Hydraulic dampers shall control the rate of opening. 2.2.7 Vent shall have an FM and UL listing and shall include a fire brand screen. 2.2.8 Vent shall be designed and fitted with a personnel safety structure . capable of withstanding an impact load of 700 pounds. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation. Install smoke and explosion relief vents per manufacturers printed instructions. 3.2 Provide vents at locations indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 07900 SEALANTS 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Fillers for Pavement and Walks Section 02600 Concrete Expansion Joint Fillers Section 03251 Fillers used in conjunction with Masonry Section 04150 Sealants used for Glazing Section 08800 Caulking for Sound Retardant Walls Section 09250 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT COLOR SAMPLES to the Architect - Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS 1.3.1 WEATHER AND TEMPERATURE. Install sealants on dry days with temperatures between 40F and 90F. 1.3.2 PROTECTION. Exercise special care to prevent damage to adjacent work during installation of sealants. 1.3.3 SEQUENCING 2.0 PRODUCT 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 COLD - APPLIED RUBBER - ASPHALT SEALANTS shall be of the following type and manufacture: 158 Cold- Applied Rubber - Asphalt Joint Sealer W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2.1.2 THERMOSETTING PAVING SEALANTS shall be two -part polysulfide (Thiokol) or , polyurethane sealants meeting the requirements of FS TT- S- 00227E, Type I, and of the following types and manufacture: Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant Sonneborn Building Products Vulkem 245 Mameco International NR -200 Urexpan Sealant Pecora Corporation Sikaflex 12SL Sika Chemical Corp. Thorospan Heavy Standard Drywall Products, Inc. Pourthane Sealant W.R. Meadows, Inc. Chem -Calk 250 Woodmont Products, Inc. Chem -Calk 550 Woodmont Products, Inc. 2.1.3 Paving sealant in storage areas to be of a chemical resistant type: vulkem 116 as manufactured by Nameco International. 2.1.4 THERMOSETTING BUILDING SEALANT shall be one -part or two -part polysulfide (Thiokol), or polyurethane, or silicone sealants meeting the requirements of FS TT- S -230C, Type II, or FS TT- S- 00227E, Type II, FS TT- S- 001543A, and of the following types and manufacture: Thiokol One Component Morton Thiokol, Inc. GC -9 Synthacalk Pecora Corp. Sonolastic Sealant One -Part Sonneborn Building Products 73- 90- 133.4-4 1. Install Sealant adjacent to painted surfaces before adjacent surfaces receive their final coat of paint. 2. Install Exterior Sealants after precast concrete is washed down and before water - repellent treatment is applied. 07900 -1 Thorospan One- Component Chem -Calk 100 Thiokol Two Component GC -5 Synthacalk Sikaflex 412 Sonolastic Sealant Two -Part Thorospan S Chem -Calk 200 Vulkem 116 Dynatrol I Sikaflex 12 Sonolastic NP 1 Chem -Calk 900 Vulkem 227 Dynatrol II Sonolastic NP II Duacthane 790 Building Sealant Silpruf Sealant 864 Architectural Silicone Dymeric Standard Drywall Products, Inc. Woodmont Products, Inc. Morton Thiokol, Inc. Pecora Corp. Sika Chemical Corp. Sonneborn Building Products Standard Drywall Products, Inc. Woodmont Products, Inc. Mameco International Pecora Corp. Sika Chemical Corp. Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. Woodmont Products, Inc. Mameco International Pecora Corp. Sonneborn Building Products W.R. Meadows, Inc. Dow Corning Corp. General Electric Pecora Corp. Tremco Manufacturing Co. 2.1.5 SILICONE SEALANT, FS TT- S- 001543A, Class A, shall be White and of the following types and manufacture: Mildew - resistant Sealant Dow Corning Corp. SCS -1702 General Electric Silicon W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2.1.6 PRIMER shall be of the type and manufacture recommended by the sealant manufacturer for use with the sealant specified and the abutting materials. 2.1.7 BACKER ROD shall be a closed -cell polyethelene or an open -cell polyurethane rod recommended by the sealant manufacturer, of a diameter 1/8 inch greater than the joint width up to 3/4 -inch diameter and 1 -inch diameter for 3/4 -inch wide joints. 2.1.8 BOND BREAKER, where required to break the bond between sealant and the back -up material or joint filler, shall be a tape material recommended by the sealant manufacturer, or shall be polyethelene film. 2.1.9 PRECOMPRESSED EXPANDING SEALANT shall be Will -Seal black polyurethane impregnated neoprene foam sealant, self adhesive roll, or stick form manufactured by Illbruck, Troy, MI. 2.2 MIXING 2.2.1 MIX TWO -PART SEALANTS by mixing the activator with the resin, uniformly and thoroughly, in the proportions supplied to meet the recommendations of the sealant manufacturer. Mix sealant in a mechanical mixer, except very small amounts may be hand mixed with a trowel. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 CLEAN DOWN joint surfaces using oilfree solvent for metal, glass, and other nonporous surfaces and by wire brushing concrete and masonry surfaces. Surfaces to receive sealant shall be sound, clean, and dry, and free of frost, laitance, curing compounds, waterproofing compounds, mastic' compounds, 'corrosion, mill scale, rust, oil, tar, wax, paint, mastic, and similar contaminates. Sandblast concrete in contact with form release agents. 3.1.2 MASK ADJACENT AREAS if necessary to obtain a neat sealant line. 73- 90 -133Ej 07900 -2 3.1.3 PRIME concrete, and similar porous surfaces. Brush out excess material to insure a uniform film over the whole joint face. Allow primer to dry out before applying sealant. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 INSTALL BACKER ROD with a blunt rod or plain faced roller. Recess into joint to meet the requirements of the sealant manufacturer's recommendations for joint width and depth ratio. Do not puncture, fold, twist, or crease backer rod. 3.2.2 INSTALL BOND BREAKER where sealant would otherwise bond to backer rod or joint filler. 3.2.3 INSTALLATION OF HOT - APPLIED SEALANTS. Apply sealant at the temperature recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not exceed the safe heating temperature. Pour into joints and fill to within 1/8 inch of surface. 3.2.4 INSTALLATION OF COLD - APPLIED SEALANTS. Apply sealant by holding the gun nozzle at an angle of about 45 degrees and moving steadily along the joint so that a uniform bead is applied without dragging, tearing, or leaving unfilled spaces. Push the bead rather than draw it with the gun leading. Fill joints in vertical surfaces level with adjacent surfaces • and tool within ten minutes of application with one continuous stroke to insure intimate contact with the joint faces, to remove any trapped air or voids, to consolidate material, and to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Fill joints in horizontal surfaces holding the top surface of the sealant slightly below the adjacent surfaces. 3.2.5 INSTALLATION OF PRECOMPRESSED SEALANT. Apply adhesive side of sealant to one side of the joint and press firmly as the entire length is installed in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 3.3.1 CLEANING. Remove masking immediately after application and tooling operations are complete. Clean excess or spilled sealant from nonporous surfaces with solvent before curing. Clean excess or spilled sealant from porous surfaces with abrasive or mechanical means after curing. 3.3.2 PROTECT SEALANT where bituminous material is to be applied over thermosetting joint sealant with vinyl or polyethelene sheet material. 3.4 SCHEDULE OF APPLICATION 3.4.1 APPLY HOT- APPLIED ASPHALT, RUBBER - ASPHALT, OR COLD - APPLIED RUBBER-ASPHALT SEALANTS at the following locations: At pavement and walk expansion joints Where walks abut structural slabs or stoops Where walks abut exterior walls of building Where exposed interior concrete slabs abut vertical surfaces 3.4.2 APPLY THERMOSETTING PAVING SEALANT at the following locations: At walk expansion joints Where walks abut structural slabs or stoops Where walks abut exterior walls of buildings Where exposed interior concrete slabs abut vertical surfaces Where sealant is shown on the Drawings for concrete slabs 3.4.3 APPLY CHEMICAL RESISTANT PAVING SEALANT at storage areas 3.4.4 APPLY THERMOSETTING BUILDING SEALANT at the following locations: At exterior masonry control joints At framed openings at exterior walls, including sills and thresholds At joints between adjacent precast concrete panels Where tight joints are required between masonry and built -in materials At miscellaneous locations where caulking is shown on the Drawings 73- 90- 133 - 07900 -3 3.4.5 APPLY ACRYLIC LATEX SEALANT at the following locations: Where rough and dissimilar materials abut one another and where tight joints are required prior to painting 3.4.6 APPLY PREFORMED SEALANT at the following locations: At expansion joints between concrete walls At expansion joints between walls and concrete decks At expansion joints in floors At expansion joints between preformed metal panels 3.5 SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL SEALANT COLORS 3.5.1 SPECIAL THERMOSETTING PAVING SEALANTS shall match Sonneborn colors as follows: At concrete walks At concrete slabs 884 Gray 884 Gray END OF SECTION CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION - 8 names ccE on 21A Fluah' Woo d Doors Section 08330 Coiling Doors Ccction 08400 Accc30 Doora Section 08700 Hardware and Specialties Section 08800 Glazing Ccction 08912 Clazcd Aluminum Window Systcm 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Caulking and Sealants Section 07900 Fluoh Wood Deoro 6cction 00210 Hardware Section 08700 Glazing Section 08800 1.2 DESCRIPTION 1.2.1 WORK SPECIFIED UNDER THIS SECTION includes 1 -3/4 -inch thick, 16 -gauge metal doors in 14 -gauge metal frames regardless of hardware types. Doors and frames shall be provided together as a unit. 1.3 OUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 CODES AND STANDARDS. Metal doors and frames shall be constructed to conform to CS 242 -62, PS 4-66, and Steel Door Institute Standard SDI -100. 1.4 HARDWARE TEMPLATES 1.4.1 HARDWARE TEMPLATES shall be furnished to the fabricator by the hardware manufacturer. The fabricator shall drill and tap holes and make cutouts and reinforcement in doors and frames to receive hardware in a neat and proper manner. 1.5 COORDINATION 1.5.1 COORDINATE FRAMES with the requirements of the Glazing Subcontractor to assure required bite, edge, and face clearance. Provide weep system where insulated glass is scheduled. 1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.6.1 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES. Where noted or shown on the Drawings, furnish doors and frames tested in accord with ASTM E 152 and bearing the label of Underwriters Laboratories which indicates the applicable rating and wall opening classification specified f fi Ie ld modifications are perform an a raked d oor : a t xac icatio f rom ' appro v od to t ins atren mails icat ons;:; do mat viola e : he: fi re rating performance 1.7 SUBMITTALS 1.7.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS to the Architect- Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Shop drawings shall show quantities, types, and locations. Door and frame construction shall be fully detailed showing weights of material, finish, framing, and reinforcing. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.8.1 DELIVERY AND STORAGE. Doors shall be shipped individually packed. Ship frames with angle spreaders at door opening bottoms. Store doors and frames on the building site, in an upright position, under cover, on wood sills or floors, in a manner that prevents rust or damage. Ventilate canvas or plastic covers to prevent moisture traps. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS 2.1.1 FACE SHEETS AND FILLERS. Face sheets shall be 18 -gauge cold rolled stretcher - leveled steel internally welded to steel stiffeners of sufficient strength and spacing to support the face sheets against impact and to assure flat face sheet surfaces, or shall be bonded to a rigid polystyrene, polyurethane, or a resin - impregnated honeycomb core. If steel stiffeners are used, fill doors with mineral rock wool or fiberglass, or sound deaden inside faces of face sheets. 73-90-133-0 SECTION 08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100 -1 Exterior doors shall have a 1 -1/2 -pound density polyurethane core with "U" value 0.09. 2.1.2 VERTICAL EDGES shall be minimum 16 -gauge channels with each face sheet wrapped around the channels, meeting at the center of the edge, with the resulting seam closed, welded shut, and ground smooth. Other methods of edge fabrication are acceptable if they provide equivalent strength and concealed seams. 2.1.3 TOP AND BOTTOM EDGES shall be 16 -gauge steel channels. The back of the channel shall be flush with the top and bottom of face sheets. Inverted channels, if used, shall have filler caps. Tops shall be smooth and flush. 2.1.4 HARDWARE PREPARATION. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled, and tapped for scheduled mortise hardware and reinforced for scheduled surface - applied hardware. Hinge reinforcing shall be 7 -gauge or heavier steel plate, continuous from top to bottom. Closer reinforcing shall be minimum 12 -gauge steel, and other reinforcing shall be 14 -gauge steel. 2.1.5 WELDS shall be ground invisible, and depressions shall be filled smooth. 2.1.6 FABRICATE TRANSOM PANELS the same as metal doors. 2.1.7 SHOP PAINT. After fabrication, thoroughly clean doors and degrease, phosphatize, and paint with a rust- inhibitive primer. 2.1.8 UNDERCUT doors 1/2 inch to clear carpet where carpet is indicated in the Room Finish Schedule. 2.2 PRESSED METAL FRAMES FOR DOORS, AND BORROWED LITES 2.2.1 FABRICATE PRESSED METAL FRAMES of 16 -gauge cold rolled steel, formed to types and profiles as shown on the Drawings, Breaks, angles, and arises shall be uniform, straight, sharply defined, and true. Saw mitre, continuously weld, and grind corners of frames, except drywall partition frames shall be knocked -down (KD) with mitered corners and reinforcement for integral tabs for interlocking of frame head and jambs. Terminate door stops 4 inches above floor with 45- degree return to frame face except at exterior doors (sanitary stops). 2.2.2 JAMB ANCHORS. Frames shall have appropriate anchors for conditions shown on the Drawings. Anchor each jamb to the floor with an adjustable base anchor. Provide other types of anchors when required for other conditions. Provide a minimum of three anchors per jamb for frames up to 90 inches high. Provide six wall anchors and two base anchors for drywall partition frames. 2.2.3 REINFORCING. Butt, closer, and holder reinforcing shall be 3/16 -inch thick steel, continuous for the full height or length of the frame for exterior and vestibule doors, and minimum 14 gauge for strike, 12 gauge for closer, and 7 -gauge steel for butts at other doors, except drywall partition frames shall have minimum 16 gauge for strike and 8 gauge for butts. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled, and tapped for scheduled mortise hardware, and shall be reinforced for surface - applied hardware. Weld dust covers over drilled reinforcements. 2.2.4 SHOP PAINT. After fabrication, thoroughly clean frames and degrease, phosphatize, and paint with a rust- inhibitive primer. 2.3 DRYWALL DOOR FRAMES 2.3.1 FABRICATE DRYWALL FRAMES of 16 -gauge cold - rolled steel formed to types and profiles shown on the Drawings. Breaks, angles, and arises shall be uniform, straight, sharply defined, and true. Frames shall be knocked -down (KD) with mitered corners and reinforcement for integral tabs for interlocking of frame head and jambs. 73-90-133-g 08100 -2 END OF SECTION 2.3.2 REINFORCING. Frames for 1 -3/4 -inch doors shall be 9 -gauge steel hinge reinforcement plates for 4 -1/2 -inch x 4 -1/2 -inch template type hinges, 14 -gauge steel strike reinforcement, and 12 -gauge steel for closers. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled, and tapped for scheduled mortise hardware, and shall be reinforced for surface - applied hardware. 2.3.3 ANCHORS. Frames shall have leveling screw anchors at jambs and two base anchors pre - punched for secure screwing to the wall. 2.3.4 SHOP PAINT. After fabrication, thoroughly clean frames, phosphatize, and finish with one coat of rust- inhibitive primer. 2.3.5 INSTALL DRYWALL FRAMES at openings in finished walls plumb, square, and level. Anchor frames to the wall at base and at jambs with leveling screws. MP 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Frame at Rolling Door Section Wiring of Operator Motors Ionization Smoke Detectors Electromagnetic Holders Inc., 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 ROLL -UP DOORS 2.1.1 LABELED ROLL -UP Operation: Mounting: Curtain: Material and Finish: Control: Motor Characteristics: F -41 FD -5 FMI FPO F -265 FMSERIES UF3 FMA -1093 .......................... Operation: Mounting: Curtain: Material and Finish: Motor Characteristics: Motor Control: Type and S -41 FCM MFI FPO -20 930P SF4 FN1 FMA -1093 Section Section Section SECTION 08330 COILING DOORS 05500 16120, 16721, 16721, 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 LABELED ROLL -UP DOORS shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories indicating the applicable rating and wall opening classification scheduled. p i fo med ran ra id doo , the o ct Ohl #� nvi.de ver ; ea l on., : :a , rov a e that : the. : ; mod ficat o;ns .o ::: v.olate o f g g ::.:•. :: 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT shop drawings and product data to the Architect - Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. DOORS shall be as follows: Atlas Door Corporation Cookson Company Cornell Iron Works, Inc. Harsco Corporation (Kinnear) Overhead Door Corporation Mahon Door Corporation North American Rolling Door Inc. J.G. Wilson Corporation Ce cr /Wi dsCr Dapx fCtt::; 2.1.2 NONLABELED ROLL -UP DOORS shall be as Manufacture: Atlas Door Corporation Cookson Company Cornell Iron Works, Inc. Harsco Corporation (Kinnear) Mahon Door Corporation North American Rolling Door Inc. Overhead Door Corporation . J.G. Wilson Corporation co/Winda C 2.1.3 EXTERIOR ROLL -UP DOORS shall be as follows: 73- 90- 133;16: 08330 -1 existing follows: Electrical Manual Electrical Manual Electrical Manual Motorized Face Flat slat matc factory primed Governor to regulate closing speed 1/2 hp, 120 volts, 8.2 amperes, 60 Hertz Motor, with safety bottom bar Chain Face Flat slat (matc;t e ciing >) Galvanized; phosphatized Steel, factory primed 1/2 hp, 120 volts, 8.2 amperes, 60 Hertz Three- position switch (open - close -stop) Operation: Mounting: Curtain: Hood: Bottom Bar: Guides: Finish: Motor Characteristics: Motor Control: Door Position Switch: Type and Manufacture: All Weather S41W Weatherbar FCM Weatherguard MFW Extr -TITE FPO -20 930 -P Air -Bar SF4 Stormtite SFN1 Weather Door FMA- 1089 -WD 4V .tither : Protea ed: :M ade r 3.0 EXECUTION Motor with safety bottom bar Face Flat slat with wind and end locks CO `_ll With internal header baffle or exterior hea weatherstripping With resilient weatherstripping With windlocking bars, continuous weatherstripping Galvanized, phosphatized steel, factory primed 1/2 hp, 120 volts, 8.2 amperes, 60 Hertz Three - position switch (open - close -stop) DPDT for building security system Atlas Door Corporation Cookson Company Cornell Iron Works, Inc. Harsco Corporation (Kinnear) Mahon Door Corporation North American Rolling Door Inc. Overhead Door Corporation J.G. Wilson Corporation Ceco /Windsor: :Co Wind locks to withstand external wind load of 20 P.S.F. END OF SECTION 2.1.4 Sloping bottom bars to be furnished where indicated to suit sloped floor conditions. 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL ROLL -UP DOORS securely anchored in a straight, plumb, and level condition without distortion, in accord with the manufacturer's installation details and instructions. Install labeled roll -up doors in accord with NFPA 80. Adjust governor to control closing speed. Provide manual operator. ' 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Metal Doors Wood Doors SECTION 08700 HARDWARE AND SPECIALTIES Section 08100 Section 08210 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 LABELED HARDWARE. Furnish hardware as hereinafter scheduled, including additional items that are required to provide frame and fire door assemblies that meet the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for the rating and wall application noted on the Door and Frame Schedule. Hardware on doors so noted shall be listed in the latest edition of the Building Materials List published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT HARDWARE SCHEDULE to the Owner in accord with the requirements for submitting shop drawings as stated in the General Conditions and General Requirements. The Hardware Schedule shall list the type, manufacturer's name and number, finish, and location. Abbreviations and symbols used on the Schedule shall be explained. 1.4 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS 1.4.1 PACKING AND MARKING. Package each item of hardware and each lock set separately in individual containers, complete with necessary screws, keys, instructions, and installation templates for spotting mortising tools. Mark each container with the item number corresponding to the number shown on the Hardware Schedule. 1.4.2 DELIVERY OF KEYS. After locks have been installed, tag keys according to their corresponding locks and deliver to the Owner or his authorized representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 SPECIALTIES 2.1.1 KEY INDEX TRAY shall be an Embaocy Key Index Tray with a capacity of [ 2.1.2 KEY CABINET shall be Diplomat DWT, 500 S, surface mounted wall key cabinet with combination look manufactured by TclKce Inc. 2.2 DESCRIPTION OF HARDWARE 17 Ea. Exterior Doors 3 Ea. Hinges BB1191 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 26D (Hager) 1 Ea. Lockset 5067L L2 Lustra L/C 32D (Russwin) 1 Ea. Cylinder (Yale) 1 Ea. Closer PR7500AL (Norton) 1 Ea. Floor Stop F121X 26D (BBW) 1 Ea. Threshold TH015A MSES 36" x 84" SET (Ultra) 1 Ea. Door Sweep DB - -6A 36" (Ultra) 11 Ea. Interior Locking Doors 3 Ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 26D (lager) 1 Ea. Lockset 5056L L2 Lustra L/C 32D (Russwin) or 1 Ea. Lockset 5059L L2 Lustra L/C 32d (Russwin) as required 1 Ea. Cylinder (Yale) 73- 90- 133»0 08700 -1 Kickplate 10 x 34 32D (BBW) • 1.;. Ea. 'Wall Stop WC9X 26D (BBW) 1 - Ea. - Door Seal WS108D.17' (Ultra) '11 Ea. Interior Non- Locking Doors 3 - -Ea. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 26D (Hager) :1.Ea.`.Latchset 5025L L2 Lustra 32D (Russwin) :1 Ea. Closer 7500BF.AL (Norton) : Kickplate 10 x 34 32D (BBW) 1.Ea Wall Stop WC9X 26D (BBW) 1-Ea.. 'Door .Seal WS1080 17' (Ultra) END OF SECTION 73 - 90 - 1334; ; 08700 - 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 08800 GLAZING 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Aluminum Windows Section 08912 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 GLASS shall meet the requirements of FS DD- G -1403B and FS DD- G -451d. Material containing bubbles, scratches, or other glass shall be removed immediately upon notice. Each piece of glass shall bear the manufacturer's label. 1.2.2 COORDINATION. The Glazing Subcontractor shall coordinate his requirements with the Frame Subcontractor to assure that frames are provided with required bite, edge, and face clearance. 1.2.3 FABRICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS. The fabricator of insulated glass units shall have a minimum of five years of experience in the fabrication and testing of insulated glass units. 1.3 WARRANTY 1.3.1 INSULATED GLASS WARRANTY. For a period of ten years from the date of manufacture, the fabricator of insulated glass shall warrant the glazing units against defects in material or workmanship that result in moisture accumulation, film formation, or dust collection between the interior surfaces caused by failure of the hermetic seal. 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.4.1 STACK GLAZING SHEETS at five degrees to seven degrees from vertical. Separate sheets with interleaving of protection paper and cushion top and bottom edges with felt. Cover to protect material from wind -blown water or run -off and provide for ventilation and circulation of cool, dry air. Maintain temperature above dew point. Protect glazing material from welding, sandblasting, and other potentially damaging operations. 1.4.2 HANDLE GLAZING SHEETS to prevent damage to edges and corners. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS 1.5.1 TEMPERATURE shall be 40F or higher during application and curing. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS 2.1.1 CLEAR FLOAT CLA &C (CFC) shall be 3/3 inch thick, clear, glazing quality, and mirror quality, float glaoo. 2.1.2 CLEAR PLATE CLASS (CPC) ohall be 3/8 inch thick, clear, glazing quality, and mirror quality, twin ground polished plate glaoo. vertically heat treated, tempered, float or plate glaoo. Tong marks (hall not appear adjacent to oiliconc jointo. 2.1.4 LAMINATED WIRED GLASS (LWG) shall consist of one sheet of 1/4 -inch thick wired glass and one sheet of 1/4 -inch thick, clear, tempered, float or plate glass laminated together with a minimum 0.060 -inch thick interlayer of polyvinyl butyral for a total thickness of 9/16 inch. 2.1.5 INCULATED CLASC EXTERIOR (IC) ohall conciot of two ohects an outer 1/4 inch thick, clear, float or plate glaoo acparatcd with a metal opacer to 73- 90- 133 ! 08800 -1 channel at perimeter of each ohcct. Provide a metal edge 2.1.6 INSULATED GLACE INTERIOR (ICI) ohall conaiot of two ohccto an outer ohcct of 1/4 inch thick, clear, float or plate glaoa and an inncr ohcct of 1/4 inoh thiok, olcar, float or plate glaoo ceparatcd with a metal opaocr to provide 1/2 inoh air - ocalo. The metal opaccr ohall contain a drying agent. Provide a metal edge 2.1.7 GLAZING CHANNELS FOR INSULATED INTERIOR shall be Vari -Seal, CU -625, neoprene U Channels manufactured by Vari -Seal Corporation. 2.2 OTHER GLAZING SEALANT COMPOUND AND TAPE shall be of the type and manufacture recommended by the glazing manufacturer and the sealant manufacturer for the type of glass and application. Color shall match frame color. 2.2.1 GLAZING CHANNEL CLEANERS AND PRIMER - SEALERS shall be as recommended by the glazing sealant manufacturer. 2.2.2 SETTING BLOCKS, SPACERS, AND FILLERS shall be neoprene of Shore A durometer hardness and size recommended by the glazing manufacturer. Lead setting blocks may be used when recommended by the glazing manufacturer. 2.2.3 MIRROR MASTIC shall be an adhesive produced specifically for setting mirrors by spot application with 25 percent coverage and support only at bottom edge. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 CLEAN GLAZING CHANNELS and remove protective coverings and coatings. 3.1.2 FIELD MEASURE FRAMES to determine actual sizes for glazing materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 INSTALL GLAZING REGLETS straight, plumb, aligned, and in place with joints aligned within tolerances recommended by the glazing gasket manufacturer. Apply compatible sealant over reglet joints prior to installation of gaskets. 3.2.2 INSTALL GLAZING GASKETS in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2.3 INSTALL GLASS together with miscellaneous glazing accessories, to meet the recommendations of the Glazing Manual for Flat Glass Products of the Flat Glass Marketing Association except the manufacturer's recommendations shall prevail when they differ from the Glazing Manual. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 3.3.1 REMOVE LABEL from glass immediately after installation. 3.3.2 CLEAN GLASS with a soft, clean, gritfree cloth and mild soap, detergent, or slightly acidic cleaning solution. Immediately rinse with clean water and remove excess rinse water with a clean squeegee. Do not use abrasive cleaner. 3.3.3 REMOVE GREASE and miscellaneous glazing materials with commercial 73- 90- 133` 08800 -2 solvent. Follow with normal wash and rinse. Be careful not. to damage glazing or.seals 3..3.4 PROTECT. GLASS from breakage by applying crossed streamers.,to.£raming, away,, from glass. Do not'apply markers or signs of any type to 'surface of glazing. Finishes CHEMICAL 'MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION 9 Ccetion 09220 rortland Ocmcnt Plaotcn sa ion ? ' i'3O'0 7 Ceram Ccction 09510 Acouotical Ccilingo Ccction 09530 Acouotical Inoulation a Cootion 09650 Rcoilicnt Flooring Section 09900 Painting 1.0 GENERAL $ECTxON 99251 CEMENT ` 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Plastic Vapor Retardant Section 07213 Fibrous and Reflective Insulation Section 09110 Non - Loading Bearing Wall Framing System Section 07193 1.2 DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.2.1 Delivery. Do not deliver to the project site until immediately before installation begins. 1.2.2 Storage. Store board under cover and stack on a clean floor in the center of large rooms. Material shall remain in their wrappings or container until ready for actual use. Store flat and protect them from damage and bending. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS 1.3.1 Temperature and Humidity. When outside temperatures are below 55'F, maintain the inside temperature in the range of 55'F to 70'F for 24 hours before the application of the board and until the project is complete. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 CEMENT BOARD. 2.1.1 Cement board shall be Durock Cement Board, 1/2" thickness, 48" width, 8' length. Smooth finish or approved equivalent. 2.2 FASTENERS. 2.2.1 Shall be Durock Steel Screws, 1 1/4" or 1 5/8" Water Head, with anticorrosive coating, for 20 ga. steel framing. 2.3 JOINT REINFORCEMENT. 2.3.1 4" wide, Durock Exterior tape, open weave. 2.4 SKIM AND BOND COATS. 2.4.1 Meeting ANSI A118.4: Durock Latex Fortified Mortar, white. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Vapor Barrier. Install vapor barrier as specified in Section 07193. 3.2 EXTERIOR CEMENT BOARD APPLICATION. 3.2.1 Apply cement board with smooth fact to the interior room and with ends and edges over supports.. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Stagger end joints in successive courses. 3.2.2 Fasten cement board to framing with specified fasteners. Drive fasteners in field at Cement Board first, working toward ends and edges. Hold cement board in contact with furring while driving fasteners. Space fasteners 8" o.c. with perimeter fasteners at least 3/8" and less than 5/8" from ends 73 -90- 133 -0 09251 -1 and edges. Drive screws so bottom of heads are flush with surface of Cement Board, to provide firm contact with.framing. Do not . overdrive fasteners. 3.3. JOINT REINFORCEMENT 3.3.1 Prefill joints with Latex Fortified Mortar Embed Exterior Tape centered over all joints and corners but not overlapped. 3.3.2 Sand joint smooth after drying. 73-90-133 09251- END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE SECTION 09900 PAINTING 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED 1.2.1 NONFERROUS METALS. Copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, aluminum, and Monel metal shall not be painted or finished, except as specified otherwise. 1.2.2 CONCEALED SURFACES, AREAS, AND INACCESSIBLE AREAS, including crawl spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts, and elevator shafts, do not require paint, unless specified otherwise. Paint inside of ductwork exposed to view. 1.2.3 OPERATING PARTS, such as valve and damper operations, linkages, linkages, sensing devices, and motor and fan shafts, do not require paint, unless specified otherwise. 1.2.4 LABELS AND PLATES, such as Factory Mutual and Underwriters _ Laboratories' labels and equipment identification, performance, name, and nomenclature plates, shall not be painted. 1.2.5 FACTORY - PRIMED PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS do not require job- applied prime coats. 1.2.6 COORDINATION. Primers and undercoats shall be of the same manufacture as finish coats. Thinners shall be approved by the paint manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS are as follows: Preservative Paint 1.3.2 COORDINATION. Primers and undercoats shall be of the same manufacture as finish coats. Thinners shall be approved by the paint manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT samples of each type of finish and color to the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Submit paint samples on 8 -1/2 -inch x 11 -inch Mead Mark I cover paper, coated on one side, with paint sprayed or applied with a foam rubber roller. Submit samples within 60 days after the Contract date. On the back of paint samples, show the paint manufacturer and trade name of the proposed paint. 1.4.2 EXTRA STOCK. The Painting Contractor shall furnish the Owner with two gallons of each color or type of finishes, sealed and unused, together with mixing formulae (with matching information). The Painting Contractor shall furnish two copies of this information to the Owner in addition to the instructions attached to paint containers. 1.5 JOB MOCK -UP 1.5.1 PAINT OR FINISH ONE ROOM designated by the Architect - Engineer as specified and scheduled. After the first finish coat has been applied, notify the Architect - Engineer so that the work can be inspected. After the final finish coat is inspected and approved, this room will be used for comparison in evaluation of other painting and finishing of a similar nature. 73 -90 -133' 09900 -1 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.6.1 DELIVERY. Deliver paints, varnishes, enamels, lacquers, stains, paste fillers, and similar materials in their original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. 1.6.2 STORAGE. Store materials used on the project in a single place designated by the Owner or the Architect - Engineer. Keep storage place neat and clean, and correct any damage thereto or to its surroundings. Remove any oil, rags, waste, etc., from the building every night and take every precaution to avoid the danger of fire. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS 1.7.1 TEMPERATURE of surfaces and surrounding air shall be between 50F and 90F during painting and drying. 1.7.2 SURFACES to be painted shall not be wet or damp. 1.7.3 WEATHER. Do not apply exterior paint in rain, snow, fog, or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. 1.7.4 PROTECTION. Protect adjacent work by drop cloths, masking tape, or other suitable coverings. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 LEAD CONTENT in pigment shall not exceed 0.5 percent lead metal by weight of the total nonvolatile liquid content or dry film of paint surfaces readily accessible to children under twelve years of age. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES. The painter shall examine surfaces which are scheduled to receive paint, stain, varnish, or other coatings and report to the Contractor any surfaces which cannot be put into proper condition for finishing by customary cleaning, sanding, puttying, or other similar preparation operations. Application of the first coat shall constitute acceptance of surfaces as fit and proper to receive finish. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION 3.2.1 REMOVE hardware, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items, which are not to be painted, or apply protective coverings before commencing surface preparation. Re- install these items in each room after painting is complete and dry. 3.2.2 CLEAN surfaces free of dirt, rust, scale, grease, and moisture. 3.2.3 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS 1. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, and oils and roughen as required to remove glaze. 2. Correct alkalinity if this condition will cause blistering and burning of finish paint. 3. Do Not Paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds eight percent, unless permitted otherwise in manufacturer's printed directions. 73- 90- 1330 09900 -2 3.2.5 FERROUS METALS 1. Wash nonprimed metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt and grease and remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sand papering clean. 2. Omit prime coat on metal surfaces which have been shop primed, unless a touch -up of damaged prime coats is required. 3. Wire Brush damaged shop - applied prime coats and touch -up with the same primer as shop coat. 4. Apply barrier coat or remove primer and reprime surfaces which are shop primed with primers that are incompatible with finish coats. 3.2.6 GALVANIZED METAL. Clean and treat chemically with a compound designed for this purpose, such as "Lithoform," "Stibley," or "Solfo Metallic Coat," in accord with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 MIXING 3.3.1 MIX AND PREPARE paint in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations. Tint undercoats to match finish coats. 3.4 APPLICATION 3.4.1 GENERAL. Under adequate illumination, apply materials with brush, roller, or spray in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations. Spread evenly and flow on smoothly without runs, sags, or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass and color break lines. 3.4.2 APPLY SECOND COAT only after first coat is thoroughly dry. Sand with fine sandpaper between enamel and varnish coats applied to wood or metal. 3.4.3 APPLY SUBSEQUENT COATS when stains, undercoats, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 3.4.4 SPRAY APPLICATION OF PAINTS is permitted on wall surfaces and exposed metal deck, steel joists, and exposed structural roof system areas provided the application is by airless -type spray equipment, and provided the application by spray is followed by a roller on wall surfaces. Roller shall thoroughly work paint into pores for complete surface coverage. Conventional paint spray equipment is permitted on metal door frames, metal doors, and metal fabrications. Sprayed surfaces shall be smooth, free of imperfections and paint runs, and shall be completely covered by each coat. Do not double back to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 3.5.1 CLEAN adjacent and other surfaces smeared or splattered as a result of the painting. 3.6 PAINT AND STAIN SCHEDULE 3.6.1 EXTERIOR WORK PAVEMENT MARKING 2 coats CONCRETE 1 coat 1 coat FERROUS METAL 73-90-133g§ 09900 -3 P & L Traffic Paint Concrete Primer Satin 1 coat GALVANIZED METAL l coat 1 coat 3.6.2 INTERIOR WORK CONCRETE 1 coat 2 coats CONCRETE BLOCK 1 coat 2 coats FERROUS METAL 1 coat 2 coats .09900 -4 !.' GALVANIZED METAL DUCTS 1 coat GYPSUM BOARD% ; . MENXr< ,gA t 1 coat ? . . ....,. . . . . ... ......... ..... 2 coats Follow Boeing Painting Standards. 3.7 PAINT AND STAIN COLOR SCHEDULE 3.7.1 PAINT COLORS shall be: Interior: Preservative Paint "Light String" Exterior: Preservative Paint "Seafoam" #5 -5 END OF SECTION Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline 4.0 - 6.0 DFM per coat Series 70 Endura- Shield 1.5 - 2.5 DFM per coat Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline 4.0 - 6.0 DFM per coat Series 70 Endura - Shield 1.5 - 2.5 DFM per coat Wall Primer Satin Finish Concrete Filler Satin 4 -55 Vesare 2.0 - 3.5 DFM Series 2 Tneme -Gloss 1.5'- 2.5.DFM per coat .Pro -Hide. Dry Fall -Out Spray Coating Satin Wall Primer Satin Finish Section 10200 Louvers &;3leri Section 10250 Firefigfi trig Devices 8eeties 199 ?0 T F' CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION - 10 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK Concrete Tilt -up Wall Pane Is. Section 03400 Sealant Section 07900 Metal Doors and Frames Section 08100 Electrical: Power requirements for Operable louvers Division 16 1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.2.1 Louver Terminology: Refer to AMCA Publication 501 -85 for definitions of terms for metal louvers not otherwise defined in this section or referenced standards. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.3.1 Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install exterior metal wall louvers to withstand the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement, without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; and permanent damage to fasteners and anchors: .1 Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 25 lbf per sq. ft. acting inwards or outwards. . 2 Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and night time sky heat loss. . 3 Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (55.5 deg C). 1.3.2 Air Performance, Water Penetration, and Air Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated as demonstrated by testing manufacturers stock units, of height and width indicated, according to Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500. 1.4 SUBMITTALS SECTIO ; 1 .200 LODUVERS AND VENTS 1.4.1 Product data for each product indicated. Describe design maximum air velocity and relative static pressure, free area, materials and finishes for each size and type indicated. 1.4.2 Shop drawings of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details showing profiles, angles, spacing of louver blades; unit dimensions related to wall openings and construction; and profiles of frames at jambs, heads and sills. 1.4.3 Include structural computations, material 'properties, and other information needed for structural analysis which has been prepared by, or under the supervision of, a qualified professional engineer. 73- 90- 133 -:6 10200 -1 1.4.4 Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems; differentiating clearly between manufacturer - installed wiring and field - installed wiring. 1.4.5 Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available. 1.4.6 Samples for verification purposes of each type of metal finish required, prepared on 6 inch square metal samples of same thickness and alloy indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 1.4.7 Product test reports evidencing compliance of units with performance requirements indicated. 1.4.8 Product certificates signed by louver manufacturers certifying that their products which comply with Project requirements are licensed to bear AMCA Seal based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 and complying with AMCA Certified Ratings Program. 1.4.9 Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Single Source Responsibility: Obtain louvers and vents from a single source. 1.5.2 Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" and D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." �. 1.5.3 SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 1.5.4 UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor - operated adjustable louvers which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.6.1 Field Measurements: Check actual louver openings by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 2.1.1 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.1.2 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 73- 90- 133 -0 10200 -2 .1 Louvers: 2.2 MATERIALS .1 Airstream Products Div., Penn Ventilator Co., Inc. .2 Construction Specialties, Inc. .3 Greenheck, Inc. .4 Substitutions in accordance with 01600 Material & Equipment. 2.2.1 Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526 or A 527, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 2.2.2 Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer to produce required finish. 2.2.3 Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063 -T5. 2.2.4 Fasteners: Stainless Steel. .1 Use types, gages, and lengths to suit unit installation conditions. .2 Use Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2.5 Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for type of loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. 2.2.6 Bituminous Paint: SSPC -Paint 12 (cold - applied asphalt mastic). 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL 2.3.1 General: Fabricate louvers and vents to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, materials, joinery, and performance. 2.3.2 Preassemble louvers in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 2.3.3 Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. 2.3.4 Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of size indicated with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances of louvers, adjoining construction, and perimeter sealant joints. 2.3.5 Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. 2.3.6 Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated but not further apart than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. At horizontal joints between louver units provide horizontal mullions except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. 2.3.7 Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior. 2.3.8 Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades as follows, unless otherwise indicated, or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections 73 90 133 - 1:6 10200 -3 4g03 between frame members necessary: .1 With fillet welds, concealed from view; or mechanical fasteners; or a combination of these methods; as standard with louver manufacturer. 2.4 ADJUSTABLE EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALL LOUVERS 2.4.1 General: Provide adjustable blade louvers with manufacturer's recommended bearings and operating mechanisms to suit louver sizes and actuator indicated below: .1 Motor operation, with 2 directional, 120V, a.c., 60 cycle motor, and limit switches wired for grounding, equipped with terminals for controlling devices. 2.4.2 Drainable Adjustable Blade Louvers: Extruded aluminum frames and louver blades; designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of adjustable blades and of channels in jambs and mullions; complying with the following requirements: .1 Louver Depth: 64 inches .2 Frame and Louver Blade Thickness: 0.125 inch. .3 Louver Blade Angle: 45 degrees, approximately. .4 Accessories: Equip louvers as follows: .1 Snap -on blade edge gaskets for each louver blade to produce continuous air -tight closures. .5 Performance Requirements: As follows, determined by testing units 48 inches wide by 48 inches high per AMCA Standard 500: .6 AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. .7 Oonatruotion opoaialtico odcl 6867 with EX 150 ocrieo - .Green eick Model ll CK 400 cr approved aquae 2.5 LOUVER SCREENS 2.5.1 General: Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying with the following requirements: .1 Screen Location for Adjustable Louvers: Interior face, except at exterior if recommended by the louver manufacturer. .2 Screening Type: Bird screening consisting of 1/2 inch square mesh formed of 0.063 inch diameter aluminum wire. .3 Exposed Fastener Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 73- 90 -133- i6 .1 Louver Free Area: Not less than 48 %. .2 Air Leakage: Not more than 3.5 cfm per sq. ft. of louver gross area at . a differential static pressure of 0.15 inch water gage with adjustable louver blades closed. .3 Static Pressure Loss: Not more than 0.08 inch water gage at an airflow of 657 fpm free area intake velocity. .4 Water Penetration: Not more than 0.02 oz. per sq. ft. of free area at an airflow of 857 fpm free area velocity when tested for 15 minutes. 10200 -4 2.6 BLANK -OFF PANELS 2.6.1 General: Fabricate blank -off panels from materials and to sizes indicated and to comply with the following requirements: .1 Finish: Match finish applied to louvers with respect to coating type, color and gloss. .2 Finish: Match finish applied to louver with respect to coating type, except for color which shall be flat black. .3 Attach blank -off panels to back of louver frames with stainless . steel sheet metal screws. 2.6.2 Noninsulated Blank -off Panels: Metal sheet complying with the following requirements: ' .1 Aluminum sheet 0.051 inch, unless otherwise indicated. .2 Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with polyvinyl chloride compression gaskets, 1/8 inch by 1 inch. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL 2.7.1 Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. 2.7.2 Finish louvers after assembly. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES 2.8.1 Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 2.8.2 High Performance Organic Coating: AA- C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating, acid chromate - fluoride- phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below) Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions. .1 Fluorocarbon 2 -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2 -coat thermo -cured system, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinyldene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. .1 Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard choices for color and gloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.1.1 Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorages which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 Locate and place louver units plumb, level, and in proper alignment•with adjacent work. 3.2.2 Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. 73 -90- 133 -7; 10200 -5 3.2.3 Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. 3.2.4 Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. 3.2.5 Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding operations require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in field to shop, make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. 3.2.6 Protect galvanized and nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. 3.2.7 Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses where required to make louver joints weathertight. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealants applied during installation of louver. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION 3.3.1 Protect louvers and vents from damage of any kind during construction period including use of temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. 3.3.2 Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction period, so that no evidence remains of correction work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by Owner, remove damaged units and replace with new units. .1 Clean and touch -up minor abrasions in finishes with air -dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory - applied finish coating. Provided by louver manufacturer. Touch up by hand using smallest brush practical. Do not touch up with spray paint. 3.3.3 Test operation of adjustable wall louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units which comply with requirements. 3.4 CLEANING 3.4.1 Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents, which are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period; do not let 'soil accumulate until final cleaning. 3.4.2 Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and with a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Rinse thoroughly and dry surface. END OF SECTION 73- 90- 133 -1 § 10200 -6 1.0 GENERAL Cosmic E Model MP 10 Panorama Hodol 1017 Ccmini Model 2409 3.0 EXECUTION SECTION 10250 FIREFIGHTING DEVICES 1.1 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.1.1 UNDERWRITERS' LABEL. Fire extinguishers shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories Inc., with a rating of 4A, 40BC shown on the label. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS to the Owner in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 2.1.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS shall be 10 -pound extinguishers with steel cylinders and pressure - indicating gauges, shall include wall- mounting brackets when installed at locations other than in fire extinguisher cabinets, and shall be one of the following types and manufacture: J.L. Industries Larsen Manufacturing Co. and flat atccl trim (ocmi rcocoocd with 2 -1/2 inch rcturn at walla lcoo than 3.1 INSTALLATION • 3.1.1 INSTALL FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS at all locations where shown on the Drawings. Top of cabinet shall be 5 feet 4 inches above finish floor. END OF SECTION J.L. Induotrioo Larocn Hanufaoturing Co. Equipment NOT USED CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION,--11 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE II DIVISION - 12 CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 =04. PHASE III DIVISION' -.13. CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION 14 Mechanical Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION - 15 15010 Mechanical Requirements 15030 Heating and Cooling System Testing 15040 Acceptable Manufacturers List .. 15050 External Corrosion Control 15060 Pipe and Fittings 15070 Supports and Hangars 15080 Valves 15090 Piping Identification 15100 Installation of Equipment, 15110 Sleeves and Seals 15130 Insulation 15140 Motors and Control 15430 Domestic Water Piping 15440 Domcotic Hot Watcr DepApmon` -_ `_ 15450 Plumbing Specialties 15460 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim - 15470 Natural Piping System 15510 Fire Protection System 15810 Air Moving Equipment 15820 Roof -Top Central Station Air Handlers 15830 Air Duct Systems 15850 Air Distribution Specialties 15950 Temperature Controls Monitoring and Balancing Piping, and Ductwork 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 MECHANICAL REOUIREMENTS 1.1.1 THIS SECTION is supplemental to the General and Supplementary Conditions and the General Requirements of these Specifications. These Sections shall apply to phases of the Work specified, shown on the Drawings, or required to provide for the complete installation of the mechanical systems for this project. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.2.1 IN GENERAL, Sections 15010 through 15140 specify basic methods and material that apply to work specified in other Division 15 Sections. Refer to these sections, as they apply, whether they are specifically referred to or not in the individual sections. 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS 1.3.1 WORK shall meet the requirements of applicable sections of the latest codes and standards of the following organizations: American Gas Association (AGA) American Refrigeration Institute (ARI) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boeing Facilities Standard Document D- 180 - 14302 -3 Factory Mutual Engineering National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Uniform Building Code Uniform Plumbing Code Uniform Mechanical Codes Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) Washington State Energy Code 1.3.2 THESE CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS shall take precedence if the Drawings and Specifications are not in conformance therewith. These codes and standards shall be considered as a minimum requirement for the work. Items shown on the Drawings or specified in these Specifications which exceed the minimum requirements of the code shall be installed as shown on the Drawings or as specified in these Specifications. 1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1.4.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT specified to be of a certain make, type or "approved equal" shall be of the make or type specified or as listed in Section 15040, Acceptable Manufacturers List. Unless otherwise specified or shown, materials shall be new and previously unused. The entire cost of changes, due to substitutions for materials or equipment specified, shall be borne by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner. 1.4.2 THE CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the operability and maintainability of equipment when other than what is specified is installed. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing "added requirements" in his Shop Drawings when proposing the use of non - specified equipment whether or not the proposed equipment manufacturer is listed as acceptable in this specification or is approved by prior approval. 73-90-133t# 15010 -1 iE 1.4.3 ADDED REQUIREMENTS to the Shop Drawings for non - specified equipment include complete dimensional and connection data and electrical information where applicable. Also include a 1/4 -inch scale drawing prepared by the Contractor showing the exact location with relation to the building and the space allocated for the equipment. The drawing shall show actual sizes to scale of all equipment, including accessories, adjacent equipment and structural components. The drawing shall show all recommended clearances required for normal operation and maintenance including spaces required for cleaning, disassembly, and replacement. The drawing shall also indicate clearances required by the National Electric Code. 1.5 INSTALLATION 1.5.1 EQUIPMENT shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations unless specifically directly otherwise by the Architect - Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing what is required to meet the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.5.2 THE CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing the necessary equipment, accessories, and installation to provide completely and totally operable systems as described in these specifications and shown on the Drawings. 1.5.3 EQUIPMENT, PIPING, ETC. shall be installed by trained craftsmen in a quality workmanlike manner. Poor workmanship will be considered proper justification for rejection of the work. 1.6 PROJECT EQUIPMENT LIST 1.6.1 WITHIN TEN DAYS AFTER START OF CONSTRUCTION, submit to the Architect- Engineer five copies of a complete list of materials and equipment to be used on the project. The list shall show the manufacturer's name and catalog number of material and equipment, with any other data necessary to identify the equipment in the manufacturer's catalogs. The Architect - Engineer will return two copies of the list marked "approved," "approved as . noted," or "disapproved." Resubmit disapproved items. No pay requests will be processed until the list is submitted and approved. 1.7 FIELD STORAGE OF MATERIALS 1.7.1 STORE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT indoors at the jobsite, or, if this is not possible, store on raised platforms and protect from the weather by means of waterproof covers. Coverings shall permit circulation of air around materials to prevent condensation of moisture. Screen or cap openings in equipment to prevent the entry of vermin. 1.8 VERIFICATION OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS 1.8.1 THE DRAWINGS indicate the proper sizes and general arrangement for piping, fixtures, ductwork and equipment. Locations of risers shown are approximate only, and shall be verified in the field by the Contractor. As the Drawings are small scale, it is not possible to show the necessary offsets, fittings and accessories. Investigate the structural and finished conditions and arrange equipment accordingly, furnishing such fittings, offsets, and accessories as may be required at no additional expense to the Owner. If it becomes necessary to make a change in location or building construction, consult with the Architect- Engineer before making any change. Any such change approved by the Architect - Engineer shall be made without added cost to the Owner. Under no circumstance shall the sizes indicated on the Drawings be changed without first having the written approval of the Architect - Engineer. 1.8.2 DETERMINE, AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR, the proper location and character of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for the Work, and obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress so Work will not be delayed. Rough -in of fixtures, 73- 90- 133 1;6 . 15010 -2 etc., must be laid out accurately. Connections to equipment of the same class shall be equal heights, plumb and at right angles to the wall, unless otherwise directed. 1.8.3 FINAL LOCATION of inserts, hangers, etc., required for each installation must be coordinated with facilities required for other installations to prevent interference. 1.8.4 TAKE EXTREME CAUTION not to install work that connects to equipment until such time as complete shop drawings of such equipment have been approved by the Architect - Engineer. Any work installed by the Contractor prior to approval of shop drawings will be at the Contractor's risk. 1.9 PROTECTION 1.9.1 AT ALL TIMES during the performance of this Contract, properly protect work from damage and protect the Owner's property from injury or loss. Make good any damage, injury or loss, except such as may be caused by agents or employees of the Owner. Adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law. Provide and maintain passageways, guard fences, lights, and other facilities for protection required by public authority of local conditions. 1.10 LEAK DAMAGE 1.10.1 THE CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for damages to the work of other Contractors, to the building or its contents, people, etc., caused-by leaks in any of the equipment installed by him, through equipment or materials failures, disconnected pipes or fittings, or by overflows, and shall make, at his own expense, repairs to fixtures and equipment so damaged. 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 1.11.1 AT THE TIME OF PURCHASE OF EQUIPMENT, the Contractor shall request copies of operation, lubrication, and maintenance manuals for all equipment. Assemble literature in coordinated manuals with additional information describing the combined operation of field - assembled units, including as -built wiring diagrams and lubrication data. Manuals shall also contain the names and addresses of the manufacturer and the local representative who stocks or furnishes repair parts for the items of equipment. Submit the manuals under Provisions of Section 01700. 1.11.2 SEE SECTION 01700 for additional requirements for operation and maintenance manuals. 1.12 PLACING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION 1.12.1 AT THE COMPLETION OF THE WORK, and at such time as the Owner shall direct, prior to final acceptance, the Contractor performing this work shall put into satisfactory operation the various systems installed under the Specifications. At no additional cost to the Owner, furnish the services of a person completely familiar with the installations performed under this Specification, to instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation, and servicing of the equipment and systems. These services shall be available for a period of not less than one day. END OF SECTION 73- 90 -133 15010 -3 1.3.3 BALANCING DATA will not be acceptable if the work is performed prior to cleaning of the air systems. 1.4 REFERENCES 1.4.1 NATIONAL STANDARDS FOR FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION - TOTAL SYSTEM BALANCE, latest edition, published by Associate Air Balance Council. 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.5.1 SUBMIT HVAC SHOP DRAWINGS, approved by the Architect - Engineer, to the testing and balancing agency prior to the commencement of the testing and balancing work. 1.5.2 SUBMIT TESTING AND BALANCING REPORTS under provisions of Section 01300 except as modified below: 1. Submit three copies, each in a three, ring binder. I 2. Submit testing and balancing data on approved forms which identify each diffuser, grille, register and item of tested equipment, and which show size, type, manufacture, location, area and test data. 1.0 GENERAL 1 _on_1114 SECTION 15030 HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 1.1.1 BALANCING OF ALL AIR SYSTEMS constructed in this contract. This includes diffusers, registers, grilles, and all supply, exhaust, and return air openings. 1.2 RELATED WORK: SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Section 15010 Air Moving Equipment Section 15810 Roof -Top Central Station Air Handlers Section 15820 Air Duct System Section 15830 Air Distribution Specialties Section 15850 Temperature Controls and Monitoring Section 15950 1.3 OUALITY CONTROL - 1.3.1 OBTAIN THE SERVICES of an agency that performs the type of work hereinafter specified. The agency shall be a certified member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), or shall have submitted adequate documentation to prove the agency competent in air balancing. Minimum qualifications for acceptance shall be the General Membership Standards of the Associated Air Balance Council, as published in AABC "National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation - Total System Balance," Volume 1, No. 81266, except that affiliation with manufacturers, installing contractors, or engineering firms may not preclude their acceptance. 1.3.2 ALL INSTRUMENTS USED FOR MEASUREMENTS shall be accurate. Calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. The Architect /Engineer reserves the right to request instruments recalibration, or the use of other instruments, where accuracy of readings is questionable. 1.6 GUARANTEE 1.6.1 TESTING AND BALANCING WARRANTY. Air quantities shall be readjusted as required to provide uniform temperatures and eliminate objectional noises during a period of one year beginning at the completion of the testing and balancing work. �n�n -1 �tiraEzl'??i >t 2.0 PRODUCTS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 AIR SYSTEM BALANCING 3.1.1 NOTIFICATION. After the installation and cleaning of HVAC system and the completion of start -up, the Contractor shall notify the testing and balancing agency and the Architect - Engineer that the system is fully operable and ready for testing and balancing. 3.1.2 MAKE THE FOLLOWING TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS AND RECORDINGS: 71 —can -1 11':1`:F 1. Test and adjust supply and exhaust fan rotation and RPM to design requirements. 2. Test and record fan motor full load amperes after above adjustments. 3. Make pitot tube traverse at main supply and rcturn ducts, and obtain design CFM at fans. 4. Test and adjust system static pressures, suction and discharge. . 15. Test and adjust exhaust fans for required CFM. END OF SECTION 1 C.n1n -7 a' k:s:�i;i >3E:f'iit?'E #<::Ranie7i 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 15040 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS LIST 1.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.1.1 THE FOLLOWING MANUFACTURERS are acceptable for the equipment listed. Equipment of manufacturers not listed herein may be used only with prior written approval as outlined in Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. SECTION 15060 Pipe and Fittings ITT Grinnel Corp Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc. Victaulic Co. of America SECTION 15070 Hangers and Supports B -Line Systems Inc. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. Corner & Lada Co., Inc. Elcen Metal Products Co. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co. ITT Grinnel Corp. Shields and Saddles Elcen Metal Products Co. Pipe. Shields, Inc. SECTION 15080 Valves Crane Fairbanks Jenkins Keystone, Lunkenheimer Milwaukee Sarco Stoc'kham Grinnell Watts Ball Valves Apollo Watts Wolverine Brass Grinnell SECTION 15090 Piping Identification Allen Systems Brady (W.H.) Company Seton Name Plate Corp. SECTION 15130 Insulation Armstrong Certain -Teed Manville Owens- Corning Pittsburgh CECT 1 5410 &tee Germs aesam Cmith Wade *tire Soria Sinko Wiliieme Fiat SECTION 15810 Centrifugal Roof Exhauster Acme Aerovent Eriedert Carnes Cook Greenheck Jenn -Air Pace Penn Power -Line Gas Fired Make -Up Air Units Reznor 8lee4-ree- 0 • c Make -Up Air Units Rupp gslAr SECTION 15820 Air Handling Unit Carrier ,SECTION 15830 fire Dampers Air Balance Air Stream American Warming ;shin !United Sheet Metal $aYtional Controlled Air Sate Air w • 731 -90- 133 vr,. ,.,, SECTION 15850 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles Anemostat Barber- Coleman Carnes Hart and Cooley Krueger Metalaire Titus 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 15050 EXTERNAL CORROSION CONTROL 1.1 SCOPE 1.1.1 CORROSION protection for buried pipe and steel items. 1.1.2 CORROSION protection for equipment and steel pipe exposed to outdoor environmental weather conditions or corrosive environment. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Pipe and Pipe Fittings Supports and Hangers Natural Gas Piping System Air Moving Equipment Roof -Top Central Station Air Handler Air Duct System 73 -90 -133 15050 -1 Section 15010 Section 15060 Section 15070 Section 15470 Section 15810 Section 15820 Section 15830 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.4.1 SUBSTITUTIONS under provisions of Section 01600. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 2.1.1 COAL TAR ENAMEL: 1. Coal tar based, heavy duty. 2. Water repellent. 3. Designed to protect buried metals from corrosion. 4. Manufactured by Koppers Co., Inc., Bitumastic No. 50. 2.1.2 PLASTIC TAPE: 1. Self - sealing polyvinyl chloride tape. 2. Minimum 10 mil thick. 3. Adhesive backed. 4. 3M Company, Scotchrap No. 50; Manville, Trantex Tape VID 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 PROVIDE COMPLETE PROTECTION for the work. 1. Equipment exposed to weather shall be factory - finished for that usage or provided with protection when installed. 2. Protection of buried piping shall be continuous; applied to fittings, and valves, etc., as well as to pipe. 3.1.2 BURIED IRON OR STEEL material shall be coated, wrapped, or encased. 3.1.3 BARE IRON OR STEEL exposed to weather shall be galvanized; or shall be painted, coated, wrapped, or encased. For painting; see Section 09900 of these Specifications. 3.1.4 WHERE BURIED ITEMS EMERGE from the ground, the burial protection shall be extended to not less than 6- inches above ground (or above slab on fill). 3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 THOROUGHLY CLEAN SURFACES by removing all dirt, scale, grease, and oil. Where tape is to be applied, use solvent for thorough removal of grease and oil. 3.2.2 COMPLETELY DRY the cleaned surface before applying protective material. 3.3 BURIED STEEL PIPE 3.3.1 GALVANIZED: Cover with one coat of coal tar enamel. 3.3.2 BLACK: Cover with two layers of plastic tape. 3.3.3 BLACK (CONTRACTOR'S OPTION): Factory- covered plastic - coated pipe. Wrap and seal joints per manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 BURIED SUPPORTS 3.4.1 STEEL AND IRON: Cover with coal tar enamel to a thickness of not less than 30 mils. (Requires three applications between drying periods, if material is clean). 3.5 EQUIPMENT EXPOSED TO WEATHER 3.5.1 IF EQUIPMENT DOES NOT have factory - applied weatherproof finish, it must be painted. For painting, see Section 09900 of the Specifications. 3.6 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL 3.6.1 WHEN BURIED IRON OR STEEL material is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection, electrostatic brush tests for "holidays" shall be performed as listed below. Voltage check of brush shall be made before and after each test. 1. On Buried Pipe, Shop - Applied Cover a. Immediately before placement in trench. b. All field -made joints and installed fittings immediately before backfilling trench. 2. On Buried Pipe, Field- Applied Cover: Immediately before placing pipe on bottom of trench. 3. Spot testing may be required at any location having the appearance of damage at any time. 73 -90- 133» END OF SECTION 15050 -2 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Acceptable Manufacturer's List SECTION 15060 PIPE AND FITTINGS Section 15010 Section 15040 1.2 STANDARDS 1.2.1 PIPING MATERIALS shall meet the requirements of the applicable sections of the latest standards of the following organizations listed below: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) American Welding Society (AWS) American Water Works Association (AWWA) Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) Commerical Standards, National Bureau of Standards (CS) Federal Specifications (FS) Military Specifications (MIL SPEC) 1.2.2 ALL PIPING shall conform to the above standards as required by the Uniform Plumbing Code, 1985 Edition. Fittings used for fire protection shall be FM approved and UL listed. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.4.1 SUBSTITUTIONS under provisions of Section 01600. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.1.1 CAST I RON SOIL PIPE AND FI TTINCC 0h311 mcct tk 2.1.2 ABS PIPE shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 1527 and CS -218, or ASTM D 2282 and CS -254. Fittings shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2468, D 2469, or D 2465. 2.1.3 STEEL PIPE shall meet the requirements of ANSI B -36.20 or FS WW -P -406 and ASTM A 120; or ANSI B -36.1 or FS WW -P -404 and ASTM A 53. Cast iron fittings shall meet ASTM A 126, Class B, and ANSI B -16.4 or FS WW -P -501 (threaded); ANSI B -16.1 or FS WW -F -406 (flanged); or ANSI B -16.12 or FS WW -P- 491 (drainage). Malleable iron fittings shall meet ASTM A 197 and the above dimensional standards. Steel welding fittings shall meet ASTM A 106, Grade B, or A 234, Grade B. ANSI B -16.9 dimensional standards are not required. Welding fittings shall be factory fabricated. 2.1.4 GAS PIPING shall be Schedule 40, black steel, with threaded or welded joints, and shall meet ANSI B 36.1; ASTM A53; or FS WW -P -401. Cast iron fittings shall meet ASTM A 126, Class B; ANSI B -16.4; or FS WW -P -501 (threaded); ANSI B -16 -9; ASTM A 106, Grade B; or ASTM A 234, Grade B (welded). Dimensional standards are not required. Welding fitting shall be factory fabricated. 2.1.5 COPPER TUBING shall meet the requirements of ASTM B 88 and ANSI H -23.1; or FS WW -T -799. Fittings shall meet ANSI.B -16.22 and ASTM B 75 (wrought copper) or ANSI B -16.18 or B -16.23 and ASTM 8 145 (cast brass). Solder shall be 95 percent tin and five percent antimony, meeting ASTM B 32. Brazed joints shall be made with approved silver or copper alloy brazing materials. END OF SECTION 1cncn_i ' 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Acceptable Manufacturers List Installation of Equipment, Piping, and Ductwork SECTION 15070 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS Section 15010 Section 15040 Section 15100 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS shall be those listed in Section 15040, Acceptable Manufacturers List. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL - PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 2.1.1 GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal - piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP -58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal- piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper - plated hangers and supports for copper - piping systems. 2.1.2 HANGERS shall be one of the following: 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1. 2. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers for non - insulated piping only: MSS Type 7. 2.2 VERTICAL - PIPING CLAMPS 2.2.1 GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory - fabricated vertical - piping clamps complying with MSS SP -58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper - plated clamps for copper - piping systems. 2.2.2 TWO -BOLD RISER CLAMPS: MSS Type 8. 2.3 HANGER -ROD ATTACHMENTS 2.3.1 GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger -rod attachments complying with MSS SP -58, selected by Installer to suit horizontal - piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP- 69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger -rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper - plated hanger -rod attachments for copper - piping systems. 2.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS 2.4.1 GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory - fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP -53, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper - plated building attachments for copper - piping systems. 73-90-1334k 5 15070 -1 2.4.2 CONCRETE INSERTS: MSS Type 18. 2.4.3 TOP BEAM C- CLAMPS: MSS Type 19. 2.4.4 CENTER BEAM CLAMPS: MSS Type 21. 2.5 SADDLES AND SHIELDS 2.5.1 GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory- fabricated for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 2.5.2 PROTECTION SADDLES: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. 2.5.3 PROTECTION SHIELDS: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 EXAMINE AREAS AND CONDITIONS under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 PREPARATION 3.2.1 PROCEED WITH INSTALLATION of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments. 3.2.2 PRIOR TO INSTALLATION of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, installers of other work requiring coordination with work of this section for purpose of reviewing material selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS 3.3.1 INSTALL BUILDING ATTACHMENTS at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP -69. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 3.4.1 GENERAL: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP -69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP -69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 3.5.1 HANGER ADJUSTMENT: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. 73 -90 -133» '6 15070 -2 »•sat 3.5.2 SUPPORT ADJUSTMENT: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping • and equipment to proper level and elevations. !3.5..3 CLEANING: Clean factory- finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched' surfaces with manufacturer's touch -up paint. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Acceptable Manufacturer's List Pipe and Fittings Installation of Equipment, Piping and Ductwork 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.3.1 SUBSTITUTIONS shall 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1.3 CATE VALVES, 2 1/2 SECTION 15080 VALVES END OF SECTION Section 15010 Section 15040 Section 15060 Section 15100 under provisions of Section 01300. be under provisions of Section 01600. 2.1 VALVES 2.1.1 SHUTOFF. VALVES, 2 -inch and smaller, shall be ball valves of bronze construction with a full port hard chrome plated brass ball, teflon seals and be rated for temperatures up to 450F and pressures to 400 psi WOG and 150 psi steam. Ball valves shall be Watts Series B -6000 or approved equal. inoh and largcr, ohall be flangcd 125# oaot iron 2.1.3 GATE VALVES, 2 -inch and smaller, shall be 125# bronze body non - rising d stem, solid wedge disc, screwed cna en or solder ends, Stockham B103— or Stockham 8104, or approved equal. wren 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL VALVES with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 3.1.2 PROVIDE ACCESS where valves are not exposed. 3.2 APPLICATION 3.2.1 INSTALL BRASS MALE ADAPTORS each side of ,valves in copper pipe system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Section 15010 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under 2.0 PRODUCTS 3.0 EXECUTION SECTION 15090 PIPING IDENTIFICATION provisions of Section 01300. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.3.1 SUBSTITUTIONS shall be under provisions of Section 01600. 2.1 PIPE 2.1.1 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS shall be identified in accordance with Boeing Standard D180- 14302 -3, Vol. I, Section A -2. 3.1 PIPING 3.1.1 PIPE MARKERS shall be installed in accordance with Boeing Standard D180- 14302 -3, Vol. I. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Supports and Hangers 1.2 SCHEDULING 1.2.1 PLAN THE WORK so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other trades. Coordinate size and location of openings required in the building structure and coordinate mechanical equipment locations with the approved equipment location drawings. 1.2.2 INSTALL pipe and duct sleeves and pipe support inserts before concrete is poured. 2.0 PRODUCTS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL EQUIPMENT, ACCESSORIES AND SERVICES to permit easy access to filters, motors, drives and other items requiring maintenance. Relocation of equipment connections required to permit normal maintenance shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.1.2 ALL EQUIPMENT NOT ON VIBRATION ISOLATORS shall be rigidly attached to prevent overturning and rotation. Attachment shall be capable of resisting 50 percent minimum of the equipments weight applied in any direction at its center of mass. 3.1.3 MAKE FINAL PIPING CONNECTIONS to equipment with unions or flanges to permit dismantling. Locate unions or flanges to allow coil removal. 3.1.4 PROVIDE PERMANENT PROTECTIVE COVERS at rotating or reciprocating parts. Provide openings in covers to allow measurement of RPM. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION 3.2.1 INSTALL PIPING TO CONFORM TO BUILDING CONDITIONS, offsetting to clear structural members and cuts. Run in furred spaces wherever possible. Run exposed piping parallel or at right angles to the building walls and as high as possible. 3.2.2 INSTALL PIPE HANGERS where specified to provide piping systems which are self - supporting and not dependent upon connection to equipment. 3.2.4 PREVENT INTERFERENCE between piping and doors, windows, aisles and passageways. 73 -90 -133 13. SECTION 15100 INSTALLATION OF EOUIPMENT, PIPING, AND DUCTWORK Section 15010 Section 15070 15100-1 I, 3.2.5 ALLOW FLEXIBILITY in the erection of the piping system to prevent excessive stresses in materials and joints due to thermal expansion or equipment vibration. 3.2.6 USE FULL LENGTHS of pipe; short lengths with couplings will not be permitted. 3.2.7 ALLOW FOR PIPE INSULATION without cutting pipe or fitting coverings. 3.2.8 SLOPE PIPING and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. 3.2.9 TEST ALL PRESSURE PIPING in accordance with ASME B 31. 3.3 METALLIC PIPING SYSTEMS 3.3.1 FABRICATE WELDED PIPING in accord with the ANSI Standard Code for Pressure Piping. 3.3.2 WELD -O -LET OR THREAD -O -LET TYPE FITTINGS may be used in lieu of tees for branch connections provided the main is one size larger than the takeoff. Couplings or half couplings may be used at non -flow connections such as thermometers. 3.3.3 MAKE JOINTS IN METALLIC PIPING as follows: 1. Welded Joints. Bevel pipe ends. Weld by electric arc process, using electrodes recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe. Welders shall be qualified and certified for the type of welding to be performed under this Contract and welding done in conformance to American Welding Society Standards. 2. Screwed Joints. Cut threads accurately, with axis of thread corresponding with axis of pipe. Limit the number of threads so that not more than two threads will show beyond fittings. Make up joints with pipe thread lubricant on outside threads or teflon joint tape. 3. Soldered Joints. Thoroughly clean both the male and female surfaces to be joined; apply flux and sweat according to the fitting manufacturer's directions. ,,d m cn load, 12 ounoca of which shall bc uccd for each inoh in diamctor of pipco at each joint, and must bc poured in at one time~ Lead uocd for this purpose shall be ao €t pig or bar. After cooling and applied. 5. Hake brazed joints uoing an oxyacetylene flame. Apply flux ao --t - anceated to the extent that acalc forma on pipe, 4. Make compression type joints as recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Provide unions at each screwed type valve and at each piece of equipment having screwed connections. Unions in steel pipe shall be heavy duty, malleable screwed type, with brass to iron ground joints. Unions in copper tube shall be copper, with solder connections, and copper to copper ground joints. U. tfahc jointo between c of = - tecl pipe by ocrcwing a half 73-90-133i80 15100 -2 6. Make joints between copper and dissimilar metals with an approved dielectric connection. a.5 CEICHIC BRACE AF DUCT' 3.6 CLEANING AND PAINTING 3.6.1 CLEAN PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT to remove rust, plaster and dirt before insulation or painting. Painting shall be in accordance with Section 09900. 3.6.2 REPAINT DAMAGED EQUIPMENT to match original factory finish. END, OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 1.1.1 WORK INCLUDED is as follows: Sleeves Sleeve Seals Fire Barrier Penetration Seals 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Firestopping Mechanical Requirements 2.0 PRODUCTS SECTION 15110 SLEEVES AND SEALS Section 07270 Section 15010 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.4.1 Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.1 SLEEVES 2.1.1 SLEEVES for pipes through non -fire rated floors: Form with 18 gauge galvanized steel. 2.1.2 SLEEVES for pipes through non -fire rated walls, footing, and potentially wet floors: Form with steel pipe or 18 gauge galvanized steel. 2.1.3 SLEEVES for pipes through fire rated and fire resistive walls and fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed, or form with steel pipe or 18 gauge galvanized steel. 2.1.4 SLEEVES for round ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. 2.1.5 SLEEVES for rectangular ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. 2.2 SLEEVE SEALS 2.2.1 SLEEVE SEALS: Provide sealant and caulk of quality specified in Section 07270. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVES 3.1.1 INSTALL PIPE SLEEVES of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/ Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than a minimum of 1/4 inch clearances all around between bare pipe and inside of sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeves. Install length of sleeve equal to ' thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4 inch above level floor finish. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. Sleeves in walls or beams below grade shall be sized to provide a minimum clearance of two inches all around between pipe and inside of sleeve. Sleeves below grade require no seals. 73- 90- 133:10 15110 -1 3:2 SLEEVE SEALS 3..2.1 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALS: Fill entire opening with sealing compound as specified in Section 07270., 3.2.2 SLEEVES IN NON -RATED INTERIOR WALLS shall be sealed and caulked air tight. 3.3 COVERS 3.3.1 IN UNFINISHED SPACES OR CONCEALED LOCATIONS provide close fitting metal collars or escutcheon covers. 3.3.2 AT FINISHED SURFACES provide chrome plated steel escutcheons. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 15130 INSULATION 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Section 15010 Acceptable Manufacturer's List Section 15030 Installation of Equipment, Piping, and Ductwork Section 15100 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS under provisions of Section 01300 for the following: Duct Insulation Equipment Insulation Fitting Covers Piping Insulation 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.3.1 SUBSTITUTIONS shall be under provisions of Section 01600. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.4.1 FURNISH INSULATION AND MATERIALS bearing the manufacturer's label. Only mechanics skilled at such work shall apply materials. Insulation and materials shall be by one of the manufacturers listed in Section 15040, Acceptable Manufacturers List. Specialty material shall be of the manufacturer indicated or approved equal. Fire and smoke hazard classification ratings on composition, jacket, and adhesive shall conform to NFPA 255, ASTM 5 -84, and UL -723 as follows: Flame spread not exceeding 25 Fuel contributed not exceeding 50 Smoke developed not exceeding 50 1.5 INSULATION PROTECTION 1.5.1 PIPE INSULATION exposed in finished areas and in the mechanical room shall be protected with Ceel -Co 300 series PVC plastic jacketing covers. Covers shall be installed using a welding adhesive to form a monolithic system. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION 2.1.1 PIPING INSULATION shall be as scheduled below: System Pipe Size and Location For 20 ft. or to larger drain Domestic Cold Water Piping in building Insulation and Jacket 1/2 inch 4 -pound density with ASJ vapor barrio' jacket "1/2 -inch 4 -pound density fiberglass insulation with ASJ vapor barrier jacket 2.2 VALVE AND FITTING INSULATION 2.2.1 VALVE AND FITTING INSULATION shall be System Valves and Fittings Domestic Hot and Cold Water 2.3 DUCT INSULATION 2.3.1 DUCT INSULATION shall System Air conditioning supply and return ducts inside the warehouse ........ ............................... re OY.t3 tion `►isd <are'. ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINER 2.4.1 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINER shall be as specified in Air Duct Systems Section. 3.0 EXECUTION Pipe Size and Location All piping be as scheduled as scheduled below: below: Insulation and Jacket Fiberglass insulation built up to equivalent thickness of pipe insulation covered with a premolded PVC jacket. Tape edge with pressure sensitive tape Insulation 1 -1/2 fiberglass flexible insulation, with heavy duty FRK vapor barrier. Apply insulation todu:C with edges lightly butted. Secure on 'centers with approved adhesive and pins. Secure the joints to overlapping facing or 4 inch wide strips of same material adhered with Benjamin Foster 85 -20 adhesive. Installed R -nave va ......e. . shall be 4.2 minimum. ...... ............... ................ 3" fib erglase .. flexible inaula FRK vapor barrier stalled R -value shall be'< 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSULATE PIPING AND DUCTWORK continuously through walls, floors and ceilings. Where a vapor barrier is specified, insulate flanges, unions and fittings 3.1.2 PROTECT VAPOR BARRIERS on pipe insulation by installing pipe hangers around the outside of the insulation. Protect the insulation with sheetmetal jackets to distribute the weight or install rigid insulation designed for use with pipe hangers. If rigid insulation is used, seal vapor barrier after pipe hanger is installed. 3.1.3 AT THE CONTRACTOR'S OPTION, insulated piping with no vapor barrier may be hung directly provided that the insulation is carried over the hanger strap and 6 inches up the hanger rod. 3.1.4 DO NOT INSTALL INSULATION before equipment, piping, and ductwork has been tested and approved. 3.1.5 ENSURE SURFACE is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and during application. 3.1.6 LOCATE INSULATION or cover seams in least visible locations. END OF SECTION 1 s 1 n n -a iiMMENAIMAtid 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 15140 MOTORS AND CONTROL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Raceways Section 16110 Wires and Cables Section 16120 Motor and Circuit Disconnects Section 16170 Fuses Section 16181 1.2 WORK FURNISHED, INSTALLED AND CONNECTED UNDER DIVISION 15 1.2.1 HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, CONDUIT AND WIRING shall be furnished, installed and connected complete. 1.3 WORK FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNDER DIVISION 15 1.3.1 HVAC EQUIPMENT, TEMPERATURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, MOTORS, HEATERS AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES specified in Division 15 shall be set in place as part of Division 15 work, including separately packaged motors and electrical materials required for the proper operation of the equipment. 1.3.2 CONTROL WIRING, installed in air plenums, regardless of voltage, shall be installed in conduit. Materials and installation shall be as specified in Division 16, Sections 16110 and 16120. 1.4 WORK FURNISHED UNDER DIVISION 15 BUT CONNECTED UNDER DIVISION 16 1.4.1 POWER SOURCE WIRING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTION for equipment furnished in Division 15 shall be furnished, installed and connected under Division 16 for those items shown and /or scheduled in the Electrical Connection Schedule. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the extent of work covered in each Division. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS 1.5.1 COMPLETE COMPOSITE ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS for Division 15 equipment, including power requirements and temperature control wiring, shall be prepared and shall be included with the specific shop drawing submittals. Shop drawings shall be of sufficient detail for the electrical installer and the Owner's use after installation. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.6.1 WHEN ELECTRICAL LOADS are substituted by the Contractor which differ in size and /or number other than those specified, the Contractor shall submit complete power and control wiring diagrams showing the proposed modifications to the electrical system, and shall bear all additional electrical costs, such as additional or larger overcurrent devices, disconnect switches, power wiring, control wiring, electric service modifications, etc. Substituted loads, quantities, or equipment requiring additional electrical work, other than that shown on the Drawings, shall not be installed or connected without the approval of the Architect- Engineer. Proper documentation of electrical design modifications and extra costs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Equipment installed without such prior documented approval shall be removed by the Contractor, and specified items shall be installed at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS 2.1.1 MOTOR RATINGS shall conform to NEMA performance standards to carry full nameplate load continuously at a maximum.temperature of 40C above ambient with a service factor of 1.15. Manufacturers of electric driven equipment shall match motor torque, starting, running and speed characteristics to the driven 73-90-133i0 15140 -1 load, and the power requirement of the driven machine shall not exceed the nominal nameplate rating of the furnished motor. Advantage shall not be taken of service factors in the selection of motors. Motor horsepower shall be as specified. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS 2.2.1 STARTERS FURNISHED under Division 15 shall be furnished with a suitable number of auxiliary contacts for specified control interlocks. Starters shall have individual control transformers for 120 VAC control. Starters shall be NEMA size 1 minimum. 1. Packaged, factory -wired equipment containing motor starters shall be provided as part of Division 15 work. 2. Manual motor switches shall be furnished, installed and power connected as part of Division 16 work as shown on the Drawings. .3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 MOTORS AND CONTROLS 3.1.1 EXECUTION OF WORK shall be as specified in the appropriate Mechanical and Electrical Sections of these Specifications. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE 1.1.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL the domestic water piping system as shown on the Drawings. Systems included in this Section are contained within the building lines. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Excavation and Backfilling Section 02220 Mechanical Requirements Section 15010 Pipe and Fittings Section 15060 Supports and Hangers Section 15070 Valves Section 15080 Installation of Equipment and Piping and Ductwork Section 15100 Insulation 1.3 REOUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES Uniform Plumbing Code, 1985 Edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. 1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.5.1 SUBSTITUTIONS shall be under provisions of Section 01600. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER PIPING 2.1.1 ABOVEGROUND PIPING shall be Type L, hard drawn copper tubing with wrought copper or cast brass solder fittings. Pipe sizes shown on the Drawings are nominal inside diameter. :.1.2 B1413FACItAHND P- IrING- jointa. 2.2 VALVES 2.2.1 VALVES for domestic water shall be as specified in the Section 15080, Valves. 2.3 DISINFECTING FLUID 2.3.1 LIQUID CHLORINE shall conform to FS BB -C -120. 2.3.2 HYPOCHLORITE shall conform to FS 0 -C -114, Type II, Grade B, or FS 0 -8 -602 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING 73- 90- 13310 SECTION 15430 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15430 -1 Section 15130 3.1.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL water pipe lines and risers necessary to supply fixtures and equipment of sizes specified or shown on the Drawings. Ream pipe to full inside diameter after cutting. Run piping as directly as possible, avoiding unnecessary offsets, and conceal in finished rooms, unless shown or specified otherwise. 3.1.2 WATER PIPING shall be properly supported and braced as to eliminate vibration and noise when water is turned on or off. Pipes passing through framing members and walls shall have adequate clearance to eliminate noise due to thermal expansion. Pipes passing through walls for supplies, showerheads, etc. shall be braced horizontally and vertically and secured in the wall to framing members or supports with drop ear fittings or approved supporting systems may be utilized. 3.1.3 PITCH PIPING as required to allow the system to be drained. Furnish and install 3/4 -inch hose and drain valves at low points of the system. WH2O1. Scloot for c ed 6 5 10 fps and uoc ncxt largcr oisc if END OF SECTION prcoourc at point of-use 3.2 TESTING 3.2.1 TEST THE DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM with compressed air before installing plumbing fixtures. Test pressure shall be 1.5 times the system operation pressure but at least 100 psig. The system shall hold within 5 percent of initial pressure for twelve hours. 3.3 DISINFECTION 3.3.1 ACCOMPLISH DISINFECTION of domestic water system as described below or 'by the system prescribed by the AWWA Standard C601. The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. Introduce chlorinating material to water lines and distribution systems in an approved manner. Thoroughly flush lines before the introduction of chlorinating materials. After a contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush system with clean water until residual chlorine content is not greater than 2 ppm. Open and close valves in the lines being disinfected several times during the contact period. The testing laboratory shall verify chlorine levels during and after disinfection. 1.0 GENERAL 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Acceptable Manufacturer's List Installation of Equipment and Piping and Ductwork Motor and Controls Domestic Water Piping 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBBS 2.1.1 SEE PLUMBING SCHEDULE. 2.2 £U HP-PUHP 2.2.1 6EE Puri 14604LE -r 2-.3 TRAP PR14ERs 2.6 s�R�4 73 -90 -133 SECTION 15450 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 1.1 SCOPE 1.1.1 Furnish and install the specified hydrants where shown on the drawings and listed in the plumbing fixture schedule. Section 15010 Section 15040 Section 15100 Section 15140 Section 15430 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300, 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.4.1 SUBSTITUTIONS under provisions of Section 01600. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.5.1 SUBMIT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA under provisions of Section 01700. : 3 END OF SECTION 15450 -1 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 15460 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 1.1 SCOPE 1.1.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL the specified plumbing fixtures and trim where shown on the Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Section 15010 Acceptable Manufacturers List Section 15040 Installation of Equipment, Piping, and Ductwork Section 15100 @ S on 1 5 4 1 0 Domestic Water Piping Section 15430 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 FIXTURES AND TRIM shall be free of flaws and defects in material and workmanship, and, when installed, shall operate as intended using the manufacturer's instructions. 1.3.2 REPLACE DEFECTIVE FIXTURES AND TRIM at no additional cost. 1.3.3 FIXTURES AND TRIM shall be by the manufacturer listed herein or as listed Plumbing Fixture Schedule. 1.4 PROTECTION 1.4.1 PROTECT PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM during construction to avoid damage. Replace damaged fixtures and trim at no additional cost. 1.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS 1.5.1 MOUNT FIXTURES AND TRIM at standard heights unless scheduled or shown otherwise. 1.6 REOUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES National Sanitation Foundation Uniform Plumbing Code, 1985 Edition U.S. Department of Commerce 47 7 HAJ3D T CCEESI D I 1 1.8 FLANGES AND ESCUTCHEONS 1.8.1 FLANGES AND ESCUTCHEONS used for supplies and P -traps shall have a set screw to secure flange or escutcheon to pipe. 1.9 SUBMITTALS 1.9.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. 1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.10.1 SUBSTITUTIONS under provisions of Section 01600. 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.11.1 SUBMIT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA under provisions of Section 01700. 73- 90- 133;x` < : 15460 -1 ont- .; 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIXTURES AND TRIM 2.1.1 SEE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON':THS:: > DRAWINGS. ' 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 3.1.6 INSTALL HOSE AND FAUCETS and hose connections with vacuum breakers. 3.1.7 ADJUST EACH FLUCH VALVE to provide the proper flow €er-- adeute 3.2 FIXTURE ROUGH -IN SCHEDULE 3.2.1 ROUGH -IN FIXTURE PIPING CONNECTIONS in accordance with schedule on drawings. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE 1 t ` t_Y:'kitb W2AX SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements External Corrosion Control Pipe and Fittings Supports and Hangers Valves Installation of Equipment and Piping and Ductwork 2.0 PRODUCTS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.2 TESTING 3.2.1 TEST T HE.EN? LEAKS and repair 73- 50- 133414 SECTION 15470 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS 1.1.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL GAS PIPING and accessories where shown on the Drawings. mctcr and prcoourc regulator for a complete workable- ayetem,- 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES American Gas Association National Fuel Gas Code 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. END OF SECTION 15470 -1 and connect equipment Section Section Section Section Section 15010 15050 15060 15070 15080 Section 15100 2.1 GAS PIPING 2.1.1 PIPING shall be ASTM A 120, Schedule 40, seamless, black steel, with threaded joints. Malleable -iron threaded fittings, ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern for threaded joints, conforming to ANSI 81.20.1. 2.2 GAS COCKS 2.2.1 2 -INCH AND SMALLER: 150 psi WOG, bronze body, straightaway pattern, square head, threaded ends. 2.2.2 2 -1/2 INCH AND LARGER: MSS SP -78; 175 psi, lubricated plug type, semi - steel body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends. 3.1 PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 3.1.1 INSTALL PIPING AND SPECIALTIES as required by the governing regulatory agency. R+ SYSTEM, INCLUDING ::PIPING. INSTALLED ON P accordance' the Uniform Plumbing Code':" :s :FOR 3.2.2 DISCONNECT GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS during testing to prevent damage. 1.0 GENERAL 73- 90- 133 -16 SECTION 15510 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 1.1.1 DESIGN AND INSTALL FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, piping; sprinkler heads, valves, hangers, supports, and accessories for all areas in the building. 1.1.3 THE DRAWINGS indicate the layout of the systems. The Contractor shall complete the design to provide both wet and dry pipe schedule designed sprinkler systems. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Section 15010 Pipe and Fittings Section 15060 Supports and Hangers Section 15070 Valves Section 15080 Installation of Equipment, Piping, and Ductwork Section 15100 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES Uniform Building Code NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems, Iatesdt#'pn NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code Factory Mutual 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4.1 SPRINKLER layout shall be reviewed by Boeing Fire Protection Engineering prior to submission to fire marshall for approval. 1.4.2 ONLY CONTRACTORS AND WORKERS experienced in, and regularly engaged in, the installation of fire sprinkler systems shall be permitted to install the specified systems. The holding of an applicable license is mandatory. 1.4.3 VALVES shall be FM approved and UL listed. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.4.4 ALL EQUIPMENT, material and components shall be FM approved and UL listed. 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.5.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. 1.5.2 INDICATE PIPE MATERIALS USED, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals, components, accessories and sizes. 1.5.3 INDICATE VALVE DATA and ratings. 1.5.4 SUBMIT PRELIMINARY LAYOUT showing only head locations for review by Architect - Engineer. 1.5.5 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS of entire sprinkler 'system, after review by Architect of head locations, to the Boeing Project Engineer. 1.5.6 OBTAIN AND SUBMIT from each authority having jurisdiction written certification that the permanent installation has been inspected by the authority and that it complies with all details of the authority's published 15510 -1 t.er B3Ofl >i f<:ithe ............ ............................... A r regulations and requirements. ROOF;;t iat e xisting air pressure ;maintenance dev ce and air Comp reaaon hav a : spare capacity to operate:: the entire dr pipe: system. 1.6 PIPE SCHEDULE SYSTEM DESIGN 1.6.1 GENERAL: Design and install systems so that no parts interfere with doors, windows, heating, plumbing, air - conditioning systems, or electrical equipment. Comply with requirements of NFPA No. 13 as herein modified. 1.6.2 DRY SPRINKLER SYSTEM: Provide for covered outside area ra 1' <'<> e oign,D 100 _ a. Co vered Outside Area ; Ordinary Hazard as Cylinder Storage Rooms:: Extra Hazard 1.6.3 PIPE SCHEDULE METHODS: Prepare in accordance with Chapter 3 of NFPA No. 13. 1.6.4 WATER SUPPLY: Available water supply is 130 psi static pressure and 97 psi residual pressure with flow of 3065 gpm at hydrant number 908 NE. 1.6.5 SYSTEM LAYOUT 1. Cpaoe, locate and pooition sprinkler heado ao ohown on the deewinge: 1. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2. Design Densities: a. Office areas Ordinary hazard a. Flammable Liquid Storage: Extra hazard a. Consolidation Areas Extra hazard b. : sPene sng > xtra Hazard c. Other liquid storage areas and Deese - area-, Aisle and tool reem Ordinary hazard 73 -90- 133 -0 15510 -2 ana:t�ne as. sized accordance: with:pipe schedule metho 1.6.6 SYSTEM WORKING DRAWINGS: Prepare per Section 1 -9, NFPA No. 13. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.7.1 SUBMIT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA under provisions of Section 01700. 1.8 STORAGE 1.8.1 PROVIDE TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COATING on cast iron and steel valves. 1.8.2 PROVIDE TEMPORARY END CAPS AND CLOSURES. Maintain in place until installation. 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.9.1 SUBSTITUTIONS under provisions of Section 01600. 2.1 PIPE, BURIED 2.1.1 IRON PIPE: ANSI /AWWA C151, ductile iron. Cast iron or ductile iron fittingot ANSI /AWWA C110, ductile iron. Joints: ANSI /AWWA C110, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diamctcr rods. Other types of pipe may be used if apprevcd by local authorities. 2.2 PIPE, ABOVE GRADE 2.2.1 WET PIPE: ASTM Al20, black steel pipe, Schedule 40. Fittings: ANSI /ASME B16.3, malleable iron, screwed type, or grooved end malleable iron or steel. Joints: screwed or mechanical grooved couplings. 2.2.2 DRY PIPE: ASTM Al20, galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40, and cast iron fittings. Galvanized pipe downstream of dry pipe valve per FM. 2.3 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS 2.3.1 UNIONS: 150 psi malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping. 2.3.2 FLANGES: 150 psi forged steel slip -on flanges for ferrous piping. 2.3.3 MECHANICAL GROOVED COUPLINGS: Consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure- responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll - grooved pipe and fittings. Grooved mechanical couplings including gaskets used on dry -pipe systems shall be listed for dry -pipe service. 2.4 VALVES 2.4.1 SHUTOFF VALVES shall be FM approved and UL listed OS & Y valves. Check valves shall be FM approved and UL listed. Test and drain valves shall be approved brass globe or angle valves. OS & Y valves used on the fire ' protection system shall have provisions for padlocking. 2.4.2 SPRINKLER CONTROL VALVED 1. Provide valves for sprinkler piping where shown on thc drawings. 2. Ccotionalissing valves shall bc OS &Y gate valves. 73- 90 -133- 3. All OC & Y control valves shall bc locked in thc open position, as specified in Ccotion 08700. tamper switches. klcr systems will be provided with 2.5 SPRINKLER HEADS 2.5.1 SPRINKLER HEADS shall be 165 degrees F temperature rated. Sprinkler heads of higher temperature rating may be used as required by Fig. 3- 16.6.3(a) of NFPA 13. Rating of the fusible elements shall be in accordance with NFPA No. 13. 2.5.2 FURNISH spare sprinkler heads and wrench as required by NFPA, mounted in a metal cabinet marked "Auto. Sprinklers - Reserve Supply." for temporary closing of sprinkler head after a fire has been extinguished. type heads with factory finish. 2.5.5 AREAS WITHOUT SUSPENDED CEILING shall have plain bronze upright heads. 2.5.6 SPRINKLERS shall be automatic closed type with 1/2 -inch orifice. 15510 -3 2.5.7 PROVIDE GUARDS for exposed heads that are less than 7 feet 6 inches above the floor. 2.6.1 PROVIDE variable prcaeurc type alarm check valve for wet oyotem, operation including trim for attachment and control of a water motor alarm. Water motor assembly connected to a striker- and -gong assembly by a rigid drive shaft. 2.7 DRY ALARM VALVE 2.7.1 PROVIDE dry pipe valve for dry system, complete with fittings, interconnecting piping, and devices required for valve operation. Provide water motor alarm. 2.8 AIR PRESSURE MAINTENANCE DEVICE 2.8.1 PROVIDE AIR PRESSURE MAINTENANCE DEVICE including pressure regulator, air filter, ball check valve, restrictor, and tapped inlet and outlet, factory set for 50 psi. Viking Model D -2 or approved equal. 2.9 AIR COMPRESSOR 2.9.1 PROVIDE ELECTRIC DRIVE, horizontal tank mounted, single stage compressor, capable of restoring normal system air pressure within 30 minutes, two pole air pressure operated electric pressure with two -way release or breather valve, safety valve, check valve, tank drain, belt guard, and controls. 2.10 INSPECTOR TEST . ......... 2.10.1 Provide inspector `::s test in each sprinkler system per NFPA. Locate inepector :test. connection in the hydraulically most remote area of the system. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - SPRINKLERS 3.1.1 SPRINKLER HEAD ARRANGEMENT on ceilings shall be carefully planned, symmetrically laid out, with full allowances for obstructions, including partitions, columns, beams and lighting fixtures. Sprinkler head spacing may be shortened or lengthened to achieve an equal and symmetrical pattern. Center sprinkler heads in tile in lay -in ceilings. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR PIPING INSTALLATION 3.2.1 REAM PIPE AND TUBE ENDS to full inside diameter. 3.2.2 REMOVE BURRS and bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 3.2.3 REMOVE SCALE AND FOREIGN MATERIAL, inside and outside, before assembly. 3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE 3.3.1 DIE CUT SCREW JOINTS with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non -toxic joining compound applied to male threads only. 3.3.2 COAT THREADED ENDS with pipe lubricant compound. 3.3.3 INSTALL PIPING in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems. 3.3.4 DO NOT PENETRATE building structural members unless indicated. 3.3.5 PROVIDE SLEEVES when penetrating walls. 3.3.6 SEAL PIPE AND SLEEVE PENETRATION to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. 73 -90- 133 -1f 15510 -4 3.3.7 RUN PIPING concealed above ceilings where possible. 3.3.8 COMBINATION FLOW TEST AND DRAIN VALVE at the alarm check valve shall be piped outside the building. Auxiliary drains may be piped outside the building or to floor drains. 3.3.9 INSTALL INSPECTOR TEST VALVES per NFPA and the local inspection authority, with discharge pipe to outside. Provide nameplate legend to read "Inspector Test Valve." Locate test connection at the hydraulically most remote point in the system. 3.3.10 PROVIDE EARTHQUAKE PROTECTION, pipe supports, hangers and sway bracing in accordance to NFPA 13. 3.3.11 ROUTE PIPING in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. 3.3.12 INSTALL PIPING to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space, other work, or equipment. 3.4 INSTALLATION - VALVES 3.4.1 INSTALL VALVES with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 3.4.2 PROVIDE DRAIN VALVES at main cut off valve°, low points of piping. aild apparat 3.4.3 PROVIDE CHUTOFr VALVES in aooccoiblc location° outoidc cicvator ohafto .gam 3.5 IDENTIFICATION aer�d --D rn in�e - ►c'" 2. For drains Legend to read "System Drain Valve. Clooe the Clain Shutoff bcforc oponing thin valve. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FIRE SPRINKLERS 3.6.1 PROTECT SPRINKLER HEADS with 7 foot 6 inches, or less clearance against mechanical injury with standard guards. 3.6.2 MOUNT CABINET with spare sprinkler heads near sprinkler risers. 3.7 SYSTEM TEST AND CLEANING 3.7.1 HYDROSTATICALLY test entire fire protection system at 225 psi for 2 hours in accordance with NFPA 13. 3.7.2 TEST(S) shall be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction a n d t he Boa ei ' ng Fire pepar me rit Notify t he,, ; Owner.: e and Genral.Contrac a l eas 0 t 1 dprior rto any test .: END OF SECTION 73 -90- 133 -16 15510 -5 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 15810 AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT 1.1 SCOPE 1.1.1 FURNISH AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT designed to operate at the conditions noted on the Drawings. 1.1.2 EQUIP UNIT with disconnects as required. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Section 15010 Heating and Cooling System Testing and Balancing Section 15030 Acceptable Manufacturer's List Section 15040 External Corrosion Protection Section 15050 Installation of Equipment and Piping and Ductwork Section 15100 Motor and Controls Section 15140 Natural Gas Piping System Section 15470 Air Duct System Section 15830 Temperature Controls and Monitoring Section 15950 1.3 REOUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES Air Diffusion Council (ADC) National Electric Code (NEC) National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) American Gas Association (AGA) 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. 1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.5.1 SUBSTITUTIONS under provisions of Section 01600. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.6.1 SUBMIT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA under provisions of Section 01700. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUSTER 2.1.1 ROOF EXHAUSTERS shall be of the type, wheel size, and capacity indicated on the Drawings. Fans shall be of centrifugal type, belt driven or direct driven, as shown on the Drawings. V -belt drives shall be designed for 50 percent overload, and shall have adjustable pitch motor sheave. Motors shall be mounted on an adjustable base. 1. Housings shall be of corrosion - resistant spun aluminum alloy fully weatherproofed. Provide outlets with removable bird screens. 2. Fan bearings shall be ball bearing type and provided with adequate and accessible means of lubrication. Each unit shall have'a disconnect located in the motor compartment. Fans shall be quiet in operation. Fan housings shall be easily removable for access to all parts. Units shall have internal vibration isolators. 73- 90- 1334:1:6. 15810 -1 3. Dampers shall be gravity type furnished by the fan manufacturer. 4. The fans shall be certified by AMCA and shall be listed by UL. 1 k...:b iCated ' out of the airstream 2.2 GAS -FIRED MAKE -UP AIR UNITS 2.2.1 GENERAL. Provide factory- fabricated and factory- tested roof -top make- up air units as indicated, of sizes and capacities as scheduled, and as specified herein. 2.2.2 UNITS SHALL include a centrifugal blower, open drip -proof blower motor, adjustable belt drive, controls, dampers and inlets to provide air control cycle and insulated heavy duty galvanized casing. 2.2.3 UNITS SHALL be equipped for use with natural gas, 120 -volt supply voltage, 24 -volt control transformer, intermittent spark pilot with electronic flame supervision, and a single -stage 24 -volt gas valve. 2.2.4 THE DUCT FURNACE shall be American Gas Association designed -- certified and bear the AGA label. 2.2.5 THE UNIT SHALL be provided with a full roof curb, filter rack with 1" filters, outside air rain hood, and shall be fully isolated with internal vibration isolators. 2.2.6 UNITS SHALL be provided with a 409 or 321 stainless steel heat exchanger and burner, natural gas control system, 24 -volt control transformer, gravity vent cap, motor contactor, intermittent spark control, filter rack and outside air rain hood. 2.3 ELECTRIC MAKE -UP AIR UNIT 2.3.1 GENERAL. Provide factory- fabricated and factory- tested roof -top make- up air unit as indicated of size and capacity scheduled. 2.3.2 UNIT SHALL include a centrifugal blower, motor, adjustable belt drive, electric heater coil, controls, dampers, and insulated heavy duty galvanized casing. 2.4 ': : >: NhTURAIs >'GF s < •IRED :UNIT >::HEATER 2 4.1 peneral. Provide natural gas fired:unit heaters as indicated, of typ€ and mi.ntmum capacity as scheduled, ;'and as. specified. herein • Construct cashnq Gf galvanized steel, with enamel fi;niss. nt egral ar hanger..: ." ..„ : ".:Igo or at alat u t ic atitateaiwict . of , ...... w 1 ed.alumini�ed std d mater Lal as...teat. ec irri:ez:'to' be`:: sutab];e c.f:.:a]uminum, direct drive type, . ..a100.0'4 ............... rgvide motors, totally enclosed,, . sleeve or ball ;beara.n: ua.it�an h m over oad;protect�.on, designed` for voltay.:. phase.: Mount orator bn „ resilient mount and provide: heavy -duty 73- 90- 133748 15810 -2 V A e . C. .un. • .<:::± . •.::::... :. :: «::::.. . >: • a, :::. moun END OF SECTION una facticy;pa 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL EQUIPMENT on prefabricated curbs as required by the manufacturer. :. p are vr �rsa: ?:r 2.5 ROOF CURBS 2.5.1 ROOF CURBS shall be of prefabricated metal type and designed for mounting roof exhausters and make -up air units furnished. Curb shall be of sound - attenuating type with insulated lining. Design curb for flashing to roof in an approved manner. Curb shall have adequate means for mounting dampers where dampers are specified or shown on the Drawings. 3.2 STARTUP . 3.2.1 FOLLOWING INSTALLATION, check belts, motor mountings, dampers and associated equipment for proper operation. 3.2.2 ADJUST FAN RPM as required to provide specified air movement without excessive noise. 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE 1.1.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL roof -top central station air handler rLd condensing# 'Una. s where shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.1.2 UNIT PERFORMANCE shall be certified in accord with ARI Standard 430 -66 for fans and 410 -72 for coils. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Heating and Cooling System Testing and Balancing Acceptable Manufacturer's List External Corrosion Control Installation of Equipment, Piping, and Ductwork Motors and Control Temperature Controls and Monitoring 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES SMACNA NFPA Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 2.0 PRODUCTS opccificd hcrcin. mounted on a full perimeter roof curb. 73 90 13316 SECTION 15820 ROOF -TOP CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLERS 15820 -1 Section 15010 Section 15030 Section 15040 Section 15050 Section 15100 Section 15140 Section 15950 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. 1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.5.1 SUBSTITUTIONS under provisions of Section 01600. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.6.1 SUBMIT OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA under provisions of Section 01700. 2.1.1 CENEML. Provide factory fabricated and factory- tcotcd roof -top air all APr 3hall di3chargc upward. 2.1.6 UNIT CABINET ohall be conotrueted of galvanized ctccl, bonderized and coated with a bakcd cnamcl finioh. Cabinet intcrior ohall bc inoulatcd with indoor coil ohall bc providcd. pre3surc3tat, low prc33ure3tat3, lo33 of chargc protection, indoor coil frceocotato, and current and temperature ccncitivc overload devioco. cold rollcd otccl. 2.1.9 HEATING CONTROLS ohall eon3i3t of a rcdundant gal valvc, intcrmittcnt pilot ignition, rcmotc pilot flamc ocnoor, time delay rclay, limit owitchco and centrifugal switch. 2.1.10 ROOF CURB ohall bc of thc oamc manufacture 33 unit and Shall include -eft thc bottom 2.1.11 ECONOMIZER ohall include rcturn air (R.A.) and outside air (0.A.) dampero, outdoor air filtcr and hood, and fully modulating cicctric control Gyotem with cnthalpy Chang Economizer control ohall bc - = - - - = capable of introducing up to 100% outdoor air. 2.1.12 POWER EXHAUST to be used only in conjunction with economizcr, cxhauoto up to 75% of rcturn air at 0.1 S.P. Dliminatec overprepourization of tho building. 2i...2 .ROOF-itTOP0GENTRAIr-S-TIAT10N-AIR 2::24:.....:4PENNRA;4nPrOt.i00:4ACtorYfabricatad'And handling. unit .ae .indicated, of Bizee and caPacitl Specifiedhliiiih and disconnect switches:. 2 be of nonferrous oonstr4cticWW101:::altIPIPUM Plate tinevmeCiianiCail:yboncied to Seamless copper tubes with-aii' joints brazed. 24.3 UNIT SHALL have 4 separate refrigeration loops, ie..... 4 .circuits:.inthe cooling coil. .The failure of one refrigeration loop shall not:affeCt he operation of the other .3. 2-2:4 : belt--Oril.iehtieM#Oi:*41 Pitchliideigb100er iniiitPOihs - .:UNIT:CABINET4halabe'.constructedof galvSnized coated..with Cabinet interior .shailAieinei:114ted*ith One-in. thick neoprene-coated fiberglass. Cabinet panels shall be easily removable for service to all operating components. A condensate dram for the indoor coil shall be provided. 24.6 .CONTROLS. The cooling system shall be protected with indoor coil tteezeetsts,.and sensitive overload devices. 2,4..7: EXCHANGP:::phail be tubular ir desigiv.-and:.:00310r4Ote4..: carroSiOnreSietant;a14minitaiVateeir:.84rnera shall be constructed:.of al..uminu painted cold rcale(;VOteel. 2.44.1t UNIT SHALL be equipped with an Air to Air Heat exchanger to recover heat fro,m the exhaust air stream and return it to the outside air stream. ggcluinger shall be diagonal flow plate type fabricated from aluminum. minimum 15820-2 Apri.:114.9.92 efficiency shall be 60% at design air flow. Maximum dro design air flow. 24 'consist of a redundant gas valve, intermittent Pittit.ignitiOnramOte'pilot flame sensor, time-delay relay, limit switches • centrifuga 2.2.10 ROOF CLJRB shall be ' the ..same manufacture as :unit'And 46::::•.4441400:::::P4P0i:tiO4*..::,.compre s to Prevent cOndenSatiOP:.: the bottom. - - - 2g2g14 EGON0M-14ER-UNThaIlihclUde-return air (n.A.) and e xhaustai .: damper ..outdoorairfflitOkAnjakhC fully modulating aleCtricEpiantrolsysteM'. with enthalpy change over control introducing up to 100% outdoor air. 2.2.12 POWER Milli.= to bc Lined only in conjunction with economizer, cmhauntn up to 75% of return air at 0.1 S.P. Eliminate° ovcrprepourization of tho 2::3--.ROOFTOP STATION AIR HANDLER(ACRA3) 2.3.1 GENERAL. Provide factory-fabricated and factory-tested roof-top air handling unit as indicated, of sizes and capacities as schedui.ed, and as iiiPebifiedhereinlrialiide:dmOtor*etartere and;'eliesOOnnedtei;iit6' ----- - electric heating unit and g4.4 sac heating shall be mounted onefull perimeter roof curb. 2.3.3 UNIT COMPRESEOR(C) shall bc of thc name manufacture an unit. 2:3A: COILS -.Indoor :coils shall be of nonferrous construction .with aluMinum 4 plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes with . all joints brazed. 2:3 refrigeration loops,.ie... 2 circuits in the cc5611.hg.%:66i1:thefeiiUr* .one refrigeration circuit sheli:libt feCttk)e 2 . 3 ..: 61rANSAN0A4PTOR Indoor biowers shall .be..forward belt type. Motor pulley shall be adjustable Oitths.. mciOr,:ebeit bearings. UNIT CABINET shall be constructed of bonderize coated with .i'Aiaed Cabinet interior shall be insulated with k rene-coated fiberglass. Cabinet panels c rt I M . (4blrlOr..::giCe' to all operating components. A condensate..dreinJor the . indoor coil shall.:beproylded. 2..3.8' system shall be protected with: freezesiatay:;inct::Currintan&temperature sensitive overload dev Provideevapbratordefkoat-control to .allow operation.to..407.F. 2, .." 3 '. 9 '' . ...:vNIV:BPALtrbe' . .eqUiPPed . with.an . air to atrbeat'.:ei6h4n4e:::::, to recover heat . . frOO:%the:::eShaUst stream and return it to.the''Out0i40440' E'eanan99* type fabricated froal'-alUm1h4(0::::4inimum efficiency ahal1 design air flow. Maximum pressure.Shali:..be,at design air flow. 1Qfl-1 V - 1 2.3.1().:4ECTRIC HEATING COIL .shall be constructed for use in hazardous locations. 'Control-panel shall be mounted out of the airstream. Coll: obeli be suitiblf3:4or.use,ln : hazardous atmosphere classification :Division 1 4.2,.GrouP'4)..Element surface temperatures shall not exceed the llmitS specitied in the code, and Ul Standard - 1cA9n..1 aluminum painted cold rolled ctccl. ent pilot ignition, remote pilot flame acnoor, time delay relay, limit awitchca and centrifugal owitch. .2:13 'JPitort)EYbtfAi3shalIke::.Of the '..same_manufacture. as unit and shall include an insulated panel under compressor 'section to prevent condensation forming on the bottom. 2 , BGGNas.m44-Ea-PNITshall-.jnalvde:return air (R.A.) two position Exhaustair (E.h.)and outside air (0.A.) clampers, outdoor air filter and hood, and fully modulating electric control system % uiltnentna4Y. 40i1A0iU6tAi4611ii)cOdAW:th9r -zPohalllizei introducing tiptd outdoor air. CONDENSING UNITS General Unite. shall be assembled on heavy .gauge steel mounting/lifting.:Taile and ehall-beWeathgr:::PrOOfed. Unites shall include a "hermetic: OOMPrOaacirAal4Plat.[P'Yflri,:.Onclen66i coil, fans and rnotors, controls and bOld44040r00.0f1 'i'ang61011614 be between 115' F and 35 F in cooling as standard from the f act9tY-' Units shall be UL listed, C.S.A. cortified and ci0t6c11n.'466ordSn66 with ARI Standard 210 and 270. Unit Oaaing, shall be constructed of 18 gauge zinc coated heave , gauge, galvanized steel. .. ';Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned; 1:)hosphatiied-atid finished with _a.weathei-resistant baked enamel finish: . ::'Units surface shall be tested 300 'hours in . salt spray test. units . :ihall have -- - reMovable end panels which allow access to all major components and controls. Refrigeration.::System -.Single Compressor Units Bhall have a single refrigeration circuit. Each refrigeration circuit has an integra3. :sUbOoolin4• circuit. A ref rigs ratiliip. i4er. drier : • The . units , shal liquid:•••Iihe gas line and suction gas. line with gauge port. 2.4.4 Refrigeration System - Dual Compressor Units shall have two separate and independent refrigeration circuits. Each refrigeration circuit' shall have an integral subcooling circuit. A refrigeration 'filter drier shall be provided as standard. Unite ishall have two direct drive hermetic reciprocating compressors . with centrifugal 011 pump and provide positive lubrication to al]. moving Parts. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and .. 0 1 4 11.1 41040#a00 utilization nge of :Pius or minus lo percent of narneplate voltage. Crankcaae and overloads shall be included for maximum Prbtacting44 spring isolatiOnandzeoundMuffling to minimize.vibrationtraneMiesion and noise. EXternaihighend low pressure cUtout.4eVicesshalbe provided.. Evaporator defrost control provided in indoor*blOWerfladti shall prevent .compressor slugging by temporarily interrupting :coMprepept operation when Iva evaporator coil temperatures are encountered. 2.4.5 Condenser Coil Coils shall be internally finned or smooth bore 3/8" copper tubes /1-qn-111-16 15820-4 APril 14..1992 Mechanica boric acto ry...... i s r0t1K n Ca bratiori Isol°ation 73- 90- 133 to conf igored aluminum plate fin as s �. eak.: tested to 425 psig air pressure. o protection shall be provided. Direct drive, stat3ca13y .and >dynamical1y,bal oi...28 inch er fan(s >) wxth aluminum blades and electro- coated steel hubs propell phall be used in thaw throug ertica d v ischar position E permanent y lub totally? enclosed or open construction motor's 11::be.::yrnvided ve r load and have bus It in current and: . o . (s) .. s ha ll :have s either ba, 1 ar bear Condehsing:;un ts«sMi1. : 6 00(4 1 4 4 factory wire controls # and contac oa pressure lugs or t erminal block for power wxrin Contral: ring shall be 2 vol,t.control circuit which includes losing a : contx'o] ttanefc rmer Units shall pro .l o cat ion .. or mounti a fused disconnect device. Time delay timers to pre compressors: 4n: dual :compressor. units from simultaneous sta -up > ' and anti- reoycle timers.shal:lbe provided. Provide hot gas by - pass for single compressor Sli :ala: - re duce tranemiss�on of noise ;and vibration to build 0 M n and d scent spaces Packages shall be neopre END OF SECTION 4 sar. ructures shear 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 EXAMINE AREAS AND CONDITIONS under which the air handling unit are to be installed. Do not proceed with.work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ROOF -TOP AIR HANDLING UNIT 3.2.1 GENERAL: Install the air handling unit where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. 3.2.2 COORDINATION: Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, roof construction, and piping, as necessary to interface installation of the air handling unit with other work. 3.2.3 ACCESS: Provide access space around the air handling unit for service as required, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. 3.2.4 SUPPORT: Install roof - mounted air handling unit on prefabricated factory roof curb. Curb to be for flashing• :.to.roof a:n an aip 040-ne 3.3 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL 3.3.1 TESTING: Upon completion of installation of the air handling unit, start -up and operate equipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct any malfunction, then retest to demonstrate compliance with requirements. 15820 - Rtar<1 >3' 4' s 9`g2 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 15830 AIR DUCT SYSTEMS 1.1 SCOPE 1.1.1 EXTENT of ductwork is indicated on drawings and by requirements of this section. 1.2 DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION 1.2.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL DUCTS as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall vary the run and shape of ducts and make offsets during the progress of the Work if required to meet structural or other interferences without added cost to the Owner. All changes must be approved by the Architect - Engineer. 1.2.2 INSTALL DUCTWORK to the required ceiling heights and finishes. Consult with other trades and, in conjunction with them, establish necessary space requirements for each trade to maintain required clearances. 1.2.3 DUCT SIZES shown are net opening sizes. Add allowance for duct liner where required. 1.2.4 INSTALL DUCTWORK in areas noted "Exposed Structure" or "No Ceiling" with concern for appearance as well as function. Install hangers, joints, dampers, etc., in a manner suitable for viewing. All ductwork in the 1.3 OPENINGS REOUIRED FOR DUCTWORK 1.3.1 COORDINATE OPENINGS THROUGH STRUCTURE required for ductwork with other trades. The Contractor shall provide sleeves required for duct penetrations. Sleeves shall be of the same cross - sectional shape (round, square, rectangular) as the duct so that patching is not required. After installing duct, seal between duct and sleeve with compressible sealer, such as Tremco's Acoustical Sealant or Johns - Manville's Duxseal. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Heating and Cooling System Testing and Balancing Section 15030 Acceptable Manufacturers List Section 15040 External Corrosion Control Section 15050 Installation of Equipment, Piping and Ductwork Section 15100 Sleeves and Seals Section 15110 Insulation Section 15130 Air Moving Equipment Section 15810 Rooftop Central Station Air Handler Section 15820 Air Distribution Specialties Section 15850 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ASTM NBS SMACNA NFPA No. 90A TIMA 73- 90- 133'.( 15830 -1 Section 15010 1.6 SUBMITTALS 1.6.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA and ductwork shep drawings under provisions of Section 01300. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.7.1 SUBSTITUTIONS under provisions of Section 01600. 1.8 OUALITY ASSURANCE 1.8.1 MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.8.2 CODES AND STANDARDS 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 "Duct Construction ", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS 2.1.1 EXPOSED DUCTWORK MATERIALS: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. 2.1.2 SHEET METAL: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS 2.2.1 GENERAL: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. 2.2.2 FITTINGS: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 degree change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 degree laterals and 45 degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 degree branches are indicated, provide conical type tees. • rtialc C2.11. 2.2.6 DUCT SEALANT: Non - hardening, non - migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for fabrication /installation detail, as compounded 73 - 90 - 1334 ; 15830 -2 and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. 2.2.7 DUCT CEMENT: Non - hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type applicable for fabrication /installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork. 2.2.8 DUCTWORK SUPPORT MATERIALS: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot - dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 2.2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS: Either spiral -wound spring steel with flameproof vinyl sheathing, or corrugated aluminum; complying with UL 181. 2.3 rIBROU& CLACK DUCT& 2.3.1 rIDAOU& CLAC& DUCT& may be oubotitutcd fo awl-- trane€er air duetop not including outoidc air and cxhauot air ducto. duotworh ohcil _Form -•ith CHllCNA FCDCC. For oupply duot, uoc only 2.3.2 MATERIALS: UL 181, Claims. 1 and additional rcquircmcnto herein opcoificd. Factory fabricate fibrous glass ductwork. Provide ducto with a = arricr have a eater vapor permclzncc of not lieu of factory fabricated. conncctoro or molded integral high dcnoity clip joints. Before aoocmbly, coat o the air otrcam. Over all 2.4 FABRICATION 2.4.1 SHOP FABRICATE DUCTWORK in 4, 8, 10, or 12 -ft. lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs. Pre - assemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match -mark sections for re- assembly and coordinated installation. 2.4.2 SHOP FABRICATE DUCTWORK of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards." 2.4.3 FABRICATE DUCT FITTINGS to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center -line radius equal to 1 -1/2 times associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 degrees for contracting tapers and 20 degrees for expanding tapers. 73- 90- 133;»0 15830 -3 ith zinc coated metal Sleeve 2.5 VOLUME DAMPERS 2.5.1 VOLUME DAMPERS shall be constructed of 22 -gauge galvanized steel for damper sizes up to 12- inches in height and 18- inches in length. Blades longer than 18- inches shall be constructed of 20 -gauge galvanized steel. Volume dampers over 12- inches in height shall be multiple blade dampers with maximum 8 -inch high blades constructed of 18 -gauge galvanized steel. Multiple blade dampers shall be constructed in a frame. All blades shall have a stiffening bend at top and bottom edge. All blades shall be supported by a continuous 3/8 -inch (minimum) rod pin with a bearing at each end. Provide volume damper with locking quadrant. 2.6 FIRE DAMPERS 2.6.1 INSTALL FIRE DAMPERS, where shown on the Drawings, to meet the requirements of NFPA Standard 90A and as shown in SMACNA Fire Damper Guide. Fire dampers shall be UL listed. 2.6.2 FIRE DAMPERS shall be Air Balance No. 119ALS or 119BL or approved alternate. Provide installation instructions and submit with shop drawings. 2.6.3 INSTALL ACCESS DOORS of not less than 10 x 12 on the link side of dampers for inspection and checking of damper position. Doors in ductwork shall be Ventlok insulated doors or Airsan hinged duct ports with double glass. Access doors are not required at locations where inspection and access to the fire link is possible by removal of diffusers or grilles. 2.7 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS 2.7.1 DUCT HEATERS shall be standard clip in unite meeting requiremento of era noted. 73- 90- 133»:16 ahnll be NBHA 1 construction with hinged cover with latch. primary overload pvetcetion. it stern shall protection. neater Schedule. 2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS 2.8.1 FLEXIBLE DUCTS: Either spiral -wound spring steel with flameproof vinyl sheathing, or corrugated aluminum; complying with UL 181. Where installed in unconditioned spaces other than return air plenums, provide 1" thick continuous flexible fiberglass sheath with vinyl vapor barrier jacket. PEflA q DAMPERS (GENERATOR:: :DAMPER) P rovide factory fabricated, balanced type damper. 0 ; opposed blade type. ax le akago, 4.n ;closed position shall .not ;:excee M trr �fla1 ±3Q cFM /Sq. ft::.at 2 inches differential pr4 rams e a reef �.eakag @ ..:C. ................. :a alvanized st eel channel ::with seats : as requ ed:.': c Van zed etsel :aiuminuiri 15830 -4 also be equipped with - heemai Aprl rdwar shall be zinc plated; steel. Connecting roda and l .nka�g orking parts of joints shall be bra a b onz ei:: ><i ylgzi. ar sta s 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 GENERAL: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK 3.2.1 GENERAL: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air -tight (5% maximum leakage for systems rated 3" and under noiseless (no objectionable noisey systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly_ with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true - to -shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. 3.2.2 FIELD FABRICATION: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop- fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. 3.2.3 PENETRATIONS: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1 -1/2 ". Fasten to duct and substrate. 1. Where ducts pass through fire -rated floors walls or partitions, provide firestopping between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Division 7, Section "Fireproofing." 3.2.4 COORDINATION: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. 3.2.5 INSTALLATION: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 9% Beeir1nge aha be ny3on, b :sleeve <or 'ball type. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS 3.3.1 MAXIMUM LENGTH: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 6 feet extended length. 3.3.2 INSTALLATION: Install in accordance with'Section III of SMACNA's, "'F4t1AC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible." 73.90 -. 133 * . 6 15830 -5 ire . ............................... .f_��t-treers Apr roomo. Do not uoc fibrouo glaoo duoto for air otrcvm above 250 dcgrcco F, --11., ....1 floor to floor riocrs, in hatardouo 3.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 3.5.1 GENERAL: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and /or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 3.6.1 CLEAN DUCTWORK INTERNALLY, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. 3.6.2 TEMPORARY CLOSURE: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. 3.6.3 BALANCING: Refer to Section 15030 for air distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process. diotanoo of 30 feet from fan inlet or lcngth of duet if lcoo than 30 foot. Linc all air tranofcr ducto. 73 90 M END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INSTALLATION 1.1.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL air distribution specialties as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Section 15010 Heating and Cooling System Testing and Balancing Section 15030 Acceptable Manufacturers List Section 15040 Installation of Equipment, Piping, and Ductwork Section 15100 Air Duct Systems Section 15830 1.3 REOUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES Air Diffusion Council Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. 1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.5.1 SUBSTITUTIONS under provisions of Section 01600. 2.0 PRODUCTS SECTION 15850 AIR DISTRIBUTION SPECIALTIES 2.1 DIFFUSERS 2.1.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL, where shown on the Drawings, ceiling- diffuser assemblies of the size, style and manufacturer scheduled on the drawings. Diffuser assemblies shall include volume dampers. iikc inatullationr Provide equalizing grids to insure uniform air distribution. 2.1.2 CONSTRUCT round or square cone type diffusers of 20 -gauge (minimum) cold - rolled steel and distribute the specified air quantity in a true 360 - degree pattern. Cones shall be one piece units, spun or stamped, without corner joints. Diffusers shall be composed of an inner and outer cone section with the inner section fastened to the outer section using a spring -lock assembly. Shop drawings for diffusers shall indicate N.C. curve, static pressure drop, material, gauge and a room -by -room takeoff showing mounting (lay in or surface) and finish. 2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES 2.2.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL registers and grilles for openings as indicated on the Drawings. Registers are indicated by the letter R; grilles by the letter G. Furnish complete units with frames and blades (and removable key - operated dampers for registers). 2.3 EXTRACTORS 2.3.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL adjustable extractors behind all supply registers. Extractors used behind a grille face shall have key operators. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.1.1 EXAMINE AREAS AND CONDITIONS under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have 73- 90- 133w;'6 15850 -1 been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 GENERAL: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions. 3.2.2 COORDINATE WITH OTHER WORK, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of. air outlets and inlets with other work. 3.2.3 LOCATE CEILING DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES, as indicated. OR 3.3 SPARE PARTS 3.3.1 FURNISH TO OWNER, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED ;: >c:ancera 1.2 RELATED WORK: SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Mechanical Requirements Heating and Cooling System Testing and Balancing Acceptable Manufacturer's List Installation of Equipment and Piping and Ductwork Motors and Control Air Duct Systems SECTION 15950 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AND MONITORING 1.1.1 THIS SECTION includes the furnishing and installation of a Robert Shaw D.D.C. Control System. The system shall include but is not limited to zone dampers, monitor thermostat, slave thermostats, relay packs, bypass controllers, bypass dampers, and wiring. The requirements of this section provide for a complete and operational control system. 0 w 0 A: nte§rator eys:tem . �e<' Boein,�g Section 15010 Section 15030 Section 15040 Section 15100 Section 15140 Section 15830 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA under provisions of Section 01300. 1.3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS 1. Provide complete plan layouts of all devices and interconnected wiring. 2. All control components (hardware and software). 1.3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS shall be submitted under provisions of Section 01700. 1. Installation and operating manuals including trouble shooting and repair instructions for the computerized control system. Also include diagnostic error code descriptions and applicable corrections. 2. Specification data sheets on each device. 3. Software operation and programming information. 4. Parts list. 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.4.1 SUBSTITUTIONS under provisions of Section 01600. or 1.5 OUALITY CONTROL 1.5.1 THE FIRM INSTALLING the work of this section must meet the following requirements: 1. Be an independent controls contractor who has experience in the installation of a D.D.C. temperature control systems. 2. Have a direct factory representative within 200 miles of the project site. 73-90-133!46 15950 -1 3. Have factory trained installation and start -up mechanics /technicians within 100 miles of this project site. 4. Have factory trained technicians, fully competent to provide instruction, routing maintenance, and emergency service on site within 24 hours upon receipt of request. 5. Be experienced in the design and application of computerized central systems similar in performance to that specified herein. 6. Have installation technicians with prior experience installing this specified product and performing the work ' under the direct supervision of a factory trained supervisor. 1.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING 1.6.1 ALL ELECTRICAL WIRING and wiring connections required for the installation of the temperature control system, as herein specified, shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor unless specifically shown on the electrical drawings or called for in the electrical specifications. 1.6.2 ALL WIRING shall comply with local and national electrical codes and the requirements of Division 16 of this specification. 1.6.3 ALL CONTROL, communication bus and sensor wiring shall be color coded in compliance with designated color scheme by vendor. 1.6.4 ALL WIRING shall be plenum rated Beldon or equivalent, #18, #20, or #22 gage, nonshielded wiring. Lengths for specific gage and applications shall comply with the following tables: 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIC SYSTEM: 2.1.1 The building control system specified herein shall be a Direct Digital Control System which can, without additional equipment, perform all of the automatic temperature control and energy management functions as required in this specification. 2.1.2 The Direct Digital Control System (DDC) shall be fully integrated and include all computer software and hardware, operator input /output devices, sensors and controls required for complete operation. The vendor shall provide all wiring, installation, supervision and labor, including calibration, adjustments, operator training and checkout necessary for a complete and fully operating system. 2.1.3 System Components: 1. Robertshaw DMS -350 DCM 2. Robertshaw MSC -P100 3. Robertshaw T -99 Type Temperature Sensors 4. Robertshaw R -436 Differential Pressure Switch 5. Robertshaw MSC -V200 Zone Controller i�..an 133x+.16 BERTR W:;::;<AM 35ODCM was : provided for.Phase <II work 2.2 2.2.1 Wiring shall be new and brought on the job site in original packages bearing Underwriter's label and the date of manufacture. 2.2.2 Minimum wire size shall be No. 10 for ground, No. 12 for 120 VAC power and No. 16 for switched output. Single conductor wire insulation shall be THHN. All wires shall be sized per the NEC for the load services. A single conductor shall not be used for more than one leg of an input or output device 15950-2 Aor Y; >:]4:s19:42 circuit (no "common" conductors) unless approved by Owner. 2.2.3 All wiring shall be stranded. 2.2.4 All wire shall be run in conduit. Wire pulls by powered mechanical means will not be permitted. Conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material just prior to pulling the wire or cable. Lubricants shall be compounds specifically prepared for cable pulling and shall not contain petroleum or other products which will affect cable insulation. Wire with scrapes, nicks, gouges, or crushed insulation shall not be used and shall be removed. Cable ties shall be used in all panels, wireways and other enclosures where conductors should be neatly grouped and laced. All wiring contained in metal wireways shall be in wireways dedicated to temperature control service. Low voltage energy limited to wiring shall not be run in the. same wireways with or closely parallel to high voltage and /or switched power wiring. 2.2.5 Explosion proof materials are to be used in the areas indicated on the contract drawings. 2.3 ROOM THERMOSTATS: 2.3.1 Provide room thermostats with locking covers, and with concealed or readily - accessible adjustment devices and dead band, as indicated. 1. Line - Voltage On -Off Thermostats: Provide thermostats of bi -metal actuated open contact, or bellows actuated enclosed snap - switch type, or equivalent solid -state type; UL- listed at electrical rating comparable with application. Provide bemetal thermostats which employ heat anticipation. Equip thermostats which control electric heating loads directly, with Off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors. 2. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Comply with requirements for line - voltage thermostats. In addition, include as integral part of each thermostat, 2- position push - button or lever operated manual switch for control of fan in each unit with type of control as indicated. CT LOCATIONS OR PROVIDE CCi1BDULC. Label switches "fan on- off ". Provide factory - fabricated unit, capable of being mounted on 2 -gang switch box or mud ring. 2.4 Emergency breakglass operator shall be UL Type 4, 13, with replaceable glass disks. Operator shall be supplied with contact block, break hammer and chain, 4 spare glass disks and legend plate reading "EMERGENCY VENTILATION SHUTDOWN ". Legend plate shall meet Boeing signage standards for material, color and letter size. 2.5 Mushroom button shall be UL Type 4, 13, 2 1'4" diameter red in color, screw -on type with security set screw. Operator shall be supplied with contact block and Legend plate reading "EMERGENCY VENTILATION SHUTDOWN ". Legend plate shall meet Boeing standard for material, color and letter size. 2.6 Audible Alarm shall be grille type vibrating horn and shall generate 100 db at 10 feet. Legend plate shall be supplied with alarm reading "VENTILATION SYSTEM FAILURE ALARM ". Legend plate shall meet Boeing standard for material, color and letter size. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: 3.1.1 The complete DDCS control system shall be installed by a Contractor who is thoroughly versed in the installation of Direct Digital Control Systems. This Contractor shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of DDCS. 3.1.2 The wiring of the Direct Digital Control System shall be done under the direct supervision of the manufacturer and will be in accordance with all Code Authorities have jurisdiction. 3.1.3 All installation work shall be coordinated with all other trades such that no re -work, cutting, or patching will be required. 3.1.4 All devices shall be configured for normal operation in accordance to their individual configuration charts, attached to this specification by the Owner /Engineer. 3.1.5 All work shall be installed in accordance with current industry practices. Only top quality workmanship will be accepted. Any work not properly executed in compliance with these specifications shall be removed and replaced without additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 Service and Warranty 3.2.1 After completion of the installation, system start up shall be completed. All thermostats and related components will be adjusted, as well as the equipment being controlled by the specified control system shall be in operation and fully checked out. The entire system must be in operation for twenty -four (24) hours prior to seeking acceptance from the Owner /Engineer. 3.2.2 The Control system herein specified shall be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service. If, within twelve (12) months from date of acceptance by Owner /Engineer, any of the equipment herein described is proved to be defective in workmanship or material, it will be repaired, adjusted, or replaced free of charge by the installing Contractor. END OF SECTION 'n .q_0n_111'aW 1 aQMn -n CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDING 9 -04 PHASE III DIVISION - 16 Section 16010 General Provisions Section 16110 Raceways Section 16120 Wires and Cables Section 16134 Outlet Boxes Section 16140 Wiring Devices Section 16155 Motor Starters Section 16160 Panelboards and Enclosed Circuit Breakers Section 16165 Cwitchboard3 Section 16170 Motor and Circuit Disconnects Ccotion 16171 Non Automatic Tranafcr Cwitohoo Section 16181 Fuses Section 16190 Supporting Devices Ccotion 16310 Cubotationo 30 and 31 Section 16402 Outside Power Transmission and Distribution Section 16450 Grounding Section 16460 Transformers (small dry type) Section 16500 Lighting Section 16612 Generator System and Automatic Transfer Switch 8eetiee 16 1 irc Alarm and Dctcction Eyotcm Section 16770 Public Address System Section 16900 Motor Connections and Controls Section 16994 Testing SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.0 THE CONDITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS shall apply to the Work specified in Division 16, Electrical. 2.0 CODES: Electrical Work shall meet the requirements of national, state, and local codes that govern the Project. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to be aware of, and to abide by, the governing codes. 3.0 STANDARDS: Electrical equipment and materials shall meet the applicable requirements of the following standards: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM) Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) Independent Testing Laboratories (ITL) National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 4.0 PAYMENTS FOR FEES, PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, AND LICENSING required for the Electrical Work shall be included under this Division. 5.0 PAYMENTS OF ASSESSMENTS AND CHARGES levied by the serving utilities, relative to the Electrical Work, shall be paid by the Owner. 6.0 EXISTING CONDITIONS. Electrical Work shall include proper interface of existing conditions for all electrical systems. 7.0 DEFINITION: The term "Electrical Contractor" used throughout Division 16 shall mean the Prime Electrical Subcontractor. 8.0 METAL ROOF DECKS shall not be used to support lighting fixtures or other electrical work. 9.0 SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS to the Architect - Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. 10.0 ELECTRICAL ROUGH -INS for Contractor- furnished or Owner - furnished equipment shall be made in accord with the approved manufacturer's drawings. Discrepancies in electrical rough -ins shall be corrected at no additional cost. 11.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SIZE, LOCATION, CLEARANCE, AND ROUGH -INS shall be coordinated with other trades prior to going ahead with any work. Conflicts with electrical equipment and other building systems shall be corrected at the expense of this Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. 12.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONDUIT LOCATIONS shall be coordinated with other trades prior to this work and other trade work, and shall not occupy space intended for other work of other trades. Conflict will require electrical work to be relocated at no additional cost to the Owner. 13.0 MATERIALS 13.1 ALL SIMILAR MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT shall be the product of the same manufacturer. J.3,2 WHERE NO SPECIFIC MATERIAL, APPARATUS, OR APPLIANCE is mentioned, any first -class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the Contract requirements and meets the approval of the Architect - Engineer. .2 -711 7A 1fn1n -1 aY ;;A:VA ia :::::: h:aoh 13.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material, and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design. 13.4 IDENTIFY exposed conduits, junction, and pullboxes at maximum intervals of 20 feet and as indicated below. Identify exposed conduit 3/4 inch or larger in diameter according to the system carried by means of Brady B -350 permacode thin film pipe markers or approved equal. Identify junction and pullboxes by painted -on stencils or approved labels. Place identification at necessary intervals on straight conduit runs, close to terminations. 14.0 DRAWINGS 14.1 GENERAL: 'Electrical Drawings show the general' arrangement of conduit, equipment, etc., and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades permits. The Architectural and Structural Drawings shall be considered as a part of the work insofar as these Drawings furnish the Contractor with information relating to the design and construction of the building. Architectural Drawings shall take precedence over Electrical Drawings. The Contractor shall investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work, and shall arrange his work accordingly, providing such fittings, elbows, pullboxes, and accessories required to meet such conditions. 14.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS: Verify dimensions governing electrical work at the building. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the Drawings. 15.0 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND OUTLETS 15.1 APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS of cabinets, panelboards, switches, light outlets, power outlets, etc., are indicated on the Drawings; however, the exact location shall be determined after thoroughly examining the General Drawings and by actual measurements during construction to avoid conflicts with any structural, architectural, or other trades, with all locations subject to the approval of the Architect - Engineer. 15.2 VERIFY WITH THE ARCHITECT- ENGINEER the location of conduit, boxes, etc., stubbed in the floor prior to installation.. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Supporting Devices Section 16190 Outside Power Transmission and Distribution Section 16402 Grounding Section 16450 Telephone System Section 16740 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC). Raceways shall be approved for the intended application, and shall meet the requirements of the NEC. 1.3 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. 1.3.1 RACEWAYS shall be UL listed. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 CIRCULAR METALLIC RACEWAYS 2.1.1 SIZE. Circular raceways shall be 3/4 -inch minimum diameter.for lighting and receptacle branch circuit home runs and exterior work and 1/2- inch minimum diameter for other interior work, unless shown or specified otherwise. 2.1.2 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) shall be high performance steel, electrically welded, lightweight, rigid -type conduit, manufactured to meet the requirements of UL 1242. Couplings, fittings, and connectors shall be raintight and concretetight, steel compression type. 2.1.3 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (RSC) shall be hot - dipped galvanized mild steel, manufactured to ANSI C80.1 and FS WW -C -581. 2.1.4 PLASTIC COATED METAL CONDUIT (PCMC) shall be plastic coated, (20 mil underground, 40 mil above ground) hot - dipped galvanized, mild steel rigid conduit, or rigid aluminum conduit, and shall conform to the requirements of the NEMA No. RN1 (Type A). 2.1.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) shall be mild steel, electrically welded, galvanized, and produced to ANSI C80.3 and FS WW -C -563. Couplings, fittings, and connectors shall be raintight and concretetight, steel compression type. 2.1.6 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUITS (FMC) of steel or aluminum shall be 1/2 -inch minimum, except 3/8 -inch nominal trade size shall be permitted in lengths not in excess of 72 inches (48 inches in environmental air plenums) as a part of a manufacturer's approved assembly of lighting fixtures. Flexible connections to motors shall be permitted in lengths not in excess of 36 inches. Fittings approved for grounding purposes shall be used at flexible conduit terminations. 2.1.7 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) shall meet the specifications for flexible metal conduit, and shall have an outer liquidtight,,nonmetallic, sunlight-resistant jacket. 2.2 CIRCULAR NONMETALLIC RACEWAYS 2.2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC) shall be of the following types: 1. Type A, Thin Wall, shall be UL listed for underground encased use, 73- 90- 133: 2. Type 40, Heavy Wall, shall be UL listed for direct burial and exposed use, and shall conform to NEMA standards. 3. Type 80, Extra Heavy Wall, shall conform to U.S. Product Standard PS -21. 4. Type EB, Power and Communication Duct, shall be rigid nonmetallic conduit UL listed for "Underground - for concrete encasement in outdoor trenches only. Not for use in walls, floors, or ceilings." 5. Type DB, Power and Communications Duct, shall be rigid nonmetallic conduit UL listed for direct burial use. 6. EB and DB shall meet the requirements of NEMA TC -6. 2.2.2 BOXES, COVERS, ACCESSORIES, FITTINGS, AND EXPANSION JOINTS shall be UL listed and designed for use with each type of PVC specified. 2.2.3 PVC SOLVENT CEMENT shall be fast drying, solvent weld cement for joining conduits and fittings, and shall be of the same manufacture as the nonmetallic conduits. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.1.1 RACEWAY TYPES for specific applications shall conform to NEC Articles 345 through 362. Use PVC conduit for underground installation only or where specified otherwise. 3.1.2 INSTALL an independent raceway system for emergency circuits to meet the requirements of NEC Article 700. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CIRCULAR RACEWAYS 3.2.1 DETERMINE exact conduit locations in the field. Conduit runs shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic. 3.2.2 AVOID proximity to heating ducts and hot pipes. Install raceways to clear the insulation of ducts or pipes by a minimum of 6 inches where crossings are unavoidable. Raceways shall not be supported from, or fastened to, mechanical ductwork or piping. 3.2.3 RUN CONCEALED CONDUITS with long sweep bends and offsets in finished areas. 3.2.4 RUN EXPOSED CONDUITS in unfinished areas parallel, and at right angles, to building lines. Install conduits perpendicular to open web joists directly beneath the upper cord, and install conduits parallel to open web joists along the lower cord with no part of the conduit below the cord. 3.2.5 FIT box connections with an approved lock nut and steel bushing to form a tight bond with the box. 3.2.6 PROTECT ungrounded conductors, No. 4 and larger, with insulated bushings where conduits enter boxes, cabinets, etc., and provide lock nuts on both inside and outside of enclosures to which the conduit is attached. 3.2.7 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT shall have rigid steel ells where penetrating concrete slabs. Do not expose the nonmetallic conduit above finished floor. 73-90-1334 and shall conform to NEMA standards. 16110 -2 3.2.8 CONDUITS CAST IN CONCRETE TOPPINGS, SLABS, AND WALLS shall be of sizes and in locations that do not impair the strength of the construction. Conduits shall meet the following requirements, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings or approved, in writing, by the Architect - Engineer. 1. Maximum Diameter or conduit thickness shall be 1/3 of the concrete thickness. 2. Minimum Spacing of conduit shall be 6 diameters. 3. Minimum Concrete Cover shall be 3/4 inch. 4. Reinforcing Bars shall not be displaced. 3.2.9 CONDUITS shall not be cast in, or pass through, beams, columns, or joists unless shown on the Drawings or approved, in writing, by the Architect- Engineer. 3.2.10 SLEEVES for conduits or pipes passing through walls or floors shall be of sizes and locations that do not impair the strength of the construction. Sleeves shall meet the following requirements, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings or approved, in writing, by the Architect - Engineer. 1. Maximum Diameter shall be 4 inches. 2. Minimum Spacing shall be 3 diameters. 3. Reinforcing Bars shall not be displaced. 3.2.11 BURY PVC conduits a minimum of 18 inches for underground installations, except for areas subject to vehicular traffic shall have a minimum cover of 24 inches. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for trenching, forming of duct assemblies, providing protective concrete envelopes, backfilling, and removing excess earth. Record dimensions from concrete or building walls to underground electrical work and mark on the record copy of the Drawings. 3.2.12 INSTALL APPROVED EXPANSION JOINTS on PVC conduits where raceway crosses building expansion joint. 3.2.13 INSTALL PVC - COATED CONDUIT AND FITTINGS where indicated for highly corrosive atmospheres. 3.2.14 INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT for motor connections and other electrical equipment connections, in dry locations only, where subjected to movement and vibration. 3.2.15 INSTALL LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT for connection of motors in mechanical rooms, and other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration and also where subjected to one or more of the following conditions: Corrosive atmosphere Dripping oil, grease or water Exterior location Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate Water spray 34406R,'?-', co n,iu : 73- 90- 133; Ra ......... in hazardouu l acati:ans sh `ravide seal off fittings where con duit leaves END OF SECTION 16110 -3 : 1.0 GENERAL if ea-1 Mal Wiring Dcvicco Aaocwayo Crounding '2r noformcro Lighting M and Controls Conductors integral with equipment, such as motors and controllers 2.0 PRODUCTS 73 -90- 133 -16 SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE rciu ida 16120 -1 Ccction 16140 Scotion 16110 Ccction 1645') Ccction 16460 Scction 16500 Ccotion 16900 1.2 REOUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) Wiring methods, conductor applications, and £ staU a t&ons shall. me t he requa.rements of t he NEC. 1.2.2. STANDARDS: and inoulationo shall mcct thc rcquircmcnto of thc NEC. 1.2.2 CTANDALLDE* Conductors shall conform to IPCEA and NEMA specifications for manufacturing, cable identification, and testing, and shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. : Dry < and wet.locations Dry 'locations Dry;Lucations 2.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL, SIZES AND INSULATION 2.1.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL shall be copper. Aluminum conductors will not be permitted. 2.1.2 MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SIZE shall be No. 12 AWG or larger, unless specified otherwise herein and permitted in NEC Article 310 -5. signal and pilot control circuits may be No. 14 AWG minimum. 2.1.3 STRANDED CONDUCTORS: Conductors 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. 2.1.4 INSULATION: Rate insulated conductors for 600 volts for electrical systems up to 600 volts, unless specified otherwise. Color code insulation as hereinafter specified. 2.2 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 600 VOLT, NOMINAL OR LESS 2.2.1 SECONDARY FEEDERS AND SUBFEEDERS shall be Types THWN, or XHHW rated 75C (167F), sized as shown on the Drawings. 2.2.2 POWER BRANCH CIRCUITS shall be sized as shown on the Drawings, and shall be of the following types: KHHW TIIIIN 2.2.3 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS shall be of the following types: W ::;:and >: we:� j; a'ocationffi kTItT47 ............................... ............................... DrY and iic .. locut'iono THHN Dry locations and where 2.2.4 PULL WIRE shall be 16 AWG galvanized iron in empty conduits in dry locations and 12 AWG copper wire in conduits in, or under, concrete slab -on -grade or in damp locations. ai rid > ><t .............:.:............. 3 NS L`A XON shall b ex e propylene rubber, extrude conduc #ax ,aye : .. ... : c o v ed with a minimum 5 >mil bare ;copper hi.eLth :; and ca AA4 TJ JACKET sh all be`PVC minimum' average thickness` :;of 8b mils. I NG shall be 1'SKV type MV -90. 133 percent insulation °1revel. :.9.. operations 130 degree C. for emergency overload and 250. rcuit c:anditions. ,NUFACTURERS are Cablec, arophone, speaker, and call in , system :s ties° wiNGa° 2.5 WIRE CONNECTORS 2.5.1 HAND - APPLIED WIRE CONNECTORS for circuit and fixture conductors from 8 AWG through 12 AWG shall be UL listed for AL /CU, AL /AL, and CU /CU, 600 -volt insulated, pressure type, 105C, and shall have an integral self - locking spring grip 2.5.2 PRESSURE CONNECTORS AND SPLICES for No. 8 AWG through No. 750 MCM shall be mechanical screw or compression type as follows: 1. Use Mechanical Connectors for copper conductors only. Connectors shall be copper or bronze bodied, and shall be UL listed configurations for taps, tees, or crossover -tees- parallel tap. 2.6 TERMINALS AND SPLICES 2.6.1 SMALL TERMINALS (WIRE SIZE 22 -10). Connectors and splices for miscellaneous terminal block connections shall be Thomas and Betts Sta-Kon Locking Fork terminal, insulated brazed seam sleeve, type of the proper size to accommodate the conductor. 2.6.2 GROUND CONNECTIONS for 1/0 AWG and larger shall be Cadweld or Burndy "Thermoweld " ::: :,• : : :. :. : : : : : :.......... ;.... ����.b���al. p�caoess ar : Thomas : and Bette; Go*irwel4 73- 90- 133 -# Dry Locationo run through lighting fixtures Dry ;and :wet ';locatox:e, 16120 -2 Rome, Okonite. errnin ations shall be fang barrel, hyct ro Uc.. : :; :.; : :. : :.; : :: S IL uP to 95 KV '. Approved manu ct;ue 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS WIRING MATERIAL 2.7.1 MISCELLANEOUS CONNECTING AND SPLICING DEVICES. Miscellaneous products, such as heat shrink tubing, electrical insulation, plug caps, splices and kits, tapes, terminal blocks, and terminations, shall be approved for the specific application. 2.7.2 JOINT COMPOUNDS shall be approved for the specific type metal joint to be prepared. 2.7.3 WIRE PULLING LUBRICANTS shall be UL listed for the conductor insulation types. 2.7.4 CABLE TIES, CLAMPS, AND IDENTIFICATION shall be nylon, self - locking. 2.7.5 UNDERGROUND TAPE WARNING SYSTEM shall be yellow, colored adze d1 1y j. n a - dii 9 " CA�JTIdN ...:. EL ECTRIC LINES 3.0 EXECUTION 3.2.7 3.2.9 IDENTIFICATION 1. 73- 90- 133 -16 3.1 WIRING METHODS 3.1.1 INSTALL conductors in conduit unless noted otherwise. 3.1.2 PROVIDE No. 10 minimum wire size from panelboard to first 120 -volt lighting fixture or first receptacle for runs 50 feet or more, and -to the first 277 -volt lighting fixture for runs 100 feet or more. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3.2.1 INSTALL CONDUCTORS to conform to the applicable requirements of NEC Article 300, Wiring Methods. 3.2.2 RUN feeder cables continuous from origin to termination without splices. Unless noted otherwise, each conduit raceway shall contain only those conductors constituting a single feeder circuit. 3.2.3 JOIN both ends of parallel conductors electrically to form a single conductor. Parallel conductors shall meet the requirements of NEC Article 310 -4. 3.2.4 THREE - PHASE WIRING: Install one common neutral with 3 -phase conductors and a maximum of three circuits per conduit home run, except where shown otherwise on the Drawings. Derating factors for additional number of conductors in conduits shall be applied according to NEC Table 310, Note 8. 3.2.5 EMERGENCY CIRCUIT WIRING shall comply with NEC Article 700. 3.2.6 INSTALL GABLE ina neat and a - == raoko, cable cleats, and-- supper -t- ,- 3.2.8 ypc conncctoro with a Identify feeder and branch circuit conductors by the following color -coded system: Phase 120/208 Volts Black 16120 - 3 277480 Volts own. A a O Neutral Equipment Cround . " 1?l' .w . tiOems> : "<.: ,:<:::,.::::.::: ; <.::.:.:.,.;..;,:, _;: >;:::...:. e sx y <fu rni,she i. ur th c a 0.xe • 'ropr;ia Black Red Dluc Whitc Crccn END OF SECTION aoe Brown Orange Yellow Whitc /Grey Green stripe Where used, this method of coding shall be incorporated in all junction boxes, switches, etc., that comprise the raceway system. 3.2.10 BURY underground tape warning system 1 foot below the surface before final.backfilling of trenches. 3.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING 3.3.1 STORE wiring materials in a protected environment not subject to physical damage or the effects of sunlight or inclement weather. 1.0 GENERAL 3.9 =1.33 0 'PRODUCTS 11 r4Y ? i ' }Y.•, : �! : {:x �r. %r ' rr:.: is :`l.Vii�ii 1.'ir'�: '.f•.�•i'r:{�: i::`4 is 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 OUTLET BOXES shall be as manufactured by the following: Appleton Electric Lew Electric Co. National Electrical Products Company Rayco Inc. Steel City SECTION 16134 OUTLET BOXES .. ........... ....... 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1' OUTLET BOXES -3:1.1 INSTALL outlet boxes as shown on the Drawings and where required by,, NEC. Install extension rings where required. Install outlet boxes plumb and flush with finished surfaces. Outlet boxes installed in wet or damp areas shall /be enclosed and gasketed. END OF SECTION ' 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Wires and Cables Outlet Boxes Supportin Devices .,4„,z7A:11gmmos,.Amon 1.2 STANDARDS 1.2.1 WIRING DEVICES manufactured by the following will be equally acceptable Bryant Hubbell 1.'"491* '''tigagiO 1.2.2 WIRING DEVICES shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT shop drawings and product data to the Architect-Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements as follows: 1. Submit Four Copies of product data for each type of wiring device and device cover plate. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 SWITCHES 2.1.1 SWITCHES shall be as follows: Single Pole, Sitch, ' momen ampe 0. Ammq 20 ampere Duplex, 73.-90-133-0 ...... . . .. . . . Three way, 20 ampere Four way, 20 ampere 2.2 RECEPTACLES 2.2.1 RECEPTACLES shall be as follows: SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES ground fault interru ter — MiAgagNegAgA , ...NM717VVM=mmW AS ampere 2,3 DEVICE PLATES 2,3.1 DEVICE PLATES shall be as follows: 16140-1 Section 16120 Section 16134 Section 16190 1:::4404:1:1:%4P94 Pass • & Seymour Dd Pass and SOYMO Pass and Seymour Hubbell 1221 Hubbell 1223 Hubbell 1224 Ilubbell CF-a26 Switch s Plate, 5tiat`e1 excee "''t 3.1.8 brushed finish 0 000. Pla e; weathera ::: staa.riTcoe ot'ccl '.' Cwitah Plato, galvanised steel c.. •tch P� 4.. Ott i`CtlTI"��iQ'CC weat hcrproe'f otainlcoo steel Receptacle Plato, CFI Calvaniscd Steel Rcccptaolc Plato, weatherproof stainless steel 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3.1.1 FURNISH AND INSTALL wiring devices as shown on the Drawings and as specified. 3.1.2 INSTALL wiring devices plumb with walls so that device plates are tight to finished surfaces. Long axis of device to be vertical. 3.1.3 DEVICE PLATES IN FINISHED AREAS AND ON PAINTED WALLS shall be satin. finish stainless steel. Oversized device plates shall not be used. 3.1.4 DEVICE PLATES IN UNFINISHED AREAS ON UNPAINTED WALLS shall be galvanized steel. c rawu g "r 73-90-133 w r g:: devices at heights above finished floor ae ehor ING'> 1 t IC all be 20 'amperes: in all areas, and shall meet or [I.L. and'NEMA Standards, and be specification grade. 3.1.7 MOUNT wiring devices at heights above finished floor as shown on the Drawings or as follows: Receptacles + 12" Aff. Switches + 48" Aff. 3.1.9 WIRING DEVICES shall have No. 14 AWG green grounding jumper installed from the device grounding terminal to the outlet box as required by the code enforcing authority. END OF SECTION 16140 -2 Pass & Seymour S Steel City 2 -me t8 e moll feel City 68 ::C' -7 ubbell 5 IIubl c ll ' ty070 Ccrica Steel City 68 - C 30 Hubbell 88 Hubbell WPF526 Ctccl City 60 C 7 Hubbell 526W0 Hubbell 812 10 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 MOTOR STARTERS shall comply with NEMA Standards, and shall be UL listed. 1.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.3.1 MOTOR STARTERS shall be manufactured by: General Electric Co., General Purpose Control I -T -E Electrical Products, Siemens - Allis, Inc. Square D Company Westinghouse, Control Products 20 PRODUCTS Hotoro and Controlo Motor Concrol Cantor Motors and Controls 2.1 MOTOR STARTER ENCLOSURES 2.1.1 MOTOR STARTER ENCLOSURES shall be NEMA 1, unless . >not edr<4 1:Orwj sh all. ba gal vanized,Prime painted, and f inished in:'the' manufactur an 4 SO ca &ble NI tmrp ��x3.mts�►� . �zgia 2.3 AC MAGNETIC STARTERS .,,..:..: ,, :.:::::....... 2.3.1 MAGNETIC STARTERS shall b e NEMA Size 1 minimum, acre s — * ase and shall have the roliowin on ac minimum of two normally open and tw � p t� Sw.tcn, o iltight . with - spring return Bait ng ilot?> Lights lack: vo 'ea ; e .. e r -- age x9 ti tec0n utton%. nits :W 0 -: 73- 90- 133 -0 SECTION 16155 MOTOR STARTERS Section 15140, Mechanical Manual Ccction 16900 Scotion 169920A RSEPQWER TYPE: 'for s ngle _,,.,: a manually operated >toggle >the l over]oad e le ment and . bight adlgciced in the OFF : posit ion. • 16155 -1 I ORSEP_OWER• : TYPE for polyphase. al .,motars.;, 600 -voat •manuly op :switch.with.•i melting: .ement, under - voltage; protection, and ;pilot ,: ize l minimum :and' Shall be c apable of be ngi co " 'othcrs,iac notca . ii Ccicctor Switch, oiltight with opring rcturn Ambient Temperature Compensated Melting Alloy Type Thermal Overload Element Control Transformer, 120 -volt, wit'h`two" Co ___, , i 1 , o , 2.4 —AO OOHBINATI N s TT R T . n • golcator Csiitoh, oiltight with opring rcturn I� diaatiog- ilot s = _h P .. d t o ck ? ca t ure 4..- .] nd f- ... 30 EXECUTION a wiring hazardous b con wit•fi : .NEC: • END OF SECTION 3.1 MOTOR STARTERS 3.1.1 INSTALL motor starters with integral control stations and pilot lights and sized as shown on the Drawings. Verify motor characteristics and ambient temperature and size thermal elements accordingly. 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE • C et-X Plat Concr e:':<": Ss Crown n4 — an Z'cot g Hotor Conncotiono and Controls Misting 1.2 REOUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 PANELBOARDS shall comply with S tandards, shall be UL listed, 400 sf a' ' '3 vie`'an Xnte " : ` ''t shall havc an Intcgratcd or Ccricb Fiquipmcnt Chort'Circuit Rating. 1.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.3.1 PANELBOARDS shall be as manufactured by: General Electric Co. (Distribution Assemblies Square D Co. I.T.E. Division of Ccimcns Co. Westinghouse, ContCo . Pxo Industrial Elcotr c flanufacturing Inc. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT shop drawings to the Architect- Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Shop drawings shall include the following: Rating Standards Circuit Breaker Withstandability Data General Standards 2.0 PRODUCTS SECTION 16160 PANELBOARDS AND ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PANBIAGARDS � Sect',io Section ; `16 9:4 Scction 16450 Scction 16900 Ccction 16991 2.1 PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES 2.1.1 CABINETS shall be of code gauge galvanized steel. Enclosures may be NEMA type 1, but shall comply with Boeing Standards, i.e., door in door construction. 2.1.2 TRIM AND DOORS shall be suitable to the mode of mounting, and shall be primed and painted in the manufacturer's standard color. 2.1.3 LOCKS shall be flush cylinder tumbler type and furnished with two keys for each lock. Locks shall be keyed alike. 2.1.4 LOCATE branch circuit directory inside the door. Directory shall consist of a metal frame, clear plastic cover, and typed circuit directory. 2.1.5 MOUNT panelboard identifier permanently on the exterior side of the door. Identifier shall consist of engraved plastic label, white letters on red background for emergency panels and white letters on black background for all other panels. Xaert? in metal frame and clear plastic cover. 2.1.6 PROVIDE COPPER EQUIPMENT GROUNDING BAR in panelboards. 73- 90- 13316' 16160 -1 i:7X11RNEUTRAt AR and seperate ground bar. ELBOARO$AieeditiWttt,ieqarOjeCtehai.14Dethelare0UetOtiabe in* • 4.fac cUTTAAE4KERseheilbe::bOit-7 .nterrupting ratngs ap 000 AJC:: BUS , BARS to be copper. 00. REAKS AKER: • ta 11•4 oi -• have int ... Pg;05.: 4 .. k-rnake,..qutck-beak, trip indicating, with common tri.pon multiple - tea er . Sihd 27.7/480 volts. VtiNtkEdtittok RCOITBREAKERA.IINIMUM RATINGS shall be 10,000 AI , 31 - 1000 0 142 %#.0T*Wthi.0 0 .1 1 *44W.cii . cuit:44.0.f*4?#404POT.— FORISH Opcoial foaturCti, ouoh ao cub oub feccl OP1"US"rai'Int64rhi as shown on thc Drawqngo. 3.1.4 = tilaiittfaettiVerr 3.2 CIRCUIT MAKER PANELBOARD8 (180/277 V, 3 phc, 4W and 480 V. 3 phazo 444+ kcn into oonoidcration. brea4tere ?"41461614=4-21 3.3 CIRCUI 73-90-133-0 16160-2 Apri1 14, 1992. END OF SECTION 3.4.3 EXPEND vortical buooing thc full hcight of thc panclboard. 3.x-.4 CIRCUIT-SR F —with ground fault intcrruptcro ohall be bolt on, 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Motors and Controls Fuses < :'. <:< �': • . ... • •. • ro 2.0 PRODUCTS SECTION 16170 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS END OF SECTION Section 15140, Mechanical Manual Section 16181 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 MOTOR AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES shall be NEMA rated and UL listed, and shall meet the requirements of NEC. 1.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.3.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES shall be as manufactured by the following: General Electric Co . , t30ne3 z0Q:se? Con Square D Company Westinghouse, Control Products 2.1 SWITCHES AND ENCLOSURES • 2.1.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES shall be heavy duty fusible type, «;::,`.;': `•'r�: ,nr::,u �� e:;:::a fed . , :.. ck.:: e.. :::` ��: ra�> �k� ?: ��v� ;�w�z�..r.�..e,...f. .,..�.1..a . p 1 qui mad,. :::::..:.�k:,.:::.z$:::k. ►•. 'guiok bream -,- and shall be capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. 2.1.2 DISCONNECT SWITCH ENCLOSURES shall be NEMA 1, unless noted otherwise, and shall be galvanized, prime painted and finished in the manufacturer's standard color. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL disconnect switches as shown on by NEC. 3.1.2 MAKE line side connections to disconnect pre -wired mechanical equipment. 3.1.3 LABEL each disconnect switch with engraved plastic identifier, and white letters on black background. the Drawings and where required switches furnished with 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Motor Connectiono and Controlo 2.1 FUSES 73 -90- 133 - SECTION 16181 FUSES lzfet3 b a< 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 FUSES shall be UL listed. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SUBMIT shop drawings to the Architect- Engineer in accord with the General Requirements and General Conditions. Shop drawings shall include the following: Catalog Data on each fuse type aalt Current inal.ysls of complete distribution system with graphLc • ....... ....:...:::: 1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER 1.4.1. FUSES shall be manufactured by Bussmann Company, Inc., Economy Fuse, or Gould Inc., Electric Fuse Division (Shawmut). Fuses for the project shall be by the same manufacturer. 1.5 SPARE STOCK 1.5.1 FURNISH three spare fuses for each size of fuse used on this project. 2.0 PRODUCTS F uoreacent xt;ure. NCH;:: > C:IRCUITS , ssmann ,.- S RKI, `Dual Element a:0.mann':Class < K.'>;Fu satrQn K5, Dual Element 5 K5;,': Dua�:':Element 16181 -1 Section 16900 Bussmann .GLR :GMFfj HLR fuseboldez %BtiesMAO:KTK.::br.F NQ :HEB,:or HPS fus.vhol WO' 4 250 volto 251 600 volt° 3.0 EXECUTION 'I S Ci INET sha 2.3-.2 HO .+ nND CIROU -ItFC 0 100 anaperco 0 250 volto 251 600 volts . be Busemann :Type : SFG wi END OF SECTION :owx LPN AK1, Ducal Element LPS IIK1, Dual Elcmcnt >Oet as shown on ° the Da; aw .rt an engraved label to the outs Ln:forrnatLon %nd a Buasmann Clasp KS Fuoctron FflN 35, Dual Element FITS K5, Dual Elcmcnt 3.1 FUSES 3.1.1 INSTALL fuses as shown on the Drawings. Do not install fuses until the equipment has been finally installed, protected, and ready to be energized. 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Rough Carpentry Piping Specialties Raceways Outict Bonoa Wiring Devices Lighting 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES 2.1.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS shall be as follows Gio ntu Con nt i i dl�lai�lty#i1t cc l Ohannc Roam Clampo SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 2.1.4 CONDUCTOR SUPPORTS shall be as follows or similar: Cord Grip Connectors Nylon Cable Ties 2.1.6 FASTENINGS shall be as follows: Expansion Shields for masonry construction Pan -head Screws for wood or light metal construction ex.s�z'uti' 2.2 SUPPORTING METHODS 2.2.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT shall be fastened with bolts not be welded in place. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAYS 3.1.1 INSTALL raceway supports within 12 inches of junction boxes and conduit 73 -90- 133 - 0 16190 -1 Section 06100, Section 15070, See 0L 1 00 Ccction 16110 Ccction 16134 Section 16140 Ccction 16600 or similar: Thomas .&;; Befit 69:C Supers C 900 Sez: Supers 735 w l'ow`s nr: simil'ar iiiperstrut ><$:6 S a e >pe A �83 awi u connect ady Na 50!5 ::. ICindo 12 'Ca., galvanised Kindorf, galvanisod ex'ile`s: >'1`4' bolt typo General Manual Mechanical Manual Thomas & Betts 2000 Series Thomas & Betts TY Series O U or screws, and shall ;couplings. . Raceways installed above suspended ceilings.shall be independently .. ;supported 2 feet above the ceiling where the ceiling plenum depth exceeds 3 feet. 3.2 JUNCTION BOXES 3.2.1 INSTALL supports . at each junction box. END OR SECTION vi. 1.0 GENERAL SECTION 16402 OUTSIDE POWER TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 WORK INCLUDED. The work required under these specifications shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, services, products, accessories, equipment, tools, etc., and all other items which are necessary but not specifically shown or mentioned, for the installation, application, and completion of the underground electric distribution system shown on the drawings and /or as specified herein. 1. Furnish and install underground cast -in -place concrete encased electrical duct bank with PVC conduits, reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric. 2. Installation of owner furnished 13,800V- 480/277V, 3 phase, 4 wire pad mounted transformer. 3. Furnish and install grounding with all connections. 4. Furnish and install 480/277, 3 phase, 4 wire service from pad mounted service transformer to service entrance equipment. 1.1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Trenching, Backfill and Compaction Section 02222 Concrete Formwork Concrete Reinforcement and Accessories Cast -In -Place Concrete Section 03100 Section 03200 Section 03300 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP. All materials, equipment and parts specified herein, shall be new and unused, of current manufacture and of highest grade. 1.2.2 STANDARDS. The materials shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest applicable standards as recommended by UL, ANSI, ASTM, NEMA, IEEE, SPCEA, AEIC and the National Electric Code - NFPA 70. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 SHOP DRAWINGS. 1. Submit shop drawings showing all components: dimensions, connection details and radius of bend. 1.3.2 MANUFACTURER'S DATA. Submit standard data sheet for all components by catalog number, name and manufacturer. Submit original catalog data, i.e., photocopies are not acceptable. Specifically mark each item submitted. Data shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. High voltage cable 2. Conduit, all types 3. Conduit fitting, all types 4. Cable splicing materials 5. Cable hangers, brackets and insulators 73-90-133-# 16402 -1 6. Grounding materials 7. Cable tags and marking materials 1.4 TEST REPORTS 1.4.1 ALL "TYPE" MATERIALS shall have been tested by approved published test methods. Submit copies of test reports to substantiate specification requirements. 1.5 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1.5.1 submit all shop drawings, manufacturer's catalog data and installation data bound together into volumes properly marked and sectioned per the index. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.6.1 SCHEDULING OF MATERIALS DELIVERED to jobsite shall be made to insure uninterrupted progress of work. 1.6.2 ALL MATERIALS shall be arranged for easy access, inspection and identification. 1.6.3 ALL MATERIALS shall be protected against intrusion of water, dirt and other contaminants. Conduits shall be stored on blocking off ground, with ends wrapped or capped protect threads or untreated conduit ends. All fittings shall be stored in closed cartons until ready for installation. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAY MATERIALS 2.1.1 GENERAL. 1. UL approved for electrical raceway use. 2. Zinc die -cast or set screw fittings not permitted. 2.2 RIGID STEEL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS 2.2.1 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT shall be hot dip galvanized, metalized or sheradized process, steel conduit, standard pipe sizes and threaded joints; as manufactured by Clifton, Jones Laughlin (General Electric), National, Pittsburgh- Standard, Republic, Rome Cable, Triangle, Walker, or Youngstown. 2.2.2 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT FITTINGS shall be threaded, galvanized, malleable iron as manufactured by Gedney, Killar, Pyle- National, Thomas & Betts, 0.Z. Co., or Crouse - Hinds. 2.2.3 COATING MATERIAL shall be Koppers #33 Bitumastic. See Execution for applicable requirement. 2.3 POWER DUCT AND FITTINGS 2.3.1 DUCT: Type "EB" rigid conduit rated for 90 degrees C cable, manufactured from specially formulated PVC compounds for electrical use and UL approved for encasement in concrete. 2.3.2 FITTINGS FOR PVC PLASTIC CONDUIT: Socker type - slip fitting for solvent welded joints. Manufactured from specially formulated PVC compounds for electrical use by the same manufacturer of the conduit and UL approved for use with Type "EB" conduit. Fittings constructed of other material and by another manufacturer shall not be used except by specific approval of the Owner. 2.3.3 SOLVENT CEMENT FOR PVC FITTINGS AND DUCT: Shall be from the same manufacturer as the duct and fittings, and recommended for use by that manufacturer. 73 -90- 133 -; 16402 -2 2.3.4 MANUFACTURER: Shall be Carlon Type "EB." PVC conduit materials from Western Plastics, Certainteed, Bantex or other approved manufacturers may be submitted for approval if equal in every respect to Carlon Type "EB." 2.4 DUCT SPACERS 2.4.1 SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR THE DUCT SIZE USED. Constructions of from molded plastic into base and intermediate units which interlock both horizontally and vertically. Use of spacers is mandatory where applicable. 2.5 GROUNDING 2.5.1 GENERAL: Provide a complete ground system for the transformer distribution system. 2.5.2 PRODUCTS: 1. Grounds: Provide 3/4" x 8' copper clad ground rods. 2. Ground Cable: Provide #1 /0 Class B stranded, tin plated, bare copper. 3. Connections - Welded: Provide thermit welded connection for all cable to cable to ground rod connections. Provide new molds for this job as required. Molds which have been used to their life span shall be discarded and new molds provided. Materials shall be Cadweld by Erico Products, Inc. or other approved. 4. Connections - crimp type Bolted: Provide heavy duty crimp type solid plated copper bolted lugs for miscellaneous connection to metal parts of the manhole and system, except as noted above. Materials shall be Thomas & Betts, Burndy, or other approved. 5. Clamps and Bolts: Provide brass, or bronze or stainless steel or nylon clamps for intermediate clamps for the ground wire around manhole. Provide brass or bronze or stainless steel bolts for the clamps. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION 3.1.1 ALL EQUIPMENT AND UNDERGROUND UTILITIES shall remain operable during all phases of this work except as fully approved by the Owner. Only during cutover shall the existing equipment be de- energized. All services are to be considered critical until the Owner gives full approval for the interruption. Any drawing and information included with the Contract documents reflects information available. It is the contractor's responsibility to examine the site and determine the location and problems he will encounter with existing conditions. The full costs of repair to existing and new equipment and utilities caused by damage, unauthorized interruption, carelessness, disrespect for existing conditions, shall be born by this Contractor. Repair and resumption of service shall be prompt, complete and to the satisfaction of the Owner and at the Owner's direction. 3.2 RACEWAYS AND DUCT BANK 3.2.1 GENERAL. 1. All conduits shall be protected against damage and entrance of water or foreign material during construction. 2. Exposed ends of all conduits shall be closed with plastic plugs, during and after construction (tape is not acceptable). . 73- 90- 133 -0 16402 -3 3.3 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT 3.3.1 BENDS shall be minimum of 42" long sweep. 3.3.2 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT shall end in plated steel insulated throat grounding type bushings, in the manhole and in the building. 3.3.3 ALL DIRECT BURIED (NOT CONCRETE ENCASED) RIGID STEEL CONDUIT shall be PVC coated. 3.4 NON - METALLIC CONDUIT DUCTS 3.4.1 45 DEGREE AND 90 DEGREE BENDS AND CONDUITS run under buildings to 5 ft. beyond building lines shall be rigid steel conduit with appropriate adapters to non - metallic conduit. Conduits run under areas specifically used and marked as a road shall be rigid metal conduit with appropriate adapters to non - metallic conduit. 3.4.2 SWEEPS shall be made in the field with proper tools for concentricity with other conduits. Sweeps shall be very long radius sweeps. If factory sweeps are used, they shall be of the greatest radius, and concentric with other conduits. 3.5 CONDUITS shall be joined in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Both units of a joint shall be coated with solvent cement and turned for maximum bond. 3.5.1 CONDUITS shall end in manholes in end bells for the same material as the conduit. The end bells shall be flush with the inside face of the manhole. 3.6 DUCT BANK 3.6.1 GENERAL. The duct bank shall be installed without incidental horizontal and vertical deviations. All changes in elevation and direction shown or implied on the drawings or deemed necessary due to site conditions shall be gradually accomplished by very, long sweeps. All main line ducts shall slope toward the manhole insofar as is possible. 3.6.2 TRENCH PREPARATION. The bottom of the trench shall be graded consistent with the expected profile of the duct bank. The bottom of the trench shall be cleared of all displaced earth, rocks, clods, and debris. 3.6.3 BEDDING. Provide a consistent three (3) inch bed of moist sand (not wet). Any other material besides sand will be rejected. Compact material and flatten bottom with weighted roller or other acceptable means. 3.6.4 FORMS. Provide forms both sides of duct bank. Forms shall allow for full and consistent concrete cover on all sides of the ducts. See Section 03100 for Formwork. 3.6.5 DUCTS, SPACERS AND BINDING. Ducts shall be supported on interlocking spacers. After assembly of the duct bank, provide for binding the duct bank into a composite unit with metal shipping tape. 3.6.6 WELDED WIRE MESH. Provide welded wire mesh where shown on the drawings. Bond each section together with 2 crimp type grounding connectors; crimp two wires per intersection. 3.6.7 REINFORCING. Provide reinforcing bars where shown on the drawings. All bars shall be "keyed in" to the outside wall of the manhole. Provide a shop drawing explaining the method chosen. 3.6.8 CONCRETE. Provide 3000 PSI concrete to encase duct bank. Color concrete consistently "red" prior to pouring, for HV duct bank. 73- 90 -133- as 16402 -4 3.6.9 CLEANING AND PROVING OF DUCTS AND CONDUITS. Prior to backfill every conduit shall be cleaned and the bore proved. A round mandrel and stiff bristled brush shall be pulled through each conduit. 1. The mandrel shall exactly fit the bore. Distorted bores shall be cause for mandatory replacement of that section of duct bank. 2. Provide plugs in every duct after cleaning. 3.6.10 PULL STRING. Provide a pull string in every conduit and duct. 3.6.11 DUCT BANK MARKING ON PAVED AREAS. A stripe of two coats of Orange Safety (FSC- 12246) shall be painted on outside paving to designate where electrical conduits are buried or otherwise concealed. The legend HIGH VOLTAGE shall be stenciled in Gloss Black (FSC- 17038) at intervals not exceeding 50 feet. Where duct banks are to be abandoned in place the orange stripe shall be painted neatly over with two coats of grey paint after proper preparation. 3.7 EOUIPMENT 3.7.1 TRANSFORMER shall be mounted on a concrete pad with structural steel sills grout into and set flush with the concrete pad. Equipmetn shall be bolted to the sills. 3.7.2 INSTALL equipment level and plumb at location shown on drawings. 3.7.3 NOTIFY the architect - engineers, in writing, when the equipment is ready for testing. 3.8 GROUNDING 3.8.1 GENERAL. A complete grounding system shall be provided as specified herein, shown on the drawings and as required. Tin plated cable shall be used throughout. 3.8.2 METAL PARTS. All metal parts of the duct bank, manholes and equipment shall be grounded by an approved method. 3.8.3 CAST WELDED CONNECTIONS. Welds with voids and run -outs in this kind of connection shall be replaced. Worn out molds shall be replaced. Improper molds and welds will be rejected and shall be replaced. Methods shall be exactly as recommended by the connection manufacturer. 3.8.4 MANHOLE GROUNDING. The duct bank ground conductor shall be brought into the manhole from all directions and connected by weld to the manhole loop conductor, then attached to the ground rod. Ground rod shall protrude 3 inches into manhole. 3.9 SIGNS 3.9.1 PROVIDE ONE (1) SIGN AT EACH CONNECTION ARRAY, i.e., two (2) per manhole. signs shall be 4" x 8" minimum, 1/8" laminated engraved plastic, minimum 3/4" white letters on red background. Logo: "Danger - Do Not Break or Make Connections While Energized." Attach with brass screws. END OF SECTION 73- 90- 1331A 16402 -5 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 GROUNDING shall comply with NEC Articles 250 and state and local codes. Grounding electrodes and bonding equipment shall comply with NEMA Standards, and shall be UL listed. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 2.1.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS shall be insulated except as otherwise noted. Insulation type shall be identical with the circuit conductors serving the load except as otherwise noted. Insulation shall be colored green. 2.2 GROUND ELECTRODES 2.2.1 GROUND ELECTRODES shall be copper -clad steel, 3/4 -inch diameter, and a minimum of 10 feet long. 2.3 GROUNDING CLAMPS 2.3.1 GROUNDING CLAMPS shall be Thomas and Betts 390 *BU for connection to copper water pipes and Thomas and Betts 3846 for connection to grounding electrodes except where exothermic welding is specified. ( *Contractor to add number as required for pipe size). 2.4 GROUNDING LUGS 2.4.1 GROUND LUGS shall be Ilsco SLR35 or similar. 2.5 EOUIPMENT GROUNDING BUS BAR 2.5.1 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING Bus Bar shall be copper. Size and location to be as shown on drawings. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM GROUNDING conductar 73- 90- 133 -4 SECTION 16450 GROUNDING Section 03300, Ge0e03 0404 1; : Section 16110 Section 16120 Section 16160 = Sect n < ;64'.02 Section '16450 Section x6612: section - .: 16994 Scation 1699'1 e0tx9dr3 conduc to t he ne0*' aa mei a3, f rame af the main seriiice eniiince eQtrode conductors: and Equipment:; Gron ;e1 G xode totherounded - raver s 16450 -1 April 14` cA 133 16450 -2 `. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING 3.2.1 BOND the equipment grounding bus in the service equipment to the grounding electrode conductor. 3.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 3.3.1 INSTALL equipment grounding conductors on circuits as shown on the Drawings. Run equipment grounding conductors in the same raceway as the circuit conductors serving each load. 3.3.2 INSTALL equipment grounding conductors on transformers, motor starters, disconnect switches, and other noncurrent carrying parts according to NEC. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Wires and Cables Section 16120 a ortatrtee' :::<;::: >:: >::: ><::.;.:::::;: >: Section ;:16255 rounding g ...... Section 164517 1.2 WORK BY OTHERS 1.2.1 MOUNTING BRACKETS for wall- or column- mounted transformers shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. 1.3 REOUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.3.1 TRANSFORMERS shall comply with NEMA Standards, and shall be UL listed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT shop drawings to the Architect - Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and Genera Requirements. Shop drawings shall include the following: Detail of Mounting Assembly for wall- mounted transformers Mounting Arrangements Number and Ratio of Taps Primary and Secondary Voltage and Phase 1.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.5.1 TRANSFORMERS shall be as manufactured by the following: General Electric Co. Cquarc D. Co. I.T.E 1actriaa1 P eCa x: era 2.0 PRODUCTS ane OrmO 6epper— aee�l' 73-90-133-0 SECTION 16460 TRANSFORMERS (SMALL DRY TYPE1 .-Inc 2.1 TRANSFORMERS 2.1.1 DISTRIBUTION DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS shall be as follows: se bore a 4.0 . degree Cen Amb i en _. :: ,. irou;gh 7:5 kva Manufacturer : - i nstal er- tranoforme-r-s thro 75 kva 16460 -1 Universal Tap Arrangement with two full capacity taps, 2- 1 /2percent above_ normal voltage and two full capacity taps, 24:1/2 perce4 be�bt� ttt� tl#ei. �Q a •f 1 2 p r c n t bC .. .. ......... ....x. Noise Ratings per NEMA Standard Apr ..3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 INSTALL transformers as shown on the Drawings. mounted transformers to support mounting brackets. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ern XlfJr 82"Y'. 'its' '' w atee� Goner aocwaya Wirc and Cable() Outlet Bonao Cupporting Dcvicco 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES shall be UL listed. 1.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.3.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES shall be as Fixture Schedule. 1.3.2 LAMPS shall be manufactured by General Electric, Lamp Division, Sylvania, Westinghouse, or Phillips, except that metal halide lamps shall be Sylvania Super Metal -Arc. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.1.1 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES shall be prewired. Prime and a >it'fxt urea on 2.1.2 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES shall be prewired. Totally enclose metal halide fixtures. 2.2 BALLASTS 2.2.1 BALLASTS FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS shall be Class P, rapid start, high power factor, series type, rapid start; UL and CBM Labeled, and certified and meet UL specification regarding light output, reliable starting, radio interference and dielectric rating and National Electric Code requirements. leg-type. "A" pound rating for 430 MA. 2.2.3 BALLASTS FOR HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS shall be constant wattage, high power factor, and shall be fused where noted. 73- 90- 133 -16 n fit iot SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 5 watt, 16500 -1 ect ion 016°° S. ectio n' 01 Section. : al Section 03300, General net Section <0721► _. 6eCEion'16110 Ccotion 16120 Ccotion 16131 Ccction 16100 shown on the Drawings, and Lighting : ..:.:..:..........::..... C< 17XS CHA R GE LA shall.' be > as ;.s chedule d spa ' a uiahin .. va t re:;: amass rnotedtherwishe s` 3.0 EXECUTION TO xpos TINCi :!XX.TU IS en extingu e4 ng _`oa`_ure unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 3.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES 3.1.1 INSTALL lighting fixtures as shown on the drawings for a complete 277/480 and 120 volt lighting system. Install all outlets as shown on the drawings and connect all branch circuits back to respective panels, adhering to circuiting as called for on the drawings and indexed on the panels. 3.1.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES shall be fully lamped. {1# t afGt al.t be ;approves . tar nazazcious van3 zed s t`eel. :� STALLED I N SUSPENDED CEILINGS shall. cop) each recessed .fluorescent fastened directly to the:; bui. df ng e u . azaxclaus l ac.at oils shal l b ; ra .`.: cam wath SEC Section: END OF SECTION hazardous ] Oc at io_,. assifcation of usage ; 10 GENERAL SECTION 16612 GENERATOR SYSTEM 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Testing Section 16994 1.2 WORK BY OTHERS 1.2.1 COOLING /COMBUSTION AIR LOUVERS, louver controls and radiator - to- louver ductwork will be provided by the General Contractor. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM 1.3.1 GENERATOR SYSTEM shall be diesel fueled, and shall include an engine - mounted radiator, with flexible stainless steel piping connectors at the engine and radiator, exhaust piping, exhaust silencer, wall thimble, batteries, spring type vibration isolators, water jacket heater, engine - mounted control panel, automatic transfer switch, 28 gallon in -skid base fuel tank and all accessories for a complete unit and system. 1.3.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH shall be mechanically held, electrically operated, and shall include the following features .a. Upon Power Outage, automatically start the engine and, when the alternator output voltage and frequency is proper, initiate the transfer and connect the load to the ge nera t or s s te m. Q:e eratoreg onse C hile > <ahat1. 0 .:.:.....:. .b. Upon Return of Normal Power, transfer the load, after an adjustable delay of 30 seconds to 30 minutes, to the normal source and, after a ten - minute cool -down period, stop the generator system and reset the controls. .c. Prevent Momentary Power Outage from causing an immediate transfer to standby power with a time delay device, adjustable from 0.1 second to 15 seconds. .d. An Automatic Engine Exerciser with provisions for selecting exercise time, day of week, and load or no -load operation .e. Auxiliary Contacts for building automation system supervision. 1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF THE REGULATORY AGENCIES 1.4.1 GENERATOR SYSTEM shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory. 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.5.1 SUBMIT shop drawings to the Architect- Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Shop drawings shall include the following: I.T.L. Certification Statement Engine Specifications Alternator Specifications Automatic Transfer Switch Exhaust Silencer 73- 90- 133 -1b 16612 -1 "W. 20 PRODUCTS Vibration Isolators Accessories 1.6 WARRANTY 1.6.1 FURNISH generator system with a two -year warranty for labor and materials and a five -year or 1,500 -hour warranty for materials. 1.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS /SUPPLIERS 1.7.1 GENERATOR SYSTEMS shall be manufactured by the following: F.G. Wilson, Energy Dynamics /Signal Equipment Caterpillar /N.C. Machinery Onan Electric Power Systems /Cumming Northwest No other suppliers will be acceptable. 2.1 GENERATOR SYSTEMS 2.1.1 ENGINE shall be of the manufacturer's standard design, and shall include the following features: High Coolant Temperature Sensor Low Coolant Temperature Sensor Low Oil Pressure Sensor Overcrank Sensor Overspeed Sensor Battery Charging Alternator Coolant Jacket Heater Welded Steel Base with vibration isolators 2.1.2 ALTERNATOR shall be of the manufacturer's standard design, 4 pole, revolving field, reconnectable, and shall have manually reset overload protection. 2.1.3 CONTROL PANEL shall be of the manufacturer's standard design, and shall include the following features: High Coolant Temperature Pre -Alarm /Alarm Shut -down Low Coolant Temperature Alarm Low Oil Pressure Pre -Alarm /Alarm Shut -down Overcrank Alarm Lockout Overspeed Alarm Shut -down Low Coolant Level Alarm /Alarm Shut -down Oil Pressure Gauge Coolant Temperature Gauge Battery Charge Rate Ammeter Running Time Meter AC Voltmeter with phase selector switch AC Ammeter with phase selector switch Voltage Adjust Rheostat Frequency Indicator Run - Stop - Remote Selector Switch Panel Lights Low Fuel Alarm 2.1.4 All alarms to be provided with an alarm silence switch, spring loaded type with reset and timer. Alarm indicators to remain activated until condition is corrected. 2.1.5 VOLTAGE REGULATOR shall be the magnetic amplifier type. Commutator, commutator brushes, or revolving solid state sensors will NOT be acceptable. 73-90-13310 16612 -2 1#pxi:1 14 > ►:<:9< 133 - 46 2.1.6 TRANSFER CONTROL shall be of the manufacturer's standard design, and shall include the following features: Rated 60 ampere, 480 volt, 3 Pole, 4 wire with integral neutral bus and system grounding lugs and integral float -type SCR battery charger 2.1.7 ACCESSORIES FOR GENERATOR SYSTEMS shall include the following: In -base mounted 28 gallon fuel tank and associated fuel lines Fuel level sensor with (1) local and (1) remote /outdoor readout Batteries with cables and mounting assembly Automatic battery charger Water Jacket Heater, 1.0 kw, 120 volt, 1 phase 2.2 RATINGS 2.2.1 RATE GENERATOR SYSTEM as follows: Continuous Standby Rating at 25 kw, 31.3 kva Voltage 277/480 volts Phase 3 phase Circuit 4 wire Frequency 60 Hertz at 1,800 rpm 30 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERATOR SYSTEM 3.1.1 INSTALL A COMPLETE GENERATOR SYSTEM as shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section. Cooling and exhaust systems shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.1.2 NOTIFY the Architect- Engineer, in writing, when the generator system is ready for testing. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL Rauland -Borg Corp. 2.0 PRODUCTS 73- 90- 133 - 0 SECTION 16770 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Raceways Section 16110 Wires and Cables Section 16120 Outlet Boxes Section 16134 Supporting Devices Section 16190 Testing Section 16994 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.2.1 PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT shall be UL listed. System installation shall comply with NEC Article 300. 1.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1.3.1 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM components shall be manufactured by the following: Soundolier JBL Atlas -Sound 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 SUBMIT shop drawings to the Architect - Engineer in accord with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Shop Drawings shall include the following: Product Data System Block Diagram 1.4.2 OPERATING MANUALS. At the conclusion of the Work, submit to the Owner operating instruction manuals, wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's descriptive literature for all components. 2.1 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 2.1.1 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM is existing. Contractor shall extend system into warehouse addition. All components shall match existing. Fully integrate new speakers into existing system as required. 2.1.2 ALL SPEAKER LINES must be twisted pair shielded cable installed in ferrous conduit. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 3.1.1 SECURING AND SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT. All loudspeakers shall be firmly held in place. Fastenings and supports shall be adequate to support their loads. 3.1.2 GROUNDING, SHIELDING, and ISOLATION OF WIRING: 1. Take the Necessary Precautions to prevent and guard against electromagnetic and electrostatic hum, and to install the equipment to provide reasonable safety for the operator. 2. Run lines in separate conduits for loudspeaker circuits (above +30dbm). Conduit shall not be routed within 3 feet of power 16770 -1 Al conduits. 3. Ground Loudspeaker Shields at the power amplifier inputs or console outputs only and terminate at the "floating" end with "wedge -on" collars or with plastic tape. Preserve continuity of shields at connecting points. Connect audio grounds in the equipment racks to a common point on the rack; ground the racks to a copper stake or similar earth connection. Ground racks in the same room to a single point. 3.1.3 WORKMANSHIP: The installation of all work shall be neat. Boxes equipment, etc., shall be plumb and square. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. Make joints and connections with rosin -core solder or with mechanical connectors approved by the'Architect- Engineer. Execute wiring in strict adherence to standard broadcast practices. 3.1.4 CONTRACTOR'S SUPERVISION AND COORDINATION. Cooperate with other trades in order to achieve well- coordinated progress and satisfactory final results. 3.1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING. After supplying diagrams and completing the initial tests and adjustments specified, notify that Architect - Engineer, in writing, that the installation fulfills this Specification, and is complete and ready for inspection by representatives of the Architect - Engineer and the Owner. END OF SECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Control piquipmcnt and ... fSatcrialo Raceways q' s'connec Det on S ystem: irco and —C a Motor Ctartcro Panclboardo Fuoco SECTION 16900 MOTORS AND CONTROLS 73 -90- 133 -16 16900 -1 section : : ;:15.9:1:0: action 15920: s ect ian': 15930, section 15710; Section 16110 Seon«'16120 .... ............ .. ..... ............................... 3e'ction' `11:6:155 ... ............................... act i on; %1::6:1: eation 16170 Secton:<J618:1 Section '1672:1 Ccction 16120 Section 16155 Ccction 16160 T. ant ca] €:Menu m7 MechanicaX #a nua, Me Tian iaaniu al' Hcohz nio 8cotion 16181 a nuzI 1.2 WORK FURNISHED, INSTALLED AND CONNECTED UNDER DIVISION 15 1.2.1 HVAC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, CONDUIT, A ? ; T1t3 >i uz,n s'ah .. _ _ _ _ _ - _ ohall be furniblie ; insta connected complete by the Mechanical Contractor. 1.3 WORK FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNDER DIVISION 15 1.3.1 HVAC EQUIPMENT, TEMPERATURE CONTROL EQUIPMENT, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, MOTORS, HEATERS, AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES specified in Division 15 shall be set in place by the Mechanical Contractor, including separately packaged motors and electrical materials required for the proper operation of the equipment. 1.3.2 CONTROL WIRING installed in air plenums, regardless of voltage, shall be installed in conduit. Materials and installation shall be as specified in Division 16, Sections 16110 and 16120. 1.4 WORK FURNISHED UNDER DIVISION 15 BUT CONNECTED UNDER DIVISION 16 1.4.1 POWER SOURCE WIRING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTION for equipment furnished in Division 15 shall be furnished, installed, and connected by the Electrical Contractor for those items shown and /or scheduled in the Electrical Connection Schedule. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the extent of work covered in each Division prior to bidding. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS 1.5.1 COMPLETE COMPOSITE ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS for Division 15 equipment, including power requirements and temperature control wiring, shall be prepared by the Control Subcontractor, and shall be included with the specific shop drawing submittals. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.6.1 WHEN ELECTRICAL LOADS are substituted by the Mechanical Contractor which differ in size and /or number other than those specified, the Contractor making the substitution shall submit complete power and control wiring diagrams showing the proposed modifications to the electrical system, and shall bear all additional electrical costs, such as additional or larger overcurrent devices, disconnect switches, power wiring, control wiring, electric service modifications, etc. Substituted loads, quantities, or equipment requiring additional electrical work, other than that shown on the Drawings, shall not be installed or connected without 73 -90- 133 -: the approval of the Architect - Engineer. Proper documentation of electrical design modifications and extra costs shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor. Equipment installed without such prior documented approval shall be removed by the Mechanical Contractor, and specified items shall be installed at no additional cost. 20 PRODUCTS ... .. cad `on• `::..... •;a`: • >:: >:::M . ti ::: .s 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS 2.2.1 MOTOR STARTERS shall be as specified in Division 16, Section 16155. Starters furnished under Division 15 shall be furnished with a suitable number of auxiliary contacts for specified control interlocks. Starters furnished under Division 16 shall have a minimum of one normally -open and one normally - closed auxiliary contact for control interlocks. Starters shal'l':'have .nd..vidua c ontrol 7ntrcil Ctsrtcro furnichcd under Diviaion 15 siici I6 Starters shall be NEMA size 1 minimum. 2.2.1.1 Packaged, Factory -wired Equipment containing motor starters shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor. 2.2.1.2 Two -speed Motor Starters, remote mounted, shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor for equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall set and power connect. connected by the Elec 30 EXECUTION ar r:•terg and:Manua � l ::Motor .::Sw tQ:�l ,.;. >: » i ,•;' ' aw :•: ; Contractor as shown on END OF SECTION Ins tl a, anu power the Drawings. 3.1. MOTORS AND CONTROLS 3.1.1 EXECUTION OF WORK shall be as specified in the appropriate Mechanical and Electrical Sections of these Specifications. 1.0 GENERAL Geera ro3cct 0:loocou Ianclboarda Crounding Motor Control Center 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1,.2.1 SUBMIT results of testing for each system prior to Substantial Completion. 2.0 EXECUTION 2.1 TESTING 2.1.1 TEST each system. Test results shall comply with specified standards and the manufacturer's published standards. Adjust and retest if the system does not meet the prescribed standard. 2.1.2 TEST AND BALANCE PANELBOARDS as follows: ee Insulating Breakdown Voltage prior to ether s Ap plied, : the ;load on each Phase un minimum. 2.1.3 TEST SWITCHBOARDS as follows: I nsulating Breakdown. Voltage prior to the SWItrhb w ith All Load Applied; ..� _._ a ::.::::::.. ::::•:::.:: ::: - 4"-ael ::,:<:.: : :: .:::: :.;: ::.. : :.::. .::.. L oa ds 1ppl ied, balance ; the load on each ph ase an ti, he neutr u re £ minimum Me asure;;: th P o w er Factor of' 'overall electrical sy stem. 2.1.5 TEST 1. 2. 3. rie ra] ..`e 73- 90- 133 -0 SECTION 16994 TESTING DERGROUND ELECTRICAL: SERVICE as follows Insulation Breakdown Voltage prior to energizin service entranc c onductors. GROUNDING as follows: Test the Continuity of the System Ground prior to energizing the service entrance equipment. Resistance between the neutral and system grounds shall not exceed 5 ohms. Test the Continuity of the Equipment Grounds prior to the service entrance equipment. Resistance >betw ee.n ground and pane1boards., motor frames, and other equipment g shall not exceed 5 ohms. Resietance.::<::betwesn a*d4o 8gi4.pme;n and earth ground shall' not exceed 2 ohms,. Test "'the T'r'ip Level of Ground Fault Interrupting Devices. Leakage current trip levels shall not exceed 5 milliamperes on branch circuit breakers. 16994 -1 eCtion: x014);0 eo:tion ?::0'.170:0 ct on 6O ct'io ':'<> Section 01700 Ecction 16160 Scotian 16450 Section 16920A to the Architect- Engineer energizing mom, Inas ------ *** teat Trip Level on Ccrvioc Entrance° Cround Fault (To be completed by the Contractor and returned to the Architect-Engineer prior to Substantial Completion) sv*r - **** woos !IWTO" WAMSYS ROUND, 44 1 Pam]. Pano 1 1, herein * ** WggnuggmaUximgaMa Nmn TECT RESULT& 73790-133-0 16994-2 0/ /A FLA 0/ FLA Bua ereakdown -.4.4•44 C:iritUtt o n: •,(4 ncie r ............. 004 ::- - 10.7 - all f u ncto n e g Au q anfer 4. unt Uat e a l ow f ue ] . co low cool.ant condttiQn #00#000004;t*040:/:044144X4;01#41;44L..„:„....,#0,—Ag* ! t2:00NDEPOROONti :Etir 0/ /A FLA 0/ /B FLA 0/ /C rLA ........... Resistance from Service Neutral to Ground Grid Pigtail ohms Resistance from Service Neutral to Building Steel ohms Trip Level of Branch Ground Fault Interrupters milliamperes - 133 - END OF SECTION 16994 - el; Stinitiart bar,ed, 19t18U, nifOrrit _Building Code (UBC),.19813 Uniform Mechanical Code t,(UMC), 98f3 Uniform Fire Code (UFC); and National Fire Codes (NFPA). All references are to UBC unless . , Construction:" - Type 11-N ' ",,,Eletkeeefleawjeeth„ ents [Tetble De BERM 4975 RE v. 7/63 • ', 2 RATED AREA SEPARATION WALL USE CLASSIFICATION H-2 • 'USE'CLASSIFICATiON 1+:7 • USE CLASSIFICATION H-3 Non-cenlbustible Tilt-up concrete panels Non-combustible Tilt-up concrete panels ermanent walls ';Non-combustible • Tilt-up concrete panels & concrete masonry units 'roof Noe:combUstible Steel bar joist & metal deck 4 • . with perlite and roof insulation rea Separation walls 2 rated Tilt-up concrete panels, 8" thick A.' Area Separation Walls divide Phase III addition into 9 separate areas, each of which , • may be considered a separate building [Sec. 505.(e)]. Area separation walls may terminate at non-combustible roof [Seca 505.(e) 3., Exception 34. ' Openings in 2- hour Area Separation Wall shall be protected by 1-1/2 hour rated assembly. (Sec. '•505.(e)1.1 , ' " ' * late: Information as to type of Materials to be used in each area has been provided by , oeing Engineering and Construction. (For areas 1-8, see previous project.) - - Area 9, Area 10, Area 11: These areas will be used for the storage of materials in •• normally Closed containers, that 'may`inciude flammable liquids. , • ' 143 . • [Sec. 901.(a), Dv. 3, 3.] [Sec. 3320] [Sec. 901(d) (UFC Sec. 79.203.(a)) (UFC Sec. 80.301.(I)] [UFC Sec. 80.301.(m)] [NFPA 497A, Chap: 2] ,[Table No. 5 [Sec: 901.(d) 2.] Use dassircatiori = Two exits are required , - Smoke" and heat venting is required Automatic sprinkler , system is required , e, Spill Control is required Ventilation Rate = 1 CFM/SF Classification Type 1, Division 2 BasiO' Allowable Area (Type H-N construction) Special Area Limitation . Actual Area: - Area 9 4:74,,WWW4 E. Area 17: This area will be used to house the electrical generator. It will contain' no •- . 1r hazardous "Materials above exempt amounts. Use classification ei B-2 [Sec 701] • _ Basic Allowable Area (Type 11-N construction) 12,000 SF " , 4 , Actual Area Area 10 449 SF 4. Fire Oictection , The ereire Phase III structure shall be in accordance with NFPA, Chapter 13. There then be a dry system in the outside covered area and a wet system in all other , areas. The sPrinkler system shall' be designed to the following requirements: Area 9, Area 10,'Area 11-eAree 14, Area 15, Area 16 Extra Hazard • Area 4A, Area '12 & 12A, Area 13, Area 17 Ordinary Hazard Outside covered area Ordinate/ Hazard . Spa Protedlon All floors in storage areas in the Phase structure shall be noncombustible, liquid • • • construction. [Sec 902.(b)] All floors shall be provided with a 4" high liquid-tight raised sill, which may be omitted at door openings if an open-grate trench connected to the , 'room drainage system is installed. [Sec 902.(c)] "Drains in the storage areas shall be directed to a secondary containment system. The secondary containment system shall be designed to retain the spill from the largest single container plus the design flow rate of the sprinkler' system for 20 minutes. [Sec 902.(e)] All floors in the storage areas are concrete. :Storage areaa that require spill containment are surrounded by 4" high curbs and open trench grates at door openings. The floors in these areas slope to trend') drains which flow into lined concrete pits, These pits are sized as indicated below. The required capacity in gallons is determined by the indicated flow rate x area x 20 minutes + 55 gallons. The required volume of containment is based on required capacity / 7.48 gallons per cubic foot. , Area '12 412A, Area 13, Area 4 & 4A: _These areas will ba ysed'for the storage of Materials in normally ofes ed contalners, e , , other ners , that m ay Includ core °sive' to )dc InateriS18 that may constitute a health hazard. Use classification :2 H-7 Spill Control is required Ventilation Rate et '1 CFM/SF Autornetic sprinkler system .is required Hazard Classification Uncleselned Basic Allowable Arse (Type'll-N construction) '12000 SF Actual Area: Area 12 & 12A 2,552 SF Area 13 2,074 SF Area 4 & 4A 3,9248F C. Area 14, Area 15: These areas will be used for to dispense materialt; in nophally that closed containers, at May Include corrosive, toxic, or other Materials that may. constitute; a health' hazard Use classificatien at 142 (Sec, 901.(a), Div. 2, 5.] Aubornadc sprinkler system is required „[UFC Sec. 79.804. 1.] E.)cplcsalon venting Is *liked [UFC'Sec. 79.804. 54 Spill Control Is required (UFC Sec. 80.30141)] Ventilation Rate Ng° 1 CFM/SF • (UFC See. 60.301 .(m)] Hazard ClaseifiCatiOn TYPS I, DIVIslOrl 1 [NFPA 497A Chap. 2] Basic Alit:wools Area (Type II-N construction) 3,700 SF[Table No. 5-C] Actual Area: - Area 14 298 SF • Area 15 385 SF D. Area 18: This area will beeusedfOr the stbrage of compressed gases In closed ConteliWS, Use ciassification H.7 Vinthation Rate gig 1 CF1VI/SF Automatic sprinkler system Is required , Explosion ventfrig is required Spill Control itrngi required 'Hazard ClassificatiOn..e Type•I,Iiivision`2 Basic Alloi,vable" Area ';(type 11-N "coiestruction) ACtUal Area: Area IS aegmeee Areal fiew 7 RoqcLg Area 9 994 SF 0.3 GPM 6,019 gal. Area 10 964 SF 0.3 GPM 5,839 gal. Area 11 964 SF 0.3 GPM 5,839 gal. Area 12 2,136 SF 0.2 GPM **9,304 gal Area 13 2,074 SF 02 GPM 8,296 gal. Area 4A 2,074 SF 0.2 GPM 8,296 gal. Area 14 351 SF 0.3 GPM **2,473 gal. Area 15 25.9 SF 0.3 GPM **2,137 gal. Area 16 Spill control is not required in this area. See *" Capacity th this area frwludes a portion of the flow of Area 1 2A, Drelnage Control All drainage from the secondary containment in this building is directed to the existing - loading truck well. This weil has a capacity of 1605 cu, ft. or 12,000 gallons. There is no drainage from this tertiary containment well. The building drainage system is ,not connected to any sewer or storm drainage lines. 4 HarardOUS Material Vapbt Characteristics . Ths Materiels stored in this building emit heavier than air vapors, except the compressed gasses stored in Area 16 which will generally be lighter than air. DATE APPROVED IE I I li I 11111 16 7115 INCH (Sec. (a), Div. 71 IUFQ Sec. 80.301.(m)] [UFC Sec. 80.301.(p)] ° (UFC Sec. 80.303.(a) 4.) (UFC Sac. 80.303.(a) 5.] _ (NFPA 497A, Chap. 2 12,000 SF [Table No. 5-C] 372 SF • fleg:d. vel. Aelekyeal 804 cu.ft. 843 cede 780 cu.ft. • 843 cu.ft. 780 cu.ft. 843 cu.ft. 1,244 cu.ft. 1300 cu.ft. 1,110 cu.ft. 1300 wit. 1,110 cu.ft. 1300 cu.ft. 331' cu.ft. 338 cu.ft. 285 cu.ft. 288 3D. above. based on floor slope direction. • ,01 [Sec. 901:(a)," Div, 7] [UFC Sec. 80.4014)1 (UFO Sec. 80.301: rfl)1 (UFC $00, 80.801.(p)) [NFPA 497A, Chap.'2] (Table No. 5-C] OC 8Z L3 OZ Z 4 7Z CZ ZZ OZ 8 fittlffilkiltht10111111110111 1 11 I . 1 11 Itil„ j (111_1111111111 kt." , ,eee'rgesi'egel'iWer e eee. .eee,e•eeeeeeeee,eee eee.,,e.e.ce-eleee_efeeee,...e; 127 CHEMICAL 61 GAS CYLINDER STORAGE GAS oYi..1NISER' STORAGE GAS CYLINDER FLAMMABLE tiolito • ST(AG CHEMICAL 6tOIRAG EM CHICAL STORAGE 127C co CO CONC CONC C O M O CONIC coke CEM BD HDR 1CONC CEM BD cciNc CONC CONC CONC PNT I CONC • PNT CONC " PNT CONC Oka CONC PNT ce)ikie PNT CONC EXP 1 PNT PNT 1 •EXP 1 PAT 1.4 E & 2. CONC CEM BD 1;n6 I 66igo CIRCULATION SPACE 1 CONC big150 t PROVIDE STEEL PROTECTION RAILS AT WALLS WI71-1 CEMENT BOARD FACING. SEE OETAIL •t/A-14. H CMU PARTITIONS WITHIN ROOM SHALL BE PAINTED, ALL SIDES AND TOP. • } 1 AWERKDA.M1 HDWR HARDWARE HGHT HEIGHT HM HOLLOW METAL MAIL • MATERIAL MFR BY MANUFACTURER (MIN) MINUTES AUBURN, WA. 98002 0 EVERETT, WA. 98201 0 KENT, WA. 98031 0 PORTLAND, OR 97220 (73 RENTON, WA. 98055 0 SEATTLE, WA. 98124 IMAM 4 5 6 7 8 9 ef NOTE: if the microfilmed document is less clear than this notice, it is due to the quality of the original document. t 91 LI. 9l th Vi et 81 pi, 6 8 , iffilliniffillf.111,111111 111111111111111111111111161111 I irC0 F 7FiNisti CONC CONCRETE CMU • CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CEM BD CEMENT BOARD • . EAST EXP • EXPOSED STRUCTURE MM MISCELLANEOUS METAL NO _ NUMBER OPNG OPENING ROLL ROLLING OVERHEAD DOOR THICK THICKNESS - • NONE OR NOT REQUIRED APPROVED ACCEPTABILITY THIS DESIGN AND/OR SPECIFICATION IS APPROVED F' 11111:111 111111P- 144UE etRIMY 12 z 0 HDR HARDENER MAIL MATERIAL N NORTH PNT PAINT 8 SOUTH W WEST NONE OR NOT REQUIRED 1. g W ONLY. 2. SUBTITLE TITLE ilg,14141, -1-'*4--w , ha .-tiLthEe PiCia°r%::eck101.°48/8 all.:i v „ di cirov. ?se 0t. net vaiod aPPrQviaanny. e ' erreisao . o eetlo 4 „, " .. e o i CO lari dOtIS lieC P S o d e or a octitn k adopted 0. e d p tr i c acte copy of DpPt Y # L A, ---•-".---"-----‘1".- NOTE: THE PHASE III WORK DESCRIBED INTHESE DOCUMENTS IP ,IM`1,ADDriciN TO A STRUCTURE WHICH RECEIVEIZA BUILDING PERMiT UNbER A OnitiFt ApFiticAtiOrst (ActyAL SINCk„THE ADOMON W1LL BE - BUILT UNDER THE SAME cOrst$TR, uo'noN: CONTRACT, THESE DRA, VANGS, REPRESENT - AN EXTENSION TO THE SET OF DRAWINGS WHICH WERE caftEvidUtoe „ REVIEWED AND APPROVED; SHEETS PREVIOUSLY ISSUED WILL CONTAIN DETAILS NOT FOR 'THE PHASE 111 WORK A8 'WILDING S4CT • • • . • • • • . • .. . . . . .. A9 DOOR & WINDOW DETAILS & SCHEDULES . . . . A10 • WALL SECTIONS, DETAILS . . . . . . . . . All GROUND' LEVEL PLAN PHASE II . . . . .... . . . . Al2 ROOF PLAN & DETAILS - • PHASE IH ELEVATIONS PHASE A A1 1 4 3 WALL sEcTiorsisst i m u PHAS E 111 . . . . . UNDERFLOOR HVAC & PLUMBING - PHASE 11 GROUND LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN -- PHASE III GROUND LEVEL HVAC PLAN - PHASE 01 . . SCHEDULES & SEQUENCE OF CONTROLS - PHASE III JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES A & E M. A, IVIORTENSON CO.- CONTRACTORS Si GENERAL. NOTES & TYPICAL DETAILS S6 SECTIONS AND DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 37 SECTIONS AND DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 TILT-UP INAGFIANIS AND DiTA1LS Se FOUNDATION PLAN - PHASE 01 . . . . . . 810 GROUND FLOOR FRAMING - PHASE 01 . . . .... 811 ROOF FRAMING PLAN - PHASE 10 (revised & re issued) (revised & re-issued) (revised & re-issued) .(revised &"'re-issued) . . . (hew sheet) . . (new sheet) . (new sheet) - E5 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN - PHASE !!! . new sheet) E6 GROUND LEVEL PLAN ELECTRICAL - PHASE 111 . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . new sheet ET RISERS AND D ET .. .. PHAS 11 ( ) E8 SCHEDULES - PHASE ill . . . . . . . .. . . . . ... . (new w sheet) ) • . . (hew sheet) . (re-issued for'.;r6forenced previously apPrieved) . • . . . . . (re-issued for only, previously apprCived) . . . ; .(neW sliest) . . . . . . (new sheet) . . . . (new sheet) (new sheet) (revised & re-issued) n (re=isslied for referenced detaits Oaiii6Ualy aptrebved) (revised &'re-issued) '(new Sheet) (new sheet) '(new sheet) l(new sheet) ' (new sheet) (new sheet) r (re-issued for referenced details, previously approlead) (re-issued for referenced' details, previously approved) THE FOLLOWING SI-IEE'TS WERE ISSUED TtiE ORIGINAL BUILDING PROJECT. THEY HAVE NOT BEEN RE-ISSUED WITH THESE SHEETS BECAUSE NE? ARE NOT RELEVANT TO THE PHASE 01 WORK: DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE o • DOOR MARIE a_A n UL LABEL .„ NOTES wpm ,HGHT 12311 PAATL TYPE DEMI acT %ehe, 1 125A 3 • 7 1 3/4" ROLL HM HM 'ROLL.' MN immaram 4 ' MM aloe 5 3/4" HV11 NOTE 1. '. 1258 125C 10.-0° 3 12-0" T-0" 7 12'-O" MFR 1 3/4" 1 3/4" MFR . --- HW-1 90 HM MM 5 3/4" 6 3/4" IIMMII HW-1 1.1W-1 90 126A . 3%0" 90 126B • 10%0" 127A 1278 . 127C 6 6 , 6 8 8%0" . 8%0" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 11110.1111113111 5 HM 5 3/4" HW-1 HM HM & 6 5 3/4" 5 3/4" HW-1 HW-1 128A 3%0" _T-0" 1 3/4" 1 HM . 2 5 3/4" HW-1 NOTE 1. 1288 10 12%0" MFR ROLL 4 MM 4 HW-1 90 12BC 3%0" 7-0" 1 3/4" - HM 1 HM 4 5 3/4" HW-1 90 129A 3 . 7 1 3/4" HM 1 HM * 5 3/4" HW-1 90 129B 8 12 MFR ROLL 4 MM = 4 --- HW • 90 120C 10 12 MFR ROLL 4 1 ' MM 4'. --- HVV-1 129D ----.... 7 .1 3/4" HM :4- 5 3/4" 90 130A 3'-O" 7 1 3/4 HM HM 2 5 3/4" I-IW-/ --- NOTE 1. 1308 10 12 MFR ROLL MM 4 --- .HW-1 90 • 130C ° '3 7 1 3/4' HM 1 HM 5 3/4" 1.1W-1 90 131A 3%0" 7-0" 1 3/4" MFR HM ROLL 1 4 HM MM HM 2 ., 5 3/4" ileillillizsill 5 3/4" HW-1 90 • 1318 8 120" 90 --- 131C 3 T-0" 1 3/4" HM .'.*.' ' ' `' : ' .$ . :' 3 7 1 3/4" HM HM 4 I1W-1 90 132B 10 12 MFR ROLL 4 MM 4 --- 1-1W-1 90 133A 8 , 12%0" MFR ROLL MM 4 --- HW-1 90 1 133U 3 7 I 3/4" HM HM 5 3/4" HW-1 90 133C 3 7 1 3/4" HM 1 HM 5 3/4" HW-1 --- . , NOTE 1. 134A 8 12 MFR ROLL MM HW-1 90 134B 3 T-0" 1 3/4 HM 1 HM 5 3/4" HW-1 90 134C 3 7 1 3/4" HM , 1 HM 2 5 3/4" HW-1 --- 7 135 3 nnrat 1 3/4" ' • . HM 1 HM KW 5 3/4" .__ HW-1 1 - ereererree - Trene el; Stinitiart bar,ed, 19t18U, nifOrrit _Building Code (UBC),.19813 Uniform Mechanical Code t,(UMC), 98f3 Uniform Fire Code (UFC); and National Fire Codes (NFPA). All references are to UBC unless . , Construction:" - Type 11-N ' ",,,Eletkeeefleawjeeth„ ents [Tetble De BERM 4975 RE v. 7/63 • ', 2 RATED AREA SEPARATION WALL USE CLASSIFICATION H-2 • 'USE'CLASSIFICATiON 1+:7 • USE CLASSIFICATION H-3 Non-cenlbustible Tilt-up concrete panels Non-combustible Tilt-up concrete panels ermanent walls ';Non-combustible • Tilt-up concrete panels & concrete masonry units 'roof Noe:combUstible Steel bar joist & metal deck 4 • . with perlite and roof insulation rea Separation walls 2 rated Tilt-up concrete panels, 8" thick A.' Area Separation Walls divide Phase III addition into 9 separate areas, each of which , • may be considered a separate building [Sec. 505.(e)]. Area separation walls may terminate at non-combustible roof [Seca 505.(e) 3., Exception 34. ' Openings in 2- hour Area Separation Wall shall be protected by 1-1/2 hour rated assembly. (Sec. '•505.(e)1.1 , ' " ' * late: Information as to type of Materials to be used in each area has been provided by , oeing Engineering and Construction. (For areas 1-8, see previous project.) - - Area 9, Area 10, Area 11: These areas will be used for the storage of materials in •• normally Closed containers, that 'may`inciude flammable liquids. , • ' 143 . • [Sec. 901.(a), Dv. 3, 3.] [Sec. 3320] [Sec. 901(d) (UFC Sec. 79.203.(a)) (UFC Sec. 80.301.(I)] [UFC Sec. 80.301.(m)] [NFPA 497A, Chap: 2] ,[Table No. 5 [Sec: 901.(d) 2.] Use dassircatiori = Two exits are required , - Smoke" and heat venting is required Automatic sprinkler , system is required , e, Spill Control is required Ventilation Rate = 1 CFM/SF Classification Type 1, Division 2 BasiO' Allowable Area (Type H-N construction) Special Area Limitation . Actual Area: - Area 9 4:74,,WWW4 E. Area 17: This area will be used to house the electrical generator. It will contain' no •- . 1r hazardous "Materials above exempt amounts. Use classification ei B-2 [Sec 701] • _ Basic Allowable Area (Type 11-N construction) 12,000 SF " , 4 , Actual Area Area 10 449 SF 4. Fire Oictection , The ereire Phase III structure shall be in accordance with NFPA, Chapter 13. There then be a dry system in the outside covered area and a wet system in all other , areas. The sPrinkler system shall' be designed to the following requirements: Area 9, Area 10,'Area 11-eAree 14, Area 15, Area 16 Extra Hazard • Area 4A, Area '12 & 12A, Area 13, Area 17 Ordinary Hazard Outside covered area Ordinate/ Hazard . Spa Protedlon All floors in storage areas in the Phase structure shall be noncombustible, liquid • • • construction. [Sec 902.(b)] All floors shall be provided with a 4" high liquid-tight raised sill, which may be omitted at door openings if an open-grate trench connected to the , 'room drainage system is installed. [Sec 902.(c)] "Drains in the storage areas shall be directed to a secondary containment system. The secondary containment system shall be designed to retain the spill from the largest single container plus the design flow rate of the sprinkler' system for 20 minutes. [Sec 902.(e)] All floors in the storage areas are concrete. :Storage areaa that require spill containment are surrounded by 4" high curbs and open trench grates at door openings. The floors in these areas slope to trend') drains which flow into lined concrete pits, These pits are sized as indicated below. The required capacity in gallons is determined by the indicated flow rate x area x 20 minutes + 55 gallons. The required volume of containment is based on required capacity / 7.48 gallons per cubic foot. , Area '12 412A, Area 13, Area 4 & 4A: _These areas will ba ysed'for the storage of Materials in normally ofes ed contalners, e , , other ners , that m ay Includ core °sive' to )dc InateriS18 that may constitute a health hazard. Use classification :2 H-7 Spill Control is required Ventilation Rate et '1 CFM/SF Autornetic sprinkler system .is required Hazard Classification Uncleselned Basic Allowable Arse (Type'll-N construction) '12000 SF Actual Area: Area 12 & 12A 2,552 SF Area 13 2,074 SF Area 4 & 4A 3,9248F C. Area 14, Area 15: These areas will be used for to dispense materialt; in nophally that closed containers, at May Include corrosive, toxic, or other Materials that may. constitute; a health' hazard Use classificatien at 142 (Sec, 901.(a), Div. 2, 5.] Aubornadc sprinkler system is required „[UFC Sec. 79.804. 1.] E.)cplcsalon venting Is *liked [UFC'Sec. 79.804. 54 Spill Control Is required (UFC Sec. 80.30141)] Ventilation Rate Ng° 1 CFM/SF • (UFC See. 60.301 .(m)] Hazard ClaseifiCatiOn TYPS I, DIVIslOrl 1 [NFPA 497A Chap. 2] Basic Alit:wools Area (Type II-N construction) 3,700 SF[Table No. 5-C] Actual Area: - Area 14 298 SF • Area 15 385 SF D. Area 18: This area will beeusedfOr the stbrage of compressed gases In closed ConteliWS, Use ciassification H.7 Vinthation Rate gig 1 CF1VI/SF Automatic sprinkler system Is required , Explosion ventfrig is required Spill Control itrngi required 'Hazard ClassificatiOn..e Type•I,Iiivision`2 Basic Alloi,vable" Area ';(type 11-N "coiestruction) ACtUal Area: Area IS aegmeee Areal fiew 7 RoqcLg Area 9 994 SF 0.3 GPM 6,019 gal. Area 10 964 SF 0.3 GPM 5,839 gal. Area 11 964 SF 0.3 GPM 5,839 gal. Area 12 2,136 SF 0.2 GPM **9,304 gal Area 13 2,074 SF 02 GPM 8,296 gal. Area 4A 2,074 SF 0.2 GPM 8,296 gal. Area 14 351 SF 0.3 GPM **2,473 gal. Area 15 25.9 SF 0.3 GPM **2,137 gal. Area 16 Spill control is not required in this area. See *" Capacity th this area frwludes a portion of the flow of Area 1 2A, Drelnage Control All drainage from the secondary containment in this building is directed to the existing - loading truck well. This weil has a capacity of 1605 cu, ft. or 12,000 gallons. There is no drainage from this tertiary containment well. The building drainage system is ,not connected to any sewer or storm drainage lines. 4 HarardOUS Material Vapbt Characteristics . Ths Materiels stored in this building emit heavier than air vapors, except the compressed gasses stored in Area 16 which will generally be lighter than air. DATE APPROVED IE I I li I 11111 16 7115 INCH (Sec. (a), Div. 71 IUFQ Sec. 80.301.(m)] [UFC Sec. 80.301.(p)] ° (UFC Sec. 80.303.(a) 4.) (UFC Sac. 80.303.(a) 5.] _ (NFPA 497A, Chap. 2 12,000 SF [Table No. 5-C] 372 SF • fleg:d. vel. Aelekyeal 804 cu.ft. 843 cede 780 cu.ft. • 843 cu.ft. 780 cu.ft. 843 cu.ft. 1,244 cu.ft. 1300 cu.ft. 1,110 cu.ft. 1300 wit. 1,110 cu.ft. 1300 cu.ft. 331' cu.ft. 338 cu.ft. 285 cu.ft. 288 3D. above. based on floor slope direction. • ,01 [Sec. 901:(a)," Div, 7] [UFC Sec. 80.4014)1 (UFO Sec. 80.301: rfl)1 (UFC $00, 80.801.(p)) [NFPA 497A, Chap.'2] (Table No. 5-C] OC 8Z L3 OZ Z 4 7Z CZ ZZ OZ 8 fittlffilkiltht10111111110111 1 11 I . 1 11 Itil„ j (111_1111111111 kt." , ,eee'rgesi'egel'iWer e eee. .eee,e•eeeeeeeee,eee eee.,,e.e.ce-eleee_efeeee,...e; 127 CHEMICAL 61 GAS CYLINDER STORAGE GAS oYi..1NISER' STORAGE GAS CYLINDER FLAMMABLE tiolito • ST(AG CHEMICAL 6tOIRAG EM CHICAL STORAGE 127C co CO CONC CONC C O M O CONIC coke CEM BD HDR 1CONC CEM BD cciNc CONC CONC CONC PNT I CONC • PNT CONC " PNT CONC Oka CONC PNT ce)ikie PNT CONC EXP 1 PNT PNT 1 •EXP 1 PAT 1.4 E & 2. CONC CEM BD 1;n6 I 66igo CIRCULATION SPACE 1 CONC big150 t PROVIDE STEEL PROTECTION RAILS AT WALLS WI71-1 CEMENT BOARD FACING. SEE OETAIL •t/A-14. H CMU PARTITIONS WITHIN ROOM SHALL BE PAINTED, ALL SIDES AND TOP. • } 1 AWERKDA.M1 HDWR HARDWARE HGHT HEIGHT HM HOLLOW METAL MAIL • MATERIAL MFR BY MANUFACTURER (MIN) MINUTES AUBURN, WA. 98002 0 EVERETT, WA. 98201 0 KENT, WA. 98031 0 PORTLAND, OR 97220 (73 RENTON, WA. 98055 0 SEATTLE, WA. 98124 IMAM 4 5 6 7 8 9 ef NOTE: if the microfilmed document is less clear than this notice, it is due to the quality of the original document. t 91 LI. 9l th Vi et 81 pi, 6 8 , iffilliniffillf.111,111111 111111111111111111111111161111 I irC0 F 7FiNisti CONC CONCRETE CMU • CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CEM BD CEMENT BOARD • . EAST EXP • EXPOSED STRUCTURE MM MISCELLANEOUS METAL NO _ NUMBER OPNG OPENING ROLL ROLLING OVERHEAD DOOR THICK THICKNESS - • NONE OR NOT REQUIRED APPROVED ACCEPTABILITY THIS DESIGN AND/OR SPECIFICATION IS APPROVED F' 11111:111 111111P- 144UE etRIMY 12 z 0 HDR HARDENER MAIL MATERIAL N NORTH PNT PAINT 8 SOUTH W WEST NONE OR NOT REQUIRED 1. g W ONLY. 2. SUBTITLE TITLE ilg,14141, -1-'*4--w , ha .-tiLthEe PiCia°r%::eck101.°48/8 all.:i v „ di cirov. ?se 0t. net vaiod aPPrQviaanny. e ' erreisao . o eetlo 4 „, " .. e o i CO lari dOtIS lieC P S o d e or a octitn k adopted 0. e d p tr i c acte copy of DpPt Y # L A, ---•-".---"-----‘1".- NOTE: THE PHASE III WORK DESCRIBED INTHESE DOCUMENTS IP ,IM`1,ADDriciN TO A STRUCTURE WHICH RECEIVEIZA BUILDING PERMiT UNbER A OnitiFt ApFiticAtiOrst (ActyAL SINCk„THE ADOMON W1LL BE - BUILT UNDER THE SAME cOrst$TR, uo'noN: CONTRACT, THESE DRA, VANGS, REPRESENT - AN EXTENSION TO THE SET OF DRAWINGS WHICH WERE caftEvidUtoe „ REVIEWED AND APPROVED; SHEETS PREVIOUSLY ISSUED WILL CONTAIN DETAILS NOT FOR 'THE PHASE 111 WORK A8 'WILDING S4CT • • • . • • • • . • .. . . . . .. A9 DOOR & WINDOW DETAILS & SCHEDULES . . . . A10 • WALL SECTIONS, DETAILS . . . . . . . . . All GROUND' LEVEL PLAN PHASE II . . . . .... . . . . Al2 ROOF PLAN & DETAILS - • PHASE IH ELEVATIONS PHASE A A1 1 4 3 WALL sEcTiorsisst i m u PHAS E 111 . . . . . UNDERFLOOR HVAC & PLUMBING - PHASE 11 GROUND LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN -- PHASE III GROUND LEVEL HVAC PLAN - PHASE 01 . . SCHEDULES & SEQUENCE OF CONTROLS - PHASE III JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES A & E M. A, IVIORTENSON CO.- CONTRACTORS Si GENERAL. NOTES & TYPICAL DETAILS S6 SECTIONS AND DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 37 SECTIONS AND DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 TILT-UP INAGFIANIS AND DiTA1LS Se FOUNDATION PLAN - PHASE 01 . . . . . . 810 GROUND FLOOR FRAMING - PHASE 01 . . . .... 811 ROOF FRAMING PLAN - PHASE 10 (revised & re issued) (revised & re-issued) (revised & re-issued) .(revised &"'re-issued) . . . (hew sheet) . . (new sheet) . (new sheet) - E5 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN - PHASE !!! . new sheet) E6 GROUND LEVEL PLAN ELECTRICAL - PHASE 111 . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . new sheet ET RISERS AND D ET .. .. PHAS 11 ( ) E8 SCHEDULES - PHASE ill . . . . . . . .. . . . . ... . (new w sheet) ) • . . (hew sheet) . (re-issued for'.;r6forenced previously apPrieved) . • . . . . . (re-issued for only, previously apprCived) . . . ; .(neW sliest) . . . . . . (new sheet) . . . . (new sheet) (new sheet) (revised & re-issued) n (re=isslied for referenced detaits Oaiii6Ualy aptrebved) (revised &'re-issued) '(new Sheet) (new sheet) '(new sheet) l(new sheet) ' (new sheet) (new sheet) r (re-issued for referenced details, previously approlead) (re-issued for referenced' details, previously approved) THE FOLLOWING SI-IEE'TS WERE ISSUED TtiE ORIGINAL BUILDING PROJECT. THEY HAVE NOT BEEN RE-ISSUED WITH THESE SHEETS BECAUSE NE? ARE NOT RELEVANT TO THE PHASE 01 WORK: CO-3A VD ER-20 CO = `3C ze,;ocp fi1R` `Rli.'i Qx'4s' '!�'ti J►O II► ti'4� . 411: REVISION SR -IC. VD GROUND FLOOR HVAC PLAN I1)c 1 Z 1JP 'TO C�! DUCT' PRO rECTVN - rY� ' ro 4 . ALL. OUcT D N. WALL. S'EE. •Norf' 4 rm.'s_ s >ze7r '''ox 6 214, Tv .' 1 vp FIR 2 p 410 6FP4i ; _ } sum FOR BUILDING !'SIT, PEE 111 . SUED FOR :B1D PHASE 11 IS -UED WITH ADDENDUM NO. !U-1 ISSU..ED FOR CONSTRUCTION 12/2/91 0 AUBURN, WA. 98002 p �� ,,1kG . D EVERET'T, WA. 99201 E1 -KENT, WA. 980 0.PORTLAND, OR. 97220 RENTON, WA. - 98055 SEATTLE, • WA. 98124 4Xe) 6R-2C - �c V5:0T '200 c F vi 1 5R -le) 155 CFI :' •ex.L.,.r.:COL.ryai..(: >:: +:v.•n :.1 .rrElGYi ., c�S .' I �S'.C..:Y ••... ^.ra'ar4.C4 ;.-,r: PLOT : If the ieicrofil>I,ed document is lc'ssa clear than this notice, it is clue to the quality of the original document. 1: oe 6I et £4 91 5I hi £t 2t t ill• ... 8 i III Ill !l ( 1I1 `� , I IiIIlI1UIl!I,IIII Ct �r[ rt y J j I � i;ll �t iIIIIlriilllll�ii llin�ll �lIII1� d4; 7 ?;. _ -. ( I` ,t I.r. £.:, x • i.. • S b'+. y ,y, 4 "r .�r,�; !.„S ! 7 ^." ' +7 r. ye "t*° .�T � .. ' " ... +' �h ; f � _63 s ,`>��^f+ � ��'�� [ 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 ' 1 1 ° I � • I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 I , 1 Kt GEi4ANY . 12 - �, £ z Pm -p iliilll i�iilItIIUIln 11 f"IiI 1t APPROVED APPROVED BY EP ; s: DRAWN ACC ®Y TA BILITY EAS /AH THIS DESIGN AND/OR CHECXED LTW SPECIFICATION IS APPROVED . _ R E ` tJ O. N '4 X A (.) 5't" DoW "N WALL To FLOOR AL.... Be. mil A I c F. F. 2. i3U TW0 L L $telMT ED T' )`;E=! T `f o t,O "TT M ©F E .� OI MO r5i" W i H Iti. i.l11"l .) M 14 C, L. EA R TO F L.. 00 R. • COORD ! NATE TO CLEAR. L.i AT 10 h: . £ E `SNIrE t MP -8 FOR Tye CEILING 0iFFusER OEM ALL RVi , L 1 & Y DUCTS e DOwN W,I • To BE taROTECTel> ° \JtrH sR4Ck SUBTITLE JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES - A & E M. A. MQRTENSON CO. CONTRACTORS TITLE ,. CHEMICAL MANAGEMENT BUILDINQ PHASE 1� ROOM SCHEDU I ROOM NAME CHEMICAL STORAGE CHEMICAL STORAGE CHEMICAL STORAGE GAS.CYLINDER STOF1AGE 130 'FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE 131 CHEMICAL STORAGE .: 133 DISPENSING 134 DISPENSING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHEET NORTH 060L NN3d- '611113d If01S SVD If01S SVD 8C311J3 3'£31183 V3NV dSIQ 1;VUJS NO1S WV1J 1'81145 V3UW dSIO irV1AJ3 1101S INV1J ' L ;8x33 fox% u3.1763 L Va /s L'3Ud3 'ON . 13001A1 009 ► St1010111111100 '00 NOSN3.1110141 "VW 328111 ' S3LLVIOOSSV HO '33VdS JO 30lSinO .JJOiAHS ADN39U30/3 W31SAS NOi1V111N3A. 03'1811 H011MS>11D1 3dAi SSV19 - XV31:18 11YISNI '9 vino 9VJ 3QIAO11d '8 'AHV HJLM Q3a1AO8d 38 01110101N ONV NVd P 'NVA :OO!1d )IaVdS 3GIAOUd OS1V 'JOOUd 38 01 1:1010L1 'E 'NVd JOO W 30lAO8d OS1V 'INV3UiSWIV 30131110 38 11VHS 1.10101. 'Z 'H3dViv8 1JVHd•3i3V8 GNV 8Hn3 HVJ -311d H1IM 3alAOUd ' L OZE L' OL - 8V OL OL -BV . 31i11,01S NN3d ';' )dOIS SVD 31110310S; NVJ S3ION dx - V•000 -LINO dn *31VJH a3A0add ' S! NOLL1f314133ds 1101aNd N'JIS3a SIHL' S31ON Ja 3dA1 '3NVt11 S31ON NDIS3Q JO SISV8 t „'81133. • 0 • 100, { , : . ° rn g, �?�Ce?� �+ �� z a xY eai ,�I► 11� 1 1 i 1 i( i1��� (i{.i 0JIl1llll1ii�l�llifin►,Il i 1 12 13” 14 15 16 17 ; 18 19 20 21 •lsia aline VV01Sn3 91. - CC 1-00-£ 'MINAS NOISIA3i� ISV i 03A08ddV 03AOi:I4dv '1430 O3AOdddV SYWdx ' Gib _. r n� m 3SVild °1iil tl d O MCI1Ifl9 434flsOoI "L£L G ' a^ yrn = M9r-',,..40,ss.V1i,' fiw.�4YRCA+e r w,,-+. .. "..Z:.^.•:i�a.Y.rn - ;..p..?:up •r+ eh"n; r. „ 'i VZt86 .•d 1 ", 'a 99086 ' VMS NO1N9d,a .. OZZ .O 'ElO:'aNd1,1.8Od'D E08S ' VNi 'INN 0 L O Z86 VA,'i `11 1:13 A3 0 Z0086 '•VM. 'Nuf8nV 'XVIN 1snvHx3 •1.1.3 'XVIN vivo 1103 311313313 Hf3lN 1V101 •1 - 's3a 'Hd 6'Sl+ /9t' SL /S8 . , ZE' r 6'Ei' /isir' S!. /S8 ZZ' 6'OS /LS SL /S9 aivea ' 4131 • 1111 '9AZ 000'09£ 000 000'00Z 8M/8a dW31 HIV '1N3 SI10A 08O'ZL (Nita) Hnie 0,038 (.1444. elftl ~�. S39V1S 9NIJV3N I'TM 'N11 '4•d 1113' XvW it�idJ1 SEO 9L-J 09 L 00Z - 89811 'ON 13(]31 OOZE 31na ;13 .ipip, fit dNr NyiN 33yN n UONZ3H HHONZ31 :1 SJA113S I W3H S 9idldid S.l138O1OddfN�fW t13d:38 Ol 3ZIS ONV S31111NVf10 3d1d 1NV113DIa33U a 117 Q :,.. '1NV1SIS314 NOISO148O3 39 01 iiNn••Z '0L VdJN A8 03NH3tl SV NOIIV301 Z NOISIAIO ' L SSV13 NI 3Sn 1108 a3A011ddV ONV 031S11 38 01 nine 3DVNtin3 • L•: £1331 EVI1a3 :5310N OVZ CVUJOO 13A 330'8 XVIN. WJ3 S3A113S 'ON 811103 31f Q3HOSS;1103 3[ i1003 X11 N 1131 W31SAS NOI1V111N3A. 03138V1 H11IMS 111N 38A1 SSV19•)IV3UO '33145 JO 3tlISlnO 031V301 38 01 ..JJOlf1HS A� 3�J 3 • 'v %OOL• li ■V Alddns '1:13NUf19 ONV 1139NVHDX3 J.V3H 1NV1SIS3U NOISOIJUOJ HUM IINn 3tl1A0 ,' 1, ,, :S3,10N a3JI 4,114n DNISNa®NO3 0310Q3 *IIV• o0z 171113 UJMO18 003'69Z ON dIn03 •ivl13N39 :S3ION 802 1L-V LJ '3NV1fl aoz L '3NVU1 9Z 001. , 00.1•.' NDIS30 JO SISVO 001 zzy L Z Z-lf �^ 111111111/11 ZZ' 1 1111111111111111 t . aoz Z ZZ.•!i' Z 601: L ZZ-1i 8'6 Z' bOL, L'L9 IHBW) A,1. `6101 zeun3 zven a.: i'tno '33VdS`AO 3aisino .JJO1.fHS A3N39U31 W31,SAS'NOI1V1I1N3A a31i3V1 HOIMS I 111)1 3dJ4l )IV3U8 Ilb1SN1 '6 'lIN01ONOI1V03dO AsA1 J3A,0 H11 H31tMS 1HDIl 1V 11-1D14 u01VoIaNI l IVISNI, '8 lOU N O O O S3H 1IM5 MO1J -1S CI ViA,R'3 Io1OW 9 01 1 31,�fldl X3 ONVe.lddns 'L 114111 3181tlnV �JNIl 1 O - . iN z " % E`;aslv oasio'.. :38 01 Sk13 '114 9 ; 11144 Hli 031l � e • :: 0 : , 3 , S , � - ,:� , , . ,a� " ", S1H91�1 M 5131411103 13311110. e • : S 01. saoo0 3NO ' IV HOIIMS TIIX (Q311) V OOUHSfiW 11VLSNI, . 1' .111111 JNIQNt/H HIV. 1431 MS 13911 IINn NMOa 11114 ,.. Z NOISIAICI','I SSV13 NI 3 Sfl Lf A 03AOUddV GNV 031SI1 38 01 .LINn.4iII.LN3,;'C OL Vd:1 A8 CI..NIJ30 SV 5113111130'1 NI , , , , . , ;,., .; '1111, l 1114 301113N1 01 aZ ' ' , ' : 13 NVHaX3 1.V3� 0 1 V 3 'L IV amino 38 111145 143131 NVJ Sn HX 1131115 tf 31`11, _3 , :NOIiVuhoil ONV NOIJ.V3d113VX311OJ SNV1d 33S ' 1VH3N39 N ,. 5310 WJ3 "tl CI NIW 00Z V3iIV 'dsla 'IJOIS '1114 31V0 snlv.i,S '111dNI 1V11JIQ 4015 /IHV19'indln0 -mom SV38V 3Sf1OH3HVM C JO HOV3 >JOd L) Sn1V.S '1ndN! 1V11�JIa snivis 'indNi 1V1I9iO NV8 A1ddIlS 01 03)00101Ni :3£OHHd3 '8£01:1d3 'V£311H3 SNVd 1SnVHX3 SniVls '1ndNi 1Vi101o 10UINOO 1V001, :IV-LS 323311d °. 1081N33 1V301 sniViS '1ndN 1:1V11010 1081NOD 11301 3an1Va3dW31 '111dNI OOIVNV 1OH11\100 1V001 SniVIS '1ndM 1V1i0IO 10111NO0 1V001 'dO1S /1UV.S (SV3UV.9 40 H3V3 1104 L) SniVl '1ndNl 1V11010 •Sn1VIS .,'1ndNi 1111813 NVd AlddnS 01 03)1001831N1 snlvls '111dNI 1V119IQ 10HLNO3 11301 3HntVH3dW31 '111dN1 301VNV 1081NO3 1100 Snit/ LS %mato 1ViIJla '1O111N00 11841 sn1V15 '1114111 1V11JIC1 '101SLNO3 1V301 Sf1J.VJ.S ' -LndNI r1V11ola. d015 /111VlS '1ndif10 1V1I9I0r :S113dINV0 HIV aCliClfO :SNVd 1SfVHX3 :1131V3H SVJ :3Hn1Va3dW31 AlddilS :NVd A'lddfS : L,:3Hd3 .. ' 1. 31:IVW 'E38J3 'ZOadlnl :S Vd IS11VHX3 aNV SJWn 111'4 do -3NVW 'ON sn1VJS '111dNl 1V1101a :S143dWVCI HIV A31131:I :1115 3Z33Hd :SHJdi/IVa HIV 30191110 :3tin1VH3d1A131 AlddfS :SifO$S31:Id1^103 w :NVd A1ddnS '39013:11VH5 Sli3dWVC1 3H1 . 9 /_ 01 SdOHO INoo0, JH1 N3HM 4 'N3d0 11V 11VHS ,Sa3dIAIV61�1011,V1n3U1103H QNVa1SflVHX3 '3NVINI IH1 'd ', 98 01 S3SIU;3an!Vil3dIN31 0/OO1 HO1Vti3N3D,3HJ. GNV, SI; A3N3JH3W3 3HI N,3HM •3a01N1 -NON n.he P"+ ..w +l.,9 Y '8 OL -dO 3Hf11VU dI i &OOH H01VH3N3J,V „NIVi,NIVVV 01:38 1f OcM livi - 1S SU IdINVa NOIiV1fl3th33a dt'JV 1Sf,1 11X3, .' . - 3H1 dO VHS S>JadWV,- NOI1V1nOHI33!>I aN 1 t' 3XViNI 3I-t.L'S-LHV.LS HOiVa3N3D AON3Oa31N3 3H1 FJ HM 1 d00 O •NMOa lnHs 03 730 .L la a a31t AI13V 111181 hJVd, 3HJ. 3001N 1 dn, :... H ..... N ,., � SIHOIiMVIS 111N A3N3`M131, 3 5$110 -)I'v 1 . 8 31H1 3H /V1, V1131SAS s a N1vHS1k1390a 3111 A9 ,Q31O;lINOW ONV ,Lt O 119 : 11V1•IS ` s'aow aSldn000Nfligaidf a31ncd3H,0S '4,:09 d0 3HiIld,VUldIN3i.LNIOd .,—LOS 3OVdS NIViNIVW 01 lb!1S ©133141 a3J.Nn01N 11Nn'dQ,'10 1I.N” 3 a30Nn 340 AN NO.31OA0 831V3H 3 14 1 , 1 11VHS "3501 0 1114 Al lOJ A � H SH 4113 >�IV 4311314 3114 ldlV`30l51;f1rJ`31a 'NMOCI 11VHS SNVd 811 A 144115 CIN�/ 1Sf1df+X3 3H r. ' i;.L AII3d SI HOJ,IMS •111)1 AON3£)HiiIN3 SS1i1D4V3HS'1VfNVV41 3141 N3HM 'b 3 11 f 1 J,OJ.OJ X3 ',VHS a3dINVa Hid 3aiSino 3H1 1fH5 '11 N Vd SfVH ' 3H1`4NV I V 1 1114 814485 3HJ. 1 • aE M013 SI 3lltl J.bli 3 dV�a'11 . lV Alddf 3 . 3\( ; [p �1d `3233dd • *k r ,} ' °;�'',l"�Sn03 3 Vd3d0 SNVd H109.VHI OS'NVA C131O3 NNQ3t'1.1N $.11 NWd. - Sn,VHx3 CIlyt NV3 HI�I Aici inS' . • • , ► 1I , 'd' S3311630 so do 3klnid143dWa.L ' 1NIOd 13S.33VdS ,NIVINIVW 01 313A0 11VHS� 143NHI19 SAI 3H1' •%WOI... 01 N3d0 11VHS`5H3dWVa I;1IV: 3Hl=`'AIS(lOfNi.LNOO 31V1:13d 'M ' 11VHS NVd 1SnVl x3 QNV' NVd AlddnS 3H1 'atfrt `yraI!!S'St' £VBJV 'LVIJ3V ' L'aliOV SJJNf ONI1QNVH HIV •v LSAS;MVHS.W380H 3H1 AB '9NI14o.UNOLN 3HJ. tIOd O3HSINan3 38 11VHS;'O.6 Ni SINIOd tilvtf QNV:;SW3ISAS rJNIM01104,3H1' :3,fIa3H3 1O f1NO3 IN S HJ O ki .LON • 1 113 3 H d SI 3a0W N. MOo -1f1H5 AON33>J3VV3 'tot I3 ONV'ZO4Vv i St/ 83NNVNI` 3115 " 3HJ. N13i,, 11380' 11VHS'NVi1S11VHx3 S,lI'dNV 'i iA L' 3Hd3�6WIlNV�f 1511111X3 OPlV 1111 !11'4 df1 I 001 WAS 31Y0 :IO SI 1A13.1SAS 3Hi N3HM 31VH3dO ION r ilVHS NVd 1SfVH7(S 3141 GNV 35010 11VHS SH3dINV0 81V amino 3H,1''31VIJ3d0 , "SNVd 3Hi 113A3N3HM %QO L 01 N Jdo T iVHS Sd3diNVCI HIV 3aI$if10 , 3H1, 'd. SV AO 31Jn,1.Vti3d1N111NIOd J.39 3oVdS NIVLNIVIA1 Oi ?430 ONV - . NO 310/9 11VHS NVd: 15fVHX3 ONV l;•n 3141 '1A13ISAS 09S MvHSi1138013 , ONI_LSIX3 3141 01. NOiSN31X3 NV A8 ,031AO11NcW 3811VHSW31SAS 01 00 11VHS SH3dWVQ HIV ISfVHX3GNV HlV 3a1Sino HJ. " 'NMOCI JMHS;'11VHS SNVd : iSnVI•IX3 CINV AlddflS H.L. 'asss3HaBa SI Halms 111)I WOOHHSfM a31A 3H1 N3HM •CINloS 11VHS v 'nV 3•!8IQfV NV 8 S11V3 NVd J.SfVHX3 aO AldafS 3111113H113 QNV 3OOIN CI3Idn300 NI 91 nHT 3H1 N3HM' MOW WIfV1V . 3S010 - rind 01 3 08 11VHS SH3dINVO aIV .LSnVHX] aNV 1 V 3aisino 3H1 'NMOO JMHS 11VHS SNVd SIV iSnVHX3 ONV AlddllS 3H1 >'J. SiE M0138 SdOHQ 3LiniVa3dIN31 1iiV`AlddfiS 3H1 N31-1M' x r :3Q01A1 N0115 .LOHd '3Z338d '%COL 01 ,, N3d0 11VHS Sti3dVJVO 3H1'31VH3dO SNVd 3H1 H3A3N3HM , '1H911 3S010 11VHS %H3dWva 8IV `J3I131:1 ,,; HIV 3alsino 'AA() 31JV SNVd 3H1 N3HM 'd Z *'g ' .OL'AO 311n1V143dVi31 30VdS V NIVI.NIVIP 01 310A3 :11VHS IINf1 JNINOi1ION00 HIV 1.1O ,1103 - 1V3133flLL3a 311 314 3H1 aNV 1> S a3li NV 1 t5 1SS �i fV ��lpa` HX3 13 ONV ?Al `11VH dd Oil ns_ r� ' 13 I. 3 V d I C) SOV1 S AS " .• 1 Idn3OONl z :'NOI1VH3d0 IINn WIJIJNO0 , 11VHS.1- 101IMS'.LHDfl IV 11 -1011 11OiV3IGNI .'3a0W C13Idf13OO 3H4. 1' NI ' 31VE13d0; aNV': W31SAS SIAM MVH51H3>30a 3H1301HH3AO 11VHS', iINn DNl1ONVH HIV 3H1 Ni) a3H311MS =31V S.HOIl ;3H1 H3A3N3HM ` V1131 SING MVHSl)j38O14 3H1 AS 03H011NOV1 ONV a31loaLN00 , 11VHS S3aOW Cl31dna30Nf1 /031df1030 a31na3HOS' '35013 llftd oJ. 09 11VHS SH3dVVVCI HIV 15nVHX3 aNV 81V' 3atsino 3H1 ` ° 'NMOa _1 nF1S' , 11VHS SNVd SAIV ,X14485 QNV .LSfVHX3:3H16: SI ; '. H31IMS111)1 ADN30kf3W3 SSV19- )1V3d8:1 'fNVVv aH1 N3HMf•; „` 3C10W. NMOO-111HS'A3N3E d3N13 " -- •aS013 ThHs SH3dWVn HIV J.SnVHX3`„ ONV .HIV 3aisino sHJ. QNV;dO1S 1,1VNS SNV3x1SfVHX3',ONV'�AlddfS- `3H1;'3)iOWS' d0.133.J-3a 3)(OWS ra31NnoW 10 , Q 3 H1 "N3HM '3SO13 Tir al Oa TIVHS Su3dWVa, •Ilx 1111.331'13ki 3NV alt? 3alS1110. NMOO ,NVd,€1V7, ?. AlddfiS 31-1d. 9E:`M0139- 31111 dd3dW3.L,t11V,Alddfi5 3HJ.'N3HJV ";; . � a -drZ V 3 111 J. V 3 dS v NiV N1 .... 01,31.VH3 .l'1VHS. 11.Nt1 ,(!L 4,0 33111 kl d , 3 . , A ,.,.G : : >.�: �; . , ONINOIliaNO3 , al1f UO 3pfINHnd SVJ l3H1; 3CJOW asldno3O t9It A1SnonNp.N00 Nfla 11VHS S tflb;,i5f1 14X3 ^ Cal } ` aIV Alddf1 i 3H1; %OO I. N3dO "IIVHS Sd3ef1✓ilt/Cl ldid ?d3113H $Nd 8114 3a1S1f1O aHl; '30Z .OL 31111VE13dw31. , 3OVdS V NIVINIVW 0131VH3d0 11VHS liNn 9NINOI11ON00 8 HO • 1103 1V3H 31141.0313 3H1 :'30011V O3Id1130Q tJNIHf1CJ ' `' A1sflonNiiNoo WEI i1VHS SNVd HIV 1SfVHX3 ONV AlddfS HIV 3H1 '%OO L N3d0 11VHS S>;13dIAIVa HIV 431138 GNV alV 3aisino 314± :3C101N 433ldnoo0 • . : % S li 3 d V llV(J .3H1'3d.1Ya3d04.SNV 3Hl �13n3N3H. : 0 '11'd dWVC1 HIV J:a„ Hj(3; CINV HIV 3C]IS1fC .i ( 1314 .2 �a ' ,7'!VH:. lNf 9INOII IaNO3:HiV 33VN fl S HL NQ: NV 11SflVH)C3� ONd V1d311 . A a 0 > 31N 38 11VHS NOIiV ddO WS 5W MVHSl 380 3H1 . '8 .03>f0 ! OW C1N1t ` { �� 1lOH d 1N 3 39 VNS S3GO ,03Hn Od' n 31 O0 (I lnZt3H3S ` �d � - `. *? ,. °..'tip c Y' 7 a ����' „,.e ..�dJ +y +rm� •3S01J.l1f% of ,oa 11VI-IS S 1111 33n *l:1 - oN r, OIS 0 3H. `'''NMO 1OHS 11 1145; ,Nti'. H .SnV1�X3 ONV' l ddflS 3 in 1 314 I .3sr, �11 oi`3> SdO8cl 3 Ifl jV1I dVy31'UIV A"t • ' df1S- 3SQ'1 311VH5 s 3wV HrV,01NV 1 X3 an1V 81 ,331 -1 0, 141.. QNV dOiS 1 SNVd ,Lf'zI -! 3111' 4 y •�: Q3I .Qc.' Ao + 3a N niVa3d1A1 � 33bdS ,NIVINIV J 01 ;;31i.dl3dO s 9NI p lih n . G O” liV, 3OV klfy,Nan *3 H1., •3CI01/1i di1 Q: f±llk�f t] fl ., �i ' D S d IV 1 rVHX3sONV �S A1'da IV3Qi o3. C3NV'. 1f1 i,' N 3d , , N d 11. H 3341 `1d 3 '•31da3dO 511114 ,• 9000101 3 Q V.SS .. •.. _ ;,...,. . : . N 311 V d d(9 dl+d 1S VN X . 1 � , 3141 11311311314811 .114811 SO O 11d1� S T IV cols , � ��a 3H�d S d� 3H1 �.� . ,,d� ii .�� � � ..,.. is .i. �,, _... .N. _. ... , . :,.. ,�. ... ,. N $ii d Qr 0� iN N 1 3 Vd� � N1V1N1VI�1 Ol .,'1�xO '1�vNS .� n, �N! a .� a „'n .4 SAS • , V NV •- 5 4)a* C1NV A ddns ISOINHSHI. 33VN n b 314 1111 5 � . l�n H ._ .., ... � � Ae '� 38.11 0 3 O!J.Va3a VV 3i 0 � 141 0 0 l H , N . , -T• i ' y W 31 r A.S SVaC1 MV Si438 ©H 3HS Ol NOISNELLX3 NYA$.93U101.1 Owe! - 631101:1-010.3 38 11VHS 031dn33ONry X111030 a t I�33V Ifl *TO.N `FrEov V(11Y00^I t'b 6 JNICI un8 ONV:;13Ndd 69c-swC1 3Nl.LSIX3;3 3i N 311 8. f � N01103NNOO 003'3i61SN0,d$311 ;; 3S T1IM O4I30l3.:- •8OO1d C3N003S :1.9 -6 SVNO..MVHS1ki3 O I v: AO (531101441100 CJNV a3El4JINOV $ 41 ! >V1C 1I(`js1 . / y 1• I� V3 ,.o BNOIid 3Id13adS NI a31d13dS Si' 3911vE1$'s1a1H3.I vW ONV . N3VidinO3 'Mo13a 03(dIJ3dS SNOLida3d , ,. < Dos sgaou1 141 ��1AOad 11VHS Si io Ii NO f 1t/ dV43.L 3I4 t�a� CONDENSER DATA ZONE DAMPER ZONE DAMPER ZONE DAMPER ZONE "DAMPER ZONE DAMPER PARKER ;036 ;027 .034 CD-3A 50-125 250 -300 401 -50'0 4 s 426 - 8t SURFACE FRAME SURFACE FRAME -2 WAY DUCT MOUNTED WALL MOUNTED KRUGER • KRUGER 14x10 14x10 SURFACE MOUNTED • DUCT MOUNTED DUCT MOUNTED DUCT MOUNTED KRUGER moo: a47e.,n y • ALL CEILING DIFFUSERS SHALL BE 4 -WAY THROW UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWIN , ::,.. 2 . , 5ERIES CD-1 & oD -2 CEILING DIFFUSERS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SQUARE TG ROUND DUCT CONNECTION AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. � ICATTE :. ��_ a O p� /ILL OTHERS Nor S A. ELECTRIC WALL HEATER SCHEDULE COIL' DATA REP/ARKS F1012 X100 ? .0 1211 FURNISH WITH UNIT INSTALL' THERMOSTAT. ,..,� ' . I N) CONSTRUCTIO DETAIL I�OT' USED I�C�I� PHASE III . , HEATING BTUFI REQED KW 24x24 , 4; 201 -270 ' 20 24x24 271 -350 2U 24x24 351.710y, 20 30-160 300 • NO T•BAT2 FRAME 400 r NG ' "s' T -BAR FRAME ; 650 NO SURFACE MTD EACH SIDE OF WAIL 20.0 216,000 SURFACE FRAME -3 WAY DUCT MOUNTED DUCT MOUNTED YES DUCT MOUNTED YES '° SURFACE MOUNTED SURFACE MOUNTED SURFACE MOUNTED DUCT MOUNTED • OE 6Z : eG LZ 9 � iZ C iz REZNOR RXE -156 REZNOR RXE -T4O 16 115;000 150,000 ;1 1 5,500 EQUIP MFCR ECFA=104 EQUIP MFGR MARHOI A EQthP NO EFRHO2B PENN EFRHO2A PENN EFREO4A PENN AB-35 EDH -2 INDEECO INDEECO INDEECO AO. SMITH' A.O. SMITH INDEECO PROVIDE W /CORR RESISTANT HEAT EXCHANGER & BURNER QUA 8,120 QUA 10,376 QUA 3,890 QUA 6,155 FOR tLpING P "; (T', PHASE III ': ISSUED -FOR,I`3)D PHASE HI . DATE APPROVED APPROVED DATE 11,610 MODEL' � ST .GE NO. CAPACITY HEATING BTUH REM)* DETAIL NOT USED FOR PHASE III CONSTRI,JCTION) ELECTRIC MAKE -UP AIR UNIT SCHEDULE LECTRIC "COIL IWA BLOWER DATA AMPS ; VOLT P TEMP CFMI E Cf ° HR VOLT P • N OTE 1: UNIT S HALL BE PROVIDED WITH EXPLOSION-PROOF MOTOR AND SPARK•PROOF FAN • • • 2 .AIN 'A MUSHROOM ,(RED)KILL SWITCH ,AT "DOOR T SHUT "DOWN.' FAN •AND HEATER. LABEL ` SWITCH "MAKE =UP AIR UNIT". BB -531 '860 'NOTE: EFRHO2A SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH MOTOR OUT OF AIR STREAM AND A SPARK -PROOF FAN, 210 COIL DATA * HEATING BTUH = (ROOM LOSS) '+ (CFM AT 20 DEG TEMP DIFFERENCE) (DETAIL NOT USED FOR PHASE III CONSTRUCTION) 1 2x 1 0 AIR DATA . 12X8 235 12X10 235 8X8 ' 170 8X8 305 120 • 1 .INTERCONNECT CONTROLS WITH LTS s & E, F CORROSION RESISTANT CONS?~RUCTION. (DETAIL NOT USED FOR PHASE III'' CONSTRUCTION) PROVIDE WITH PRE -FAB CURB AND BACK -DRAFT DAMPER. PROVIDE WITH PRE -FAB CURB AND BACK - DRAFT DAMPER, INTERCONNECT CONTROL, WITH LIGHT FIXTURES & MAKE -UP AIR UNIT. CORROSION R PROVIDE WITH PRE -FAB CURB AND BACK-DRAFT CORROSION - RESISTANT, PROVIDE WITH PRE -FAB CURB AND BACK -DRAFT DAMPER. PROVIDE WITH PRE -FAB CURB AND BACK -DRAFT DAMPER. W)(1-1 FPM EAT rrin (SF) sx ... ,sv._v .cu +4.- .xs s::6'i2✓ r.r ... r i t�DSr,'# i sru tx?lvs u.. ',.. ; . :wSYt^eirEi�x �r rs;r.'- .r• -fi. . .• , . 7 _. , ` NOTE: If khe aaicrof doeurdent is less clear thin th3.s notice it is due to the quality of the Original document • • CAS WATER HEATER SCHEDULE RECOVERY GAS INPUT CONNECTIONS BIT AR 0 AUBURN WA. 9$002 0 EVgRETT, WA 98201 0 KENT, W,A. 95031 0 PORTLAND, OR 97220 RENTON, WA. 98055 • SEATTLE, WA 9,8124 94 / 91 I a5 El l t� Q I 6 8 )� tIItt 1111.1111 IIt1JJd1 JIIIIIIll� it " llII Illllil`(II�jI 01.101 II� II tItIII hl1III ,II!t {Illllill �iisilllll�i I i i mss .. l �� • •5 'a„"� K , !+r , �Y �'- ,a"z,... T'';e,. :.» , >,i;,. i '} ,i''��.�17�i +�'�i /• M , • * �Y.'�•u �`�4 t'�:�'1 ����'`�" ` �' , �737, .':t�4� �.�Y. N o-r ALL. Sc /%5 L--1 TEL OR AC-'rN Rc)\/ ) Q L)AAL.. . 5 P G( IGirt i r?1�15. PROVIDE UNITS 1MTH` CORROSION RESISTANT HEAT ''EXCHANGER AND'BUR�NER. LAT (deg F) 91.4 95.6 95'. 7 86.0 90.7 STAGES EQUIP NO. HW 1 J03A HW 1 J03B 155,000 1/2 1/2 1 1/2 9 SET AT 110 DEG F l ei 155,000 1 1/2 ." 9 SET AT 110 DEF F DRAWN BY CHECKED HMS: ° 1 ' PROVIDE PUMP, DISCHARGE PIPING ;.THROUGH EXTERIOR WALL TO ABOVE STORAGE TANK AND CAP AS DIRECTUD BY THE' 2." OFFSET - DISCHARGE PIPING FROM PIT ABOVE FLOOR TO CORNER OF ROOM. • (DETAIL NOT USED 'FOR PHASE S- ANTI- S'�PNON DEVICE AND CONNECTION TO TANK NOT'IWCONTRACT. ( ' III CONSTPUCTION) ACCEPTABILITY ,. ;;`THIS DESIGN AND/OA SPECIFICATION IS APPROVED DEPT. LAUNDRY TUB WATER CLOSET WATER CLOSET (HC) URINAL COUNTER LAVATORY ELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAIN P -8 EMERGENCY SHOWER & EYE WASH SHOWER HEAD & CONTROL SHOWER STALL 1 1/2 KOHLER K- 4430 -ET CLOSET °WITH " OPEN- FRONT SEAT, 1QL N ROYAL 110 FLUSH VALVE, CHAIR CARRIER. SAME AS P-1; EXCEPT FOR TOP OF' SEAT AT 17 " HB -1 PH -1 * IND1c1JrE$ FIxTURe `REFE FOR . PICA SF ITS ALL OTH Nor Us E TITLE DIFF'L 6 R kRCW } - :JN DIC/,!TI=., Ai1 - TI -4Row VO DA MPE 2 VVT 5Y5'f M DL)c� ,SIN R S uN CIJNTt.;G71_ -; o T R T T H M D 5 A . ; V /T Y;S T , r%1 • THt.F MC)5i AT �rv 5'( T `Ni 'MONI'I orZ 4...,-17A717 o `FCa • F= i� ISO t.:� C — _ "A N -- O LJ T • (P) 1 �L = 1 C: 1�'•i : FlYOO D(l TRF' WITH A t9 YYf'�T R HA M M E< P R R s= S T I--=, R (y`/ H ,c;• ) faFZG- 5 V Z E- C C- ,UL4`1`c.� 6� JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES: m A E M. A. Q T O' CO CONTRACTORS T A TOR $EE. EGEND qN SHI ET.' 'M2 SUPPLEMENTAL MECHANICAL LEGS KOHLER K- 5014 -T, URINAL; SLOAN ROYAL 8180 FLUSH VALV'r; FLOOR MOUNTED CARRIER '1/2 KOHLER X -2195 LAV; MOEN '4400 SINGLE L�R KOHLER K -7715 DRAIN; - KOHLER` K -7606 SUPPLY PIPES; KONLER K -90) 5 1 INCH P -TRAP. SITE (IN) FLAT S IN; FIAT 830 -AA FAUCET; FIAT,832 -AA HOSE ,. 3�4 3/4 AND BRAG KETO FIAT 1239 - BASIN; FIAT 889 -CC' MOP 1ANGE 2 . 3/4 3/4 FIAT FLID'TUB; FIAT A -1 FAUCET;` COMPLETE WITH ST(J P- TRAPS, TAL., PIECES AND SUPPLY PIPES. '2 - ELKAY EHFS -8, 7.6 GPM CAP.4.8 AMPS, 390 WATTS, 1/5 HP COMPRESSOR 120 VOLTS. 1/4 BRADLEY 51931 P R:Et: R KOHLER K -11730 FAUCET; KOHLER K -11740 SHOWER ' 1EAD. MOUNT AT HEIGHT SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS HYTEC /LASCO MODEL 3220, 32" ONE-PIECE FIBERGLASS,SHOWER STALL; SHOWER DRAIN FITTING; P -TRAP. 3/4 - JOSAM '71050, 12" WALL W/ VACUUM BREAKER.? MOUNT.AT 24' AFF. , 3/4 CHICAGO FAUCET 952 W/ VACUUM BREAKER.' MOUNT AT 24 " ° AFF 3/4 JOSAM 71400, 24 'BURY WITH VACUUM BREAKER. 1/2 1/2 • KOHLER K -15117 FAUCET; KOHLER K -9674 HAND HELD SHOWER W9TH SLIDE BAR. iJ' DO IMOW , 4075 DIE Y. 7/$3 3 A =G M-7 E FI I > IZ V'r > =C - r• • DWC FOT Pi ° ill C REVLSIOM • ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION ISSUED F R .13UJLDING PERMIT, PHASE III ISSUED FAR BID PHASE ii? xHALJ r DUCT 'T-4 .5 HALL 13E VA 1'0 Q. T i'C5 1--t -r. 3 \ L .. ALA.. 4lx 12" 'Pza f°'ioNPa>< -'I(Ai O T 'al -R R E WI C T H uk ) .." ° 1_ 1‘;-A 0 11.4 W . OVER' FLAW Sc STRUCTURAL MP•2 M '•Z a c��•. r-(r • P► Prr G UMEM; IG` APPROVED DATE 9/30/91 (I)E - TAIL L NOT USED FOR PHASE i8d CONSTRUCTION oc 6a ee L 9Z ea �l1!Iii'iillilliil it l'!Jl lll!11111 l llltill IifiCf1 FiPe WITH 5 /i6, ANCHOR PLAT , E.xT ∎4D I uA e ov FLOOR. SE L. — 1R. M/a'IdN O`N W Al~L SCALE: 1 /2' =1'- u`PIFN�1G TO 'CL AR DUCTVvc - P=INE 5 .iNi�i,:eR tvl'A I N %►I r�GF -i> (�t.lL I fit PIPe T ,s m iNFaTE I" At30v e,. FL.o ®fQ. OW PIT, PROvi1 VAP'OF, TJ M " je.)IN'r 5. SEC TION MPZ SCALE: 1 /2"----1"-0" (DETAIL NOT USED FOR PHASE III CONSTRUCTION) 3 7 ( . ( a` (�7� " , : � II�h,/ -1 • � 4 '.,- „ 6 •r. >rvl!.v.' t -.- - - - .,__.x"x•�ot r:d'w:3nt;7r._ :.4,'ury.. ,. ,. ',+ � lO NOTE: if the atitrofi..imed document is leas clean than this notice, it is due to the quality of the original document i • 4 t EZ ZZ LZ • 03 6t $t Lt gt 9t ht £t t tl b 8 L I . I` . i..1 1 II111�11 N 1 � llffl�llll� APPROVED N•417.2 SCALE: NONE SUBTITLE TITLE ACCEPTABILITY THIS DESIGN AND /OR . SPECIFICATION IS APPROVED DEPT. APPROVED PIT WALL VEt• - r FiFM JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES a A& • M. A. MORTENSON CO. CONTRACTORS •••'ONNE`=NALF • 6 o SYMBOL. SHEET 1 HOLp T.I 1't" 'TO SLOPE Dt1C7 'NORTH . SOH Y, FOLLOW SrRUGTt ;, 94 LZ 9Z SZ 47 41111ll[III� li c4 �!9tay7V3�8i/ FOR '. N . HASE II lZ bZ 61 AUST TT If 4 6 7 " 8 .. ✓✓...+ —. :.�, ..:r. .y:f .J/. -.: ti1fG.:....u4v;::..�il Aic ;•.I 1h:u,r-v .. K'.9 i'.re MOTE: if the >�ircra£ilmed d ocuaaent is 1068 ciear than this notice, it is due to the quality of the original document, $l Ll 91 Sl 471 et a It pi. 6 8 L III��lli��l!(� I Ill �ll (!!)�1111�J111�11�1�1111 i!fili14 �j����ll���lU�il l III�II���IIII�IIII�IIIi�lf ll�liii�ll {I�I��l� 11 II ) '' �:. , r a �5.,. '�LNt'� )"_.„ �. d ` ,, .. ' ¢;�' '"' j � ,+� � y ; ,�,�,•' i 3- ^� e ly�\t - ax��Y.:3�" 1 a' �fk' j'�h3��, i � -DR/a W BAND 0 AUBURN, WA. 98002 0 EVERETT , WA. 98201 0 KENT, WA. 98031 0 ,PORTLAND OR 97220 0 RENTON, WA. 98055 SEATTLE, WA. 98124 ftioNALIO., THIS DESIGN ANDIOR SPECIFICATION IS 'APPROVED c - TRAP NAIL-0 fro 4 k CA /NS PIP f_ Pr 4)4+,16" r l o L- TI0N PAsP AS PIPE SUPPORT • DETAIL: SCALE: IONl TITLE JOHN GRAHAM ASSOCIATES A &E M.A. MORTENSON CO °- CONTRACTORS SUSTITL E